PIC18F25K40T-I/MV

PIC18(L)F24/25K40 28-Pin, Low-Power, High-Performance Microcontrollers with XLP Technology Description These PIC18(L)F24/25K40 microcontrollers feature Analog, Core Independent Peripherals and Communication Peripherals, combined with eXtreme Low-Power (XLP) technology for a wide range of general purpose and low-power applications. These 28 -pin devices are equipped with a 10-bit ADC with Computation (ADCC) automating Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) techniques for advanced touch sensing, averaging, filtering, oversampling and performing automatic threshold comparisons. They also offer a set of Core Independent Peripherals such as Complementary Waveform Generator (CWG), Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT), Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)/Memory Scan, Zero-Cross Detect (ZCD) and Peripheral Pin Select (PPS), providing for increased design flexibility and lower system cost. Core Features • • • • • • • • • • • C Compiler Optimized RISC Architecture Operating Speed: – DC – 64 MHz clock input over the full VDD range – 62.5 ns minimum instruction cycle Programmable 2-Level Interrupt Priority 31-Level Deep Hardware Stack Three 8-Bit Timers (TMR2/4/6) with Hardware Limit Timer (HLT) Four 16-Bit Timers (TMR0/1/3/5) Low-Current Power-on Reset (POR) Power-up Timer (PWRT) Brown-out Reset (BOR) Low-Power BOR (LPBOR) Option Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT): – Watchdog Reset on too long or too short interval between watchdog clear events – Variable prescaler selection – Variable window size selection – All sources configurable in hardware or software Memory • • Up to 32K bytes Program Flash Memory Up to 2048 Bytes Data SRAM Memory © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 1 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 • • • 256 Bytes Data EEPROM Programmable Code Protection Direct, Indirect and Relative Addressing modes Operating Characteristics • • Operating Voltage Ranges: – 1.8V to 3.6V (PIC18LF24/25K40 ) – 2.3V to 5.5V ( PIC18F24/25K40) Temperature Range: – Industrial: -40°C to 85°C – Extended: -40°C to 125°C Power-Saving Operation Modes • • • • • Doze: CPU and Peripherals Running at Different Cycle Rates (typically CPU is lower) Idle: CPU Halted While Peripherals Operate Sleep: Lowest Power Consumption Peripheral Module Disable (PMD): – Ability to selectively disable hardware module to minimize active power consumption of unused peripherals Extreme Low-Power mode (XLP) – Sleep: 500 nA typical @ 1.8V – Sleep and Watchdog Timer: 900 nA typical @ 1.8V eXtreme Low-Power (XLP) Features • • • • Sleep mode: 50 nA @ 1.8V, typical Windowed Watchdog Timer: 500 nA @ 1.8V, typical Secondary Oscillator: 500 nA @ 32 kHz Operating Current: – 8 uA @ 32 kHz, 1.8V, typical – 32 uA/MHz @ 1.8V, typical Digital Peripherals • • • Complementary Waveform Generator (CWG): – Rising and falling edge dead-band control – Full-bridge, half-bridge, 1-channel drive – Multiple signal sources Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) modules: – Two CCPs – 16-bit resolution for Capture/Compare modes – 10-bit resolution for PWM mode 10-Bit Pulse-Width Modulators (PWM): © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 2 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 • • • • • • – Two 10-bit PWMs Serial Communications: – One Enhanced USART (EUSART) with Auto-Baud Detect, Auto-wake-up on Start. RS-232, RS-485, LIN compatible – SPI – I2C, SMBus and PMBus™ compatible Up to 25 I/O Pins and One Input Pin: – Individually programmable pull-ups – Slew rate control – Interrupt-on-change on all pins – Input level selection control Programmable CRC with Memory Scan: – Reliable data/program memory monitoring for Fail-Safe operation (e.g., Class B) – Calculate CRC over any portion of Flash or EEPROM – High-speed or background operation Hardware Limit Timer (TMR2/4/6+HLT): – Hardware monitoring and Fault detection Peripheral Pin Select (PPS): – Enables pin mapping of digital I/O Data Signal Modulator (DSM) Analog Peripherals • • • • • 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation (ADC2): – 24 external channels – Conversion available during Sleep – Four internal analog channels – Internal and external trigger options – Automated math functions on input signals: • Averaging, filter calculations, oversampling and threshold comparison – 8-bit hardware acquisition timer Hardware Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) Support: – 8-bit precharge timer – Adjustable sample and hold capacitor array – Guard ring digital output drive Zero-Cross Detect (ZCD): – Detect when AC signal on pin crosses ground 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC): – Output available externally – Programmable 5-bit voltage (% of VDD,[VRef+ - VRef-], FVR) – Internal connections to Comparators and ADC Two Comparators (CMP): – Four external inputs – External output via PPS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 3 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 • Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) module: – 1.024V, 2.048V and 4.096V output levels – Two buffered outputs: One for DAC/CMP and one for ADC Clocking Structure • • • • • • High-Precision Internal Oscillator Block (HFINTOSC): – Selectable frequencies up to 64 MHz – ±1% at calibration 32 kHz Low-Power Internal Oscillator (LFINTOSC) External 32 kHz Crystal Oscillator (SOSC) External High-frequency Oscillator Block: – Three crystal/resonator modes – Digital Clock Input mode – 4x PLL with external sources Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: – Allows for safe shutdown if external clock stops Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) Programming/Debug Features • • • In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) via Two Pins In-Circuit Debug (ICD) with Three Breakpoints via Two Pins Debug Integrated On-Chip PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Family Types 16-bit Timers Comparators 5-bit DAC Zero-Cross Detect CCP/10-bit PWM CWG SMT Low Voltage Detect (LVD) 8-bit TMR with HLT CRC with Memory Scan EUSART I2C/SPI PPS Peripheral Module Disable Temperature Indicator Debug(1) 256 25 4 2 24 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 1 1 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F25K40 32k 2048 256 25 4 2 24 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 1 1 Y Y Y I © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet Timer I/O Pins 1024 Windowed Watchdog Data EEPROM (bytes) 16k Computation (ch) Data SRAM (bytes) PIC18(L)F24K40 Device 10-bit ADC2 with Program Memory Flash (bytes) Table 1.  Devices included in this data sheet 40001843D-page 4 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 16-bit Timers Comparators 5-bit DAC Zero-Cross Detect CCP/10-bit PWM CWG SMT Low Voltage Detect (LVD) 8-bit TMR with HLT CRC with Memory Scan EUSART I2C/SPI PPS Peripheral Module Disable Temperature Indicator Debug(1) 1024 25 4 2 24 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F27K40 128k 3615 1024 25 4 2 24 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F45K40 32k 2048 256 36 4 2 35 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F46K40 64k 3615 1024 36 4 2 35 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F47K40 128k 3615 1024 36 4 2 35 1 1 2/2 1 0 1 3 Y Y 2 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F65K40 32k 2048 1024 60 5 3 45 1 1 5/2 1 2 1 4 Y Y 5 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F66K40 64k 3562 1024 60 5 3 45 1 1 5/2 1 2 1 4 Y Y 5 2 Y Y Y I PIC18(L)F67K40 128k 3562 1024 60 5 3 47 1 1 5/2 1 2 1 4 Y Y 5 2 Y Y Y I Timer I/O Pins 3615 Windowed Watchdog Data EEPROM (bytes) 64k Computation (ch) Data SRAM (bytes) PIC18(L)F26K40 Device 10-bit ADC2 with Program Memory Flash (bytes) Table 2. Devices not included in this data sheet Note:  Debugging Methods: (I) – Integrated on Chip. Data Sheet Index: 1. DS40001843 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Data Sheet, 28-Pin, 8-bit Flash Microcontrollers 2. DS40001816 PIC18(L)F26/45/46K40 Data Sheet, 28/40/44-Pin, 8-bit Flash Microcontrollers 3. DS40001844 PIC18(L)F27/47K40 Data Sheet, 28/40/44-Pin, 8-bit Flash Microcontrollers 4. DS40001842 PIC18(L)F65/66K40 Data Sheet, 64-Pin, 8-bit Flash Microcontrollers Filename: 00-000028A.vsd 5. DS40001841 Data Sheet, 64-Pin, 8-bit Flash Microcontrollers Title: 28-pinPIC18(L)F67K40 DIP Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 3/6/2017 N/A Generic 28-pin dual in-line diagram Pin Diagrams Figure 1. 28-pin SPDIP, SSOP, SOIC Rev. 00-000 028A 3/6/201 7 MCLR/VPP /RE3 RA0 RA1 RA2 RA3 RA4 RA5 VSS RA7 RA6 RC0 RC1 RC2 RC3 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Datasheet 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 RB7/ICSPDAT RB6/ICSPCLK RB6 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 VDD VSS RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 40001843D-page 5 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 RA1 RA0 RE3/MCLR/VPP RB7/ICSPDAT RB6/ICSPCLK RB5 RB4 Figure 2. 28-pin QFN, UQFN Rev. 00-000028B 6/23/2017 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 RA2 RA3 RA4 RA5 VSS RA7 RA6 1 21 RB3 20 RB2 2 3 19 RB1 18 RB0 4 5 17 VDD 16 VSS 6 7 15 RC7 RC0 RC1 RC2 RC3 RC4 RC5 RC6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Note:  It is recommended that the exposed bottom pad be connected to VSS, however it must not be the only VSS connection to the device. Pin Allocation Tables Table 1. 28-Pin Allocation Table I/O(2) RA0 28-Pin SPDIP, SOIC, SSOP 28-Pin (U)QFN A/D 2 27 ANA0 Reference Comparator Timers — DSM MSSP Pullup Basic — — — Y — IOCA1 — — — Y — — IOCA2 — — — Y — — — IOCA3 — MDCARL(1) — Y — — — IOCA4 — MDCARH(1) — Y — SS1(1) CCP CWG — — — — IOCA0 — — — — — — — C1IN1+ — — — T0CKI(1) — C1IN0- ZCD Interrupt EUSART C2IN0RA1 3 28 ANA1 — C1IN1C2IN1- RA2 4 1 ANA2 DAC1OUT1 C1IN0+ Vref- (DAC) C2IN0+ Vref- (ADC) RA3 5 2 ANA3 Vref+ (DAC) Vref+ (ADC) RA4 6 3 ANA4 — RA5 7 4 ANA5 — — — — — — IOCA5 — MDSRC(1) Y — RA6 10 7 ANA6 — — — — — — IOCA6 — — — Y CLKOUT RA7 9 6 ANA7 — — — — — — IOCA7 — — — Y RB0 21 18 ANB0 — C2IN1+ — — CWG1(1) ZCDIN IOCB0 — — — Y — OSC2 OSC1 CLKIN INT0(1) RB1 22 19 ANB1 — C1IN3C2IN3- — — — — IOCB1 INT1(1) — — — Y — RB2 23 20 ANB2 — — — — — — IOCB2 INT2(1) — — — Y — © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 6 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 28-Pin SPDIP, SOIC, SSOP 28-Pin (U)QFN A/D RB3 24 21 ANB3 — C1IN2C2IN2- RB4 25 22 ANB4 — — RB5 26 23 ANB5 — RB6 27 24 ANB6 RB7 28 25 ANB7 I/O(2) RC0 11 8 ANC0 DSM MSSP Pullup Basic — — — Y — IOCB4 — — — Y — IOCB5 — — — Y — — IOCB6 — — — Y ICSPCLK — — IOCB7 — — — Y ICSPDAT — — — IOCC0 — — — Y SOSCO CCP2(1) — — IOCC1 — — — Y SOSCIN SOSCI T5CKI(1) CCP1(1) T2IN(1) — — — IOCC2 — — — Y — — — IOCC3 — — SCK1(1) SCL1(3,4) Y — — — SDI1(1) SDA1(3,4) Y — Reference Comparator Timers CCP CWG — — — — IOCB3 T5G(1) T1G(1) — — — — — — — — — — — — DAC1OUT2 — T6IN(1) — — T1CKI(1) T3CKI(1) — ZCD Interrupt EUSART T3G(1) RC1 12 9 ANC1 — — — RC2 13 10 ANC2 — — RC3 14 11 ANC3 — — RC4 15 12 ANC4 — — — — — — IOCC4 RC5 16 13 ANC5 — — T4IN(1) — — — IOCC5 — — — Y — RC6 17 14 ANC6 — — — — — — IOCC6 CK1(1,3) — — Y — RC7 18 15 ANC7 — — — — — — IOCC7 RX1/ DT1(1,3) — — Y — RE3 1 26 — — — — — — — IOCE3 — — — Y Vpp/MCLR VSS 19 16 — — — — — — — — — — — — VDD 20 17 — — — — — — — — — — — — VSS VDD VSS 8 5 — — — — — — — — — — — — VSS OUT(2) — — ADGRDA ADGRDB — C1OUT C2OUT TMR0 CCP1 CCP2 CWG1A CWG1B — — DSM SDO1 SCK1 — — PWM3 CWG1C TX1/ CK1(3) DT1(3) PWM4 CWG1D Note:  1. This is a PPS remappable input signal. The input function may be moved from the default location shown to one of several other PORTx pins. Refer to the peripheral input selection table for details on which PORT pins may be used for this signal. 2. All output signals shown in this row are PPS remappable. These signals may be mapped to output onto one of several PORTx pin options as described in the peripheral output selection table. 3. This is a bidirectional signal. For normal module operation, the firmware should map this signal to the same pin in both the PPS input and PPS output registers. These pins are configured for I2C logic levels; The SCLx/SDAx signals may be assigned to any of these pins. PPS assignments to the other pins (e.g., RB1) will operate, but input logic levels will be standard TTL/ST as selected by the INLVL register, instead of the I2C specific or SMBus input buffer thresholds. 4. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 7 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Table of Contents Description.......................................................................................................................1 Core Features................................................................................................................ 1 Memory...........................................................................................................................1 Operating Characteristics.............................................................................................2 Power-Saving Operation Modes......................................................................................2 eXtreme Low-Power (XLP) Features............................................................................2 Digital Peripherals......................................................................................................... 2 Analog Peripherals........................................................................................................3 Clocking Structure........................................................................................................ 4 Programming/Debug Features..................................................................................... 4 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Family Types.................................................................................4 Pin Diagrams..................................................................................................................5 Pin Allocation Tables.................................................................................................... 6 1. Device Overview......................................................................................................17 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. New Core Features.................................................................................................................... 17 Other Special Features.............................................................................................................. 18 Details on Individual Family Members........................................................................................18 Register and Bit naming conventions.........................................................................................22 2. Guidelines for Getting Started with PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Microcontrollers.............. 24 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. Basic Connection Requirements................................................................................................ 24 Power Supply Pins..................................................................................................................... 24 Master Clear (MCLR) Pin........................................................................................................... 25 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ ICSP™ Pins.............................................................................26 2.5. 2.6. External Oscillator Pins.............................................................................................................. 26 Unused I/Os............................................................................................................................... 28 3. Device Configuration............................................................................................... 29 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. 3.4. 3.5. Configuration Words...................................................................................................................29 Code Protection..........................................................................................................................29 Write Protection..........................................................................................................................29 User ID....................................................................................................................................... 29 Device ID and Revision ID......................................................................................................... 30 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 8 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 3.6. 3.7. 3.8. 3.9. Register Summary - Configuration Words..................................................................................31 Register Definitions: Configuration Words................................................................................. 31 Register Summary - Device and Revision..................................................................................43 Register Definitions: Device and Revision................................................................................. 43 4. Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor).....................................................46 4.1. 4.2. 4.3. 4.4. 4.5. 4.6. Overview.................................................................................................................................... 46 Clock Source Types................................................................................................................... 47 Clock Switching.......................................................................................................................... 52 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor.............................................................................................................. 55 Register Summary - OSC...........................................................................................................58 Register Definitions: Oscillator Control.......................................................................................58 5. Reference Clock Output Module............................................................................. 69 5.1. 5.2. 5.3. 5.4. 5.5. 5.6. Clock Source.............................................................................................................................. 70 Programmable Clock Divider......................................................................................................70 Selectable Duty Cycle................................................................................................................ 71 Operation in Sleep Mode............................................................................................................71 Register Summary: Reference CLK........................................................................................... 72 Register Definitions: Reference Clock........................................................................................72 6. Power-Saving Operation Modes..............................................................................75 6.1. 6.2. 6.3. 6.4. 6.5. Doze Mode................................................................................................................................. 75 Sleep Mode................................................................................................................................ 76 Peripheral Operation in Power-Saving Modes........................................................................... 80 Register Summary - Power Savings Control..............................................................................81 Register Definitions: Power Savings Control..............................................................................81 7. (PMD) Peripheral Module Disable........................................................................... 85 7.1. 7.2. 7.3. 7.4. Disabling a Module.....................................................................................................................85 Enabling a Module......................................................................................................................85 Register Summary - PMD.......................................................................................................... 86 Register Definitions: Peripheral Module Disable........................................................................ 86 8. Resets..................................................................................................................... 94 8.1. 8.2. 8.3. 8.4. 8.5. 8.6. Power-on Reset (POR).............................................................................................................. 94 Brown-out Reset (BOR)............................................................................................................. 95 Low-Power Brown-out Reset (LPBOR)...................................................................................... 97 MCLR......................................................................................................................................... 97 Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT) Reset.............................................................................. 98 8.7. 8.8. 8.9. 8.10. 8.11. 8.12. 8.13. Stack Overflow/Underflow Reset................................................................................................98 Programming Mode Exit.............................................................................................................99 Power-up Timer (PWRT)............................................................................................................ 99 Start-up Sequence..................................................................................................................... 99 Determining the Cause of a Reset........................................................................................... 100 Power Control (PCON0) Register............................................................................................ 101 Register Summary - BOR Control and Power Control............................................................. 102 RESET Instruction......................................................................................................................98 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 9 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 8.14. Register Definitions: Power Control......................................................................................... 102 9. (WWDT) Windowed Watchdog Timer....................................................................106 9.1. 9.2. 9.3. 9.4. 9.5. 9.6. 9.7. 9.8. Independent Clock Source....................................................................................................... 107 WWDT Operating Modes......................................................................................................... 108 Time-out Period........................................................................................................................108 Watchdog Window....................................................................................................................108 Clearing the WWDT................................................................................................................. 109 Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................109 Register Summary - WDT Control............................................................................................ 111 Register Definitions: Windowed Watchdog Timer Control........................................................ 111 10. Memory Organization............................................................................................ 117 10.1. 10.2. 10.3. 10.4. 10.5. 10.6. 10.7. 10.8. Program Memory Organization................................................................................................ 117 PIC18 Instruction Cycle............................................................................................................124 Data Memory Organization...................................................................................................... 126 Data Addressing Modes........................................................................................................... 131 Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set.......................................................................134 PIC18 Instruction Execution and the Extended Instruction Set................................................136 Register Summary: Memory and Status.................................................................................. 137 Register Definitions: Memory and Status................................................................................. 137 11. (NVM) Nonvolatile Memory Control.......................................................................152 11.1. 11.2. 11.3. 11.4. 11.5. Program Flash Memory............................................................................................................153 User ID, Device ID and Configuration Word Access................................................................ 166 Data EEPROM Memory........................................................................................................... 166 Register Summary: NVM Control............................................................................................. 171 Register Definitions: Nonvolatile Memory................................................................................ 171 12. 8x8 Hardware Multiplier.........................................................................................179 12.1. 12.2. 12.3. 12.4. Introduction...............................................................................................................................179 Operation..................................................................................................................................179 Register Summary - 8x8 Hardware Multiplier...........................................................................182 Register Definitions: 8x8 Hardware Multiplier.......................................................................... 182 13. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner.........................184 13.1. CRC Module Overview.............................................................................................................184 13.2. CRC Functional Overview........................................................................................................ 184 13.3. CRC Polynomial Implementation............................................................................................. 185 13.4. CRC Data Sources...................................................................................................................186 13.5. CRC Check Value.................................................................................................................... 186 13.6. CRC Interrupt........................................................................................................................... 187 13.7. Configuring the CRC................................................................................................................ 187 13.8. Program Memory Scan Configuration...................................................................................... 188 13.9. Scanner Interrupt......................................................................................................................188 13.10. Scanning Modes...................................................................................................................... 188 13.11. Register Summary - CRC.........................................................................................................192 13.12. Register Definitions: CRC and Scanner Control...................................................................... 192 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 10 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 14. Interrupts............................................................................................................... 204 14.1. Mid-Range Compatibility.......................................................................................................... 204 14.2. Interrupt Priority........................................................................................................................204 14.3. Interrupt Response...................................................................................................................204 14.4. INTCON Registers................................................................................................................... 206 14.5. PIR Registers........................................................................................................................... 206 14.6. PIE Registers........................................................................................................................... 206 14.7. IPR Registers........................................................................................................................... 207 14.8. INTn Pin Interrupts................................................................................................................... 207 14.9. TMR0 Interrupt......................................................................................................................... 207 14.10. Interrupt-on-Change.................................................................................................................207 14.11. Context Saving During Interrupts............................................................................................. 207 14.12. Register Summary - Interrupt Control...................................................................................... 209 14.13. Register Definitions: Interrupt Control...................................................................................... 209 15. I/O Ports................................................................................................................ 235 15.1. 15.2. 15.3. 15.4. 15.5. I/O Priorities..............................................................................................................................236 PORTx Registers..................................................................................................................... 236 PORTE Registers.....................................................................................................................239 Register Summary - Input/Output.............................................................................................240 Register Definitions: Port Control............................................................................................. 241 16. Interrupt-on-Change.............................................................................................. 269 16.1. Features................................................................................................................................... 269 16.2. Overview.................................................................................................................................. 269 16.3. Block Diagram.......................................................................................................................... 270 16.4. Enabling the Module.................................................................................................................270 16.5. Individual Pin Configuration......................................................................................................270 16.6. Interrupt Flags.......................................................................................................................... 271 16.7. Clearing Interrupt Flags............................................................................................................271 16.8. Operation in Sleep....................................................................................................................271 16.9. Register Summary - Interrupt-on-Change................................................................................ 272 16.10. Register Definitions: Interrupt-on-Change Control................................................................... 272 17. (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module......................................................................285 17.1. 17.2. 17.3. 17.4. 17.5. 17.6. 17.7. 17.8. 17.9. PPS Inputs............................................................................................................................... 285 PPS Outputs.............................................................................................................................286 Bidirectional Pins......................................................................................................................288 PPS Lock..................................................................................................................................288 PPS One-Way Lock..................................................................................................................289 Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................289 Effects of a Reset..................................................................................................................... 289 Register Summary - PPS......................................................................................................... 290 Register Definitions: PPS Input and Output Selection............................................................. 291 18. Timer0 Module.......................................................................................................295 18.1. Timer0 Operation......................................................................................................................296 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 11 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 18.2. 18.3. 18.4. 18.5. 18.6. Clock Selection.........................................................................................................................296 Timer0 Output and Interrupt..................................................................................................... 297 Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................298 Register Summary - Timer0..................................................................................................... 299 Register Definitions: Timer0 Control.........................................................................................299 19. Timer1 Module with Gate Control.......................................................................... 303 19.1. Timer1 Operation......................................................................................................................304 19.2. Clock Source Selection............................................................................................................ 305 19.3. Timer1 Prescaler...................................................................................................................... 306 19.4. Secondary Oscillator................................................................................................................ 306 19.5. Timer1 Operation in Asynchronous Counter Mode.................................................................. 307 19.6. Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode............................................................................................... 307 19.7. Timer1 Gate..............................................................................................................................308 19.8. Timer1 Interrupt........................................................................................................................313 19.9. Timer1 Operation During Sleep................................................................................................313 19.10. CCP Capture/Compare Time Base..........................................................................................313 19.11. CCP Special Event Trigger.......................................................................................................314 19.12. Peripheral Module Disable....................................................................................................... 314 19.13. Register Summary - Timer1 .................................................................................................... 315 19.14. Register Definitions: Timer1.....................................................................................................315 20. Timer2 Module.......................................................................................................322 20.1. 20.2. 20.3. 20.4. 20.5. 20.6. 20.7. 20.8. 20.9. Timer2 Operation......................................................................................................................324 Timer2 Output...........................................................................................................................325 External Reset Sources............................................................................................................325 Timer2 Interrupt........................................................................................................................ 326 Operating Modes......................................................................................................................326 Operation Examples.................................................................................................................328 Timer2 Operation During Sleep................................................................................................338 Register Summary - Timer2..................................................................................................... 339 Register Definitions: Timer2 Control.........................................................................................339 21. Capture/Compare/PWM Module........................................................................... 348 21.1. 21.2. 21.3. 21.4. 21.5. 21.6. CCP Module Configuration.......................................................................................................348 Capture Mode...........................................................................................................................349 Compare Mode.........................................................................................................................351 PWM Overview.........................................................................................................................352 Register Summary - CCP Control............................................................................................ 357 Register Definitions: CCP Control............................................................................................ 357 22. (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation............................................................................ 362 22.1. 22.2. 22.3. 22.4. 22.5. 22.6. Fundamental Operation............................................................................................................363 PWM Output Polarity................................................................................................................363 PWM Period............................................................................................................................. 363 PWM Duty Cycle...................................................................................................................... 364 PWM Resolution.......................................................................................................................364 Operation in Sleep Mode..........................................................................................................365 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 12 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 22.7. Changes in System Clock Frequency...................................................................................... 365 22.8. Effects of Reset........................................................................................................................ 365 22.9. Setup for PWM Operation using PWMx Output Pins............................................................... 365 22.10. Setup for PWM Operation to Other Device Peripherals...........................................................366 22.11. Register Summary - Registers Associated with PWM............................................................. 367 22.12. Register Definitions: PWM Control...........................................................................................367 23. (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module.....................................................................370 23.1. External Resistor Selection...................................................................................................... 371 23.2. ZCD Logic Output.....................................................................................................................371 23.3. ZCD Logic Polarity................................................................................................................... 371 23.4. ZCD Interrupts..........................................................................................................................372 23.5. Correction for ZCPINV Offset......................................................................................................372 23.6. Handling VPEAK Variations........................................................................................................374 23.7. Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................374 23.8. Effects of a Reset..................................................................................................................... 375 23.9. Disabling the ZCD Module....................................................................................................... 375 23.10. Register Summary: ZCD Control............................................................................................. 376 23.11. Register Definitions: ZCD Control............................................................................................ 376 24. (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module..........................................378 24.1. Fundamental Operation............................................................................................................378 24.2. Operating Modes......................................................................................................................378 24.3. Start-up Considerations............................................................................................................389 24.4. Clock Source............................................................................................................................ 389 24.5. Selectable Input Sources......................................................................................................... 390 24.6. Output Control.......................................................................................................................... 390 24.7. Dead-Band Control...................................................................................................................390 24.8. Rising Edge and Reverse Dead Band......................................................................................391 24.9. Falling Edge and Forward Dead Band..................................................................................... 391 24.10. Dead-Band Jitter...................................................................................................................... 392 24.11. Auto-Shutdown.........................................................................................................................393 24.12. Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................395 24.13. Configuring the CWG............................................................................................................... 396 24.14. Register Summary - CWG Control...........................................................................................397 24.15. Register Definitions: CWG Control...........................................................................................397 25. (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module...................................................................407 25.1. DSM Operation.........................................................................................................................409 25.2. Modulator Signal Sources........................................................................................................ 409 25.3. Carrier Signal Sources............................................................................................................. 409 25.4. Carrier Synchronization............................................................................................................410 25.5. Carrier Source Polarity Select.................................................................................................. 412 25.6. Programmable Modulator Data................................................................................................ 412 25.7. Modulated Output Polarity........................................................................................................412 25.8. Operation in Sleep Mode..........................................................................................................412 25.9. Effects of a Reset..................................................................................................................... 413 25.10. Peripheral Module Disable....................................................................................................... 413 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 13 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 25.11. Register Summary - DSM........................................................................................................ 414 25.12. Register Definitions: Modulation Control..................................................................................414 26. (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module................................................. 420 26.1. 26.2. 26.3. 26.4. 26.5. 26.6. 26.7. 26.8. 26.9. SPI Mode Overview..................................................................................................................420 SPI Mode Operation.................................................................................................................422 I2C Mode Overview.................................................................................................................. 430 I2C Mode Operation................................................................................................................. 434 I2C Slave Mode Operation....................................................................................................... 438 I2C Master Mode...................................................................................................................... 457 Baud Rate Generator............................................................................................................... 471 Register Summary: MSSP Control...........................................................................................473 Register Definitions: MSSP Control......................................................................................... 473 27. (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter ...............................................................................................................................485 27.1. 27.2. 27.3. 27.4. 27.5. 27.6. EUSART Asynchronous Mode................................................................................................. 487 EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG).................................................................................... 494 EUSART Synchronous Mode...................................................................................................502 EUSART Operation During Sleep............................................................................................ 508 Register Summary - EUSART .................................................................................................510 Register Definitions: EUSART Control..................................................................................... 510 28. (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference.............................................................................520 28.1. 28.2. 28.3. 28.4. Independent Gain Amplifiers.................................................................................................... 520 FVR Stabilization Period.......................................................................................................... 520 Register Summary - FVR ........................................................................................................ 522 Register Definitions: FVR Control............................................................................................ 522 29. Temperature Indicator Module...............................................................................525 29.1. 29.2. 29.3. 29.4. Circuit Operation...................................................................................................................... 525 Minimum Operating VDD...........................................................................................................526 Temperature Output................................................................................................................. 526 ADC Acquisition Time...............................................................................................................527 30. (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module................................................... 528 30.1. 30.2. 30.3. 30.4. 30.5. 30.6. 30.7. Output Voltage Selection..........................................................................................................529 Ratiometric Output Level..........................................................................................................530 DAC Voltage Reference Output............................................................................................... 530 Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................530 Effects of a Reset..................................................................................................................... 530 Register Summary - DAC Control............................................................................................ 531 Register Definitions: DAC Control............................................................................................ 531 31. (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module............................. 534 31.1. ADC Configuration................................................................................................................... 535 31.2. ADC Operation......................................................................................................................... 540 31.3. ADC Acquisition Requirements................................................................................................ 544 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 14 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 31.4. 31.5. 31.6. 31.7. Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) Features............................................................................. 546 Computation Operation............................................................................................................ 551 Register Summary - ADC Control............................................................................................ 558 Register Definitions: ADC Control............................................................................................ 558 32. (CMP) Comparator Module................................................................................... 582 32.1. Comparator Overview.............................................................................................................. 582 32.2. Comparator Control..................................................................................................................583 32.3. Comparator Hysteresis.............................................................................................................584 32.4. Operation With Timer1 Gate.....................................................................................................584 32.5. Comparator Interrupt................................................................................................................ 585 32.6. Comparator Positive Input Selection........................................................................................ 585 32.7. Comparator Negative Input Selection...................................................................................... 586 32.8. Comparator Response Time.................................................................................................... 586 32.9. Analog Input Connection Considerations................................................................................. 587 32.10. CWG1 Auto-Shutdown Source................................................................................................ 587 32.11. ADC Auto-Trigger Source.........................................................................................................588 32.12. Even Numbered Timers Reset.................................................................................................588 32.13. Operation in Sleep Mode......................................................................................................... 588 32.14. Register Summary - Comparator............................................................................................. 589 32.15. Register Definitions: Comparator Control................................................................................ 589 33. (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect.......................................................................... 595 33.1. Operation..................................................................................................................................595 33.2. Setup........................................................................................................................................ 596 33.3. Current Consumption............................................................................................................... 596 33.4. HLVD Start-up Time................................................................................................................. 596 33.5. Applications.............................................................................................................................. 598 33.6. Operation During Sleep............................................................................................................599 33.7. Operation During Idle and Doze Modes................................................................................... 599 33.8. Effects of a Reset..................................................................................................................... 599 33.9. Register Summary - HLVD ...................................................................................................... 600 33.10. Register Definitions: HLVD Control.......................................................................................... 600 34. In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) .............................................................603 34.1. High-Voltage Programming Entry Mode...................................................................................603 34.2. Low-Voltage Programming Entry Mode....................................................................................603 34.3. Common Programming Interfaces........................................................................................... 603 35. Register Summary.................................................................................................606 36. Instruction Set Summary....................................................................................... 614 36.1. Standard Instruction Set...........................................................................................................614 36.2. Extended Instruction Set.......................................................................................................... 694 37. Development Support............................................................................................708 37.1. MPLAB X Integrated Development Environment Software...................................................... 708 37.2. MPLAB XC Compilers.............................................................................................................. 709 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 15 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 37.3. MPASM Assembler.................................................................................................................. 709 37.4. MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian........................................................................710 37.5. MPLAB Assembler, Linker and Librarian for Various Device Families..................................... 710 37.6. MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator........................................................................................... 710 37.7. MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System........................................................................ 711 37.8. MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System.............................................................................. 711 37.9. PICkit 3 In-Circuit Debugger/Programmer................................................................................711 37.10. MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer............................................................................................711 37.11. Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits................................... 711 37.12. Third-Party Development Tools................................................................................................712 38. Electrical Specifications.........................................................................................713 38.1. 38.2. 38.3. 38.4. Absolute Maximum Ratings(†).................................................................................................. 713 Standard Operating Conditions................................................................................................ 713 DC Characteristics................................................................................................................... 715 AC Characteristics....................................................................................................................725 39. DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables.................................................... 748 39.1. Graphs......................................................................................................................................749 40. Packaging Information...........................................................................................768 40.1. Package Details....................................................................................................................... 769 41. Revision History.....................................................................................................782 The Microchip Web Site.............................................................................................. 783 Customer Change Notification Service........................................................................783 Customer Support....................................................................................................... 783 Product Identification System...................................................................................... 784 Microchip Devices Code Protection Feature............................................................... 784 Legal Notice.................................................................................................................785 Trademarks................................................................................................................. 785 Quality Management System Certified by DNV...........................................................786 Worldwide Sales and Service......................................................................................787 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 16 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview 1. Device Overview This document contains device specific information for the following devices: • PIC18F24K40 • PIC18LF24K40 • PIC18F25K40 • PIC18LF25K40 This family offers the advantages of all PIC18 microcontrollers – namely, high computational performance at an economical price – with the addition of high-endurance Program Flash Memory. In addition to these features, the PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family introduces design enhancements that make these microcontrollers a logical choice for many high-performance, power sensitive applications. 1.1 New Core Features 1.1.1 XLP Technology All of the devices in the PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family incorporate a range of features that can significantly reduce power consumption during operation. Key items include: • • • • 1.1.2 Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller from the secondary oscillator or the internal oscillator block, power consumption during code execution can be reduced by as much as 90%. Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still active. In these states, power consumption can be reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal operation requirements. On-the-fly Mode Switching: The power-managed modes are invoked by user code during operation, allowing the user to incorporate power-saving ideas into their application’s software design. Peripheral Module Disable: Modules that are not being used in the code can be selectively disabled using the PMD module. This further reduces the power consumption. Multiple Oscillator Options and Features All of the devices in the PIC18(L)F24/25K40family offer several different oscillator options. The PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family can be clocked from several different sources: • • • • • HFINTOSC – 1-64 MHz precision digitally controlled internal oscillator LFINTOSC – 31 kHz internal oscillator EXTOSC – External clock (EC) – Low-power oscillator (LP) – Medium-power oscillator (XT) – High-power oscillator (HS) SOSC – Secondary oscillator circuit optimized for 32 kHz clock crystals A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier (4x) is available to the External Oscillator modes enabling clock speeds of up to 64 MHz © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 17 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview • 1.2 Other Special Features • • • • • • • 1.3 Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly monitors the main clock source against a reference signal provided by the LFINTOSC. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is switched to the internal oscillator block, allowing for continued operation or a safe application shutdown. Memory Endurance: The Flash cells for both program memory and data EEPROM are rated to last for many thousands of erase/write cycles – up to 10K for program memory and 100K for EEPROM. Data retention without refresh is conservatively estimated to be greater than 40 years. Self-programmability: These devices can write to their own program memory spaces under internal software control. By using a boot loader routine located in the protected Boot Block at the top of program memory, it becomes possible to create an application that can update itself in the field. Extended Instruction Set: The PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family includes an optional extension to the PIC18 instruction set, which adds eight new instructions and an Indexed Addressing mode. This extension, enabled as a device configuration option, has been specifically designed to optimize reentrant application code originally developed in high-level languages, such as C. Enhanced Peripheral Pin Select: The Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module connects peripheral inputs and outputs to the device I/O pins. Only digital signals are included in the selections. All analog inputs and outputs remain fixed to their assigned pins. Enhanced Addressable EUSART: This serial communication module is capable of standard RS-232 operation and provides support for the LIN bus protocol. Other enhancements include automatic baud rate detection and a 16-bit Baud Rate Generator for improved resolution. When the microcontroller is using the internal oscillator block, the EUSART provides stable operation for applications that talk to the outside world without using an external crystal (or its accompanying power requirement). 10-bit A/D Converter with Computation: This module incorporates programmable acquisition time, allowing for a channel to be selected and a conversion to be initiated without waiting for a sampling period and thus, reduce code overhead. It has a new module called ADC2 with computation features, which provides a digital filter and threshold interrupt functions. Windowed Watchdog Timer (WWDT): – Timer monitoring of overflow and underflow events – Variable prescaler selection – Variable window size selection – All sources configurable in hardware or software Details on Individual Family Members Devices in the PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family are available in 28-pin packages. The block diagram for this device is shown in Figure 1-1. The devices have the following differences: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Program Flash Memory Data Memory SRAM Data Memory EEPROM A/D channels I/O ports Enhanced USART © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 18 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview 7. Input Voltage Range/Power Consumption All other features for devices in this family are identical. These are summarized in the following Device Features table. The pinouts for all devices are listed in the pin summary tables. Table 1-1. Device Features Features PIC18(L)F24K40 PIC18(L)F25K40 Program Memory (Bytes) 16384 32768 Program Memory (Instructions) 8192 16384 Data Memory (Bytes) 1024 2048 Data EEPROM Memory (Bytes) 256 256 A,B,C,E(1) A,B,C,E(1) Capture/Compare/PWM Modules (CCP) 2 2 10-Bit Pulse-Width Modulator (PWM) 2 2 4 internal 24 external 4 internal 24 external 28-pin SPDIP 28-pin SOIC 28-pin SPDIP 28-pin SSOP 28-pin SSOP 28-pin QFN 28-pin QFN 28-pin UQFN 28-pin UQFN I/O Ports 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Module (ADC2) with Computation Accelerator Packages 28-pin SOIC Interrupt Sources 36 Timers (16-/8-bit) 4/3 1 MSSP, 1 EUSART Serial Communications Enhanced Complementary Waveform Generator (ECWG) 1 Zero-Cross Detect (ZCD) 1 Data Signal Modulator (DSM) 1 Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Yes Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) Yes 16-bit CRC with NVMSCAN Yes Programmable High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD) Yes Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR) Yes Resets (and Delays) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. POR, BOR, Datasheet 40001843D-page 19 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview Features PIC18(L)F24K40 PIC18(L)F25K40 RESET Instruction, Stack Overflow, Stack Underflow, MCLR, WWDT, (PWRT, OST) 75 Instructions; 83 with Extended Instruction Set enabled Instruction Set Operating Frequency DC – 64 MHz Note 1: RE3 is an input only pin. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 20 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview Figure 1-1. PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Family Block Diagram Rev. 30-000131A 6/14/2017 Data Bus Table Pointer Data Latch 8 8 inc/dec logic Data Memory PCLATU PCLATH 21 PORTA Address Latch 20 PCU PCH PCL Program Counter RA 12 Data Address 31-Level Stack 4 BSR Address Latch Program Memory (8/16/32/64 Kbytes) STKPTR 12 FSR0 FSR1 FSR2 Data Latch 8 PORTB 12 RB inc/dec logic Table Latch Instruction Bus 4 Access Bank Address Decode ROM Latch PORTC RC IR 8 State machine control signals Instruction Decode and Control PRODH PRODL 8x8 Multiply 3 8 W BITOP 8 Internal Oscillator Block Power-up Timer SOSCI LFINTOSC Oscillator SOSCO 64 MHz Oscillator Oscillator Start-up Timer Power-on Reset OSC1(2) OSC2(2) Single-Supply Programming In-Circuit Debugger MCLR(1) BOR HLVD FVR DAC Note Comparators C1/C2 CCP1 CCP2 PWM3 PWM4 8 Precision Band Gap Reference Timer2 Timer4 Timer6 MSSP1 EUSART1 ZCD ECWG FVR CRC-Scan DSM 1: RE3 is only available when MCLR functionality is disabled. 2: OSC1/CLKIN and OSC2/CLKOUT are only available in select oscillator modes. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. PORTE (1) RE3 ALU Brown-out Reset Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Timer1 Timer3 Timer5 8 8 8 Watchdog Timer NVM Timer0 Controller 8 Datasheet FVR DAC PMD ADC 10-bit FVR 40001843D-page 21 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview 1.4 Register and Bit naming conventions 1.4.1 Register Names When there are multiple instances of the same peripheral in a device, the peripheral control registers will be depicted as the concatenation of a peripheral identifier, peripheral instance, and control identifier. The control registers section will show just one instance of all the register names with an ‘x’ in the place of the peripheral instance number. This naming convention may also be applied to peripherals when there is only one instance of that peripheral in the device to maintain compatibility with other devices in the family that contain more than one. 1.4.2 Bit Names There are two variants for bit names: • • 1.4.2.1 Short name: Bit function abbreviation Long name: Peripheral abbreviation + short name Short Bit Names Short bit names are an abbreviation for the bit function. For example, some peripherals are enabled with the EN bit. The bit names shown in the registers are the short name variant. Short bit names are useful when accessing bits in C programs. The general format for accessing bits by the short name is RegisterNamebits.ShortName. For example, the enable bit, EN, in the CM1CON0 register can be set in C programs with the instruction CM1CON0bits.EN = 1. Short names are generally not useful in assembly programs because the same name may be used by different peripherals in different bit positions. When this occurs, during the include file generation, all instances of that short bit name are appended with an underscore plus the name of the register in which the bit resides to avoid naming contentions. 1.4.2.2 Long Bit Names Long bit names are constructed by adding a peripheral abbreviation prefix to the short name. The prefix is unique to the peripheral thereby making every long bit name unique. The long bit name for the COG1 enable bit is the COG1 prefix, G1, appended with the enable bit short name, EN, resulting in the unique bit name G1EN. Long bit names are useful in both C and assembly programs. For example, in C the COG1CON0 enable bit can be set with the G1EN = 1 instruction. In assembly, this bit can be set with the BSF COG1CON0,G1EN instruction. 1.4.2.3 Bit Fields Bit fields are two or more adjacent bits in the same register. Bit fields adhere only to the short bit naming convention. For example, the three Least Significant bits of the COG1CON0 register contain the mode control bits. The short name for this field is MD. There is no long bit name variant. Bit field access is only possible in C programs. The following example demonstrates a C program instruction for setting the COG1 to the Push-Pull mode: COG1CON0bits.MD = 0x5; Individual bits in a bit field can also be accessed with long and short bit names. Each bit is the field name appended with the number of the bit position within the field. For example, the Most Significant mode bit has the short bit name MD2 and the long bit name is G1MD2. The following two examples demonstrate assembly program sequences for setting the COG1 to Push-Pull mode: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 22 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Device Overview Example 1: MOVLW ANDWF MOVLW IORWF ~(1 PRODH:PRODL 8x8 Signed Multiply Routine MOVF MULWF BTFSC SUBWF MOVF BTFSC SUBWF ARG1, W ARG2 ARG2, SB PRODH, F ARG2, W ARG1, SB PRODH, F ; ARG1 * ARG2 -> PRODH:PRODL ; Test Sign Bit ; PRODH = PRODH - ARG1 ; Test Sign Bit ; PRODH = PRODH - ARG2 Table 12-1. Performance Comparison for Various Multiply Operations Routine 8x8 unsigned Multiply Method Program Time Cycles Memory (Max) @ 64 MHz @ 40 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz (Words) Without hardware multiply 13 69 4.3 μs 6.9 μs 27.6 μs 69 μs Hardware multiply 1 1 62.5 ns 100 ns 400 ns 1 μs © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 179 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 8x8 Hardware Multiplier Routine Multiply Method Program Time Cycles Memory (Max) @ 64 MHz @ 40 MHz @ 10 MHz @ 4 MHz (Words) Without hardware multiply 33 91 5.7 μs 9.1 μs 36.4 μs 91 μs Hardware multiply 6 6 375 ns 600 ns 2.4 μs 6 μs Without hardware 16x16 unsigned multiply 21 242 15.1 μs 24.2 μs 96.8 μs 242 μs Hardware multiply 28 28 1.8 μs 2.8 μs 11.2 μs 28 μs Without hardware multiply 52 254 15.9 μs 25.4 μs 102.6 μs 254 μs Hardware multiply 35 40 2.5 μs 4.0 μs 16.0 μs 40 μs 8x8 signed 16x16 signed 16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 unsigned multiplication. The equation below shows the algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES). 16 x 16 Unsigned Multiplication Algorithm ���3: ���0 = ���1�: ���1� • ���2�: ���2� = ���1� • ���2� • 216 + ���1� • ���2� • 28 + ���1� • ���2� • 28 + ���1� • ���2� 16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine ; ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ARG1L, W ARG2L PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 ; ARG1L * ARG2L → PRODH:PRODL ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ARG1H, W ARG2H PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 ; ; ARG1H * ARG2H → PRODH:PRODL ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ARG1L, W ARG2H PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ; ARG1L * ARG2H → PRODH:PRODL ; ; Add cross products ; ; ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ARG1H, W ARG2L PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ; ; ARG1H * ARG2L → PRODH:PRODL ; ; Add cross products ; ; ; ; 16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16 signed multiply. The equation below shows the algorithm used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers (RES). To account for the sign bits of the arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 180 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 8x8 Hardware Multiplier 16 x 16 Signed Multiplication Algorithm ���3: ���0 = ���1�: ���1� • ���2�: ���2� = ���1� • ���2� • 216 + ���1� • ���2� • 28 + ���1� • ���2� • 28 + ���1� • ���2� + − 1 • ���2� < 7 > • ���1�: ���1� • 216 + − 1 • ���1� < 7 > • ���2�: ���2� • 216 16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine ; ; ; ; ; MOVF MULW MOVF MOVFF ARG1L, W ARG2L PRODH, RES1 PRODL, RES0 ; ARG1L * ARG2L → PRODH:PRODL ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVFF MOVFF ARG1H, W ARG2H PRODH, RES3 PRODL, RES2 ; ARG1H * ARG2H → PRODH:PRODL ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ARG1L, W ARG2H PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ; ARG1L * ARG2H → PRODH:PRODL ; ; Add cross products ; ; ; ; MOVF MULWF MOVF ADDWF MOVF ADDWFC CLRF ADDWFC ARG1H, W ARG2L PRODL, W RES1, F PRODH, W RES2, F WREG RES3, F ; ; ARG1H * ARG2L → PRODH:PRODL ; ; Add cross products ; ; ; ; BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ARG2H, 7 SIGN_ARG1 ARG1L, W RES2 ARG1H, W RES3 ; ARG2H:ARG2L neg? ; no, check ARG1 ; ; ; ARG1H, 7 CONT_CODE ARG2L, W RES2 ARG2H, W RES3 ; ARG1H:ARG1L neg? ; no, done ; ; ; SIGN_ARG1: BTFSS BRA MOVF SUBWF MOVF SUBWFB ; CONT_CODE: : © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 181 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 8x8 Hardware Multiplier 12.3 Register Summary - 8x8 Hardware Multiplier Offset Name 0x0FF3 PROD 12.4 Bit Pos. 7:0 PRODL[7:0] 15:8 PRODH[7:0] Register Definitions: 8x8 Hardware Multiplier © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 182 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 8x8 Hardware Multiplier 12.4.1 PROD Name:  Offset:  PROD 0xFF3 Product Register Pair The PROD register stores the 16-bit result yielded by the unsigned operation performed by the 8x8 hardware multiplier. Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 PRODH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset x x x x x x x x Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PRODL[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 15:8 – PRODH[7:0] PROD Most Significant bits Bits 7:0 – PRODL[7:0] PROD Least Significant bits © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 183 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13. Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner The Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) module provides a software-configurable hardware-implemented CRC checksum generator. This module includes the following features: • • • • • • • 13.1 Any standard CRC up to 16 bits can be used Configurable Polynomial Any seed value up to 16 bits can be used Standard and reversed bit order available Augmented zeros can be added automatically or by the user Memory scanner for fast CRC calculations on program memory user data Software loadable data registers for communication CRC’s CRC Module Overview The CRC module provides a means for calculating a check value of program memory. The CRC module is coupled with a memory scanner for faster CRC calculations. The memory scanner can automatically provide data to the CRC module. The CRC module can also be operated by directly writing data to SFRs, without using a scanner. 13.2 CRC Functional Overview The CRC module can be used to detect bit errors in the Flash memory using the built-in memory scanner or through user input RAM memory. The CRC module can accept up to a 16-bit polynomial with up to a 16-bit seed value. A CRC calculated check value (or checksum) will then be generated into the CRCACC registers for user storage. The CRC module uses an XOR shift register implementation to perform the polynomial division required for the CRC calculation. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 184 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000206A.vsd CRC EXAMPLE 1/8/2014 PIC16(L)F1613 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner Figure 13-1. CRC Example Rev. 10-000206A 1/8/2014 CRC-16-ANSI x16 + x15 + x2 + 1 (17 bits) Standard 16-bit representation = 0x8005 CRCXORH = 0b10000000 CRCXORL = 0b0000010- (1) Data Sequence: 0x55, 0x66, 0x77, 0x88 DLEN = 0b0111 PLEN = 0b1111 Data entered into the CRC: SHIFTM = 0: 01010101 01100110 01110111 10001000 SHIFTM = 1: 10101010 01100110 11101110 00010001 Check Value (ACCM = 1): SHIFTM = 0: 0x32D6 CRCACCH = 0b00110010 CRCACCL = 0b11010110 SHIFTM = 1: 0x6BA2 CRCACCH = 0b01101011 CRCACCL = 0b10100010 Note 1: Bit 0 is unimplemented. The LSb of any CRC polynomial is always ‘1’ and will always be treated as a ‘1’ by the CRC for calculating the CRC check value. This bit will be read in software as a ‘0’. 13.3 CRC Polynomial Implementation Any polynomial can be used. The polynomial and accumulator sizes are determined by the PLEN bits. For an n-bit accumulator, PLEN = n-1 and the corresponding polynomial is n+1 bits. Therefore, the accumulator can be any size up to 16 bits with a corresponding polynomial up to 17 bits. The MSb and LSb of the polynomial are always ‘1’ which is forced by hardware. However, the LSb of the CRCXORL register is unimplemented and always reads as '0'. All polynomial bits between the MSb and LSb are specified by the CRCXOR registers. For example, when using CRC16-ANSI, the polynomial is defined as X16+X15+X2+1. The X16 and X0 = 1 terms are the MSb and LSb controlled by hardware. The X15 and X2 terms are specified by setting the corresponding CRCXOR bits with the value of 0x8004. The actual value is 0x8005 because the hardware sets the LSb to 1. Refer to Figure 13-1. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 185 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000207A.vsd CRC LFSR EXAMPLE 5/27/2014 PIC16F1613 LECQ PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner Figure 13-2. CRC LFSR Example Rev. 10-000207A 5/27/2014 Linear Feedback Shift Register for CRC-16-ANSI x16 + x15 + x2 + 1 Data in Augmentation Mode ON b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 Data in Augmentation Mode OFF b15 13.4 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b0 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 CRC Data Sources Data can be input to the CRC module in two ways: • • User data using the CRCDAT registers From Flash Memory using the Program Memory Scanner Up to 16 bits of data per word are specified with the DLEN bits. Only the number of data bits in the CRCDATA registers specified by DLEN will be used, other data bits in CRCDATA registers will be ignored. Data is moved into the CRCSHIFT as an intermediate to calculate the check value located in the CRCACC registers. The SHIFTM bit is used to determine the bit order of the data being shifted into the accumulator. If SHIFTM is not set, the data will be shifted in MSb first (Big Endian). The value of DLEN will determine the MSb. If SHIFTM bit is set, the data will be shifted into the accumulator in reversed order, LSb first (Little Endian). The CRC module can be seeded with an initial value by setting the CRCACC registers to the appropriate value before beginning the CRC. 13.4.1 CRC from User Data To use the CRC module on data input from the user, the user must write the data to the CRCDAT registers. The data from the CRCDAT registers will be latched into the shift registers on any write to the CRCDATL register. 13.4.2 CRC from Flash To use the CRC module on data located in Flash memory, the user can initialize the Program Memory Scanner as defined in the Program Memory Scan Configuration section. 13.5 CRC Check Value The CRC check value will be located in the CRCACC registers after the CRC calculation has finished. The check value will depend on the ACCM and SHIFTM mode settings. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 186 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner When the ACCM bit is set, the CRC module augments the data with a number of zeros equal to the length of the polynomial to align the final check value. When the ACCM bit is not set, the CRC will stop at the end of the data. A number of zeros equal to the length of the polynomial can then be entered into CRCDAT to find the same check value as augmented mode. Alternatively, the expected check value can be entered at this point to make the final result equal 0. When the CRC check value is computed with the SHIFTM bit set, selecting LSb first, and the ACCM bit is set then the final value in the CRCACC registers will be reversed such that the LSb will be in the MSb position and vice versa. This is the expected check value in bit reversed form. When creating a check value to be appended to a data stream, then a bit reversal must be performed on the final value to achieve the correct checksum. CRC can be used to do this reversal by following the steps below: 1. 2. 3. 4. Save CRCACC value in user RAM space Clear the CRCACC registers Clear the CRCXOR registers Write the saved CRCACC value to the CRCDAT input The properly oriented check value will be in the CRCACC registers as the result. 13.6 CRC Interrupt The CRC will generate an interrupt when the BUSY bit transitions from 1 to 0. The CRCIF Interrupt Flag bit of the PIRx register is set every time the BUSY bit transitions, regardless of whether or not the CRC interrupt is enabled. The CRCIF bit can only be cleared in software. The CRC interrupt enable is the CRCIE bit of the PIEx register. 13.7 Configuring the CRC The following steps illustrate how to properly configure the CRC. 1. Determine if the automatic program memory scan will be used with the scanner or manual calculation through the SFR interface and perform the actions specified in CRC Data Sources, depending on which decision was made. 2. If desired, seed a starting CRC value into the CRCACC registers. 3. Program the CRCXOR registers with the desired generator polynomial. 4. Program the DLENbits with the length of the data word - 1 (refer to Figure 13-1). This determines how many times the shifter will shift into the accumulator for each data word. 5. Program the PLEN bits with the length of the polynomial -2 (refer to Figure 13-1). 6. Determine whether shifting in trailing zeros is desired and set the ACCM bit accordingly. 7. Likewise, determine whether the MSb or LSb should be shifted first and write the SHIFTM bit accordingly. 8. Set the GO bit to begin the shifting process. 9. If manual SFR entry is used, monitor the FULL bit. When FULL = 0, another word of data can be written to the CRCDAT registers, keeping in mind that Most Significant Byte, CRCDATH, should be written first if the data has more than eight bits, as the shifter will begin upon the CRCDATL register being written. 10. If the scanner is used, the scanner will automatically stuff words into the CRCDAT registers as needed, as long as the SCANGO bit is set. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 187 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 11. If using the Flash memory scanner, monitor the PIRx SCANIF bit (or the SCANGO bit) for the scanner to finish pushing information into the CRCDATA registers. After the scanner is completed, monitor the BUSY bit to determine that the CRC has been completed and the check value can be read from the CRCACC registers. If both the interrupt flags are set (or both BUSY and SCANGO bits are cleared), the completed CRC calculation can be read from the CRCACC registers. 12. If manual entry is used, monitor the BUSY bit to determine when the CRCACC registers hold the valid check value. 13.8 Program Memory Scan Configuration The program memory scan module may be used in conjunction with the CRC module to perform a CRC calculation over a range of program memory addresses. In order to set up the scanner to work with the CRC the following steps need to performed: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 13.9 Set both the EN and SCANEN bits. If they get disabled, all internal states of the scanner and the CRC are reset. However, the CRC SFR registers are unaffected. Choose which memory access mode is to be used (see Scanning Modes) and set the MODE bits accordingly. Based on the memory access mode, set the INTM bits to the appropriate Interrupt mode (see Interrupt Interaction) Set the SCANLADR and SCANHADR registers with the respective beginning and ending locations in memory that are to be scanned. The GO bit must be set before setting the SCANGO bit. Setting the SCANGO bit starts the scan. Both the EN and GO bits must be enabled to use the scanner. When either of these bits are disabled, the scan aborts and the INVALID bit is set. The scanner will wait for the signal from the CRC that it is ready for the first Flash memory location, then begin loading data into the CRC. It will continue to do so until it either hits the configured end address or an address that is unimplemented on the device, at which point the SCANGO bit will clear, Scanner functions will cease, and the SCANIF interrupt will be triggered. Alternately, the SCANGO bit can be cleared in software to terminate the scan early if desired. Scanner Interrupt The scanner will trigger an interrupt when the SCANGO bit transitions from ‘1’ to ‘0’. The SCANIF interrupt flag of PIRx is set when the last memory location is reached and the data is entered into the CRCDATA registers. The SCANIF bit can only be cleared in software. The SCAN interrupt enable is the SCANIE bit of the PIEx register. 13.10 Scanning Modes The memory scanner can scan in four modes: Burst, Peek, Concurrent, and Triggered. These modes are controlled by the MODE bits. The four modes are summarized in Table 13-1. 13.10.1 Burst Mode When MODE = 01, the scanner is in Burst mode. In Burst mode, CPU operation is stalled beginning with the operation after the one that sets the SCANGO bit, and the scan begins, using the instruction clock to execute. The CPU is held in its current state until the scan stops. Note that because the CPU is not executing instructions, the SCANGO bit cannot be cleared in software, so the CPU will remain stalled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 188 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner until one of the hardware end-conditions occurs. Burst mode has the highest throughput for the scanner, but has the cost of stalling other execution while it occurs. 13.10.2 Concurrent Mode When MODE = 00, the scanner is in Concurrent mode. Concurrent mode, like Burst mode, stalls the CPU while performing accesses of memory. However, while Burst mode stalls until all accesses are complete, Concurrent mode allows the CPU to execute in between access cycles. 13.10.3 Triggered mode When MODE = 11, the scanner is in Triggered mode. Triggered mode behaves identically to Concurrent mode, except instead of beginning the scan immediately upon the SCANGO bit being set, it waits for a rising edge from a separate trigger source which is determined by the SCANTRIG register. 13.10.4 Peek Mode When MODE = 10, the scanner is in Peek mode. Peek mode waits for an instruction cycle in which the CPU does not need to access the NVM (such as a branch instruction) and uses that cycle to do its own NVM access. This results in the lowest throughput for the NVM access (and can take a much longer time to complete a scan than the other modes), but does so without any impact on execution times, unlike the other modes. Table 13-1. Summary of Scanner Modes Description MODE 11 Triggered 10 Peek First Scan Access CPU Operation As soon as possible following a trigger Stalled during NVM access CPU resumes execution following each access At the first dead cycle Timing is unaffected CPU continues execution following each access 01 Burst As soon as possible 00 Concurrent Stalled during NVM access CPU suspended until scan completes CPU resumes execution following each access 13.10.5 Interrupt Interaction The INTM bit controls the scanner’s response to interrupts depending on which mode the NVM scanner is in, as described in the following table. Table 13-2. Scan Interrupt Modes MODE INTM 1 MODE == Burst Interrupt overrides SCANGO (to zero) to pause the burst and the interrupt handler executes at full speed; Scanner Burst resumes when interrupt completes. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. MODE == CONCURENT or TRIGGERED MODE ==PEEK Scanner suspended during interrupt response (SCANGO = 0); interrupt executes at full speed and This bit is ignored Datasheet 40001843D-page 189 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner MODE INTM MODE == CONCURENT or TRIGGERED MODE == Burst MODE ==PEEK scan resumes when the interrupt is complete. 0 Interrupts do not override SCANGO, and the scan (burst) operation will continue; interrupt response will be delayed until scan completes (latency will be increased). Scanner accesses NVM during interrupt response. This bit is ignored In general, if INTM = 0, the scanner will take precedence over the interrupt, resulting in decreased interrupt processing speed and/or increased interrupt response latency. If INTM = 1, the interrupt will take precedence and have a better speed, delaying the memory scan. 13.10.6 WWDT interaction Operation of the WWDT is not affected by scanner activity. Hence, it is possible that long scans, particularly in Burst mode, may exceed the WWDT time-out period and result in an undesired device Reset. This should be considered when performing memory scans with an application that also utilizes WWDT. 13.10.7 In-Circuit Debug (ICD) Interaction The scanner freezes when an ICD halt occurs, and remains frozen until user-mode operation resumes. The debugger may inspect the SCANCON0 and SCANLADR registers to determine the state of the scan. The ICD interaction with each operating mode is summarized in the following table. Table 13-3. ICD and Scanner Interactions Scanner Operating Mode ICD Halt External Halt Peek Concurrent Triggered If external halt is asserted during a scan cycle, the instruction (delayed by scan) may If scanner would peek or may not execute before ICD entry, an instruction that is not executed (because depending on external of ICD entry), the peek halt timing. will occur after ICD If external halt is exit, when the asserted during the instruction executes. cycle immediately prior to the scan cycle, both scan and instruction execution happen after the ICD exits. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet Burst If external halt is asserted during the BSF(SCANCON.GO), ICD entry occurs, and the burst is delayed until ICD exit. Otherwise, the current NVM-access cycle will complete, and then the scanner will be interrupted for ICD entry. If external halt is asserted during the burst, the burst is suspended and will resume with ICD exit. 40001843D-page 190 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner Scanner Operating Mode ICD Halt Peek Concurrent Triggered PC Breakpoint Scan cycle occurs before ICD entry and instruction execution happens after the ICD exits. Data Breakpoint The instruction with the dataBP executes and ICD entry occurs immediately after. If scan is requested during that cycle, the scan cycle is postponed until the ICD exits. Single Step If a scan cycle is ready after the debug instruction is executed, the scan will read PFM and then the ICD is reentered. SWBP and ICDINST If scan would stall a SWBP, the scan cycle occurs and the ICD is entered. Burst If PCPB (or single step) is on BSF(SCANCON.GO), the ICD is entered before execution; execution of the burst will occur at ICD exit, and the burst will run to completion. Note that the burst can be interrupted by an external halt. If SWBP replaces BSF(SCANCON.GO), the ICD will be entered; instruction execution will occur at ICD exit (from ICDINSTR register), and the burst will run to completion. 13.10.8 Peripheral Module Disable Both the CRC and scanner module can be disabled individually by setting the CRCMD and SCANMD bits of the PMD0 register. The SCANMD can be used to enable or disable to the scanner module only if the SCANE bit of Configuration Word 4 is set. If the SCANE bit is cleared, then the scanner module is not available for use and the SCANMD bit is ignored. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 191 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.11 Offset 0x0F49 Register Summary - CRC Name Bit Pos. SCANLADR 7:0 SCANLADRL[7:0] 15:8 SCANLADRH[7:0] 23:16 0x0F4C SCANHADR SCANLADRU[5:0] 7:0 SCANHADRL[7:0] 15:8 SCANHADRH[7:0] 23:16 0x0F4F SCANCON0 7:0 0x0F50 SCANTRIG 7:0 SCANHADRU[5:0] SCANEN SCANGO BUSY INVALID INTM MODE[1:0] TSEL[3:0] 0x0F51 ... Reserved 0x0F73 0x0F74 CRCDAT 7:0 15:8 CRCDATH[7:0] 7:0 CRCACCL[7:0] 15:8 CRCACCH[7:0] 0x0F76 CRCACC 0x0F78 CRCSHIFT 0x0F7A CRCXOR 0x0F7C CRCCON0 7:0 0x0F7D CRCCON1 7:0 13.12 CRCDATL[7:0] 7:0 CRCSHIFTL[7:0] 15:8 CRCSHIFTH[7:0] 7:0 CRCXORL[6:0] 15:8 CRCXORL0 CRCXORH[7:0] EN GO BUSY ACCM SHIFTM DLEN[3:0] FULL PLEN[3:0] Register Definitions: CRC and Scanner Control Long bit name prefixes for the CRC are shown in the table below. Refer to the "Long Bit Names Section" for more information. Table 13-4. CRC Long Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix CRC CRC Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 192 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.1 CRCCON0 Name:  Offset:  Reset:  CRCCON0 0xF7C 0 CRC Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 1 0 EN GO BUSY ACCM 3 2 SHIFTM FULL R/W R/W RO R/W R/W RO 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – EN CRC Enable bit Value 1 0 Description CRC module is released from Reset CRC is disabled and consumes no operating current Bit 6 – GO CRC Start bit Value 1 0 Description Start CRC serial shifter CRC serial shifter turned off Bit 5 – BUSY CRC Busy bit Value 1 0 Description Shifting in progress or pending All valid bits in shifter have been shifted into accumulator and EMPTY = 1 Bit 4 – ACCM Accumulator Mode bit Value 1 0 Description Data is augmented with zeros Data is not augmented with zeros Bit 1 – SHIFTM Shift Mode bit Value 1 0 Description Shift right (LSb) Shift left (MSb) Bit 0 – FULL Data Path Full Indicator bit Value 1 0 Description CRCDATH/L registers are full CRCDATH/L registers have shifted their data into the shifter © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 193 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.2 CRCCON1 Name:  Offset:  Reset:  CRCCON1 0xF7D 0 CRC Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 DLEN[3:0] Access Reset 1 0 PLEN[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7:4 – DLEN[3:0] Data Length bits Denotes the length of the data word -1 (See Figure 13-1) Bits 3:0 – PLEN[3:0] Polynomial Length bits Denotes the length of the polynomial -1 (See Figure 13-1) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 194 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.3 CRCDAT Name:  Offset:  CRCDAT 0xF74 CRC Data Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 CRCDATH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset x x x x x x x x Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRCDATL[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 15:8 – CRCDATH[7:0] CRC Input/Output Data Most Significant Byte Bits 7:0 – CRCDATL[7:0] CRC Input/Output Data Least Significant Byte © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 195 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.4 CRCACC Name:  Offset:  Reset:  CRCACC 0xF76 0 CRC Accumulator Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 CRCACCH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRCACCL[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 15:8 – CRCACCH[7:0] CRC Accumulator Register most significant byte Writing to this register writes the Most Significant Byte of the CRC accumulator register. Reading from this register reads the Most Significant Byte of the CRC accumulator. Bits 7:0 – CRCACCL[7:0] CRC Accumulator Register least significant byte Writing to this register writes the Least Significant Byte of the CRC accumulator register. Reading from this register reads the Least Significant Byte of the CRC accumulator. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 196 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.5 CRCSHIFT Name:  Offset:  Reset:  CRCSHIFT 0xF78 0 CRC Shift Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 CRCSHIFTH[7:0] Access RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CRCSHIFTL[7:0] Access Reset RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 15:8 – CRCSHIFTH[7:0] CRC Shifter Register Most Significant Byte Reading from this register reads the Most Significant Byte of the CRC Shifter. Bits 7:0 – CRCSHIFTL[7:0] CRC Shifter Register Least Significant Byte Reading from this register reads the Least Significant Byte of the CRC Shifter. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 197 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.6 CRCXOR Name:  Offset:  CRCXOR 0xF7A CRC XOR Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 CRCXORH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset x x x x x x x x Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 CRCXORL[6:0] Access Reset 0 CRCXORL0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W U x x x x x x x 1 Bits 15:8 – CRCXORH[7:0] XOR of Polynomial Term XN Enable Most Significant Byte Bits 7:1 – CRCXORL[6:0] XOR of Polynomial Term XN Enable Least Significant Byte Bit 0 – CRCXORL0 LSbit is unimplemented. Read as 1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 198 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.7 SCANCON0 Name:  Offset:  SCANCON0 0xF4F Scanner Access Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 SCANEN SCANGO BUSY INVALID INTM 2 1 0 R/W R/W/HC R R R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 MODE[1:0] Bit 7 – SCANEN  Scanner Enable bit(1) Value 1 0 Description Scanner is enabled Scanner is disabled, internal states are reset Bit 6 – SCANGO  Scanner GO bit(2, 3) Value 1 0 Description When the CRC sends a ready signal, NVM will be accessed according to MDx and data passed to the client peripheral. Scanner operations will not occur Bit 5 – BUSY  Scanner Busy Indicator bit(4) Value 1 0 Description Scanner cycle is in process Scanner cycle is complete (or never started) Bit 4 – INVALID Scanner Abort Signal bit Value 1 0 Description SCANLADRL/H/U has incremented to an invalid address(6) or the scanner was not setup correctly(7) SCANLADRL/H/U points to a valid address Bit 3 – INTM NVM Scanner Interrupt Management Mode Select bit Value X 1 0 1 0 Condition MODE = 10 MODE = 01 Description This bit is ignored CPU is stalled until all data is transferred. SCANGO is overridden (to zero) during interrupt operation; scanner resumes after returning from interrupt MODE = 01 CPU is stalled until all data is transferred. SCANGO is not affected by interrupts, the interrupt response will be affected MODE = 00 OR 01 SCANGO is overridden (to zero) during interrupt operation; scan operations resume after returning from interrupt MODE = 00 OR 01 Interrupts do not prevent NVM access © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 199 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner Bits 1:0 – MODE[1:0]  Memory Access Mode bits(5) Value 11 10 01 00 Description Triggered mode Peek mode Burst mode Concurrent mode Note:  1. Setting SCANEN = 0 (SCANCON0 register) does not affect any other register content. 2. This bit is cleared when LADR > HADR (and a data cycle is not occurring). 3. If INTM = 1, this bit is overridden (to zero, but not cleared) during an interrupt response. 4. BUSY = 1 when the NVM is being accessed, or when the CRC sends a ready signal. 5. See Table 13-1 for more detailed information. 6. An invalid address can occur when the entire range of PFM is scanned and the value of LADR rolls over. An invalid address can also occur if the value in the Scan Low address registers points to a location that is not mapped in the memory map of the device. 7. CRCEN and CRCGO bits must be set before setting SCANGO bit. Refer to Program Memory Scan Configuration. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 200 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.8 SCANLADR Name:  Offset:  Reset:  SCANLADR 0xF49 0 Scan Low Address Register Bit 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 SCANLADRU[5:0] Access Reset Bit 15 14 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 SCANLADRH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SCANLADRL[7:0] Access Reset Bits 21:16 – SCANLADRU[5:0] Scan Start/Current Address upper byte Upper bits of the current address to be fetched from, value increments on each fetch of memory. Bits 15:8 – SCANLADRH[7:0] Scan Start/Current Address high byte High byte of the current address to be fetched from, value increments on each fetch of memory. Bits 7:0 – SCANLADRL[7:0] Scan Start/Current Address low byte Low byte of the current address to be fetched from, value increments on each fetch of memory. Note:  1. Registers SCANLADRU/H/L form a 22-bit value, but are not guarded for atomic or asynchronous access; registers should only be read or written while SCANGO = 0. 2. While SCANGO = 1, writing to this register is ignored. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 201 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.9 SCANHADR Name:  Offset:  Reset:  SCANHADR 0xF4C 0 Scan High Address Register Bit 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 SCANHADRU[5:0] Access Reset Bit 15 14 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 13 12 11 10 9 8 SCANHADRH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCANHADRL[7:0] Access Reset Bits 21:16 – SCANHADRU[5:0] Scan End Address bits Upper bits of the address at the end of the designated scan Bits 15:8 – SCANHADRH[7:0] Scan End Address bits High byte of the address at the end of the designated scan Bits 7:0 – SCANHADRL[7:0] Scan End Address bits Low byte of the address at the end of the designated scan Note:  1. Registers SCANHADRU/H/L form a 22-bit value but are not guarded for atomic or asynchronous access; registers should only be read or written while SCANGO = 0. 2. While SCANGO = 1, writing to this register is ignored. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 202 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) Module with Memory Scanner 13.12.10 SCANTRIG Name:  Offset:  Reset:  SCANTRIG 0xF50 0 SCAN Trigger Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TSEL[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – TSEL[3:0] Scanner Data Trigger Input Selection bits Table 13-5. SCAN Trigger Sources TSEL Trigger Source 1111 Reserved 1110 Reserved 1101 Reserved 1100 Reserved 1011 Reserved 1010 Reserved 1001 Reserved 1000 TMR6_postscaled 0111 TMR5_output 0110 TMR4_postscaled 0101 TMR3_output 0100 TMR2_postscaled 0011 TMR1_output 0010 TMR0_output 0001 CLKREF_output 0000 LFINTOSC © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 203 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14. Interrupts The PIC18(L)F24/25K40 devices have multiple interrupt sources and an interrupt priority feature that allows most interrupt sources to be assigned a high or low priority level. The high priority interrupt vector is at 0008h and the low priority interrupt vector is at 0018h. A high priority interrupt event will interrupt a low priority interrupt that may be in progress. The registers for controlling interrupt operation are: • • • • INTCON PIRx (Interrupt flags) PIEx (Interrupt enables) IPRx (High/Low interrupt priority) ® It is recommended that the Microchip header files supplied with MPLAB IDE be used for the symbolic bit names in these registers. This allows the assembler/compiler to automatically take care of the placement of these bits within the specified register. In general, interrupt sources have three bits to control their operation. They are: • • • 14.1 Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event occurred Enable bit that allows program execution to branch to the interrupt vector address when the flag bit is set Priority bit to select high priority or low priority Mid-Range Compatibility When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the interrupt priority feature is disabled and interrupts are ® compatible with PIC microcontroller mid-range devices. In Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits of the IPRx registers have no effect. The PEIE/GIEL bit is the global interrupt enable for the peripherals. The PEIE/GIEL bit disables only the peripheral interrupt sources and enables the peripheral interrupt sources when the GIE/GIEH bit is also set. The GIE/GIEH bit is the global interrupt enable which enables all non-peripheral interrupt sources and disables all interrupt sources, including the peripherals. All interrupts branch to address 0008h in Compatibility mode. 14.2 Interrupt Priority The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the IPEN bit. When interrupt priority is enabled the GIE/ GIEH and PEIE/GIEL Global Interrupt Enable bits of Compatibility mode are replaced by the GIEH high priority, and GIEL low priority, global interrupt enables. When the IPEN bit is set, the GIEH bit enables all interrupts which have their associated bit in the IPRx register set. When the GIEH bit is cleared, then all interrupt sources including those selected as low priority in the IPRx register are disabled. When both GIEH and GIEL bits are set, all interrupts selected as low priority sources are enabled. A high priority interrupt will vector immediately to address 00 0008h and a low priority interrupt will vector to address 00 0018h. 14.3 Interrupt Response When an interrupt is responded to, the Global Interrupt Enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. The GIE/GIEH bit is the Global Interrupt Enable when the IPEN bit is cleared. When the IPEN bit is set, © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 204 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts enabling interrupt priority levels, the GIEH bit is the high priority Global Interrupt Enable and the GIEL bit is the low priority Global Interrupt Enable. High-priority interrupt sources can interrupt a low-priority interrupt. Low-priority interrupts are not processed while high-priority interrupts are in progress. The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC is loaded with the interrupt vector address (0008h or 0018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine, the source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling the interrupt flag bits in the INTCONx and PIRx registers. The interrupt flag bits must be cleared by software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid repeating the same interrupt. The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits the interrupt routine and sets the GIE/GIEH bit (GIEH or GIEL if priority levels are used), which re-enables interrupts. For external interrupt events, such as the INT pins or the interrupt-on-change pins, the interrupt latency will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact latency is the same for one-cycle or two-cycle instructions. Individual interrupt flag bits are set, regardless of the status of their corresponding enable bits or the Global Interrupt Enable bit. Important:  Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify any of the interrupt control registers while any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may cause erratic microcontroller behavior. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 205 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: PIC18(L)F24/25K40 10-000010B.vsd Generic Interrupt Logic for PIC18 5/4/2016 Interrupts Figure 14-1. PIC18 Interrupt Logic Rev. 10-000010B 5/4/2016 Wake-up if in Idle or Sleep modes PIR0 PIE0 IPR0 PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 Interrupt to CPU Vector at Location 0008h PIR2 PIE2 IPR2 GIEH/GIE IPEN IPEN GIEL/PEIE IPEN PIRx PIEx IPRx High Priority Interrupt Generation Low Priority Interrupt Generation PIR1 PIE1 IPR1 PIR2 PIE2 IPR2 PIR0 PIE0 IPR0 Interrupt to CPU Vector at Location 0018h PIRx PIEx IPRx 14.4 GIEH/GIE GIEL/PEIE INTCON Registers The INTCON registers are readable and writable registers, which contain various enable and priority bits. 14.5 PIR Registers The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are 8 PIR registers. 14.6 PIE Registers The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are 8 Peripheral Interrupt Enable registers. When IPEN = 0, the PEIE/ GIEL bit must be set to enable any of these peripheral interrupts. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 206 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.7 IPR Registers The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral interrupt sources, there are 8 Peripheral Interrupt Priority registers. Using the priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority Enable (IPEN) bit be set. 14.8 INTn Pin Interrupts PIC18(L)F24/25K40 devices have external interrupt sources which can be assigned to any pin on PORTA and PORTB using PPS. The external interrupt sources are edge-triggered. If the corresponding INTxEDG bit in the INTCON register is set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising edge. It the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge. All external interrupts (INT0, INT1, INT2) can wake-up the processor from Idle or Sleep modes if bit INTxE was set prior to going into those modes. If the Global Interrupt Enable bit (GIE/GIEH) is set, the processor will branch to the interrupt vector following wake-up. Interrupt priority is determined by the value contained in the corresponding interrupt priority bit (INT0P, INT1P, INT2P) of the IPR0 register. 14.9 TMR0 Interrupt In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the TMR0 register (FFh → 00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In 16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L register pair (FFFFh → 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing enable bit, TMR0IE. Interrupt priority for Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP. See “Timer0 Module” for further details on the Timer0 module. Related Links Timer0 Module 14.10 Interrupt-on-Change An input change on any port pins that support IOC sets Flag bit, IOCIF. The interrupt can be enabled/ disabled by setting/clearing the enable bit, IOCIE. Pins must also be individually enabled in the IOCxP and IOCxN register. IOCIF is a read-only bit and the flag can be cleared by clearing the corresponding IOCxF registers. For more information, refer to chapter “Interrupt-on-Change”. Related Links Interrupt-on-Change 14.11 Context Saving During Interrupts During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers are saved on the fast return stack. If a fast return from interrupt is not used the user may need to save the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry to the Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the user’s application, other registers may also need to be saved. Saving Status, WREG and BSR Registers in RAM saves and restores the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service Routine. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 207 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts Saving Status, WREG and BSR Registers in RAM MOVWF MOVFF MOVFF W_TEMP STATUS, STATUS_TEMP BSR, BSR_TEMP ; ; USER ISR CODE ; MOVFF BSR_TEMP, BSR MOVF W_TEMP, W MOVFF STATUS_TEMP, STATUS ; W_TEMP is in virtual bank ; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere ; BSR_TEMP located anywhere ; Restore BSR ; Restore WREG ; Restore STATUS Related Links Fast Register Stack © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 208 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.12 Register Summary - Interrupt Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0EBA IPR0 7:0 TMR0IP IOCIP INT2IP INT1IP INT0IP 0x0EBB IPR1 7:0 OSCFIP CSWIP ADTIP ADIP 0x0EBC IPR2 7:0 HLVDIP ZCDIP C2IP C1IP 0x0EBD IPR3 7:0 RC1IP TX1IP 0x0EBE IPR4 7:0 TMR6IP TMR5IP 0x0EBF IPR5 7:0 0x0EC0 IPR6 7:0 0x0EC1 IPR7 7:0 0x0EC2 PIE0 7:0 0x0EC3 PIE1 7:0 OSCFIE 0x0EC4 PIE2 7:0 HLVDIE 0x0EC5 PIE3 7:0 RC1IE TX1IE 0x0EC6 PIE4 7:0 TMR6IE TMR5IE 0x0EC7 PIE5 7:0 0x0EC8 PIE6 7:0 0x0EC9 PIE7 7:0 0x0ECA PIR0 7:0 TMR4IP BCL1IP SSP1IP TMR3IP TMR2IP TMR1IP TMR5GIP TMR3GIP TMR1GIP CCP2IP SCANIP CRCIP NVMIP TMR0IE IOCIE INT2IE INT1IE INT0IE CSWIE ADTIE ADIE ZCDIE C2IE C1IE TMR4IE BCL1IE SSP1IE TMR3IE TMR2IE TMR1IE TMR5GIE TMR3GIE TMR1GIE CCP2IE SCANIE CCP1IP CWG1IP CRCIE NVMIE TMR0IF CCP1IE CWG1IE IOCIF INT2IF INT1IF INT0IF 0x0ECB PIR1 7:0 OSCFIF CSWIF ADTIF ADIF 0x0ECC PIR2 7:0 HLVDIF ZCDIF C2IF C1IF 0x0ECD PIR3 7:0 RC1IF TX1IF 0x0ECE PIR4 7:0 TMR6IF TMR5IF 0x0ECF PIR5 7:0 0x0ED0 PIR6 7:0 0x0ED1 PIR7 7:0 SCANIF CRCIF NVMIF 7:0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL IPEN TMR4IF BCL1IF SSP1IF TMR3IF TMR2IF TMR1IF TMR5GIF TMR3GIF TMR1GIF CCP2IF CCP1IF CWG1IF 0x0ED2 ... Reserved 0x0FF1 0x0FF2 14.13 INTCON INT2EDG INT1EDG INT0EDG Register Definitions: Interrupt Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 209 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.1 INTCON Name:  Offset:  INTCON 0xFF2 Interrupt Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 2 1 0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL IPEN 4 3 INT2EDG INT1EDG INT0EDG R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 1 1 1 Bit 7 – GIE/GIEH Global Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 1 0 Condition Description If IPEN = 1 Enables all unmasked interrupts and cleared by hardware for high-priority interrupts only If IPEN = 1 Disables all interrupts If IPEN = 0 Enables all unmasked interrupts and cleared by hardware for all interrupts If IPEN = 0 Disables all interrupts Bit 6 – PEIE/GIEL Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 1 0 Condition Description If IPEN = 1 Enables all low-priority interrupts and cleared by hardware for low-priority interrupts only If IPEN = 1 Disables all low-priority interrupts If IPEN = 0 Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts If IPEN = 0 Disables all peripheral interrupts Bit 5 – IPEN Interrupt Priority Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enable priority levels on interrupts Disable priority levels on interrupts Bits 0, 1, 2 – INTxEDG External Interrupt ‘x’ Edge Select bit Value 1 0 Description Interrupt on rising edge of INTx pin Interrupt on falling edge of INTx pin Important:  Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs, regardless of the state of its corresponding enable bit or the global enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 210 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.2 PIR0 Name:  Offset:  PIR0 0xECA Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 0 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 2 1 0 TMR0IF IOCIF 3 INT2IF INT1IF INT0IF R/W R R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – TMR0IF  Timer0 Interrupt Flag bit(1) Value 1 0 Description TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared by software) TMR0 register has not overflowed Bit 4 – IOCIF  Interrupt-on-Change Flag bit(1,2) Value 1 0 Description IOC event has occurred (must be cleared by software) IOC event has not occurred Bits 0, 1, 2 – INTxIF  External Interrupt ‘x’ Flag bit(1,3) Value 1 0 Description External Interrupt ‘x’ has occurred External Interrupt ‘x’ has not occurred Note:  1. Interrupts are not disabled by the PEIE bit. 2. IOCIF is a read-only bit; to clear the interrupt condition, all bits in the IOCF register must be cleared. 3. The external interrupt GPIO pin is selected by the INTPPS register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 211 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.3 PIR1 Name:  Offset:  PIR1 0xECB Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 1 Bit Access Reset 7 6 1 0 OSCFIF CSWIF 5 4 3 2 ADTIF ADIF R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – OSCFIF Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description Device oscillator failed, clock input has changed to HFINTOSC (must be cleared by software) Device clock operating Bit 6 – CSWIF  Clock-Switch Interrupt Flag bit(1) Value 1 0 Description New oscillator is ready for switch (must be cleared by software) New oscillator is not ready for switch or has not been started Bit 1 – ADTIF ADC Threshold Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description ADC Threshold interrupt has occurred (must be cleared by software) ADC Threshold event is not complete or has not been started Bit 0 – ADIF ADC Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared by software) The A/D conversion is not complete or has not been started Note:  1. The CSWIF interrupt will not wake the system from Sleep. The system will sleep until another interrupt causes the wake-up. Related Links Clock Switch and Sleep © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 212 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.4 PIR2 Name:  Offset:  PIR2 0xECC Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 2 Bit Access Reset 7 6 1 0 HLVDIF ZCDIF 5 4 3 2 C2IF C1IF R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – HLVDIF HLVD Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description HLVD interrupt event has occurred HLVD interrupt event has not occurred or has not been set up Bit 6 – ZCDIF Zero-Cross Detect Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description ZCD Output has changed (must be cleared in software) ZCD Output has not changed Bits 0, 1 – CxIF Comparator ‘x’ Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description Comparator Cx output has changed (must be cleared by software) Comparator Cx output has not changed © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 213 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.5 PIR3 Name:  Offset:  PIR3 0xECD Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 3 Bit 7 6 5 4 1 0 RC1IF TX1IF 3 2 BCL1IF SSP1IF Access R R R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – RCxIF EUSARTx Receive Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description The EUSARTx receive buffer, RCxREG, is full (cleared by reading RCxREG) The EUSARTx receive buffer is empty Bit 4 – TXxIF EUSARTx Transmit Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description The EUSARTx transmit buffer, TXxREG, is empty (cleared by writing TXxREG) The EUSARTx transmit buffer is full Bit 1 – BCLxIF MSSPx Bus Collision Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description A bus collision has occurred while the MSSPx module configured in I2C master was transmitting (must be cleared in software) No bus collision occurred Bit 0 – SSPxIF Synchronous Serial Port ‘x’ Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description The transmission/reception is complete (must be cleared in software) Waiting to transmit/receive © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 214 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.6 PIR4 Name:  Offset:  PIR4 0xECE Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 4 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMR6IF TMR5IF TMR4IF TMR3IF TMR2IF TMR1IF R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – TMR6IF TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR6 to PR6 match occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR6 to PR6 match occurred Bit 4 – TMR5IF TMR5 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR5 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) TMR5 register did not overflow Bit 3 – TMR4IF TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR4 to PR4 match occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR4 to PR4 match occurred Bit 2 – TMR3IF TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR3 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) TMR3 register did not overflow Bit 1 – TMR2IF TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred Bit 0 – TMR1IF TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software) TMR1 register did not overflow © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 215 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.7 PIR5 Name:  Offset:  PIR5 0xECF Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access 2 1 0 TMR5GIF TMR3GIF TMR1GIF R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Reset Bit 2 – TMR5GIF TMR5 Gate Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR5 gate interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR5 gate occurred Bit 1 – TMR3GIF TMR3 Gate Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR3 gate interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR3 gate occurred Bit 0 – TMR1GIF TMR1 Gate Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description TMR1 gate interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR1 gate occurred © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 216 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.8 PIR6 Name:  Offset:  PIR6 0xED0 PIR6 Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 6 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 CCP2IF CCP1IF R/W R/W 0 0 Bit 1 – CCP2IF ECCP2 Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 1 0 — Condition Capture mode Capture mode Compare mode Compare mode PWM mode Description A TMR register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR register capture occurred A TMR register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR register compare match occurred Unused in PWM mode. Bit 0 – CCP1IF ECCP1 Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 1 0 — Condition Capture mode Capture mode Compare mode Compare mode PWM mode © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description A TMR register capture occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR register capture occurred A TMR register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software) No TMR register compare match occurred Unused in PWM mode. Datasheet 40001843D-page 217 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.9 PIR7 Name:  Offset:  PIR7 0xED1 Peripheral Interrupt Request (Flag) Register 7 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 SCANIF CRCIF NVMIF 4 3 2 1 CWG1IF 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – SCANIF SCAN Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description SCAN interrupt has occurred (must be cleared in software) SCAN interrupt has not occurred or has not been started Bit 6 – CRCIF CRC Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description CRC interrupt has occurred (must be cleared in software) CRC interrupt has not occurred or has not been started Bit 5 – NVMIF NVM Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description NVM interrupt has occurred (must be cleared in software) NVM interrupt has not occurred or has not been started Bit 0 – CWG1IF CWG Interrupt Flag bit Value 1 0 Description CWG interrupt has occurred (must be cleared in software) CWG interrupt has not occurred or has not been started © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 218 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.10 PIE0 Name:  Offset:  PIE0 0xEC2 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 0 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 2 1 0 TMR0IE IOCIE 3 INT2IE INT1IE INT0IE R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – TMR0IE  Timer0 Interrupt Enable bit(1) Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 4 – IOCIE  Interrupt-on-Change Enable bit(1) Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bits 0, 1, 2 – INTxIE  External Interrupt ‘x’ Enable bit(1) Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Note:  1. PIR0 interrupts are not disabled by the PEIE bit in the INTCON register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 219 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.11 PIE1 Name:  Offset:  PIE1 0xEC3 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 1 Bit Access Reset 7 6 1 0 OSCFIE CSWIE 5 4 3 2 ADTIE ADIE R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – OSCFIE Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 6 – CSWIE Clock-Switch Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 1 – ADTIE ADC Threshold Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 0 – ADIE ADC Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 220 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.12 PIE2 Name:  Offset:  PIE2 0xEC4 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 2 Bit Access Reset 7 6 1 0 HLVDIE ZCDIE 5 4 3 2 C2IE C1IE R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – HLVDIE HLVD Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 6 – ZCDIE Zero-Cross Detect Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bits 0, 1 – CxIE Comparator ‘x’ Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 221 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.13 PIE3 Name:  Offset:  PIE3 0xEC5 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 3 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 1 0 RC1IE TX1IE 3 2 BCL1IE SSP1IE R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – RCxIE EUSARTx Receive Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 4 – TXxIE EUSARTx Transmit Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 1 – BCLxIE MSSPx Bus Collision Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 0 – SSPxIE Synchronous Serial Port ‘x’ Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 222 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.14 PIE4 Name:  Offset:  PIE4 0xEC6 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 4 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMR6IE TMR5IE TMR4IE TMR3IE TMR2IE TMR1IE R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – TMR6IE TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 4 – TMR5IE TMR5 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 3 – TMR4IE TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 2 – TMR3IE TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 1 – TMR2IE TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 0 – TMR1IE TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 223 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.15 PIE5 Name:  Offset:  PIE5 0xEC7 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 TMR5GIE TMR3GIE TMR1GIE R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Bit 2 – TMR5GIE TMR5 Gate Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 1 – TMR3GIE TMR3 Gate Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 0 – TMR1GIE TMR1 Gate Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 224 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.16 PIE6 Name:  Offset:  PIE6 0xEC8 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 6 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 CCP2IE CCP1IE R/W R/W 0 0 Bit 1 – CCP2IE ECCP2 Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 0 – CCP1IE ECCP1 Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 225 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.17 PIE7 Name:  Offset:  PIE7 0xEC9 Peripheral Interrupt Enable Register 7 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 SCANIE CRCIE NVMIE 4 3 2 1 CWG1IE 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – SCANIE SCAN Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 6 – CRCIE CRC Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 5 – NVMIE NVM Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled Bit 0 – CWG1IE CWG Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enabled Disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 226 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.18 IPR0 Name:  Offset:  IPR0 0xEBA Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register 0 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 2 1 0 TMR0IP IOCIP 3 INT2IP INT1IP INT0IP R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 0 0 1 Bit 5 – TMR0IP Timer0 Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 4 – IOCIP Interrupt-on-Change Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bits 0, 1, 2 – INTxIP External Interrupt ‘x’ Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 227 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.19 IPR1 Name:  Offset:  IPR1 0xEBB Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register 1 Bit Access Reset 7 6 1 0 OSCFIP CSWIP 5 4 3 2 ADTIP ADIP R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 Bit 7 – OSCFIP Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 6 – CSWIP Clock-Switch Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 1 – ADTIP ADC Threshold Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 0 – ADIP ADC Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 228 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.20 IPR2 Name:  Offset:  IPR2 0xEBC Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register 2 Bit Access Reset 7 6 1 0 HLVDIP ZCDIP 5 4 3 2 C2IP C1IP R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 Bit 7 – HLVDIP HLVD Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 6 – ZCDIP Zero-Cross Detect Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bits 0, 1 – CxIP Comparator ‘x’ Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 229 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.21 IPR3 Name:  Offset:  IPR3 0xEBD Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register 3 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 1 0 RC1IP TX1IP 3 2 BCL1IP SSP1IP R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 – RCxIP EUSARTx Receive Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 4 – TXxIP EUSARTx Transmit Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 1 – BCLxIP MSSPx Bus Collision Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 0 – SSPxIP Synchronous Serial Port 'x' Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 230 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.22 IPR4 Name:  Offset:  IPR4 0xEBE Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register 4 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMR6IP TMR5IP TMR4IP TMR3IP TMR2IP TMR1IP R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bit 5 – TMR6IP TMR6 to PR6 Match Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 4 – TMR5IP TMR5 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 3 – TMR4IP TMR4 to PR4 Match Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 2 – TMR3IP TMR3 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 1 – TMR2IP TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 0 – TMR1IP TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 231 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.23 IPR5 Name:  Offset:  IPR5 0xEBF Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register 5 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 TMR5GIP TMR3GIP TMR1GIP R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 Bit 2 – TMR5GIP TMR5 Gate Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 1 – TMR3GIP TMR3 Gate Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 0 – TMR1GIP TMR1 Gate Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 232 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.24 IPR6 Name:  Offset:  IPR6 0xEC0 Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 CCP2IP CCP1IP R/W R/W 1 1 Bit 1 – CCP2IP ECCP2 Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 0 – CCP1IP ECCP1 Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 233 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupts 14.13.25 IPR7 Name:  Offset:  IPR7 0xEC1 Peripheral Interrupt Priority Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 SCANIP CRCIP NVMIP 4 3 2 1 CWG1IP 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 Bit 7 – SCANIP SCAN Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 6 – CRCIP CRC Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 5 – NVMIP NVM Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority Bit 0 – CWG1IP CWG Interrupt Priority bit Value 1 0 Description High priority Low priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 234 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15. I/O Ports Table 15-1. Port Availability per Device Device PORTA PORTB PORTC PIC18(L)F2xK40 ● ● ● PORTD PORTE ● Each port has eight registers to control the operation. These registers are: • • • • • • • • PORTx registers (reads the levels on the pins of the device) LATx registers (output latch) TRISx registers (data direction) ANSELx registers (analog select) WPUx registers (weak pull-up) INLVLx (input level control) SLRCONx registers (slew rate control) ODCONx registers (open-drain control) Most port pins share functions with device peripherals, both analog and digital. In general, when a peripheral is enabled on a port pin, that pin cannot be used as a general purpose output; however, the pin can still be read. The Data Latch (LATx registers) is useful for read-modify-write operations on the value that the I/O pins are driving. A write operation to the LATx register has the same effect as a write to the corresponding PORTx register. A read of the LATx register reads of the values held in the I/O PORT latches, while a read of the PORTx register reads the actual I/O pin value. Ports that support analog inputs have an associated ANSELx register. When an ANSELx bit is set, the digital input buffer associated with that bit is disabled. Disabling the input buffer prevents analog signal levels on the pin between a logic high and low from causing excessive current in the logic input circuitry. A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in the following figure © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 235 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports Figure 15-1. Generic I/O Port Operation Read LATx D Write LATx Write PORTx TRISx Q CK VDD Data Register Data Bus I/O pin Read PORTx To digital peripherals To analog peripherals 15.1 ANSELx VSS I/O Priorities Each pin defaults to the PORT data latch after Reset. Other functions are selected with the peripheral pin select logic. See “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module” for more information. Analog input functions, such as ADC and comparator inputs, are not shown in the peripheral pin select lists. These inputs are active when the I/O pin is set for Analog mode using the ANSELx register. Digital output functions may continue to control the pin when it is in Analog mode. Analog outputs, when enabled, take priority over digital outputs and force the digital output driver into a high-impedance state. The pin function priorities are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. Configuration bits Analog outputs (disable the input buffers) Analog inputs Port inputs and outputs from PPS Related Links (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 15.2 PORTx Registers In this section the generic names such as PORTx, LATx, TRISx, etc. can be associated with all ports. For availability of PORTD refer to Table 15-1. The functionality of PORTE is different compared to other ports and is explained in a separate section. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 236 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.2.1 Data Register PORTx is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The corresponding data direction register is TRISx. Setting a TRISx bit (‘1’) will make the corresponding PORTA pin an input (i.e., disable the output driver). Clearing a TRISx bit (‘0’) will make the corresponding PORTx pin an output (i.e., it enables output driver and puts the contents of the output latch on the selected pin). EXAMPLE-1: Initializing PORTA shows how to initialize PORTA. Reading the PORTx register reads the status of the pins, whereas writing to it will write to the PORT latch. All write operations are read-modify-write operations. Therefore, a write to a port implies that the port pins are read, this value is modified and then written to the PORT data latch (LATx). The PORT data latch LATx holds the output port data and contains the latest value of a LATx or PORTx write. EXAMPLE-1: Initializing PORTA ; This code example illustrates initializing the PORTA register. ; The other ports are initialized in the same manner. CLRF LATA ; Set all output bits to zero MOVLW B'11111000' ; Set RA as inputs and RA as outputs MOVWF TRISA ; BANKSEL ANSELA CLRF ANSELA ; All pins are digital I/O 15.2.2 Direction Control The TRISx register controls the PORTx pin output drivers, even when they are being used as analog inputs. The user should ensure the bits in the TRISx register are maintained set when using them as analog inputs. I/O pins configured as analog inputs always read ‘0’. Related Links TRISA TRISB TRISC 15.2.3 Analog Control The ANSELx register is used to configure the Input mode of an I/O pin to analog. Setting the appropriate ANSELx bit high will cause all digital reads on the pin to be read as ‘0’ and allow analog functions on the pin to operate correctly. The state of the ANSELx bits has no effect on digital output functions. A pin with TRIS clear and ANSEL set will still operate as a digital output, but the Input mode will be analog. This can cause unexpected behavior when executing read-modify-write instructions on the affected port. Important:  The ANSELx bits default to the Analog mode after Reset. To use any pins as digital general purpose or peripheral inputs, the corresponding ANSEL bits must be initialized to ‘0’ by user software. Related Links ANSELA ANSELB © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 237 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.2.4 Open-Drain Control The ODCONx register controls the open-drain feature of the port. Open-drain operation is independently selected for each pin. When an ODCONx bit is set, the corresponding port output becomes an open-drain driver capable of sinking current only. When an ODCONx bit is cleared, the corresponding port output pin is the standard push-pull drive capable of sourcing and sinking current. Important:  It is not necessary to set open-drain control when using the pin for I2C; the I2C module controls the pin and makes the pin open-drain. Related Links ODCONA ODCONB ODCONC 15.2.5 Slew Rate Control The SLRCONx register controls the slew rate option for each port pin. Slew rate for each port pin can be controlled independently. When an SLRCONx bit is set, the corresponding port pin drive is slew rate limited. When an SLRCONx bit is cleared, The corresponding port pin drive slews at the maximum rate possible. Related Links SLRCONA SLRCONB SLRCONC 15.2.6 Input Threshold Control The INLVLx register controls the input voltage threshold for each of the available PORTx input pins. A selection between the Schmitt Trigger CMOS or the TTL compatible thresholds is available. The input threshold is important in determining the value of a read of the PORTx register and also the level at which an interrupt-on-change occurs, if that feature is enabled. See link below for more information on threshold levels. Important:  Changing the input threshold selection should be performed while all peripheral modules are disabled. Changing the threshold level during the time a module is active may inadvertently generate a transition associated with an input pin, regardless of the actual voltage level on that pin. Related Links INLVLA INLVLB INLVLC INLVLE Internal Oscillator Parameters(1) 15.2.7 Weak Pull-up Control The WPUx register controls the individual weak pull-ups for each port pin. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 238 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports Related Links WPUA WPUB WPUC WPUE 15.2.8 Edge Selectable Interrupt-on-Change An interrupt can be generated by detecting a signal at the port pin that has either a rising edge or a falling edge. Individual pins can be independently configured to generate an interrupt. The interrupt-on-change module is present on all the pins . For further details about the IOC module, refer to "Interrupt-onChange" chapter. Related Links Interrupt-on-Change 15.3 PORTE Registers EXAMPLE-2: Initializing PORTE 15.3.1 CLRF PORTE CLRF LATE CLRF ANSELE MOVLW 05h MOVWF TRISE ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Initialize PORTE by clearing output data latches Alternate method to clear output data latches ; Configure analog pins for digital only Value used to initialize data direction ; Set RE as input RE as output RE as input PORTE on 28-Pin Devices For PIC18(L)F2xK40 devices, PORTE is only available when Master Clear functionality is disabled (MCLRE = 0). In this case, PORTE is a single bit, input-only port comprised of RE3 only. The pin operates as previously described. RE3 in PORTE register is a read-only bit and will read ‘1’ when MCLRE = 1 (i.e., Master Clear enabled). 15.3.2 RE3 Weak Pull-Up The port RE3 pin has an individually controlled weak internal pull-up. When set, the WPUE3 bit enables the RE3 pin pull-up. When the RE3 port pin is configured as MCLR, (CONFIG2L, MCLRE = 1 and CONFIG4H, LVP = 0), or configured for Low-Voltage Programming, (MCLRE = x and LVP = 1), the pullup is always enabled and the WPUE3 bit has no effect. 15.3.3 PORTE Interrupt-on-Change The interrupt-on-change feature is available only on the RE3 pin for all devices. Related Links Interrupt-on-Change © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 239 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.4 Register Summary - Input/Output Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F0D INLVLA 7:0 0x0F0E SLRCONA 7:0 SLRA7 SLRA6 SLRA5 SLRA4 SLRA3 SLRA2 SLRA1 SLRA0 0x0F0F ODCONA 7:0 ODCA7 ODCA6 ODCA5 ODCA4 ODCA3 ODCA2 ODCA1 ODCA0 0x0F10 WPUA 7:0 WPUA7 WPUA6 WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 WPUA2 WPUA1 WPUA0 0x0F11 ANSELA 7:0 ANSELA7 ANSELA6 ANSELA5 ANSELA4 ANSELA3 ANSELA2 ANSELA1 ANSELA0 INLVLB7 INLVLB6 INLVLB5 INLVLB4 INLVLB3 INLVLB2 INLVLB1 INLVLB0 INLVLA7 INLVLA6 INLVLA5 INLVLA4 INLVLA3 INLVLA2 INLVLA1 INLVLA0 0x0F12 ... Reserved 0x0F14 0x0F15 INLVLB 7:0 0x0F16 SLRCONB 7:0 SLRB7 SLRB6 SLRB5 SLRB4 SLRB3 SLRB2 SLRB1 SLRB0 0x0F17 ODCONB 7:0 ODCB7 ODCB6 ODCB5 ODCB4 ODCB3 ODCB2 ODCB1 ODCB0 0x0F18 WPUB 7:0 WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 0x0F19 ANSELB 7:0 ANSELB7 ANSELB6 ANSELB5 ANSELB4 ANSELB3 ANSELB2 ANSELB1 ANSELB0 0x0F1A ... Reserved 0x0F1C 0x0F1D INLVLC 7:0 INLVLC7 INLVLC6 INLVLC5 INLVLC4 INLVLC3 INLVLC2 INLVLC1 INLVLC0 0x0F1E SLRCONC 7:0 SLRC7 SLRC6 SLRC5 SLRC4 SLRC3 SLRC2 SLRC1 SLRC0 0x0F1F ODCONC 7:0 ODCC7 ODCC6 ODCC5 ODCC4 ODCC3 ODCC2 ODCC1 ODCC0 0x0F20 WPUC 7:0 WPUC7 WPUC6 WPUC5 WPUC4 WPUC3 WPUC2 WPUC1 WPUC0 0x0F21 ANSELC 7:0 ANSELC7 ANSELC6 ANSELC5 ANSELC4 ANSELC3 ANSELC2 ANSELC1 ANSELC0 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 0x0F22 ... Reserved 0x0F29 0x0F2A INLVLE 7:0 INLVLE3 7:0 WPUE3 0x0F2B ... Reserved 0x0F2C 0x0F2D WPUE 0x0F2E ... Reserved 0x0F82 0x0F83 LATA 7:0 LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 0x0F84 LATB 7:0 LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 0x0F85 LATC 7:0 LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 TRISA 7:0 TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 0x0F89 TRISB 7:0 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 0x0F8A TRISC 7:0 TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 0x0F86 ... Reserved 0x0F87 0x0F88 0x0F8B ... Reserved 0x0F8C © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 240 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F8D PORTA 7:0 RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 0x0F8E PORTB 7:0 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 0x0F8F PORTC 7:0 RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 0x0F90 Reserved 0x0F91 PORTE 15.5 7:0 RA0 RE3 Register Definitions: Port Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 241 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.1 PORTA Name:  Offset:  PORTA 0xF8D PORTA Register Note:  Writes to PORTA are actually written to the corresponding LATA register. Reads from PORTA register return actual I/O pin values. Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 RA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – RAn Port I/O Value bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuu Value 1 0 Description Port pin is ≥ VIH Port pin is ≤ VIL © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 242 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.2 PORTB Name:  Offset:  PORTB 0xF8E PORTB Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – RBn Port I/O Value bits Note:  Bits RB6 and RB7 read ‘1’ while in Debug mode. Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuu Value 1 0 Description Port pin is ≥ VIH Port pin is ≤ VIL Note:  Writes to PORTB are actually written to the corresponding LATB register. Reads from PORTB register return actual I/O pin values. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 243 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.3 PORTC Name:  Offset:  PORTC 0xF8F PORTC Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – RCn Port I/O Value bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuu Value 1 0 Description Port pin is ≥ VIH Port pin is ≤ VIL Note:  Writes to PORTC are actually written to the corresponding LATC register. Reads from PORTC register return actual I/O pin values. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 244 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.4 PORTE Name:  Offset:  PORTE 0xF91 PORTE Register Note:  Writes to PORTE are actually written to the corresponding LATE register. Reads from PORTE register return actual I/O pin values. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RE3 Access R/W Reset x Bit 3 – RE3 Port I/O Value bits Note:  Bit RE3 is read-only, and will read ‘1’ when MCLRE = 1 (Master Clear enabled). Reset States: POR/BOR = x All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 Description Port pin is ≥ VIH Port pin is ≤ VIL © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 245 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.5 TRISA Name:  Offset:  TRISA 0xF88 Tri-State Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 TRISA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – TRISAn TRISA Port I/O Tri-state Control bits Value 1 0 Description Port output driver is disabled Port output driver is enabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 246 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.6 TRISB Name:  Offset:  TRISB 0xF89 Tri-State Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – TRISBn TRISB Port I/O Tri-state Control bits Note:  Bits TRISB6 and TRISB7 read ‘1’ while in Debug mode. Value 1 0 Description Port output driver is disabled Port output driver is enabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 247 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.7 TRISC Name:  Offset:  TRISC 0xF8A Tri-State Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – TRISCn TRISC Port I/O Tri-state Control bits Value 1 0 Description Port output driver is disabled Port output driver is enabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 248 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.8 LATA Name:  Offset:  LATA 0xF83 Output Latch Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – LATAn Output Latch A Value bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuuu Note:  Writes to LATA are equivalent with writes to the corresponding PORTA register. Reads from LATA register return register values, not I/O pin values. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 249 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.9 LATB Name:  Offset:  LATB 0xF84 Output Latch Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – LATBn Output Latch B Value bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuuu Note:  Writes to LATB are equivalent with writes to the corresponding PORTB register. Reads from LATB register return register values, not I/O pin values. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 250 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.10 LATC Name:  Offset:  LATC 0xF85 Output Latch Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – LATCn Output Latch C Value bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuuu Note:  Writes to LATC are equivalent with writes to the corresponding PORTC register. Reads from LATC register return register values, not I/O pin values. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 251 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.11 ANSELA Name:  Offset:  ANSELA 0xF11 Analog Select Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ANSELA7 ANSELA6 ANSELA5 ANSELA4 ANSELA3 ANSELA2 ANSELA1 ANSELA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – ANSELAn Analog Select on Pins RA Value 1 0 Description Digital Input buffers are disabled ST and TTL input buffers are enabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 252 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.12 ANSELB Name:  Offset:  Reset:  ANSELB 0xF19 0x00 Analog Select Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ANSELB7 ANSELB6 ANSELB5 ANSELB4 ANSELB3 ANSELB2 ANSELB1 ANSELB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – ANSELBn Analog Select on Pins RB Value 1 0 Description Digital Input buffers are disabled. ST and TTL input buffers are enabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 253 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.13 ANSELC Name:  Offset:  ANSELC 0xF21 Analog Select Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ANSELC7 ANSELC6 ANSELC5 ANSELC4 ANSELC3 ANSELC2 ANSELC1 ANSELC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – ANSELCn Analog Select on Pins RC Value 1 0 Description Digital Input buffers are disabled. ST and TTL input buffers are enabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 254 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.14 WPUA Name:  Offset:  WPUA 0xF10 Weak Pull-up Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WPUA7 WPUA6 WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 WPUA2 WPUA1 WPUA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – WPUAn Weak Pull-up PORTA Control bits Value 1 0 Description Weak Pull-up enabled Weak Pull-up disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 255 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.15 WPUB Name:  Offset:  WPUB 0xF18 Weak Pull-up Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – WPUBn Weak Pull-up PORTA Control bits Value 1 0 Description Weak Pull-up enabled Weak Pull-up disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 256 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.16 WPUC Name:  Offset:  WPUC 0xF20 Weak Pull-up Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WPUC7 WPUC6 WPUC5 WPUC4 WPUC3 WPUC2 WPUC1 WPUC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – WPUCn Weak Pull-up PORTC Control bits Value 1 0 Description Weak Pull-up enabled Weak Pull-up disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 257 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.17 WPUE Name:  Offset:  WPUE 0xF2D Weak Pull-up Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 WPUE3 Access R/W Reset 0 Bit 3 – WPUE3 Weak Pull-up PORTE Control bits Note:  If MCLRE = 1, the weak pull-up in RE3 is always enabled; bit WPUE3 is not affected. Value 1 0 Description Weak Pull-up enabled Weak Pull-up disabled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 258 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.18 ODCONA Name:  Offset:  ODCONA 0xF0F Open-Drain Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ODCA7 ODCA6 ODCA5 ODCA4 ODCA3 ODCA2 ODCA1 ODCA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – ODCAn Open-Drain Configuration on Pins Rx Value 1 0 Description Output drives only low-going signals (sink current only) Output drives both high-going and low-going signals (source and sink current) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 259 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.19 ODCONB Name:  Offset:  ODCONB 0xF17 Open-Drain Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ODCB7 ODCB6 ODCB5 ODCB4 ODCB3 ODCB2 ODCB1 ODCB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – ODCBn Open-Drain Configuration on Pins Rx Value 1 0 Description Output drives only low-going signals (sink current only) Output drives both high-going and low-going signals (source and sink current) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 260 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.20 ODCONC Name:  Offset:  ODCONC 0xF1F Open-Drain Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ODCC7 ODCC6 ODCC5 ODCC4 ODCC3 ODCC2 ODCC1 ODCC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – ODCCn Open-Drain Configuration on Pins Rx Value 1 0 Description Output drives only low-going signals (sink current only) Output drives both high-going and low-going signals (source and sink current) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 261 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.21 SLRCONA Name:  Offset:  SLRCONA 0xF0E Slew Rate Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLRA7 SLRA6 SLRA5 SLRA4 SLRA3 SLRA2 SLRA1 SLRA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – SLRAn Slew Rate Control on Pins Rx, respectively Value 1 0 Description Port pin slew rate is limited Port pin slews at maximum rate © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 262 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.22 SLRCONB Name:  Offset:  SLRCONB 0xF16 Slew Rate Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLRB7 SLRB6 SLRB5 SLRB4 SLRB3 SLRB2 SLRB1 SLRB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – SLRBn Slew Rate Control on Pins Rx, respectively Value 1 0 Description Port pin slew rate is limited Port pin slews at maximum rate © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 263 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.23 SLRCONC Name:  Offset:  SLRCONC 0xF1E Slew Rate Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SLRC7 SLRC6 SLRC5 SLRC4 SLRC3 SLRC2 SLRC1 SLRC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – SLRCn Slew Rate Control on Pins Rx, respectively Value 1 0 Description Port pin slew rate is limited Port pin slews at maximum rate © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 264 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.24 INLVLA Name:  Offset:  INLVLA 0xF0D Input Level Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INLVLA7 INLVLA6 INLVLA5 INLVLA4 INLVLA3 INLVLA2 INLVLA1 INLVLA0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – INLVLAn Input Level Select on Pins Rx, respectively Value 1 0 Description ST input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change TTL input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 265 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.25 INLVLB Name:  Offset:  INLVLB 0xF15 Input Level Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INLVLB7 INLVLB6 INLVLB5 INLVLB4 INLVLB3 INLVLB2 INLVLB1 INLVLB0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – INLVLBn Input Level Select on Pins Rx, respectively Note:  INLVLB2 / INLVLB1: Pins read the I2C ST inputs when MSSP inputs select these pins, and I2C mode is enabled. Value 1 0 Description ST input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change TTL input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 266 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.26 INLVLC Name:  Offset:  INLVLC 0xF1D Input Level Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INLVLC7 INLVLC6 INLVLC5 INLVLC4 INLVLC3 INLVLC2 INLVLC1 INLVLC0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – INLVLCn Input Level Select on Pins Rx, respectively Note:  INLVLC4 / INLVLC3: Pins read the I2C ST inputs when MSSP inputs select these pins, and I2C mode is enabled. Value 1 0 Description ST input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change TTL input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 267 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 I/O Ports 15.5.27 INLVLE Name:  Offset:  INLVLE 0xF2A Input Level Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 INLVLE3 Access R/W Reset 1 Bit 3 – INLVLE3 Input Level Select on Pins Rx, respectively Value 1 0 Description ST input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change TTL input used for port reads and interrupt-on-change © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 268 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16. Interrupt-on-Change 16.1 Features • • • • 16.2 Interrupt-on-Change enable (Master Switch) Individual pin configuration Rising and falling edge detection Individual pin interrupt flags Overview All the pins of PORTA, PORTB, PORTC, and pin RE3 of PORTE can be configured to operate as interrupt-on-change (IOC) pins on PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family devices. An interrupt can be generated by detecting a signal that has either a rising edge or a falling edge. Any individual port pin, or combination of port pins, can be configured to generate an interrupt. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 269 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.3 Block Diagram Figure 16-1. Interrupt-on-Change Block Diagram (PORTA Example) Rev. 10-000 037A 6/2/201 4 IOCANx D Q R Q4Q1 edge detect RAx IOCAPx D data bus = 0 or 1 Q D S to data bus IOCAFx Q write IOCAFx R IOCIE Q2 IOC interrupt to CPU core from all other IOCnFx individual pin detectors FOSC Q1 Q1 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q3 Q4 Q4Q1 16.4 Q2 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q4Q1 Q4 Q4Q1 Q4Q1 Enabling the Module To allow individual port pins to generate an interrupt, the IOCIE bit of the PIE0 register must be set. If the IOCIE bit is disabled, the edge detection on the pin will still occur, but an interrupt will not be generated. Related Links PIE0 16.5 Individual Pin Configuration For each port pin, a rising edge detector and a falling edge detector are present. To enable a pin to detect a rising edge, the associated bit of the IOCxP register is set. To enable a pin to detect a falling edge, the associated bit of the IOCxN register is set. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 270 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change A pin can be configured to detect rising and falling edges simultaneously by setting both associated bits of the IOCxP and IOCxN registers, respectively. 16.6 Interrupt Flags are status flags that correspond to the interrupt-on-change pins of the associated port. If an expected edge is detected on an appropriately enabled pin, then the status flag for that pin will be set, and an interrupt will be generated if the IOCIE bit is set. The IOCIF bit of the PIR0 register reflects the status of all IOCAFx, IOCBFx, IOCCFx and IOCEF3 bits. Related Links PIR0 16.7 Clearing Interrupt Flags The individual status flags, (IOCAFx, IOCBFx, IOCCFx and IOCEF3) bits, can be cleared by resetting them to zero. If another edge is detected during this clearing operation, the associated status flag will be set at the end of the sequence, regardless of the value actually being written. In order to ensure that no detected edge is lost while clearing flags, only AND operations masking out known changed bits should be performed. The following sequence is an example of what should be performed. Clearing Interrupt Flags (PORTA Example) MOVLW XORWF ANDWF 16.8 0xff IOCAF, W IOCAF, F Operation in Sleep The interrupt-on-change interrupt sequence will wake the device from Sleep mode, if the IOCIE bit is set. If an edge is detected while in Sleep mode, the IOCxF register will be updated prior to the first instruction executed out of Sleep. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 271 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.9 Register Summary - Interrupt-on-Change Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F0A IOCAF 7:0 IOCAF7 IOCAF6 IOCAF5 IOCAF4 IOCAF3 IOCAF2 IOCAF1 IOCAF0 0x0F0B IOCAN 7:0 IOCAN7 IOCAN6 IOCAN5 IOCAN4 IOCAN3 IOCAN2 IOCAN1 IOCAN0 0x0F0C IOCAP 7:0 IOCAP7 IOCAP6 IOCAP5 IOCAP4 IOCAP3 IOCAP2 IOCAP1 IOCAP0 0x0F0D ... Reserved 0x0F11 0x0F12 IOCBF 7:0 IOCBF7 IOCBF6 IOCBF5 IOCBF4 IOCBF3 IOCBF2 IOCBF1 IOCBF0 0x0F13 IOCBN 7:0 IOCBN7 IOCBN6 IOCBN5 IOCBN4 IOCBN3 IOCBN2 IOCBN1 IOCBN0 0x0F14 IOCBP 7:0 IOCBP7 IOCBP6 IOCBP5 IOCBP4 IOCBP3 IOCBP2 IOCBP1 IOCBP0 0x0F15 ... Reserved 0x0F19 0x0F1A IOCCF 7:0 IOCCF7 IOCCF6 IOCCF5 IOCCF4 IOCCF3 IOCCF2 IOCCF1 IOCCF0 0x0F1B IOCCN 7:0 IOCCN7 IOCCN6 IOCCN5 IOCCN4 IOCCN3 IOCCN2 IOCCN1 IOCCN0 0x0F1C IOCCP 7:0 IOCCP7 IOCCP6 IOCCP5 IOCCP4 IOCCP3 IOCCP2 IOCCP1 IOCCP0 0x0F1D ... Reserved 0x0F26 0x0F27 IOCEF 7:0 IOCEF3 0x0F28 IOCEN 7:0 IOCEN3 0x0F29 IOCEP 7:0 IOCEP3 16.10 Register Definitions: Interrupt-on-Change Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 272 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.1 IOCAF Name:  Offset:  IOCAF 0xF0A PORTA Interrupt-on-Change Flag Register Example Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCAF7 IOCAF6 IOCAF5 IOCAF4 IOCAF3 IOCAF2 IOCAF1 IOCAF0 R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCAFn Interrupt-on-Change Flag bits Reset States: POR = 0 BOR = 0 Value 1 1 0 Condition IOCAP[n]=1 IOCAN[n]=1 IOCAP[n]=x and IOCAN[n]=x © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description A positive edge was detected on the RA[n] pin A negative edge was detected on the RA[n] pin No change was detected, or the user cleared the detected change Datasheet 40001843D-page 273 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.2 IOCBF Name:  Offset:  IOCBF 0xF12 PORTB Interrupt-on-Change Flag Register Example Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCBF7 IOCBF6 IOCBF5 IOCBF4 IOCBF3 IOCBF2 IOCBF1 IOCBF0 R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCBFn Interrupt-on-Change Flag bits Reset States: POR = 0 BOR = 0 Value 1 1 0 Condition IOCBP[n]=1 IOCBN[n]=1 IOCBP[n]=x and IOCBN[n]=x © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description A positive edge was detected on the RB[n] pin A negative edge was detected on the RB[n] pin No change was detected, or the user cleared the detected change Datasheet 40001843D-page 274 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.3 IOCCF Name:  Offset:  IOCCF 0xF1A PORTC Interrupt-on-Change Flag Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCCF7 IOCCF6 IOCCF5 IOCCF4 IOCCF3 IOCCF2 IOCCF1 IOCCF0 R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W/HS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCCFn Interrupt-on-Change Flag bits Reset States: POR = 0 BOR = 0 Value 1 1 0 Condition IOCCP[n]=1 IOCCN[n]=1 IOCCP[n]=x and IOCCN[n]=x © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description A positive edge was detected on the RC[n] pin A negative edge was detected on the RC[n] pin No change was detected, or the user cleared the detected change Datasheet 40001843D-page 275 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.4 IOCEF Name:  Offset:  IOCEF 0xF27 PORTE Interrupt-on-Change Flag Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCEF3 Access R/W/HS Reset 0 Bit 3 – IOCEF3  PORTE Interrupt-on-Change Flag bits(1) Reset States: POR = 0 BOR = 0 Value 1 1 0 Condition IOCEP[n]=1 IOCEN[n]=1 IOCEP[n]=x and IOCEN[n]=x Description A positive edge was detected on the RE[n] pin A negative edge was detected on the RE[n] pin No change was detected, or the user cleared the detected change Note:  1. If MCLRE = 1 or LVP = 1, RE3 port functionality is disabled and IOC on RE3 is not available. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 276 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.5 IOCAN Name:  Offset:  IOCAN 0xF0B Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Register Example Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCAN7 IOCAN6 IOCAN5 IOCAN4 IOCAN3 IOCAN2 IOCAN1 IOCAN0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCANn Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Enable bits Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCA pin for a negative-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 277 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.6 IOCBN Name:  Offset:  IOCBN 0xF13 Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Register Example Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCBN7 IOCBN6 IOCBN5 IOCBN4 IOCBN3 IOCBN2 IOCBN1 IOCBN0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCBNn Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Enable bits Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCA pin for a negative-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 278 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.7 IOCCN Name:  Offset:  IOCCN 0xF1B Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Register Example Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCCN7 IOCCN6 IOCCN5 IOCCN4 IOCCN3 IOCCN2 IOCCN1 IOCCN0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCCNn Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Enable bits Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCA pin for a negative-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 279 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.8 IOCEN Name:  Offset:  IOCEN 0xF28 Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Register Example Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCEN3 Access R/W Reset 0 Bit 3 – IOCEN3  Interrupt-on-Change Negative Edge Enable bits(1) Reset States: POR = 0 BOR = 0 Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCA pin for a negative-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin Note:  1. If MCLRE = 1 or LVP = 1, RE3 port functionality is disabled and IOC on RE3 is not available. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 280 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.9 IOCAP Name:  Offset:  IOCAP 0xF0C Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCAP7 IOCAP6 IOCAP5 IOCAP4 IOCAP3 IOCAP2 IOCAP1 IOCAP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCAPn Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Enable bits Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCA pin for a positive-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 281 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.10 IOCBP Name:  Offset:  IOCBP 0xF14 Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCBP7 IOCBP6 IOCBP5 IOCBP4 IOCBP3 IOCBP2 IOCBP1 IOCBP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCBPn Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Enable bits Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCB pin for a positive-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 282 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.11 IOCCP Name:  Offset:  IOCCP 0xF1C Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCCP7 IOCCP6 IOCCP5 IOCCP4 IOCCP3 IOCCP2 IOCCP1 IOCCP0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 – IOCCPn Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Enable bits Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCC pin for a positive-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 283 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Interrupt-on-Change 16.10.12 IOCEP Name:  Offset:  IOCEP 0xF29 Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 IOCEP3 Access R/W Reset 0 Bit 3 – IOCEP3  Interrupt-on-Change Positive Edge Enable bit(1) Reset States: POR = 0 BOR = 0 Value 1 0 Description Interrupt-on-Change enabled on the IOCE pin for a positive-going edge. Associated Status bit and interrupt flag will be set upon detecting an edge. Interrupt-on-Change disabled for the associated pin. Note:  1. If MCLRE = 1 or LVP = 1, RE3 port functionality is disabled and IOC on RE3 is not available. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 284 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17. (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module The Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) module connects peripheral inputs and outputs to the device I/O pins. Only digital signals are included in the selections. All analog inputs and outputs remain fixed to their assigned pins. Input and output selections are independent as shown in the figure below. The peripheral input is selected with the peripheral xxxPPS register, and the peripheral output is selected with the PORT RxyPPS register . For example, to select PORTC as the EUSART RX input, set RXxPPS to 0x17 as shown in the input table, and to select PORTC as the EUSART TX output set RC6PPS to 0x09 as shown in the output table. Figure 17-1. Simplified PPS Block Diagram Rev. 10-000 262B 2/22/201 7 RA0PPS abcPPS RA0 RA0 Per ipheral ab c RxyPPS Rxy Per ipheral xyz RC7PPS RC7 xyzPPS 17.1 RC7 PPS Inputs Each peripheral has an xxxPPS register with which the input pin to the peripheral is selected. Not all ports are available for input as shown in the following table. Multiple peripherals can operate from the same source simultaneously. Port reads always return the pin level regardless of peripheral PPS selection. If a pin also has analog functions associated, the ANSEL bit for that pin must be cleared to enable the digital input buffer. Important:  The notation “xxx” in the generic register name is a place holder for the peripheral identifier. For example, xxx = INT0 for the INT0PPS register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 285 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module Table 17-1. PPS Input Selection Register Details 17.2 Peripheral PPS Input Register Default Pin Selection at POR Register Reset Value at POR Interrupt 0 INT0PPS RB0 0x08 A B — Interrupt 1 INT1PPS RB1 0x09 A B — Interrupt 2 INT2PPS RB2 0x0A A B — Timer0 Clock T0CKIPPS RA4 0x04 A B — Timer1 Clock T1CKIPPS RC0 0x10 A — C Timer1 Gate T1GPPS RB5 0x0D — B C Timer3 Clock T3CKIPPS RC0 0x10 — B C Timer3 Gate T3GPPS RC0 0x10 A — C Timer5 Clock T5CKIPPS RC2 0x12 A — C Timer5 Gate T5GPPS RB4 0x0C — B — Timer2 Clock T2INPPS RC3 0x13 A — C Timer4 Clock T4INPPS RC5 0x15 — B C Timer6 Clock T6INPPS RB7 0x0F — B — ADC Conversion Trigger ADACTPPS RB4 0x0C — B C CCP1 CCP1PPS RC2 0x12 — B C CCP2 CCP2PPS RC1 0x11 — B C CWG CWG1PPS RB0 0x08 — B C DSM Carrier Low MDCARLPPS RA3 0x03 A — C DSM Carrier High MDCARHPPS RA4 0x04 A — C DSM Source MDSRCPPS RA5 0x05 A — C EUSART1 Receive RX1PPS RC7 0x17 — B C EUSART1 Clock CK1PPS RC6 0x16 — B C MSSP1 Clock SSP1CLKPPS RC3 0x13 — B C MSSP1 Data SSP1DATPPS RC4 0x14 — B C MSSP1 Slave Select SSP1SSPPS RA5 0x05 A — C PORT From Which Input Is Available PPS Outputs Each I/O pin has an RxyPPS register with which the pin output source is selected. With few exceptions, the port TRIS control associated with that pin retains control over the pin output driver. Peripherals that © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 286 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module control the pin output driver as part of the peripheral operation will override the TRIS control as needed. These peripherals include: • • EUSART (synchronous operation) MSSP (I2C) Although every pin has its own RxyPPS peripheral selection register, the selections are identical for every pin as shown in the following table. Important:  The notation “Rxy” is a place holder for the pin identifier. The 'x' holds the place of the PORT letter and the 'y' holds the place of the bit number. For example, Rxy = RA0 for the RA0PPS register. Table 17-2. Peripheral PPS Output Selection Codes RxyPPS Pin Rxy Output Source 0x13 ADGRDB A — C 0x14 ADGRDA A — C 0x11 DSM A — C 0x10 CLKR — B C 0x0F TMR0 — B C 0x0E MSSP1 (SDO/SDA) — B C 0x0D MSSP1 (SCK/SCL) — B C 0x0C CMP2 A — C 0x0B CMP1 A — C 0x0A EUSART1 (DT) — B C 0x09 EUSART1 (TX/CK) — B C 0x08 PWM4 A — C 0x07 PWM3 A — C 0x06 CCP2 — B C 0x05 CCP1 — B C 0x04 CWG1D — B C 0x03 CWG1C — B C 0x02 CWG1B — B C 0x01 CWG1A — B C 0x00 LATxy A B C © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. PORT To Which Output Can Be Directed Datasheet 40001843D-page 287 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17.3 Bidirectional Pins PPS selections for peripherals with bidirectional signals on a single pin must be made so that the PPS input and PPS output select the same pin. Peripherals that have bidirectional signals include: • • EUSART (DT/RXxPPS and TX/CKxPPS pins for synchronous operation) MSSP (I2C SDA/SSPxDATPPS and SCL/SSPxCLKPPS) Important:  The I2C default input pins are I2C and SMBus compatible. RB1 and RB2 are additional pins. RC4 and RC3 are default MMP1 pins and are SMBus compatible. Clock and data signals can be routed to any pin, however pins without I2C compatibility will operate at standard TTL/ST logic levels as selected by the INVLV register. 17.4 PPS Lock The PPS includes a mode in which all input and output selections can be locked to prevent inadvertent changes. PPS selections are locked by setting the PPSLOCKED bit of the PPSLOCK register. Setting and clearing this bit requires a special sequence as an extra precaution against inadvertent changes. Examples of setting and clearing the PPSLOCKED bit are shown in the following examples. PPS Lock Sequence ; Disable interrupts: BCF INTCON,GIE ; Bank to PPSLOCK register BANKSEL PPSLOCK MOVLW 55h ; Required sequence, next 4 instructions MOVWF PPSLOCK MOVLW AAh MOVWF PPSLOCK ; Set PPSLOCKED bit to disable writes ; Only a BSF instruction will work BSF PPSLOCK,PPSLOCKED ; Enable Interrupts BSF INTCON,GIE PPS Unlock Sequence ; Disable interrupts: BCF INTCON,GIE ; Bank to PPSLOCK register BANKSEL PPSLOCK MOVLW 55h ; Required sequence, next 4 instructions MOVWF PPSLOCK MOVLW AAh MOVWF PPSLOCK ; Clear PPSLOCKED bit to enable writes ; Only a BCF instruction will work BCF PPSLOCK,PPSLOCKED ; Enable Interrupts BSF INTCON,GIE © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 288 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17.5 PPS One-Way Lock Using the PPS1WAY Configuration bit, the PPS settings can be locked in. When this bit is set, the PPSLOCKED bit can only be cleared and set one time after a device Reset. This allows for clearing the PPSLOCKED bit so that the input and output selections can be made during initialization. When the PPSLOCKED bit is set after all selections have been made, it will remain set and cannot be cleared until after the next device Reset event. 17.6 Operation During Sleep PPS input and output selections are unaffected by Sleep. 17.7 Effects of a Reset A device Power-on-Reset (POR) clears all PPS input and output selections to their default values. All other Resets leave the selections unchanged. Default input selections are shown in the input selection register table. The PPS one-way is also removed. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 289 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17.8 Register Summary - PPS Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0EA0 PPSLOCK 7:0 0x0EA1 INT0PPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA2 INT1PPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA3 INT2PPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA4 T0CKIPPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA5 T1CKIPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EA6 T1GPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EA7 T3CKIPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EA8 T3GPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] PPSLOCKED 0x0EA9 T5CKIPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAA T5GPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAB T2INPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAC T4INPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAD T6INPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAE ADACTPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAF CCP1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB0 CCP2PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB1 CWG1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB2 MDCARLPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB3 MDCARHPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB4 MDSRCPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB5 RX1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB6 CK1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB7 SSP1CLKPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB8 SSP1DATPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB9 SSP1SSPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EBA ... Reserved 0x0EE6 0x0EE7 RA0PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EE8 RA1PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EE9 RA2PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEA RA3PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEB RA4PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEC RA5PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EED RA6PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEE RA7PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEF RB0PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF0 RB1PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF1 RB2PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF2 RB3PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF3 RB4PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF4 RB5PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 290 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0EF5 RB6PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF6 RB7PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF7 RC0PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF8 RC1PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF9 RC2PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFA RC3PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFB RC4PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFC RC5PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFD RC6PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFE RC7PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 17.9 Register Definitions: PPS Input and Output Selection © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 291 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17.9.1 Peripheral xxx Input Selection Name:  xxxPPS Important:  The Reset value of this register is determined by the device default for each peripheral. Refer to the input selection table for a list of available ports and default pin locations. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 PORT[1:0] Access Reset 1 0 PIN[2:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W g g g g g Bits 4:3 – PORT[1:0] Peripheral xxx Input PORT Selection bits See the input selection table for a list of available ports and default pin locations. Value 10 01 00 Description PORTC PORTB PORTA Bits 2:0 – PIN[2:0] Peripheral xxx Input Pin Selection bits Value 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Description Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 7 (Rx7) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 6 (Rx6) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 5 (Rx5) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 4 (Rx4) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 3 (Rx3) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 2 (Rx2) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 1 (Rx1) Peripheral input is from PORTx Pin 0 (Rx0) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 292 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17.9.2 Pin Rxy Output Source Selection Register Name:  Reset:  RxyPPS 0 Important:  See Register Summary - PPS for the address offset of each individual register. Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RxyPPS[4:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 4:0 – RxyPPS[4:0] Pin Rxy Output Source Selection bits See output source selection table for source codes. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 293 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 17.9.3 PPS Lock Register Name:  Offset:  Bit 7 PPSLOCK 0xEA0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PPSLOCKED Access R/W Reset 0 Bit 0 – PPSLOCKED PPS Locked bit Value 1 0 Description PPS is locked. PPS selections can not be changed. PPS is not locked. PPS selections can be changed. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 294 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module 18. Timer0 Module Timer0 module has the following features: • • • • • • • • 8-bit timer with programmable period 16-bit timer Selectable clock sources Synchronous and Asynchronous operation Programmable prescaler and postscaler Interrupt on match or overflow Output on I/O pin (via PPS) or to other peripherals Operation during Sleep Figure 18-1. Block Diagram of Timer0 Rev. 10-000017C 10/27/2015 Reserved 111 Reserved 110 SOSC 101 LFINTOSC 100 HFINTOSC T0_match T0CKPS 010 PPS 001 1 Prescaler 011 FOSC/4 TMR0 body SYNC 0 IN Peripherals T0OUTPS OUT T0_out Postscaler TMR0 FOSC/4 T016BIT T0ASYNC 000 T0IF Q D T0CKIPPS PPS RxyPPS CK Q 3 T0CS 16-bit TMR0 Body Diagram (T016BIT = 1) 8-bit TMR0 Body Diagram (T016BIT = 0) IN TMR0L R Clear IN TMR0L TMR0 High Byte OUT 8 COMPARATOR Read TMR0L OUT Write TMR0L T0_match 8 8 TMR0 High Byte TMR0H Latch Enable 8 TMR0H Internal Data Bus © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 8 40001843D-page 295 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module 18.1 Timer0 Operation Timer0 can operate as either an 8-bit or 16-bit timer. The mode is selected with the T016BIT bit. 18.1.1 8-bit Mode In this mode Timer0 increments on the rising edge of the selected clock source. A prescaler on the clock input gives several prescale options (see prescaler control bits, T0CKPS). In this mode as shown in the 8-bit TMR0 Body Diagram, a buffered version of TMR0H is maintained. This is compared with the value of TMR0L on each cycle of the selected clock source. When the two values match, the following events occur: • • 18.1.2 TMR0L is reset The contents of TMR0H are copied to the TMR0H buffer for next comparison 16-Bit Mode In this mode Timer0 increments on the rising edge of the selected clock source. A prescaler on the clock input gives several prescale options (see prescaler control bits, T0CKPS). In this mode TMR0H:TMR0L form the 16-bit timer value. As shown in the 16-bit TMR0 Body Diagram, read and write of the TMR0H register are buffered. TMR0H register is updated with the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of TMR0L register. Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 takes place through the TMR0H buffer register. The high byte is updated with the contents of TMR0H register when a write occurs to TMR0L register. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0 to be read and written at the same time. Timer 0 rolls over to 0x0000 on incrementing past 0xFFFF. This makes the timer free running. TMR0L/H registers can’t be reloaded in this mode once started. 18.2 Clock Selection Timer0 has several options for clock source selections, option to operate synchronously/asynchronously and a programmable prescaler. 18.2.1 Clock Source Selection The T0CS bits are used to select the clock source for Timer0. The possible clock sources are listed in the table below. Table 18-1. Timer 0 Clock Source Selections T0CS Clock Source 111 Reserved 110 Reserved 101 SOSC 100 LFINTOSC 011 HFINTOSC 010 Fosc/4 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 296 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module T0CS Clock Source 001 Pin selected by T0CKIPPS (Inverted) 000 Pin selected by T0CKIPPS (Non-inverted) 18.2.2 Synchronous Mode When the T0ASYNC bit is clear, Timer0 clock is synchronized to the system clock (FOSC/4). When operating in Synchronous mode, Timer0 clock frequency cannot exceed FOSC/4. During Sleep mode system clock is not available and Timer0 cannot operate. 18.2.3 Asynchronous Mode When the T0ASYNC bit is set, Timer0 increments with each rising edge of the input source (or output of the prescaler, if used). Asynchronous mode allows Timer0 to continue operation during Sleep mode provided the selected clock source is available. 18.2.4 Programmable Prescaler Timer0 has 16 programmable input prescaler options ranging from 1:1 to 1:32768. The prescaler values are selected using the T0CKPS bits. The prescaler counter is not directly readable or writable. The prescaler counter is cleared on the following events: • • • A write to the TMR0L register A write to either the T0CON0 or T0CON1 registers Any device Reset Related Links Resets 18.3 Timer0 Output and Interrupt 18.3.1 Programmable Postscaler Timer0 has 16 programmable output postscaler options ranging from 1:1 to 1:16. The postscaler values are selected using the T0OUTPS bits. The postscaler divides the output of Timer0 by the selected ratio. The postscaler counter is not directly readable or writable. The postscaler counter is cleared on the following events: 18.3.2 • A write to the TMR0L register • • A write to either the T0CON0 or T0CON1 registers Any device Reset Timer0 Output TMR0_out is the output of the postscaler. TMR0_out toggles on every match between TMR0L and TMR0H in 8-bit mode, or when TMR0H:TMR0L rolls over in 16-bit mode. If the output postscaler is used, the output is scaled by the ratio selected. The Timer0 output can be routed to an I/O pin via the RxyPPS output selection register. The Timer0 output can be monitored through software via the T0OUT output bit. Related Links © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 297 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module PPS Outputs 18.3.3 Timer0 Interrupt The Timer0 interrupt flag bit (TMR0IF) is set when the TMR0_out toggles. If the Timer0 interrupt is enabled (TMR0IE), the CPU will be interrupted when the TMR0IF bit is set. When the postscaler bits (T0OUTPS) are set to 1:1 operation (no division), the T0IF flag bit will be set with every TMR0 match or rollover. In general, the TMR0IF flag bit will be set every T0OUTPS +1 matches or rollovers. 18.3.4 Timer0 Example Timer0 Configuration: • Timer0 Mode = 16-bit • Clock Source = FOSC/4 (250 kHz) • Synchronous operation • Prescaler = 1:1 • Postscaler = 1:2 (T0OUTPS = 1) In this case the TMR0_out toggles every two rollovers of TMR0H:TMR0L. i.e. (0xFFFF)*2*(1/250kHz) = 524.28 ms 18.4 Operation During Sleep When operating synchronously, Timer0 will halt when the device enters Sleep mode. When operating asynchronously and selected clock source is active, Timer0 will continue to increment and wake the device from Sleep mode if Timer0 interrupt is enabled. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 298 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module 18.5 Register Summary - Timer0 Offset Name 0x0FD3 TMR0 0x0FD5 T0CON0 7:0 0x0FD6 T0CON1 7:0 18.6 Bit Pos. 7:0 TMR0L[7:0] 15:8 TMR0H[7:0] T0EN T0OUT T0CS[2:0] T016BIT T0OUTPS[3:0] T0ASYNC T0CKPS[3:0] Register Definitions: Timer0 Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 299 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module 18.6.1 T0CON0 Name:  Offset:  T0CON0 0xFD5 Timer0 Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 5 4 T0EN 7 6 T0OUT T016BIT 3 R/W R R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 T0OUTPS[3:0] Bit 7 – T0EN TMR0 Enable bit Value 1 0 Description The module is enabled and operating The module is disabled Bit 5 – T0OUT TMR0 Output bit Bit 4 – T016BIT TMR0 Operating as 16-Bit Timer Select bit Value 1 0 Description TMR0 is a 16-bit timer TMR0 is an 8-bit timer Bits 3:0 – T0OUTPS[3:0] TMR0 Output Postscaler (Divider) Select bits Value 1111 1110 1101 1100 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000 Description 1:16 Postscaler 1:15 Postscaler 1:14 Postscaler 1:13 Postscaler 1:12 Postscaler 1:11 Postscaler 1:10 Postscaler 1:9 Postscaler 1:8 Postscaler 1:7 Postscaler 1:6 Postscaler 1:5 Postscaler 1:4 Postscaler 1:3 Postscaler 1:2 Postscaler 1:1 Postscaler © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 300 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module 18.6.2 T0CON1 Name:  Offset:  T0CON1 0xFD6 Timer0 Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 T0CS[2:0] Access Reset 4 3 2 T0ASYNC 1 0 T0CKPS[3:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7:5 – T0CS[2:0] Timer0 Clock Source Select bits Refer the clock source selection table Bit 4 – T0ASYNC TMR0 Input Asynchronization Enable bit Value 1 0 Description The input to the TMR0 counter is not synchronized to system clocks The input to the TMR0 counter is synchronized to Fosc/4 Bits 3:0 – T0CKPS[3:0] Prescaler Rate Select bit Value 1111 1110 1101 1100 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000 Description 1:32768 1:16384 1:8192 1:4096 1:2048 1:1024 1:512 1:256 1:128 1:64 1:32 1:16 1:8 1:4 1:2 1:1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 301 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer0 Module 18.6.3 TMR0 Name:  Offset:  TMR0 0xFD3 Timer0 Period/Count Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 TMR0H[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMR0L[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 15:8 – TMR0H[7:0] TMR0 Most Significant Counter bits Value 0 to 255 0 to 255 Condition Description T016BIT = 0 8-bit Timer 0 Period Value. TMR0L continues counting from 0 when this value is reached. T016BIT = 1 16-bit Timer 0 Most Significant Byte Bits 7:0 – TMR0L[7:0] TMR0 Least Significant Counter bits Value 0 to 255 0 to 255 Condition T016BIT = 0 T016BIT = 1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description 8-bit Timer 0 Counter bits 16-bit Timer 0 Least Significant Byte Datasheet 40001843D-page 302 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19. Timer1 Module with Gate Control Timer1 module is a 16-bit timer/counter with the following features: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 16-bit timer/counter register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL) Programmable internal or external clock source 2-bit prescaler Optionally synchronized comparator out Multiple Timer1 gate (count enable) sources Interrupt on overflow Wake-up on overflow (external clock, Asynchronous mode only) 16-Bit Read/Write Operation Time base for the Capture/Compare function with the CCP modules Special Event Trigger (with CCP) Selectable Gate Source Polarity Gate Toggle mode Gate Single-pulse mode Gate Value Status Gate Event Interrupt Important:  References to module Timer1 apply to all the odd numbered timers on this device. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 303 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Figure 19-1. Timer1 Block Diagram TMRxGATE Rev. 10-000018G 8/7/2015 4 TxGPPS TxGSPM PPS 0000 0 NOTE (5) 1111 1 D D Q 0 TxGVAL Q1 Q TxGGO/DONE TxGPOL CK TMRxON Q Interrupt R TxGTM set bit TMRxGIF det TMRxGE set flag bit TMRxIF Tx_overflow 1 Single Pulse Acq. Control TMRx TMRxH TMRxL TMRxON EN (2) Q To Comparators (6) Synchronized Clock Input 0 D 1 TxCLK TxSYNC TMRxCLK 4 TxCKIPPS (1) PPS 0000 Note Prescaler 1,2,4,8 (4) 1111 2 TxCKPS Synchronize(3) det Fosc/2 Internal Clock Sleep Input Note:  1. This signal comes from the pin seleted by TxCKIPPS. 2. TMRx register increments on rising edge. 3. Synchronize does not operate while in Sleep. 4. See TMRxCLK for clock source selections. 5. See TMRxGATE for gate source selection. 6. Synchronized comparator output should not be used in conjunction with synchronized input clock. 19.1 Timer1 Operation The Timer1 module is a 16-bit incrementing counter that is accessed through the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. Writes to TMRxH or TMRxL directly update the counter. When used with an internal clock source, the module is a timer and increments on every instruction cycle. When used with an external clock source, the module can be used as either a timer or counter and increments on every selected edge of the external source. Timer1 is enabled by configuring the ON and GE bits in the TxCON and TxGCON registers, respectively. The table below displays the Timer1 enable selections. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 304 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Table 19-1. Timer1 Enable Selections 19.2 ON GE Timer1 Operation 1 1 Count Enabled 1 0 Always On 0 1 Off 0 0 Off Clock Source Selection The CS bits select the clock source for Timer1. These bits allow the selection of several possible synchronous and asynchronous clock sources. The table below lists the clock source selections. Table 19-2. Timer Clock Source Selection CS 19.2.1 Clock Source Timer1 Timer3 Timer5 1111-1100 Reserved Reserved Reserved 1011 TMR5 overflow TMR5 overflow Reserved 1010 TMR3 overflow Reserved TMR3 overflow 1001 Reserved TMR1 overflow TMR1 overflow 1000 TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow 0111 CLKREF CLKREF CLKREF 0110 SOSC SOSC SOSC 0101 MFINTOSC (500 kHz) MFINTOSC (500 kHz) MFINTOSC (500 kHz) 0100 LFINTOSC LFINTOSC LFINTOSC 0011 HFINTOSC HFINTOSC HFINTOSC 0010 Fosc Fosc Fosc 0001 Fosc/4 Fosc/4 Fosc/4 0000 T1CKIPPS T3CKIPPS T5CKIPPS Internal Clock Source When the internal clock source is selected the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair will increment on multiples of FOSC as determined by the Timer1 prescaler. When the FOSC internal clock source is selected, the Timer1 register value will increment by four counts every instruction clock cycle. Due to this condition, a 2 LSB error in resolution will occur when reading the Timer1 value. To utilize the full resolution of Timer1, an asynchronous input signal must be used to gate the Timer1 clock input. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 305 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Important:  In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge after any one or more of the following conditions: • Timer1 enabled after POR • Write to TMRxH or TMRxL • Timer1 is disabled • Timer1 is disabled (TMRxON = 0) when TxCKI is high then Timer1 is enabled (TMRxON = 1) when TxCKI is low. Refer to the figure below. Figure 19-2. Timer1 Incrementing Edge Rev. 30-000136A 5/24/2017 TxCKI = 1 when TMRx Enabled TxCKI = 0 when TMRx Enabled Note:  1. Arrows indicate counter increments. 2. In Counter mode, a falling edge must be registered by the counter prior to the first incrementing rising edge of the clock. 19.2.2 External Clock Source When the external clock source is selected, the Timer1 module may work as a timer or a counter. When enabled to count, Timer1 is incremented on the rising edge of the external clock input of the TxCKIPPS pin. This external clock source can be synchronized to the system clock or it can run asynchronously. 19.3 Timer1 Prescaler Timer1 has four prescaler options allowing 1, 2, 4 or 8 divisions of the clock input. The CKPS bits control the prescale counter. The prescale counter is not directly readable or writable; however, the prescaler counter is cleared upon a write to TMRxH or TMRxL. 19.4 Secondary Oscillator A secondary low-power 32.768 kHz oscillator circuit is built-in between pins SOSCI (input) and SOSCO (amplifier output). This internal circuit is to be used in conjunction with an external 32.768 kHz crystal. The secondary oscillator is not dedicated only to Timer1; it can also be used by other modules. The oscillator circuit is enabled by setting the SOSCEN bit of the OSCEN register. This can be used as one of the Timer1 clock sources selected with the CS bits.The oscillator will continue to run during Sleep. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 306 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Important:  The oscillator requires a start-up and stabilization time before use. Thus, the SOSCEN bit of the OSCEN register should be set and a suitable delay observed prior to enabling Timer1. A software check can be performed to confirm if the secondary oscillator is enabled and ready to use. This is done by polling the SOR bit of the OSCSTAT. Related Links Secondary Oscillator 19.5 Timer1 Operation in Asynchronous Counter Mode When the SYNC control bit is set, the external clock input is not synchronized. The timer increments asynchronously to the internal phase clocks. If external clock source is selected then the timer will continue to run during Sleep and can generate an interrupt on overflow, which will wake-up the processor. However, special precautions in software are needed to read/write the timer (see Reading and Writing Timer1 in Asynchronous Counter Mode). Important:  When switching from synchronous to asynchronous operation, it is possible to skip an increment. When switching from asynchronous to synchronous operation, it is possible to produce an additional increment. 19.5.1 19.6 Reading and Writing Timer1 in Asynchronous Counter Mode Reading TMRxH or TMRxL while the timer is running from an external asynchronous clock will ensure a valid read (taken care of in hardware). However, the user should keep in mind that reading the 16-bit timer in two 8-bit values itself, poses certain problems, since the timer may overflow between the reads. For writes, it is recommended that the user simply stop the timer and write the desired values. A write contention may occur by writing to the timer registers, while the register is incrementing. This may produce an unpredictable value in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Timer1 can be configured to read and write all 16 bits of data, to and from, the 8-bit TMRxL and TMRxH registers, simultaneously. The 16-bit read and write operations are enabled by setting the RD16 bit. To accomplish this function, the TMRxH register value is mapped to a buffer register called the TMRxH buffer register. While in 16-Bit mode, the TMRxH register is not directly readable or writable and all read and write operations take place through the use of this TMRxH buffer register. When a read from the TMRxL register is requested, the value of the TMRxH register is simultaneously loaded into the TMRxH buffer register. When a read from the TMRxH register is requested, the value is provided from the TMRxH buffer register instead. This provides the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of the Timer1 value from a single instance in time. Refer the figure below for more details. In contrast, when not in 16-Bit mode, the user must read each register separately and determine if the values have become invalid due to a rollover that may have occurred between the read operations. When a write request of the TMRxL register is requested, the TMRxH buffer register is simultaneously updated with the contents of the TMRxH register. The value of TMRxH must be preloaded into the TMRxH buffer register prior to the write request for the TMRxL register. This provides the user with the ability to write all 16 bits to the TMRxL:TMRxH register pair at the same time. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 307 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Any requests to write to the TMRxH directly does not clear the Timer1 prescaler value. The prescaler value is only cleared through write requests to the TMRxL register. Figure 19-3. Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Block Diagram From Timer1 Circuitry TMR1 High Byte TMR1L 8 Rev. 30-000135A 5/24/2017 Set TMR1IF on Overflow Read TMR1L Write TMR1L 8 8 TMR1H 8 8 Internal Data Bus 19.7 Timer1 Gate Timer1 can be configured to count freely or the count can be enabled and disabled using Timer1 gate circuitry. This is also referred to as Timer1 gate enable. Timer1 gate can also be driven by multiple selectable sources. 19.7.1 Timer1 Gate Enable The Timer1 Gate Enable mode is enabled by setting the GE bit. The polarity of the Timer1 Gate Enable mode is configured using the GPOL bit. When Timer1 Gate Enable mode is enabled, Timer1 will increment on the rising edge of the Timer1 clock source. When Timer1 Gate signal is inactive, the timer will not increment and hold the current count. Enable mode is disabled, no incrementing will occur and Timer1 will hold the current count. See figure below for timing details. Table 19-3. Timer1 Gate Enable Selections TMRxCLK GPOL TxG Timer1 Operation ↑ 1 1 Counts ↑ 1 0 Holds Count ↑ 0 1 Holds Count ↑ 0 0 Counts © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 308 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Figure 19-4. Timer1 Gate Enable Mode Rev. 30-000137A 5/24/2017 TMRxGE TxGPOL TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL Timer1/3/5/7 19.7.2 N N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 Timer1 Gate Source Selection The gate source for Timer1 is selected using the GSS bits. The polarity selection for the gate source is controlled by the GPOL bit. The table below lists the gate source selections. Table 19-4. Timer Gate Signal Selection GSS Gate Source Timer1 Timer3 Timer5 1111 Reserved Reserved Reserved 1110 ZCDOUT ZCDOUT ZCDOUT 1101 CMP2OUT CMP2OUT CMP2OUT 1100 CMP1OUT CMP1OUT CMP1OUT 1011 PWM4OUT PWM4OUT PWM4OUT 1010 PWM3OUT PWM3OUT PWM3OUT 1001 CCP2OUT CCP2OUT CCP2OUT 1000 CCP1OUT CCP1OUT CCP1OUT 0111 TMR6OUT (post-scaled) TMR6OUT (post-scaled) TMR6OUT (post-scaled) 0110 TMR5 overflow TMR5 overflow Reserved 0101 TMR4OUT (post-scaled) TMR4OUT (post-scaled) TMR4OUT (post-scaled) 0100 TMR3 overflow Reserved TMR3 overflow 0011 TMR2OUT (post-scaled) TMR2OUT (post-scaled) TMR2OUT (post-scaled) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 309 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Gate Source GSS Timer1 Timer3 Timer5 0010 Reserved TMR1 overflow TMR1 overflow 0001 TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow TMR0 overflow 0000 Pin selected by T1GPPS Pin selected by T3GPPS Pin selected by T5GPPS Any of the above mentioned signals can be used to trigger the gate. The output of the CMPx can be synchronized to the Timer1 clock or left asynchronous. For more information refer to the Comparator Output Synchronization section. Related Links Comparator Output Synchronization 19.7.3 Timer1 Gate Toggle Mode When Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled, it is possible to measure the full-cycle length of a Timer1 gate signal, as opposed to the duration of a single level pulse. The Timer1 gate source is routed through a flip-flop that changes state on every incrementing edge of the signal. See figure below for timing details. Timer1 Gate Toggle mode is enabled by setting the GTM bit. When the GTM bit is cleared, the flip-flop is cleared and held clear. This is necessary in order to control which edge is measured. Important:  Enabling Toggle mode at the same time as changing the gate polarity may result in indeterminate operation. Figure 19-5. TIMER1 GATE TOGGLE MODE Rev. 30-000138A 5/25/2017 TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGTM TxTxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL TIMER1/3/5/7 N © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. N+1 N+2 N+3 N+4 Datasheet N+5 N+6 N+7 N+8 40001843D-page 310 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.7.4 Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse Mode When Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse mode is enabled, it is possible to capture a single-pulse gate event. Timer1 Gate Single-Pulse mode is first enabled by setting the GSPM bit. Next, the GGO/DONE bit must be set. The Timer1 will be fully enabled on the next incrementing edge. On the next trailing edge of the pulse, the GGO/DONE bit will automatically be cleared. No other gate events will be allowed to increment Timer1 until the GGO/DONE bit is once again set in software. Clearing the GSPM bit will also clear the GGO/DONE bit. See figure below for timing details. Enabling the Toggle mode and the Single-Pulse mode simultaneously will permit both sections to work together. This allows the cycle times on the Timer1 gate source to be measured. See figure below for timing details. Figure 19-6. TIMER1 GATE SINGLE-PULSE MODE Rev. 30-000139A 5/25/2017 TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGSPM TxGGO/ Cleared by hardware on falling edge of TxGVAL Set by software DONE Counting enabled on rising edge of TxG TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL TIMER1/3/5/7 TMRxGIF N N+1 Set by hardware on falling edge of TxGVAL Cleared by software © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. N+2 Datasheet Cleared by software 40001843D-page 311 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Figure 19-7. TIMER1 GATE SINGLE-PULSE AND TOGGLE COMBINED MODE Rev. 30-000140A 5/25/2017 TMRxGE TxGPOL TxGSPM TxGTM TxGGO/ Cleared by hardware on falling edge of TxGVAL Set by software DONE Counting enabled on rising edge of TxG TxG_IN TxCKI TxGVAL TIMER1/3/5/7 TMRxGIF N Cleared by software N+1 N+2 N+3 Set by hardware on falling edge of TxGVAL N+4 Cleared by software 19.7.5 Timer1 Gate Value Status When Timer1 Gate Value Status is utilized, it is possible to read the most current level of the gate control value. The value is stored in the GVAL bit in the TxGCON register. The GVAL bit is valid even when the Timer1 gate is not enabled (GE bit is cleared). 19.7.6 Timer1 Gate Event Interrupt When Timer1 Gate Event Interrupt is enabled, it is possible to generate an interrupt upon the completion of a gate event. When the falling edge of GVAL occurs, the TMRxGIF flag bit in the PIR5 register will be set. If the TMRxGIE bit in the PIE5 register is set, then an interrupt will be recognized. The TMRxGIF flag bit operates even when the Timer1 gate is not enabled (GE bit is cleared). For more information on selecting high or low priority status for the Timer1 Gate Event Interrupt see the Interrupts chapter. Related Links Interrupt Priority © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 312 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.8 Timer1 Interrupt The Timer1 register pair (TMRxH:TMRxL) increments to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. When Timer1 rolls over, the Timer1 interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register is set. To enable the interrupt-on-rollover, the following bits must be set: • • • • TMRxON bit of the TxCON register TMRxIE bits of the PIEx register PEIE/GIEL bit of the INTCON register GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON register The interrupt is cleared by clearing the TMRxIF bit in the Interrupt Service Routine. For more information on selecting high or low priority status for the Timer1 Overflow Interrupt, see the Interrupts chapter. Important:  The TMRxH:TMRxL register pair and the TMRxIF bit should be cleared before enabling interrupts. Related Links Interrupt Priority 19.9 Timer1 Operation During Sleep Timer1 can only operate during Sleep when set up in Asynchronous Counter mode. In this mode, an external crystal or clock source can be used to increment the counter. To set up the timer to wake the device: • • • • • • TMRxON bit of the TxCON register must be set TMRxIE bit of the PIEx register must be set PEIE/GIEL bit of the INTCON register must be set TxSYNC bit of the TxCON register must be set Configure the TMRxCLK register for using secondary oscillator as the clock source Enable the SOSCEN bit of the OSCEN register The device will wake-up on an overflow and execute the next instruction. If the GIE/GIEH bit of the INTCON register is set, the device will call the Interrupt Service Routine. The secondary oscillator will continue to operate in Sleep regardless of the TxSYNC bit setting. 19.10 CCP Capture/Compare Time Base The CCP modules use the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair as the time base when operating in Capture or Compare mode. In Capture mode, the value in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair is copied into the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair on a configured event. In Compare mode, an event is triggered when the value in the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair matches the value in the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. This event can be a Special Event Trigger. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 313 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control For more information, see Capture/Compare/PWM Module(CCP) chapter. Related Links Capture/Compare/PWM Module 19.11 CCP Special Event Trigger When any of the CCPs are configured to trigger a special event, the trigger will clear the TMRxH:TMRxL register pair. This special event does not cause a Timer1 interrupt. The CCP module may still be configured to generate a CCP interrupt. In this mode of operation, the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair becomes the period register for Timer1. Timer1 should be synchronized and FOSC/4 should be selected as the clock source in order to utilize the Special Event Trigger. Asynchronous operation of Timer1 can cause a Special Event Trigger to be missed. In the event that a write to TMRxH or TMRxL coincides with a Special Event Trigger from the CCP, the write will take precedence. 19.12 Peripheral Module Disable When a peripheral is not used or inactive, the module can be disabled by setting the Module Disable bit in the PMD registers. This will reduce power consumption to an absolute minimum. Setting the PMD bits holds the module in Reset and disconnects the module’s clock source. The Module Disable bits for Timer1 (TMR1MD) are in the PMD1 register. See Peripheral Module Disable (PMD) chapter for more information. Related Links Register Summary - PMD © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 314 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.13 Register Summary - Timer1 Offset Name 0x0FC1 TMR5 0x0FC3 T5CON 7:0 0x0FC4 T5GCON 7:0 0x0FC5 TMR5GATE 7:0 GSS[3:0] 0x0FC6 TMR5CLK 7:0 CS[3:0] 0x0FC7 TMR3 0x0FC9 T3CON 7:0 0x0FCA T3GCON 7:0 0x0FCB TMR3GATE 7:0 0x0FCC TMR3CLK 7:0 0x0FCD Bit Pos. TMR1 7:0 TMRxL[7:0] 15:8 TMRxH[7:0] CKPS[1:0] GE GPOL GTM SYNC GSPM GGO/DONE 7:0 TMRxL[7:0] 15:8 TMRxH[7:0] CKPS[1:0] GE GPOL GTM GGO/DONE RD16 ON RD16 ON GVAL GSS[3:0] CS[3:0] 7:0 TMRxL[7:0] 15:8 TMRxH[7:0] 0x0FCF T1CON 7:0 0x0FD0 T1GCON 7:0 0x0FD1 TMR1GATE 7:0 GSS[3:0] 0x0FD2 TMR1CLK 7:0 CS[3:0] 19.14 ON GVAL SYNC GSPM RD16 CKPS[1:0] GE GPOL GTM GSPM SYNC GGO/DONE GVAL Register Definitions: Timer1 Long bit name prefixes for the odd numbered timers is shown in the following table. Refer to the "Long Bit Names" section for more information. Table 19-5. Timer1 prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix Timer1 T1 Timer3 T3 Timer5 T5 Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 315 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.14.1 TxCON Name:  Offset:  TxCON 0xFCF,0xFC9,0xFC3 Timer Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 CKPS[1:0] Access Reset 2 1 0 SYNC RD16 ON R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 5:4 – CKPS[1:0] Timer Input Clock Prescale Select bits Reset States: POR/BOR = 00 All Other Resets = uu Value 11 10 01 00 Description 1:8 Prescale value 1:4 Prescale value 1:2 Prescale value 1:1 Prescale value Bit 2 – SYNC Timer External Clock Input Synchronization Control bit Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value X 1 0 Condition CS = FOSC/4 or FOSC Else Else Description This bit is ignored. Timer uses the incoming clock as is. Do not synchronize external clock input Synchronize external clock input with system clock Bit 1 – RD16 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 Description Enables register read/write of Timer in one 16-bit operation Enables register read/write of Timer in two 8-bit operations Bit 0 – ON Timer On bit Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 Description Enables Timer Disables Timer © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 316 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.14.2 TxGCON Name:  Offset:  TxGCON 0xFD0,0xFCA,0xFC4 Timer Gate Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 GE GPOL GTM GSPM GGO/DONE GVAL R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO 0 0 0 0 0 x 1 0 Bit 7 – GE Timer Gate Enable bit Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 X Condition ON = 1 ON = 1 ON = 0 Description Timer counting is controlled by the Timer gate function Timer is always counting This bit is ignored Bit 6 – GPOL Timer Gate Polarity bit Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 Description Timer gate is active-high (Timer counts when gate is high) Timer gate is active-low (Timer counts when gate is low) Bit 5 – GTM Timer Gate Toggle Mode bit Timer Gate Flip-Flop Toggles on every rising edge Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 Description Timer Gate Toggle mode is enabled Timer Gate Toggle mode is disabled and Toggle flip-flop is cleared Bit 4 – GSPM Timer Gate Single Pulse Mode bit Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u Value 1 0 Description Timer Gate Single Pulse mode is enabled and is controlling Timer gate) Timer Gate Single Pulse mode is disabled Bit 3 – GGO/DONE Timer Gate Single Pulse Acquisition Status bit This bit is automatically cleared when TxGSPM is cleared. Reset States: POR/BOR = 0 All Other Resets = u © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 317 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control Value 1 0 Description Timer Gate Single Pulse Acquisition is ready, waiting for an edge Timer Gate Single Pulse Acquisition has completed or has not been started. Bit 2 – GVAL Timer Gate Current State bit Indicates the current state of the Timer gate that could be provided to TMRxH:TMRxL Unaffected by Timer Gate Enable (TMRxGE) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 318 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.14.3 TMRxCLK Name:  Offset:  TMRxCLK 0xFD2,0xFCC,0xFC6 Timer Clock Source Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – CS[3:0] Timer Clock Source Selection bits Refer to the clock source selection table Reset States: POR/BOR = 0000 All Other Resets = uuuu © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 319 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.14.4 TMRxGATE Name:  Offset:  TMRxGATE 0xFD1,0xFCB,0xFC5 Timer Gate Source Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GSS[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – GSS[3:0] Timer Gate Source Selection bits Refer to the gate source selection table. Reset States: POR/BOR = 0000 All Other Resets = uuuu © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 320 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer1 Module with Gate Control 19.14.5 TMRx Name:  Offset:  TMRx 0xFCD,0xFC7,0xFC1 Timer Low Byte Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 TMRxH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TMRxL[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 15:8 – TMRxH[7:0] Timer Most Significant Byte Reset States: POR/BOR = 00000000 All Other Resets = uuuuuuuu Bits 7:0 – TMRxL[7:0] Timer Least Significant Byte Reset States: POR/BOR = 00000000 All Other Resets = uuuuuuuu © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 321 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20. Timer2 Module The Timer2 module is a 8-bit timer that incorporate the following features: • • • • • • • • • • • 8-bit Timer and Period registers Readable and writable Software programmable prescaler (1:1 to 1:128) Software programmable postscaler (1:1 to 1:16) Interrupt on T2TMR match with T2PR One-shot operation Full asynchronous operation Includes Hardware Limit Timer (HLT) Alternate clock sources External Timer Reset signal sources Configurable Timer Reset operation See Figure 20-1 for a block diagram of Timer2. See table below for the clock source selections. Important:  References to module Timer2 apply to all the even numbered timers on this device. (Timer2, Timer4, etc.) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 322 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-1. Timer2 with Hardware Limit Timer (HLT) Block Diagram RSEL INPPS TxIN PPS External Reset (2) Sources Rev. 10-000168C 9/10/2015 MODE TMRx_ers Edge Detector Level Detector Mode Control (2 clock Sync) MODE reset CCP_pset(1) MODE=01 enable D MODE=1011 Q Clear ON CPOL Prescaler TMRx_clk 3 CKPS ON Sync (2 Clocks) 0 Sync 1 Fosc/4 PSYNC TxTMR R Comparator Set flag bit TMRxIF Postscaler TMRx_postscaled 4 1 TxPR OUTPS 0 CSYNC Note:  1. Signal to the CCP to trigger the PWM pulse. 2. See TxRST for external Reset sources. Table 20-1. Clock Source Selection CS Clock Source Timer2 Timer4 Timer6 1111-1001 Reserved Reserved Reserved 1000 ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT 0111 CLKREF_OUT CLKREF_OUT CLKREF_OUT 0110 SOSC SOSC SOSC 0101 MFINTOSC (31 kHz) MFINTOSC (31 kHz) MFINTOSC (31 kHz) 0100 LFINTOSC LFINTOSC LFINTOSC 0011 HFINTOSC HFINTOSC HFINTOSC 0010 Fosc Fosc Fosc © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 323 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Clock Source CS 20.1 Timer2 Timer4 Timer6 0001 Fosc/4 Fosc/4 Fosc/4 0000 Pin selected by T2INPPS Pin selected by T4INPPS Pin selected by T6INPPS Timer2 Operation Timer2 operates in three major modes: • • • Free Running Period One-shot Monostable Within each mode there are several options for starting, stopping, and reset. Table 20-3 lists the options. In all modes, the T2TMR count register is incremented on the rising edge of the clock signal from the programmable prescaler. When T2TMR equals T2PR, a high level is output to the postscaler counter. T2TMR is cleared on the next clock input. An external signal from hardware can also be configured to gate the timer operation or force a T2TMR count Reset. In Gate modes the counter stops when the gate is disabled and resumes when the gate is enabled. In Reset modes the T2TMR count is reset on either the level or edge from the external source. The T2TMR and T2PR registers are both directly readable and writable. The T2TMR register is cleared and the T2PR register initializes to FFh on any device Reset. Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared on the following events: • • • • A write to the T2TMR register A write to the T2CON register Any device Reset External Reset Source event that resets the timer. Important:  T2TMR is not cleared when T2CON is written. 20.1.1 Free Running Period Mode The value of T2TMR is compared to that of the Period register, T2PR, on each clock cycle. When the two values match, the comparator resets the value of T2TMR to 00h on the next cycle and increments the output postscaler counter. When the postscaler count equals the value in the OUTPS bits of the T2CON register then a one clock period wide pulse occurs on the TMR2_postscaled output, and the postscaler count is cleared. 20.1.2 One-Shot Mode The One-Shot mode is identical to the Free Running Period mode except that the ON bit is cleared and the timer is stopped when T2TMR matches T2PR and will not restart until the ON bit is cycled off and on. Postscaler (OUTPS) values other than zero are ignored in this mode because the timer is stopped at the first period event and the postscaler is reset when the timer is restarted. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 324 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.1.3 Monostable Mode Monostable modes are similar to One-Shot modes except that the ON bit is not cleared and the timer can be restarted by an external Reset event. 20.2 Timer2 Output The Timer2 module’s primary output is TMR2_postscaled, which pulses for a single TMR2_clk period upon each match of the postscaler counter and the OUTPS bits of the T2CON register. The postscaler is incremented each time the T2TMR value matches the T2PR value. This signal can be selected as an input to several other input modules: • • • • • • The ADC module, as an auto-conversion trigger CWG, as an auto-shutdown source The CRC memory scanner, as a trigger for triggered mode Gate source for odd numbered timers (Timer1, Timer3, etc.) Alternate SPI clock Reset signals for other instances of even numbered timers (Timer2, Timer4, etc.) In addition, the Timer2 is also used by the CCP module for pulse generation in PWM mode. See “PWM Overview” and “Pulse-width Modulation” sections for more details on setting up Timer2 for use with the CCP and PWM modules. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.3 External Reset Sources In addition to the clock source, the Timer2 also takes in an external Reset source. This external Reset source is selected for each timer with the corresponding TxRST register. This source can control starting and stopping of the timer, as well as resetting the timer, depending on which mode the timer is in. Reset source selections are shown in the following table. Table 20-2. External Reset Sources Reset Source RSEL TMR2 TMR4 TMR6 1011-1111 Reserved Reserved Reserved 1010 ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT ZCD_OUT 1001 CMP2OUT CMP2OUT CMP2OUT 1000 CMP1OUT CMP1OUT CMP1OUT 0111 PWM4OUT PWM4OUT PWM4OUT 0110 PWM3OUT PWM3OUT PWM3OUT 0101 CCP2OUT CCP2OUT CCP2OUT 0100 CCP1OUT CCP1OUT CCP1OUT © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 325 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Reset Source RSEL 20.4 TMR2 TMR4 TMR6 0011 TMR6 post-scaled TMR6 post-scaled Reserved 0010 TMR4 post-scaled Reserved TMR4 post-scaled 0001 Reserved TMR2 post-scaled TMR2 post-scaled 0000 Pin selected by T2INPPS Pin selected by T4INPPS Pin selected by T6INPPS Timer2 Interrupt Timer2 can also generate a device interrupt. The interrupt is generated when the postscaler counter matches with the selected postscaler value (OUTPS bits of T2CON register). The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMR2IE interrupt enable bit. Interrupt timing is illustrated in the figure below. Figure 20-2. Timer2 Prescaler, Postscaler, and Interrupt Timing Diagram Rev. 10-000205A 4/7/2016 0b010 CKPS PRx 1 OUTPS 0b0001 TMRx_clk TMRx 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 TMRx_postscaled (1) TMRxIF (2) (1) Note:  1. Setting the interrupt flag is synchronized with the instruction clock. 2. Cleared by software. 20.5 Operating Modes The mode of the timer is controlled by the MODE bits of the T2HLT register. Edge-Triggered modes require six Timer clock periods between external triggers. Level-Triggered modes require the triggering level to be at least three Timer clock periods long. External triggers are ignored while in debug mode. Table 20-3. Operating Modes Table Mode Free Running Period MODE Output Operation 000 00 Period Pulse 001 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Timer Control Operation Start Reset Stop Software gate (Figure 20-3) ON = 1 — ON = 0 Hardware gate, activehigh ON = 1 and TMRx_ers = 1 — ON = 0 or TMRx_ers = 0 Datasheet 40001843D-page 326 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Mode MODE Output Operation Timer Control Operation Start Reset Stop ON = 1 and TMRx_ers = 0 — ON = 0 or TMRx_ers = 1 (Figure 20-4) 010 Hardware gate, activelow 011 Rising or falling edge Reset TMRx_ers ↕ Rising edge Reset (Figure 20-5) TMRx_ers ↑ 100 101 110 Period Pulse with Hardware Reset 111 TMRx_ers ↓ Low level Reset TMRx_ers =0 High level Reset (Figure 20-6) TMRx_ers =1 ON = 1 — Rising edge start (Figure 20-8) ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↑ — Falling edge start ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↓ — 011 Any edge start ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↕ — 100 Rising edge start and Rising edge Reset (Figure 20-9) ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↑ TMRx_ers ↑ Falling edge start and Falling edge Reset ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↓ TMRx_ers ↓ Rising edge start and ON = 1 and TMRx_ers =0 001 010 Edge Triggered Start (Note 1) One-shot ON = 1 Software start (Figure 20-7) 000 One-shot Falling edge Reset 01 Edge Triggered Start and 101 Hardware Reset (Note 1) 110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. ON = 0 ON = 0 or TMRx_ers = 0 ON = 0 or TMRx_ers = 1 ON = 0 or Next clock after Datasheet TMRx = PRx (Note 2) 40001843D-page 327 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Mode MODE Output Operation 111 Timer Control Operation Start Low level Reset (Figure 20-10) TMRx_ers ↑ Falling edge start and High level Reset ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↓ 000 001 Monostable 010 Edge Triggered Start 011 10 Reserved ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↑ Falling edge start ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↓ — Any edge start ON = 1 and TMRx_ers ↕ — Reserved 101 Reserved and 111 Reserved Level Triggered Start One-shot 11 TMRx_ers =1 Rising edge start (Figure 20-11) 100 110 Stop Reserved (Note 1) Reserved Reset Hardware Reset High level start and Low level Reset (Figure 20-12) ON = 1 and TMRx_ers = 1 Low level start & High level Reset ON = 1 and TMRx_ers = 0 xxx ON = 0 or — TMRx_ers =0 Next clock after TMRx = PRx (Note 3) ON = 0 or Held in Reset (Note 2) TMRx_ers =1 Reserved Note:  1. If ON = 0 then an edge is required to restart the timer after ON = 1. 2. 3. 20.6 When T2TMR = T2PR then the next clock clears ON and stops T2TMR at 00h. When T2TMR = T2PR then the next clock stops T2TMR at 00h but does not clear ON. Operation Examples Unless otherwise specified, the following notes apply to the following timing diagrams: • Both the prescaler and postscaler are set to 1:1 (both the CKPS and OUTPS bits in the T2CON register are cleared). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 328 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module • • • The diagrams illustrate any clock except FOSC/4 and show clock-sync delays of at least two full cycles for both ON and Timer2_ers. When using FOSC/4, the clock-sync delay is at least one instruction period for Timer2_ers; ON applies in the next instruction period. ON and Timer2_ers are somewhat generalized, and clock-sync delays may produce results that are slightly different than illustrated. The PWM Duty Cycle and PWM output are illustrated assuming that the timer is used for the PWM function of the CCP module as described in the “PWM Overview” section. The signals are not a part of the Timer2 module. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.1 Software Gate Mode This mode corresponds to legacy Timer2 operation. The timer increments with each clock input when ON = 1 and does not increment when ON = 0. When the TMRx count equals the PRx period count the timer resets on the next clock and continues counting from 0. Operation with the ON bit software controlled is illustrated in Figure 20-3. With PRx = 5, the counter advances until TMRx = 5, and goes to zero with the next clock. Figure 20-3. Software Gate Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 00000) Rev. 10-000195B 5/30/2014 0b00000 MODE TMRx_clk Instruction(1) BSF BCF BSF ON PRx TMRx 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 329 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.6.2 Hardware Gate Mode The Hardware Gate modes operate the same as the Software Gate mode except the TMRx_ers external signal can also gate the timer. When used with the CCP, the gating extends the PWM period. If the timer is stopped when the PWM output is high, then the duty cycle is also extended. When MODE = 00001 then the timer is stopped when the external signal is high. When MODE = 00010, then the timer is stopped when the external signal is low. Figure 20-4 illustrates the Hardware Gating mode for MODE = 00001 in which a high input level starts the counter. Figure 20-4. Hardware Gate Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 00001) Rev. 10-000 196B 5/30/201 4 MODE 0b00001 TMRx_clk TMRx_ers 5 PRx TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.3 Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit Mode In Hardware Limit mode, the timer can be reset by the TMRx_ers external signal before the timer reaches the period count. Three types of Resets are possible: • Reset on rising or falling edge (MODE= 00011) • Reset on rising edge (MODE = 00100) • Reset on falling edge (MODE = 00101) When the timer is used in conjunction with the CCP in PWM mode then an early Reset shortens the period and restarts the PWM pulse after a two clock delay. Refer to Figure 20-5. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 330 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-5. Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 00100) Rev. 10-000 197B 5/30/201 4 0b00100 MODE TMRx_clk PRx 5 Instruction(1) BSF BCF BSF ON TMRx_ers TMRx 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.4 Level-Triggered Hardware Limit Mode In the Level-Triggered Hardware Limit Timer modes the counter is reset by high or low levels of the external signal TMRx_ers, as shown in Figure 20-6. Selecting MODE = 00110 will cause the timer to reset on a low level external signal. Selecting MODE = 00111 will cause the timer to reset on a high level external signal. In the example, the counter is reset while TMRx_ers = 1. ON is controlled by BSF and BCF instructions. When ON = 0 the external signal is ignored. When the CCP uses the timer as the PWM time base then the PWM output will be set high when the timer starts counting and then set low only when the timer count matches the CCPRx value. The timer is reset when either the timer count matches the PRx value or two clock periods after the external Reset signal goes true and stays true. The timer starts counting, and the PWM output is set high, on either the clock following the PRx match or two clocks after the external Reset signal relinquishes the Reset. The PWM output will remain high until the timer counts up to match the CCPRx pulse width value. If the external Reset signal goes true while the PWM output is high then the PWM output will remain high until the Reset signal is released allowing the timer to count up to match the CCPRx value. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 331 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-6. Level-Triggered Hardware Limit Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 00111) Rev. 10-000198B 5/30/2014 MODE 0b00111 TMRx_clk 5 PRx Instruction(1) BSF BCF BSF ON TMRx_ers TMRx 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.5 Software Start One-Shot Mode In One-Shot mode the timer resets and the ON bit is cleared when the timer value matches the PRx period value. The ON bit must be set by software to start another timer cycle. Setting MODE = 01000 selects One-Shot mode which is illustrated in Figure 20-7. In the example, ON is controlled by BSF and BCF instructions. In the first case, a BSF instruction sets ON and the counter runs to completion and clears ON. In the second case, a BSF instruction starts the cycle, BCF/BSF instructions turn the counter off and on during the cycle, and then it runs to completion. When One-Shot mode is used in conjunction with the CCP PWM operation the PWM pulse drive starts concurrent with setting the ON bit. Clearing the ON bit while the PWM drive is active will extend the PWM drive. The PWM drive will terminate when the timer value matches the CCPRx pulse width value. The PWM drive will remain off until software sets the ON bit to start another cycle. If software clears the ON bit after the CCPRx match but before the PRx match then the PWM drive will be extended by the length of time the ON bit remains cleared. Another timing cycle can only be initiated by setting the ON bit after it has been cleared by a PRx period count match. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 332 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-7. Software Start One-shot Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 01000) Rev. 10-000199B 4/7/2016 MODE 0b01000 TMRx_clk 5 PRx Instruction(1) BSF BSF BCF BSF ON TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.6 Edge-Triggered One-Shot Mode The Edge-Triggered One-Shot modes start the timer on an edge from the external signal input, after the ON bit is set, and clear the ON bit when the timer matches the PRx period value. The following edges will start the timer: • • • Rising edge (MODE = 01001) Falling edge (MODE = 01010) Rising or Falling edge (MODE = 01011) If the timer is halted by clearing the ON bit then another TMRx_ers edge is required after the ON bit is set to resume counting. Figure 20-8 illustrates operation in the rising edge One-Shot mode. When Edge-Triggered One-Shot mode is used in conjunction with the CCP then the edge-trigger will activate the PWM drive and the PWM drive will deactivate when the timer matches the CCPRx pulse width value and stay deactivated when the timer halts at the PRx period count match. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 333 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-8. Edge-Triggered One-Shot Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 01001) Rev. 10-000200B 5/19/2016 MODE 0b01001 TMRx_clk 5 PRx Instruction(1) BSF BSF BCF ON TMRx_ers TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 CCP_pset TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.7 Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot Mode In Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot modes the timer starts on the first external signal edge after the ON bit is set and resets on all subsequent edges. Only the first edge after the ON bit is set is needed to start the timer. The counter will resume counting automatically two clocks after all subsequent external Reset edges. Edge triggers are as follows: • Rising edge start and Reset (MODE = 01100) • Falling edge start and Reset (MODE = 01101) The timer resets and clears the ON bit when the timer value matches the PRx period value. External signal edges will have no effect until after software sets the ON bit. Figure 20-9 illustrates the rising edge hardware limit one-shot operation. When this mode is used in conjunction with the CCP then the first starting edge trigger, and all subsequent Reset edges, will activate the PWM drive. The PWM drive will deactivate when the timer matches the CCPRx pulse-width value and stay deactivated until the timer halts at the PRx period match unless an external signal edge resets the timer before the match occurs. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 334 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-9. Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 01100) Rev. 10-000201B 4/7/2016 0b01100 MODE TMRx_clk 5 PRx Instruction(1) BSF BSF ON TMRx_ers TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.8 Level Reset, Edge-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot Modes In Level -Triggered One-Shot mode the timer count is reset on the external signal level and starts counting on the rising/falling edge of the transition from Reset level to the active level while the ON bit is set. Reset levels are selected as follows: • Low Reset level (MODE = 01110) • High Reset level (MODE = 01111) When the timer count matches the PRx period count, the timer is reset and the ON bit is cleared. When the ON bit is cleared by either a PRx match or by software control, a new external signal edge is required after the ON bit is set to start the counter. When Level-Triggered Reset One-Shot mode is used in conjunction with the CCP PWM operation, the PWM drive goes active with the external signal edge that starts the timer. The PWM drive goes inactive when the timer count equals the CCPRx pulse width count. The PWM drive does not go active when the timer count clears at the PRx period count match. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 335 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-10. Low Level Reset, Edge-Triggered hardware Limit one-Shot Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 01110) Rev. 10-000202B 4/7/2016 0b01110 MODE TMRx_clk PRx Instruction(1) 5 BSF BSF ON TMRx_ers TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.9 Edge-Triggered Monostable Modes The Edge-Triggered Monostable modes start the timer on an edge from the external Reset signal input, after the ON bit is set, and stop incrementing the timer when the timer matches the PRx period value. The following edges will start the timer: • Rising edge (MODE = 10001) • Falling edge (MODE = 10010) • Rising or Falling edge (MODE = 10011) When an Edge-Triggered Monostable mode is used in conjunction with the CCP PWM operation, the PWM drive goes active with the external Reset signal edge that starts the timer, but will not go active when the timer matches the PRx value. While the timer is incrementing, additional edges on the external Reset signal will not affect the CCP PWM. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 336 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-11. Rising Edge-Triggered Monostable Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 10001) Rev. 10-000203A 4/7/2016 0b10001 MODE TMRx_clk PRx Instruction(1) 5 BSF BCF BSF BCF BSF ON TMRx_ers TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 TMRx_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle 3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.6.10 Level-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot Modes The Level-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot modes hold the timer in Reset on an external Reset level and start counting when both the ON bit is set and the external signal is not at the Reset level. If one of either the external signal is not in Reset or the ON bit is set, then the other signal being set/made active will start the timer. Reset levels are selected as follows: • Low Reset level (MODE = 10110) • High Reset level (MODE = 10111) When the timer count matches the PRx period count, the timer is reset and the ON bit is cleared. When the ON bit is cleared by either a PRx match or by software control, the timer will stay in Reset until both the ON bit is set and the external signal is not at the Reset level. When Level-Triggered Hardware Limit One-Shot modes are used in conjunction with the CCP PWM operation, the PWM drive goes active with either the external signal edge or the setting of the ON bit, whichever of the two starts the timer. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 337 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Figure 20-12. Level-Triggered hardware Limit one-Shot Mode Timing Diagram (MODE = 10110) Rev. 10-000204A 4/7/2016 0b10110 MODE TMR2_clk 5 PRx Instruction(1) BSF BSF BCF BSF ON TMR2_ers TMRx 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 TMR2_postscaled PWM Duty Cycle ‘D3 PWM Output Note:  1. BSF and BCF represent Bit-Set File and Bit-Clear File instructions executed by the CPU to set or clear the ON bit of TxCON. CPU execution is asynchronous to the timer clock input. Related Links PWM Overview (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 20.7 Timer2 Operation During Sleep When PSYNC = 1, Timer2 cannot be operated while the processor is in Sleep mode. The contents of the T2TMR and T2PR registers will remain unchanged while processor is in Sleep mode. When PSYNC = 0, Timer2 will operate in Sleep as long as the clock source selected is also still running. If any internal oscillator is selected as the clock source, it will stay active during Sleep mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 338 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.8 Register Summary - Timer2 Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0FAF T6TMR 7:0 0x0FB0 T6PR 7:0 0x0FB1 T6CON 7:0 ON PSYNC TxTMR[7:0] TxPR[7:0] CKPS[2:0] CPOL OUTPS[3:0] 0x0FB2 T6HLT 7:0 0x0FB3 T6CLKCON 7:0 CSYNC MODE[4:0] CS[3:0] 0x0FB4 T6RST 7:0 RSEL[3:0] 0x0FB5 T4TMR 7:0 0x0FB6 T4PR 7:0 0x0FB7 T4CON 7:0 ON 0x0FB8 T4HLT 7:0 PSYNC 0x0FB9 T4CLKCON 7:0 TxTMR[7:0] TxPR[7:0] CKPS[2:0] CPOL OUTPS[3:0] CSYNC MODE[4:0] CS[3:0] 0x0FBA T4RST 7:0 0x0FBB T2TMR 7:0 TxTMR[7:0] 0x0FBC T2PR 7:0 TxPR[7:0] 0x0FBD T2CON 7:0 ON 0x0FBE T2HLT 7:0 PSYNC 0x0FBF T2CLKCON 7:0 CS[3:0] 0x0FC0 T2RST 7:0 RSEL[3:0] 20.9 RSEL[3:0] CKPS[2:0] CPOL CSYNC OUTPS[3:0] MODE[4:0] Register Definitions: Timer2 Control Long bit name prefixes for the Timer2 peripherals are shown in table below. Refer to Section "Long Bit Names" for more information. Table 20-4. Timer2 long bit name prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix Timer2 T2 Timer4 T4 Timer6 T6 Notice:  References to module Timer2 apply to all the even numbered timers on this device. (Timer2, Timer4, etc.) Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 339 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.9.1 TxTMR Name:  Offset:  TxTMR 0xFBB,0xFB5,0xFAF Timer Counter Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TxTMR[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7:0 – TxTMR[7:0] Timerx Counter bits © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 340 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.9.2 TxPR Name:  Offset:  TxPR 0xFBC,0xFB6,0xFB0 Timer Period Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TxPR[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 7:0 – TxPR[7:0] Timer Period Register bits Value 0 - 255 Description The timer restarts at ‘0’ when TxTMR reaches TxPR value © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 341 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.9.3 TxCON Name:  Offset:  TxCON 0xFBD,0xFB7,0xFB1 Timerx Control Register Bit 7 6 ON Access Reset 5 4 3 2 CKPS[2:0] 1 0 OUTPS[3:0] R/W/HC R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – ON Timer On bit(1) Value 1 0 Description Timer is on Timer is off: all counters and state machines are reset Bits 6:4 – CKPS[2:0] Timer Clock Prescale Select bits Value 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Description 1:128 Prescaler 1:64 Prescaler 1:32 Prescaler 1:16 Prescaler 1:8 Prescaler 1:4 Prescaler 1:2 Prescaler 1:1 Prescaler Bits 3:0 – OUTPS[3:0] Timer Output Postscaler Select bits Value 1111 1110 1101 1100 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 Description 1:16 Postscaler 1:15 Postscaler 1:14 Postscaler 1:13 Postscaler 1:12 Postscaler 1:11 Postscaler 1:10 Postscaler 1:9 Postscaler 1:8 Postscaler 1:7 Postscaler 1:6 Postscaler 1:5 Postscaler 1:4 Postscaler 1:3 Postscaler © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 342 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module Value 0001 0000 Description 1:2 Postscaler 1:1 Postscaler Note:  1. In certain modes, the ON bit will be auto-cleared by hardware. See Table 20-3. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 343 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.9.4 TxHLT Name:  Offset:  TxHLT 0xFBE,0xFB8,0xFB2 Timer Hardware Limit Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 PSYNC CPOL CSYNC 4 3 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 MODE[4:0] Bit 7 – PSYNC Timer Prescaler Synchronization Enable bit(1, 2) Value 1 0 Description Timer Prescaler Output is synchronized to FOSC/4 Timer Prescaler Output is not synchronized to FOSC/4 Bit 6 – CPOL Timer Clock Polarity Selection bit(3) Value 1 0 Description Falling edge of input clock clocks timer/prescaler Rising edge of input clock clocks timer/prescaler Bit 5 – CSYNC Timer Clock Synchronization Enable bit(4, 5) Value 1 0 Description ON bit is synchronized to timer clock input ON bit is not synchronized to timer clock input Bits 4:0 – MODE[4:0] Timer Control Mode Selection bits(6, 7) Value 00000 to 11111 Description See Table 20-3 Note:  1. Setting this bit ensures that reading TxTMR will return a valid data value. 2. When this bit is ‘1’, Timer cannot operate in Sleep mode. 3. CKPOL should not be changed while ON = 1. 4. 5. Setting this bit ensures glitch-free operation when the ON is enabled or disabled. When this bit is set then the timer operation will be delayed by two input clocks after the ON bit is set. Unless otherwise indicated, all modes start upon ON = 1 and stop upon ON = 0 (stops occur without affecting the value of TxTMR). 6. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 344 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 7. When TxTMR = TxPR, the next clock clears TxTMR, regardless of the operating mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 345 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.9.5 TxCLKCON Name:  Offset:  TxCLKCON 0xFBF,0xFB9,0xFB3 Timer Clock Source Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – CS[3:0] Timer Clock Source Selection bits Value n Description See Clock Source Selection table © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 346 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Timer2 Module 20.9.6 TxRST Name:  Offset:  TxRST 0xFC0,0xFBA,0xFB4 Timer External Reset Signal Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RSEL[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – RSEL[3:0] External Reset Source Selection Bits Value n Description See External Reset Sources table © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 347 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 21. Capture/Compare/PWM Module The Capture/Compare/PWM module is a peripheral that allows the user to time and control different events, and to generate Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) signals. In Capture mode, the peripheral allows the timing of the duration of an event. The Compare mode allows the user to trigger an external event when a predetermined amount of time has expired. The PWM mode can generate Pulse-Width Modulated signals of varying frequency and duty cycle. This family of devices contains two standard Capture/Compare/PWM modules (CCP1 and CCP2). It should be noted that the Capture/Compare mode operation is described with respect to TMR1 and the PWM mode operation is described with respect to T2TMR in the following sections. The Capture and Compare functions are identical for all CCP modules. Important:  1. In devices with more than one CCP module, it is very important to pay close attention to the register names used. A number placed after the module acronym is used to distinguish between separate modules. For example, the CCP1CON and CCP2CON control the same operational aspects of two completely different CCP modules. 2. Throughout this section, generic references to a CCP module in any of its operating modes may be interpreted as being equally applicable to CCPx module. Register names, module signals, I/O pins, and bit names may use the generic designator ‘x’ to indicate the use of a numeral to distinguish a particular module, when required. 21.1 CCP Module Configuration Each Capture/Compare/PWM module is associated with a control register (CCPxCON), a capture input selection register (CCPxCAP) and a data register (CCPRx). The data register, in turn, is comprised of two 8-bit registers: CCPRxL (low byte) and CCPRxH (high byte). 21.1.1 CCP Modules and Timer Resources The CCP modules utilize Timers 1 through 6 that vary with the selected mode. Various timers are available to the CCP modules in Capture, Compare or PWM modes, as shown in the table below. Table 21-1. CCP Mode - Timer Resources CCP Mode Capture Compare PWM Timer Resource Timer1, Timer3 or Timer5 Timer2, Timer4 or Timer6 The assignment of a particular timer to a module is determined by the timer to CCP enable bits in the CCPTMRS register. All of the modules may be active at once and may share the same timer resource if they are configured to operate in the same mode (Capture/Compare or PWM) at the same time. 21.1.2 Open-Drain Output Option When operating in Output mode (the Compare or PWM modes), the drivers for the CCPx pins can be optionally configured as open-drain outputs. This feature allows the voltage level on the pin to be pulled © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 348 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module to a higher level through an external pull-up resistor and allows the output to communicate with external circuits without the need for additional level shifters. 21.2 Capture Mode Capture mode makes use of the 16-bit odd numbered timer resources (Timer1, Timer3, etc.) . When an event occurs on the capture source, the 16-bit CCPRx register captures and stores the 16-bit value of the TMRx register. An event is defined as one of the following and is configured by the MODE bits: • • • • • Every falling edge of CCPx input Every rising edge of CCPx input Every 4th rising edge of CCPx input Every 16th rising edge of CCPx input Every edge of CCPx input (rising or falling) When a capture is made, the Interrupt Request Flag bit CCPxIF of the PIRx register is set. The interrupt flag must be cleared in software. If another capture occurs before the value in the CCPRx register is read, the old captured value is overwritten by the new captured value. Important:  If an event occurs during a 2-byte read, the high and low-byte data will be from different events. It is recommended while reading the CCPRxH:CCPRxL register pair to either disable the module or read the register pair twice for data integrity. The following figure shows a simplified diagram of the capture operation. Figure 21-1. Capture Mode Operation Block Diagram Rev. 10-000158E 6/26/2017 RxyPPS CCPx PPS CTS TRIS Control CCPRxH Capture Trigger Sources See CCPxCAP register Prescaler 1,4,16 and Edge Detect CCPRxL 16 set CCPxIF 16 CCPx PPS MODE TMR1H TMR1L CCPxPPS 21.2.1 Capture Sources In Capture mode, the CCPx pin should be configured as an input by setting the associated TRIS control bit. Important:  If the CCPx pin is configured as an output, a write to the port can cause a capture condition. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 349 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module The capture source is selected by configuring the CTS bits as shown in the following table: Table 21-2. Capture Trigger Sources CTS 21.2.2 Source 11 IOC Interrupt 10 CMP2_output 01 CMP1_output 00 Pin selected by CCPxPPS Timer1 Mode Resource Timer1 must be running in Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode for the CCP module to use the capture feature. In Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture operation may not work. See section "Timer1 Module with Gate Control" for more information on configuring Timer1. Related Links Timer1 Module with Gate Control 21.2.3 Software Interrupt Mode When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the CCPxIE Interrupt Priority bit of the PIEx register clear to avoid false interrupts. Additionally, the user should clear the CCPxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register following any change in Operating mode. Important:  Clocking Timer1 from the system clock (FOSC) should not be used in Capture mode. In order for Capture mode to recognize the trigger event on the CCPx pin, Timer1 must be clocked from the instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an external clock source. 21.2.4 CCP Prescaler There are four prescaler settings specified by the MODE bits. Whenever the CCP module is turned off, or the CCP module is not in Capture mode, the prescaler counter is cleared. Any Reset will clear the prescaler counter. Switching from one capture prescaler to another does not clear the prescaler and may generate a false interrupt. To avoid this unexpected operation, turn the module off by clearing the CCPxCON register before changing the prescaler. The example below demonstrates the code to perform this function. Changing Between Capture Prescalers BANKSEL CLRF MOVLW MOVWF 21.2.5 CCP1CON CCP1CON NEW_CAPT_PS CCP1CON ;(only needed when CCP1CON is not in ACCESS space) ;Turn CCP module off ;CCP ON and Prescaler select → W ;Load CCP1CON with this value Capture During Sleep Capture mode depends upon the Timer1 module for proper operation. There are two options for driving the Timer1 module in Capture mode. It can be driven by the instruction clock (FOSC/4), or by an external clock source. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 350 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module When Timer1 is clocked by FOSC/4, Timer1 will not increment during Sleep. When the device wakes from Sleep, Timer1 will continue from its previous state. Capture mode will operate during Sleep when Timer1 is clocked by an external clock source. 21.3 Compare Mode The Compare mode function described in this section is available and identical for all CCP modules. Compare mode makes use of the 16-bit odd numbered Timer resources (Timer1, Timer3, etc.). The 16-bit value of the CCPRx register is constantly compared against the 16-bit value of the TMRx register. When a match occurs, one of the following events can occur: • • • • • • Toggle the CCPx output and clear TMRx Toggle the CCPx output without clearing TMRx Set the CCPx output Clear the CCPx output Pulse output Pulse output and clear TMRx The action on the pin is based on the value of the MODE control bits. At the same time, the interrupt flag CCPxIF bit is set, and an ADC conversion can be triggered, if selected. All Compare modes can generate an interrupt and trigger an ADC conversion. When MODE = '0001' or '1011', the CCP resets the TMRx register. The following figure shows a simplified diagram of the compare operation. Figure 21-2. Compare Mode Operation Block Diagram Rev. 30-000133A 6/27/2017 MODE Auto-conversion Trigger 4 CCPx Q PPS RxyPPS S R Output Logic CCPRxH CCPRxL Comparator TMR1H TRIS TMR1L Set CCPxIF Interrupt Flag 21.3.1 CCPx Pin Configuration The software must configure the CCPx pin as an output by clearing the associated TRIS bit and defining the appropriate output pin through the RxyPPS registers. See section "Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module" for more details. The CCP output can also be used as an input for other peripherals. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 351 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module Important:  Clearing the CCPxCON register will force the CCPx compare output latch to the default low level. This is not the PORT I/O data latch. Related Links (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 21.3.2 Timer1 Mode Resource In Compare mode, Timer1 must be running in either Timer mode or Synchronized Counter mode. The compare operation may not work in Asynchronous Counter mode. See Section "Timer1 Module with Gate Control" for more information on configuring Timer1. Important:  Clocking Timer1 from the system clock (FOSC) should not be used in Compare mode. In order for Compare mode to recognize the trigger event on the CCPx pin, Timer1 must be clocked from the instruction clock (FOSC/4) or from an external clock source. 21.3.3 Auto-Conversion Trigger All CCPx modes set the CCP interrupt flag (CCPxIF). When this flag is set and a match occurs, an autoconversion trigger can take place if the CCP module is selected as the conversion trigger source. Refer to Section "Auto-Conversion Trigger" for more information. Important:  Removing the match condition by changing the contents of the CCPRxH and CCPRxL register pair, between the clock edge that generates the Auto-conversion Trigger and the clock edge that generates the Timer1 Reset, will preclude the Reset from occurring. Related Links Auto-Conversion Trigger 21.3.4 Compare During Sleep Since FOSC is shut down during Sleep mode, the Compare mode will not function properly during Sleep, unless the timer is running. The device will wake on interrupt (if enabled). 21.4 PWM Overview Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) is a scheme that provides power to a load by switching quickly between fully ON and fully OFF states. The PWM signal resembles a square wave where the high portion of the signal is considered the ON state and the low portion of the signal is considered the OFF state. The high portion, also known as the pulse width, can vary in time and is defined in steps. A larger number of steps applied, which lengthens the pulse width, also supplies more power to the load. Lowering the number of steps applied, which shortens the pulse width, supplies less power. The PWM period is defined as the duration of one complete cycle or the total amount of ON and OFF time combined. PWM resolution defines the maximum number of steps that can be present in a single PWM period. A higher resolution allows for more precise control of the pulse-width time and in turn the power that is applied to the load. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 352 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module The term duty cycle describes the proportion of the ON time to the OFF time and is expressed in percentages, where 0% is fully OFF and 100% is fully ON. A lower duty cycle corresponds to less power applied and a higher duty cycle corresponds to more power applied. The shows a typical waveform of the PWM signal. Figure 21-3. CCP PWM Output Signal Rev. 30-000134A 5/9/2017 Period Pulse Width TMR2 = PR2 TMR2 = CCPRxH:CCPRxL TMR2 = 0 21.4.1 Standard PWM Operation The standard PWM function described in this section is available and identical for all CCP modules. The standard PWM mode generates a Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) signal on the CCPx pin with up to ten bits of resolution. The period, duty cycle, and resolution are controlled by the following registers: • • • • Even numbered TxPR registers (T2PR, T4PR, etc) Even numbered TxCON registers (T2CON, T4CON, etc) 16-bit CCPRx registers CCPxCON registers It is required to have FOSC/4 as the clock input to TxTMR for correct PWM operation. The following figure shows a simplified block diagram of PWM operation. Figure 21-4. Simplified PWM Block Diagram Rev. 10-000 157C 9/5/201 4 Duty cycle registers CCPRxH CCPRxL CCPx_out set CCPIF 10-bit Latch(2) (Not accessible by user) Comparator R Q R PPS RxyPPS S TMR2 Module TMR2 To Peripherals CCPx TRIS Control (1) ERS logic Comparator CCPx_pset PR2 Note:  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 353 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 1. 2. 8-bit timer is concatenated with two bits generated by FOSC or two bits of the internal prescaler to create 10-bit time-base. The alignment of the 10 bits from the CCPRx register is determined by the CCPxFMT bit. Important:  The corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared to enable the PWM output on the CCPx pin. 21.4.2 Setup for PWM Operation The following steps should be taken when configuring the CCP module for standard PWM operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Use the desired output pin RxyPPS control to select CCPx as the source and disable the CCPx pin output driver by setting the associated TRIS bit. Load the T2PR register with the PWM period value. Configure the CCP module for the PWM mode by loading the CCPxCON register with the appropriate values. Load the CCPRx register with the PWM duty cycle value and configure the FMT bit to set the proper register alignment. Configure and start Timer2: – Clear the TMR2IF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register. See Note below. – Select the timer clock source to be as FOSC/4 using the TxCLKCON register. This is required for correct operation of the PWM module. – Configure the T2CKPS bits of the T2CON register with the Timer prescale value. – Enable the Timer by setting the T2ON bit. Enable PWM output pin: – Wait until the Timer overflows and the TMR2IF bit of the PIRx register is set. See Note below. – Enable the CCPx pin output driver by clearing the associated TRIS bit. Important:  In order to send a complete duty cycle and period on the first PWM output, the above steps must be included in the setup sequence. If it is not critical to start with a complete PWM signal on the first output, then step 6 may be ignored. Related Links TxCON 21.4.3 Timer2 Timer Resource The PWM standard mode makes use of the 8-bit Timer2 timer resources to specify the PWM period. 21.4.4 PWM Period The PWM period is specified by the T2PR register of Timer2. The PWM period can be calculated using the formula in the equation below. Equation 21-1. PWM Period ��������� = �2�� + 1 • 4 • ���� • ���2Pr����������� © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 354 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module where TOSC = 1/FOSC When T2TMR is equal to T2PR, the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: • • • T2TMR is cleared The CCPx pin is set. (Exception: If the PWM duty cycle = 0%, the pin will not be set.) The PWM duty cycle is transferred from the CCPRx register into a 10-bit buffer. Important:  The Timer postscaler (see "Timer2 Interrupt") is not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. Related Links Timer2 Interrupt 21.4.5 PWM Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing a 10-bit value to the CCPRx register. The alignment of the 10bit value is determined by the FMT bit (see Figure 21-6). The CCPRx register can be written to at any time. However, the duty cycle value is not latched into the 10-bit buffer until after a match between T2PR and T2TMR. The equations below are used to calculate the PWM pulse width and the PWM duty cycle ratio. Figure 21-6. PWM 10-Bit Alignment Rev. 10-000 160A 12/9/201 3 CCPRxH CCPRxL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 FMT = 1 FMT = 0 CCPRxH CCPRxL 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 10-bit Duty Cycle 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Equation 21-2. Pulse Width ����� ����ℎ = ������: ������ �������� ����� • ���� • ���2 Pr������ ����� Equation 21-3. Duty Cycle ������: ������ �������� ����� �������������� = 4 �2�� + 1 The CCPRx register is used to double buffer the PWM duty cycle. This double buffering is essential for glitchless PWM operation. The 8-bit timer T2TMR register is concatenated with either the 2-bit internal system clock (FOSC), or two bits of the prescaler, to create the 10-bit time base. The system clock is used if the Timer2 prescaler is set to 1:1. When the 10-bit time base matches the CCPRx register, then the CCPx pin is cleared (see Figure 21-4). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 355 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 21.4.6 PWM Resolution The resolution determines the number of available duty cycles for a given period. For example, a 10-bit resolution will result in 1024 discrete duty cycles, whereas an 8-bit resolution will result in 256 discrete duty cycles. The maximum PWM resolution is ten bits when T2PR is 255. The resolution is a function of the T2PR register value as shown below. Equation 21-4. PWM Resolution log 4 �2�� + 1 Re�������� = ���� log 2 Important:  If the pulse-width value is greater than the period, the assigned PWM pin(s) will remain unchanged. Table 21-3. Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions (FOSC = 20 MHz) PWM Frequency 1.22 kHz 4.88 kHz 19.53 kHz 78.12 kHz 156.3 kHz 208.3 kHz Timer Prescale 16 4 1 1 1 1 T2PR Value 0xFF 0xFF 0xFF 0x3F 0x1F 0x17 Maximum Resolution (bits) 10 10 10 8 7 6.6 Table 21-4. Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions (FOSC = 8 MHz) PWM Frequency 1.22 kHz 4.90 kHz 19.61 kHz 76.92 kHz 153.85 kHz 200.0 kHz Timer Prescale 16 4 1 1 1 1 T2PR Value 0x65 0x65 0x65 0x19 0x0C 0x09 Maximum Resolution (bits) 8 8 8 6 5 5 21.4.7 Operation in Sleep Mode In Sleep mode, the T2TMR register will not increment and the state of the module will not change. If the CCPx pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value. When the device wakes up, T2TMR will continue from the previous state. 21.4.8 Changes in System Clock Frequency The PWM frequency is derived from the system clock frequency. Any changes in the system clock frequency will result in changes to the PWM frequency. See the "Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor)" section for additional details. Related Links Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor) 21.4.9 Effects of Reset Any Reset will force all ports to Input mode and the CCP registers to their Reset states. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 356 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 21.5 Register Summary - CCP Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0FA6 CCPR2 0x0FA8 CCP2CON 7:0 0x0FA9 CCP2CAP 7:0 7:0 15:8 CCPRH[7:0] EN OUT FMT MODE[3:0] CTS[1:0] 7:0 CCPRL[7:0] 15:8 CCPRH[7:0] 0x0FAA CCPR1 0x0FAC CCP1CON 7:0 0x0FAD CCP1CAP 7:0 21.6 CCPRL[7:0] EN OUT FMT MODE[3:0] CTS[1:0] Register Definitions: CCP Control Long bit name prefixes for the CCP peripherals are shown in the following table. Refer to the “Long Bit Names” section for more information. Table 21-5. CCP Long bit name prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix CCP1 CCP1 CCP2 CCP2 Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 357 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 21.6.1 CCPxCON Name:  Offset:  CCPxCON 0xFAC,0xFA8 CCP Control Register Bit Access 5 4 EN 7 OUT FMT R/W RO R/W R/W 0 x 0 0 Reset 6 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 MODE[3:0] Bit 7 – EN CCP Module Enable bit Value 1 0 Description CCP is enabled CCP is disabled Bit 5 – OUT CCP Output Data bit (read-only) Bit 4 – FMT CCPW (pulse-width) Value Alignment bit Value x x 1 0 Condition Capture mode Compare mode PWM mode PWM mode Description Not used Not used Left-aligned format Right-aligned format Bits 3:0 – MODE[3:0] CCP Mode Select bits Table 21-6. CCPx Mode Select Bits MODE Operating Mode Operation Set CCPxIF 11xx PWM PWM Operation Yes 1011 Compare Pulse output; clear TMR1(2) Yes 1010 Pulse output Yes 1001 Clear output(1) Yes 1000 Set output(1) Yes Every 16th rising edge of CCPx input Yes 0110 Every 4th rising edge of CCPx input Yes 0101 Every rising edge of CCPx input Yes 0100 Every falling edge of CCPx input Yes 0011 Every edge of CCPx input Yes Toggle output Yes 0111 0010 Capture Compare © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 358 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module MODE Operating Mode 0001 0000 Operation Set CCPxIF Toggle output; clear TMR1(2) Yes Disabled — Note:  1. The set and clear operations of the Compare mode are reset by setting MODE = '0000' or EN = 0. 2. When MODE = '0001' or '1011', then the timer associated with the CCP module is cleared. TMR1 is the default selection for the CCP module, so it is used for indication purpose only. Note:  1. The set and clear operations of the Compare mode are reset by setting MODE = '0000' or EN = 0. 2. When MODE = '0001' or '1011', then the timer associated with the CCP module is cleared. TMR1 is the default selection for the CCP module, so it is used for indication purpose only. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 359 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 21.6.2 CCPxCAP Name:  Offset:  CCPxCAP 0xFAD,0xFA9 Capture Trigger Input Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CTS[1:0] Access Reset R/W R/W 0 0 Bits 1:0 – CTS[1:0] Capture Trigger Input Selection bits Table 21-7. Capture Trigger Sources CTS Source 11 IOC Interrupt 10 CMP2_output 01 CMP1_output 00 Pin selected by CCPxPPS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 360 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Capture/Compare/PWM Module 21.6.3 CCPRx Name:  Offset:  CCPRx 0xFAA,0xFA6 Capture/Compare/Pulse Width Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 CCPRH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset x x x x x x x x Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CCPRL[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 15:8 – CCPRH[7:0] Capture/Compare/Pulse Width High byte Value 0 to 255 0 to 255 0,1,2,3 0 to 255 Name MODE = Capture MODE = Compare MODE = PWM & FMT=0 Description High byte of 16-bit captured value High byte of 16-bit compare value CCPRH=Bits of 10-bit Pulse width value MODE = PWM & FMT=1 CCPRH not used Bits of 10-bit Pulse width value Bits 7:0 – CCPRL[7:0] Capture/Compare/Pulse Width Low byte Value 0 to 255 0 to 255 0 to 255 0,64,128, 192 Name MODE = Capture MODE = Compare MODE = PWM & FMT=0 MODE = PWM & FMT=1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description Low byte of 16-bit captured value Low byte of 16-bit compare value Bits of 10-bit Pulse width value CCPRL=Bits of 10-bit Pulse width value CCPRL not used Datasheet 40001843D-page 361 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 22. (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation The PWM module generates a Pulse-Width Modulated signal determined by the duty cycle, period, and resolution that are configured by the following registers: • • • • TxPR TxCON PWMxDC PWMxCON Important:  The corresponding TRIS bit must be cleared to enable the PWM output on the PWMx pin. Each PWM module can select the timer source that controls the module. Each module has an independent timer selection which can be accessed using the CCPTMRS register. Note that the PWM mode operation is described with respect to TMR2 in the following sections. Figure 22-1 shows a simplified block diagram of PWM operation. Figure 22-2 shows a typical waveform of the PWM signal. Figure 22-1. Simplified PWM Block Diagram Duty Cycle registers PWMxDCL Rev. 30-000130A 5/17/2017 PWMxDCH Latched (Not visible to user) PWMxOUT to other peripherals R Comparator Q 0 PPS S Q 1 PWMx RxyPPS TMR2 Module TMR2 Output Polarity (PWMxPOL) (1) Comparator PR2 Note 1: Clear Timer, PWMx pin and latch Duty Cycle 8-bit timer is concatenated with the two Least Significant bits of 1/FOSC adjusted by the Timer2 prescaler to create a 10-bit time base. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 362 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation Figure 22-2. PWM Output Period Rev. 30-000129A 5/17/2017 Pulse Width TMR2 = PR2 TMR2 = PWMxDCH:PWMxDCL TMR2 = 0 For a step-by-step procedure on how to set up this module for PWM operation, refer to Setup for PWM Operation using PWMx Output Pins. 22.1 Fundamental Operation The PWM module produces a 10-bit resolution output. The PWM timer can be selected using the PxTSEL bits in the CCPTMRS register. The default selection for PWMx is TMR2. Note that the PWM module operation in the following sections is described with respect to TMR2. Timer2 and T2PR set the period of the PWM. The PWMxDCL and PWMxDCH registers configure the duty cycle. The period is common to all PWM modules, whereas the duty cycle is independently controlled. Important:  The Timer2 postscaler is not used in the determination of the PWM frequency. The postscaler could be used to have a servo update rate at a different frequency than the PWM output. All PWM outputs associated with Timer2 are set when T2TMR is cleared. Each PWMx is cleared when TxTMR is equal to the value specified in the corresponding PWMxDCH (8 MSb) and PWMxDCL (2 LSb) registers. When the value is greater than or equal to T2PR, the PWM output is never cleared (100% duty cycle). Important:  The PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL registers are double buffered. The buffers are updated when T2TMR matches T2PR. Care should be taken to update both registers before the timer match occurs. 22.2 PWM Output Polarity The output polarity is inverted by setting the POL bit. 22.3 PWM Period The PWM period is specified by the TxPR register The PWM period can be calculated using the formula of PWM Period. It is required to have FOSC/4 as the selected clock input to the timer for correct PWM operation. Equation 22-1. PWM Period ��������� = �2�� + 1 • 4 • ���� • ���2 Pr����������� Note:  TOSC = 1/FOSC When T2TMR is equal to T2PR, the following three events occur on the next increment cycle: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 363 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation • • • T2TMR is cleared The PWM output is active. (Exception: When the PWM duty cycle = 0%, the PWM output will remain inactive.) The PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL register values are latched into the buffers. Important:  The Timer2 postscaler has no effect on the PWM operation. 22.4 PWM Duty Cycle The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing a 10-bit value to the PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL register pair. The PWMxDCH register contains the eight MSbs and the PWMxDCL, the two LSbs. The PWMxDCH and PWMxDCL registers can be written to at any time. The formulas below are used to calculate the PWM pulse width and the PWM duty cycle ratio. Equation 22-2. Pulse Width ���������ℎ = �������: ������� < 7: 6 > • ���� • ���2Pr����������� Note:  TOSC = 1/FOSC Equation 22-3. Duty Cycle Ratio �������: ������� < 7: 6 > �������������� = 4 �2�� + 1 The 8-bit timer T2TMR register is concatenated with the two Least Significant bits of 1/FOSC, adjusted by the Timer2 prescaler to create the 10-bit time base. The system clock is used if the Timer2 prescaler is set to 1:1. 22.5 PWM Resolution The resolution determines the number of available duty cycles for a given period. For example, a 10-bit resolution will result in 1024 discrete duty cycles, whereas an 8-bit resolution will result in 256 discrete duty cycles. The maximum PWM resolution is ten bits when T2PR is 255. The resolution is a function of the T2PR register value as shown below. Equation 22-4. PWM Resolution log 4 �2�� + 1 Re�������� = ���� log 2 Important:  If the pulse-width value is greater than the period, the assigned PWM pin(s) will remain unchanged. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 364 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation Table 22-1. Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions (Fosc = 20 MHz) PWM Frequency 0.31 kHz 4.88 kHz 19.53 kHz 78.12 kHz 156.3 kHz 208.3 kHz Timer Prescale 64 4 1 1 1 1 T2PR Value 0xFF 0xFF 0xFF 0x3F 0x1F 0x17 Maximum Resolution (bits) 10 10 10 8 7 6.6 Table 22-2. Example PWM Frequencies and Resolutions (Fosc = 8 MHz) 22.6 PWM Frequency 0.31 kHz 4.90 kHz 19.61 kHz 76.92 kHz 153.85 kHz 200.0 kHz Timer Prescale 64 4 1 1 1 1 T2PR Value 0x65 0x65 0x65 0x19 0x0C 0x09 Maximum Resolution (bits) 8 8 8 6 5 5 Operation in Sleep Mode In Sleep mode, the T2TMR register will not increment and the state of the module will not change. If the PWMx pin is driving a value, it will continue to drive that value. When the device wakes up, T2TMR will continue from its previous state. 22.7 Changes in System Clock Frequency The PWM frequency is derived from the system clock frequency (FOSC). Any changes in the system clock frequency will result in changes to the PWM frequency. Related Links Oscillator Module (with Fail-Safe Clock Monitor) 22.8 Effects of Reset Any Reset will force all ports to Input mode and the PWM registers to their Reset states. 22.9 Setup for PWM Operation using PWMx Output Pins The following steps should be taken when configuring the module for PWM operation using the PWMx pins: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Disable the PWMx pin output driver(s) by setting the associated TRIS bit(s). Clear the PWMxCON register. Load the T2PR register with the PWM period value. Load the PWMxDCH register and bits of the PWMxDCL register with the PWM duty cycle value. Configure and start Timer2: – Clear the TMR2IF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register.(1) – Select the timer clock source to be as FOSC/4 using the TxCLKCON register. This is required for correct operation of the PWM module. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 365 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 6. 7. 8. – Configure the T2CKPS bits of the T2CON register with the Timer2 prescale value. – Enable Timer2 by setting the T2ON bit of the T2CON register. Enable PWM output pin and wait until Timer2 overflows, TMR2IF bit of the PIRx register is set.(2) Enable the PWMx pin output driver(s) by clearing the associated TRIS bit(s) and setting the desired pin PPS control bits. Configure the PWM module by loading the PWMxCON register with the appropriate values. Note:  1. In order to send a complete duty cycle and period on the first PWM output, the above steps must be followed in the order given. If it is not critical to start with a complete PWM signal, then move Step 8 to replace Step 4. 2. For operation with other peripherals only, disable PWMx pin outputs. 22.9.1 PWMx Pin Configuration All PWM outputs are multiplexed with the PORT data latch. The user must configure the pins as outputs by clearing the associated TRIS bits. 22.10 Setup for PWM Operation to Other Device Peripherals The following steps should be taken when configuring the module for PWM operation to be used by other device peripherals: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Disable the PWMx pin output driver(s) by setting the associated TRIS bit(s). Clear the PWMxCON register. Load the T2PR register with the PWM period value. Load the PWMxDCH register and bits of the PWMxDCL register with the PWM duty cycle value. Configure and start Timer2: – Clear the TMR2IF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register.(1) – Select the timer clock source to be as FOSC/4 using the TxCLKCON register. This is required for correct operation of the PWM module. – Configure the T2CKPS bits of the T2CON register with the Timer2 prescale value. – Enable Timer2 by setting the T2ON bit of the T2CON register. Wait until Timer2 overflows, TMR2IF bit of the PIRx register is set.1. Configure the PWM module by loading the PWMxCON register with the appropriate values. Note:  1. In order to send a complete duty cycle and period on the first PWM output, the above steps must be included in the setup sequence. If it is not critical to start with a complete PWM signal on the first output, then step 6 may be ignored. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 366 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 22.11 Register Summary - Registers Associated with PWM Offset Name 0x0FA0 PWM4DC 0x0FA2 PWM4CON 0x0FA3 PWM3DC 0x0FA5 PWM3CON 22.12 Bit Pos. 7:0 DCL[1:0] 15:8 7:0 DCH[7:0] EN 7:0 OUT POL OUT POL DCL[1:0] 15:8 7:0 DCH[7:0] EN Register Definitions: PWM Control Long bit name prefixes for the PWM peripherals are shown in the table below. Refer to the "Long Bit Names Section" for more information. Table 22-3. PWM Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix PWM3 PWM3 PWM4 PWM4 Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 367 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 22.12.1 PWMxCON Name:  Offset:  PWMxCON 0xFA5,0xFA2 PWM Control Register Bit Access Reset 5 4 EN 7 6 OUT POL R/W RO R/W 0 0 0 3 2 1 0 Bit 7 – EN PWM Module Enable bit Value 1 0 Description PWM module is enabled PWM module is disabled Bit 5 – OUT PWM Module Output Level When Bit is Read Bit 4 – POL PWM Output Polarity Select bit Value 1 0 Description PWM output is inverted PWM output is normal © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 368 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (PWM) Pulse-Width Modulation 22.12.2 PWMxDC Name:  Offset:  PWMxDC 0xFA3,0xFA0 PWM Duty Cycle Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 DCH[7:0] Access Reset x Bit 7 x x x x x x x 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DCL[1:0] Access Reset x x Bits 15:8 – DCH[7:0] PWM Duty Cycle Most Significant bits These bits are the MSbs of the PWM duty cycle. Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuuuu Bits 7:6 – DCL[1:0] PWM Duty Cycle Least Significant bits These bits are the LSbs of the PWM duty cycle. Reset States: POR/BOR = xx All Other Resets = uu © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 369 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module 23. (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module The ZCD module detects when an A/C signal crosses through the ground potential. The actual zero crossing threshold is the zero crossing reference voltage, Zcpinv, which is typically 0.75V above ground. The connection to the signal to be detected is through a series current-limiting resistor. The module applies a current source or sink to the ZCD pin to maintain a constant voltage on the pin, thereby preventing the pin voltage from forward biasing the ESD protection diodes. When the applied voltage is greater than the reference voltage, the module sinks current. When the applied voltage is less than the Filename: 10-000194B.vsd Title: CROSS sources DETECT BLOCK DIAGRAM reference voltage, ZERO the module current. The current source and sink action keeps the pin voltage Last Edit: 5/14/2014 constant over the full range of the applied voltage. The ZCD module is shown in the following simplified First Used: PIC16(L)F1615 block diagram. Notes: Figure 23-1. Simplified ZCD Block Diagram VPULLUP Rev. 10-000194B 5/14/2014 optional VDD RPULLUP - Zcpinv ZCDxIN RSERIES RPULLDOWN + External voltage source optional ZCDx_output D ZCDxPOL Q ZCDxOUT bit Q1 Interrupt det Set ZCDIF flag ZCDxINTP ZCDxINTN Interrupt det The ZCD module is useful when monitoring an A/C waveform for, but not limited to, the following purposes: • • A/C period measurement Accurate long term time measurement © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 370 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module • • 23.1 Dimmer phase delayed drive Low EMI cycle switching External Resistor Selection The ZCD module requires a current-limiting resistor in series with the external voltage source. The impedance and rating of this resistor depends on the external source peak voltage. Select a resistor value that will drop all of the peak voltage when the current through the resistor is nominally 300 μA. Make sure that the ZCD I/O pin internal weak pull-up is disabled so it does not interfere with the current source and sink. Equation 23-1. External Resistor ����� ������� = 3 × 10−4 Figure 23-3. External Voltage Source Rev. 30-000001A 7/18/2017 VPEAK VMAXPEAK VMINPEAK Z CPINV 23.2 ZCD Logic Output The ZCD module includes a Status bit, which can be read to determine whether the current source or sink is active. The OUT bit is set when the current sink is active, and cleared when the current source is active. The OUT bit is affected by the polarity bit. The OUT signal can also be used as input to other modules. This is controlled by the registers of the corresponding module. OUT can be used as follows: • • • 23.3 Gate source for TMR1/3/5 Clock source for TMR2/4/6 Reset source for TMR2/4/6 ZCD Logic Polarity The POL bit inverts the OUT bit relative to the current source and sink output. When the POL bit is set, a OUT high indicates that the current source is active, and a low output indicates that the current sink is active. The POL bit affects the ZCD interrupts. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 371 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module 23.4 ZCD Interrupts An interrupt will be generated upon a change in the ZCD logic output when the appropriate interrupt enables are set. A rising edge detector and a falling edge detector are present in the ZCD for this purpose. The ZCDIF bit of the PIRx register will be set when either edge detector is triggered and its associated enable bit is set. The INTP enables rising edge interrupts and the INTN bit enables falling edge interrupts. Priority of the interrupt can be changed if the IPEN bit of the INTCON register is set. The ZCD interrupt can be made high or low priority by setting or clearing the ZCDIP bit of the IPRx register. To fully enable the interrupt, the following bits must be set: • • • • ZCDIE bit of the PIEx register INTP bit for rising edge detection INTN bit for falling edge detection PEIE and GIE bits of the INTCON register Changing the POL bit will cause an interrupt, regardless of the level of the SEN bit. The ZCDIF bit of the PIRx register must be cleared in software as part of the interrupt service. If another edge is detected while this flag is being cleared, the flag will still be set at the end of the sequence. 23.5 Correction for ZCPINV Offset The actual voltage at which the ZCD switches is the reference voltage at the non-inverting input of the ZCD op amp. For external voltage source waveforms other than square waves, this voltage offset from zero causes the zero-cross event to occur either too early or too late. 23.5.1 Correction by AC Coupling When the external voltage source is sinusoidal, the effects of the ZCPINV offset can be eliminated by isolating the external voltage source from the ZCD pin with a capacitor, in addition to the voltage reducing resistor. The capacitor will cause a phase shift resulting in the ZCD output switch in advance of the actual zero crossing event. The phase shift will be the same for both rising and falling zero crossings, which can be compensated for by either delaying the CPU response to the ZCD switch by a timer or other means, or selecting a capacitor value large enough that the phase shift is negligible. To determine the series resistor and capacitor values for this configuration, start by computing the impedance, Z, to obtain a peak current of 300 μA. Next, arbitrarily select a suitably large non-polar capacitor and compute its reactance, Xc, at the external voltage source frequency. Finally, compute the series resistor, capacitor peak voltage, and phase shift by the formulas shown below. When this technique is used and the input signal is not present, the ZCD will tend to oscillate. To avoid this oscillation, connect the ZCD pin to VDD or GND with a high-impedance resistor such as 200K. Equation 23-2. R-C Equations VPEAK = external voltage source peak voltage f = external voltage source frequency C = series capacitor R = series resistor VC = Peak capacitor voltage © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 372 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module Φ = Capacitor induced zero crossing phase advance in radians TΦ = Time ZC event occurs before actual zero crossing �= ����� 3 × 10−4 �� = �= 1 2��� �2 − ��2 �� = �� 3 × 10−4 Φ = tan −1� �Φ = Φ 2�� �� � Equation 23-3. R-C Calcuation Example ���� = 120 ����� = ���� × 2 = 169.7 � = 60 �� � = 0.1 �� �= ����� −4 3 × 10 �� = �= = 169.7 = 565.7 �Ω 3 × 10−4 1 1 = = 26.53 �Ω 2��� 2� × 60 × 10−7 �2 − ��2 = 565.1 �Ω �������� �� = 560 �Ω ���� �� = ��2 + ��2 = 560.6 �Ω ����� = ����� = 302.7 × 10−6� �� �� = �� × ����� = 8.0 � Φ = tan −1� �Φ = 23.5.2 �� = 0.047������� � Φ = 125.6�� 2�� Correction By Offset Current When the waveform is varying relative to VSS, then the zero cross is detected too early as the waveform falls and too late as the waveform rises. When the waveform is varying relative to VDD, then the zero © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 373 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module cross is detected too late as the waveform rises and too early as the waveform falls. The actual offset time can be determined for sinusoidal waveforms with the corresponding equations shown below. Equation 23-4. ZCD Event Offset When External Voltage source is relative to VSS ������� = sin−1 ������ ����� 2�� When External Voltage source is relative to VDD ������� = sin−1 ��� − ������ ����� 2�� This offset time can be compensated for by adding a pull-up or pull-down biasing resistor to the ZCD pin. A pull-up resistor is used when the external voltage source is varying relative to VSS. A pull-down resistor is used when the voltage is varying relative to VDD. The resistor adds a bias to the ZCD pin so that the target external voltage source must go to zero to pull the pin voltage to the ZCPINV switching voltage. The pull-up or pull-down value can be determined with the equations shown below. Equation 23-5. ZCD Pull-up/Pull-down Resistor When External Voltage source is relative to VSS ������� = ������� ������� − ������ ������ When External Voltage source is relative to VDD ��������� = 23.6 ������� ������ ��� − ������ Handling VPEAK Variations If the peak amplitude of the external voltage is expected to vary, the series resistor must be selected to keep the ZCD current source and sink below the design maximum range of ± 600 μA and above a reasonable minimum range. A general rule of thumb is that the maximum peak voltage can be no more than six times the minimum peak voltage. To ensure that the maximum current does not exceed ± 600 μA and the minimum is at least ± 100 μA, compute the series resistance as shown in Equation 23-6. The compensating pull-up for this series resistance can be determined with the equations shown in Equation 23-5 because the pull-up value is independent from the peak voltage. Equation 23-6. Series R for V range ����_���� + ����_���� ������� = 7 × 10−4 23.7 Operation During Sleep The ZCD current sources and interrupts are unaffected by Sleep. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 374 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module 23.8 Effects of a Reset The ZCD circuit can be configured to default to the active or inactive state on Power-on Reset (POR). When the ZCD Configuration bit is cleared, the ZCD circuit will be active at POR. When the ZCD Configuration bit is set, the SEN bit must be set to enable the ZCD module. 23.9 Disabling the ZCD Module The ZCD module can be disabled in two ways: 1. 2. The ZCD configuration bit disables the ZCD module when set. When this is the case then the ZCD module will be enabled by setting the SEN bit. When the ZCD bit is clear, the ZCD is always enabled and the SEN bit has no effect. The ZCD can also be disabled using the ZCDMD bit of the PMDx register. This is subject to the status of the ZCD bit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 375 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module 23.10 Register Summary: ZCD Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F32 ZCDCON 7:0 23.11 SEN OUT POL INTP INTN Register Definitions: ZCD Control Long bit name prefixes for the ZCD peripherals are shown in the table below. Refer to the "Long Bit Names Section" for more information. Table 23-1. ZCD Long Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix ZCD ZCD Related Links Long Bit Names Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 376 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ZCD) Zero-Cross Detection Module 23.11.1 ZCDCON Name:  Offset:  ZCDCON 0xF32 Zero-Cross Detect Control Register Bit 7 Access Reset 5 4 1 0 SEN 6 OUT POL 3 2 INTP INTN R/W RO R/W R/W R/W 0 x 0 0 0 Bit 7 – SEN Zero-Cross Detect Software Enable bit This bit is ignored when ZCD fuse is cleared. Value X 1 0 Condition Description ZCD Config fuse = 0 Zero-cross detect is always enabled. ZCD. This bit is ignored. source and sink current. ZCD Config fuse = 1 Zero-cross detect is enabled. ZCD pin is forced to output to source and sink current. ZCD Config fuse = 1 Zero-cross detect is disabled. ZCD pin operates according to PPS and TRIS controls. Bit 5 – OUT Zero-Cross Detect Data Output bit Value 1 0 1 0 Condition POL = 0 POL = 0 POL = 1 POL = 1 Description ZCD pin is sinking current ZCD pin is sourcing current ZCD pin is sourcing current ZCD pin is sinking current Bit 4 – POL Zero-Cross Detect Polarity bit Value 1 0 Description ZCD logic output is inverted ZCD logic output is not inverted Bit 1 – INTP Zero-Cross Detect Positive-Going Edge Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description ZCDIF bit is set on low-to-high ZCD_output transition ZCDIF bit is unaffected by low-to-high ZCD_output transition Bit 0 – INTN Zero-Cross Detect Negative-Going Edge Interrupt Enable bit Value 1 0 Description ZCDIF bit is set on high-to-low ZCD_output transition ZCDIF bit is unaffected by high-to-low ZCD_output transition © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 377 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24. (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module The Complementary Waveform Generator (CWG) produces half-bridge, full-bridge, and steering of PWM waveforms. It is backwards compatible with previous CCP functions. The PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family has 1 instance(s) of the CWG module. The CWG has the following features: • • • • • 24.1 Six operating modes: – Synchronous Steering mode – Asynchronous Steering mode – Full-Bridge mode, Forward – Full-Bridge mode, Reverse – Half-Bridge mode – Push-Pull mode Output polarity control Output steering Independent 6-bit rising and falling event dead-band timers – Clocked dead band – Independent rising and falling dead-band enables Auto-shutdown control with: – Selectable shutdown sources – Auto-restart option – Auto-shutdown pin override control Fundamental Operation The CWG generates two output waveforms from the selected input source. The off-to-on transition of each output can be delayed from the on-to-off transition of the other output, thereby, creating a time delay immediately where neither output is driven. This is referred to as dead time and is covered in Dead-Band Control. It may be necessary to guard against the possibility of circuit faults or a feedback event arriving too late or not at all. In this case, the active drive must be terminated before the Fault condition causes damage. This is referred to as auto-shutdown and is covered in Auto-Shutdown. 24.2 Operating Modes The CWG module can operate in six different modes, as specified by the MODE bits: • • • • • • Half-Bridge mode Push-Pull mode Asynchronous Steering mode Synchronous Steering mode Full-Bridge mode, Forward Full-Bridge mode, Reverse © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 378 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module All modes accept a single pulse data input, and provide up to four outputs as described in the following sections. All modes include auto-shutdown control as described in Auto-Shutdown Important:  Except as noted for Full-Bridge mode (Full-Bridge Modes), mode changes should only be performed while EN = 0. 24.2.1 Half-Bridge Mode In Half-Bridge mode, two output signals are generated as true and inverted versions of the input as illustrated in Figure 24-1. A non-overlap (dead-band) time is inserted between the two outputs to prevent shoot-through current in various power supply applications. Dead-band control is described in Dead-Band Control. The output steering feature cannot be used in this mode. A basic block diagram of this mode is shown in Figure 24-2. The unused outputs CWGxC and CWGxD drive similar signals, with polarity independently controlled by the POLC and POLD bits, respectively. Figure 24-1. CWG Half-Bridge Mode Operation Rev. 30-000097A 4/14/2017 CWGx_clock CWGxA CWGxC Falling Event Dead Band Rising Event Dead Band Rising Event D Falling Event Dead Band CWGxB CWGxD CWGx_data Note:  CWGx_rising_src = CCP1_out, CWGx_falling_src = ~CCP1_out © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 379 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000209D.vsd SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (HALF-BRIDGE MODE) 2/2/2016 PIC18(L)F6xK40 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Figure 24-2. Simplified CWG Block Diagram (Half-Bridge Mode, MODE = 100) LSAC Rev. 10-000209D 2/2/2016 ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 Rising Dead-Band Block CWG Clock clock CWG Data data out data in 1 CWG Data A 0 POLA CWG1A LSBD ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 Falling Dead-Band Block clock data out CWG Data B data in 11 CWG Data CWG Data Input 1 0 POLB D CWG1B Q E LSAC EN ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 1 0 CWG1C POLC Auto-shutdown source (CWGxAS1 register) S Q LSBD R REN SHUTDOWN = 0 ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 1 0 CWG1D POLD SHUTDOWN FREEZE D Q CWG Data 24.2.2 Push-Pull Mode In Push-Pull mode, two output signals are generated, alternating copies of the input as illustrated in Figure 24-3. This alternation creates the push-pull effect required for driving some transformer-based © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 380 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module power supply designs. Steering modes are not used in Push-Pull mode. A basic block diagram for the Push-Pull mode is shown in Figure 24-4. The push-pull sequencer is reset whenever EN = 0 or if an auto-shutdown event occurs. The sequencer is clocked by the first input pulse, and the first output appears on CWG1A. The unused outputs CWGxC and CWGxD drive copies of CWGxA and CWGxB, respectively, but with polarity controlled by the POLC and POLD bits of the CWGxCON1 register, respectively. Figure 24-3. CWG Push-Pull Mode Operation Rev. 30-000098A 4/14/2017 CWG1 clock Input source CWG1A CWG1B © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 381 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000210D.vsd SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (PUSH-PULL MODE) 2/2/2016 PIC18(L)F6xK40 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Figure 24-4. Simplified CWG Block Diagram (Push-Pull Mode, MODE = 101) LSAC Rev. 10-000210D 2/2/2016 ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 CWG Data 1 CWG Data A 0 CWG1A POLA D LSBD Q Q ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 CWG Data B 1 CWG Data Input CWG Data D 0 CWG1B POLB Q LSAC E ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 EN 11 1 0 CWG1C POLC Auto-shutdown source (CWGxAS1 register) S Q LSBD R REN ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 SHUTDOWN = 0 11 1 0 CWG1D POLD SHUTDOWN FREEZE D Q CWG Data 24.2.3 Full-Bridge Modes In Forward and Reverse Full-Bridge modes, three outputs drive static values while the fourth is modulated by the input data signal. The mode selection may be toggled between forward and reverse by toggling the MODE bit of the CWGxCON0 while keeping MODE static, without disabling the © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 382 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module CWG module. When connected, as shown in Figure 24-5, the outputs are appropriate for a full-bridge Filename: 10-000263A.vsd Title: driver. Each Example of Full-Bridge Application motor CWG output signal has independent polarity control, so the circuit can be adapted to Last Edit: 12/8/2015 high-active and low-active drivers. A simplified block diagram for the Full-Bridge modes is shown in First Used: PIC18(L)F2x/4xK40 Note: Figure 24-6. Figure 24-5. Example of Full-Bridge Application Rev. 10-000263A 12/8/2015 VDD FET Driver QA QC FET Driver CWG1A LOAD CWG1B CWG1C CWG1D © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. FET Driver FET Driver QB QD Datasheet 40001843D-page 383 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000212D.vsd SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (FULL-BRIDGE MODES) 2/2/2016 PIC18(L)F6xK40 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Figure 24-6. Simplified CWG Block Diagram (Forward and Reverse Full-Bridge Modes) Rev. 10-000212D 2/2/2016 MODE = 010: Forward LSAC MODE = 011: Reverse Rising Dead-Band Block CWG Clock clock signal out signal in D CWG Data 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 CWG Data MODE ‘1’ 1 CWG Data A 0 CWG1A POLA Q Q LSBD cwg data signal in signal out clock CWG Clock ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 Falling Dead-Band Block CWG Data Input CWG Data 1 CWG Data B 0 CWG1B POLB D Q LSAC E EN ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 1 CWG Data C Auto-shutdown source (CWGxAS1 register) 0 CWG1C POLC S Q LSBD R REN SHUTDOWN = 0 ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 1 CWG Data D 0 CWG1D POLD SHUTDOWN FREEZE D Q CWG Data In Forward Full-Bridge mode (MODE = 010), CWGxA is driven to its active state, CWGxB and CWGxC are driven to their inactive state, and CWGxD is modulated by the input signal, as shown in Figure 24-7. In Reverse Full-Bridge mode (MODE = 011), CWGxC is driven to its active state, CWGxA and CWGxD are driven to their inactive states, and CWG1B is modulated by the input signal, as shown in Figure 24-7. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 384 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module In Full-Bridge mode, the dead-band period is used when there is a switch from forward to reverse or viceversa. This dead-band control is described in Dead-Band Control, with additional details in Rising Edge and Reverse Dead Band and Falling Edge and Forward Dead Band. Steering modes are not used with either of the Full-Bridge modes. The mode selection may be toggled between forward and reverse toggling the MODE bit of the CWGxCON0 while keeping MODE static, without disabling the CWG module. Figure 24-7. Example of Full-Bridge Output Rev. 30-000099A 4/14/2017 Forward Mode Period CWG1A(2) CWG1B(2) CWG1C(2) Pulse Width CWG1D(2) (1) Reverse Mode (1) Period CWG1A(2) Pulse Width CWG1B(2) CWG1C(2) CWG1D(2) (1) (1) Note:  1. A rising CWG data input creates a rising event on the modulated output. 2. Output signals shown as active-high; all POLy bits are clear. 24.2.3.1 Direction Change in Full-Bridge Mode In Full-Bridge mode, changing MODE controls the forward/reverse direction. Direction changes occur on the next rising edge of the modulated input. A direction change is initiated in software by changing the MODE bits. The sequence is illustrated in Figure 24-8. • The associated active output CWGxA and the inactive output CWGxC are switched to drive in the opposite direction. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 385 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module • • The previously modulated output CWGxD is switched to the inactive state, and the previously inactive output CWGxB begins to modulate. CWG modulation resumes after the direction-switch dead band has elapsed. 24.2.3.2 Dead-Band Delay in Full-Bridge Mode Dead-band delay is important when either of the following conditions is true: 1. 2. The direction of the CWG output changes when the duty cycle of the data input is at or near 100%, or The turn-off time of the power switch, including the power device and driver circuit, is greater than the turn-on time. The dead-band delay is inserted only when changing directions, and only the modulated output is affected. The statically-configured outputs (CWGxA and CWGxC) are not afforded dead band, and switch essentially simultaneously. The following figure shows an example of the CWG outputs changing directions from forward to reverse, at near 100% duty cycle. In this example, at time t1, the output of CWGxA and CWGxD become inactive, while output CWGxC becomes active. Since the turn-off time of the power devices is longer than the turnon time, a shoot-through current will flow through power devices QC and QD for the duration of ‘t’. The same phenomenon will occur to power devices QA and QB for the CWG direction change from reverse to forward. When changing the CWG direction at high duty cycle is required for an application, two possible solutions for eliminating the shoot-through current are: 1. 2. Reduce the CWG duty cycle for one period before changing directions. Use switch drivers that can drive the switches off faster than they can drive them on. Figure 24-8. Example of PWM Direction Change at Near 100% Duty Cycle Rev. 30-000100A 4/14/2017 Forward Period t1 Reverse Period CWG1A CWG1B Pulse Width CWG1C CWG1D Pulse Width TON External Switch C TOFF External Switch D Potential ShootThrough Current © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. T = TOFF - TON Datasheet 40001843D-page 386 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.2.4 Steering Modes In both Synchronous and Asynchronous Steering modes, the modulated input signal can be steered to any combination of four CWG outputs. A fixed-value will be presented on all the outputs not used for the PWM output. Each output has independent polarity, steering, and shutdown options. Dead-band control is not used in either steering mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 387 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000211D.vsd SIMPLIFIED CWG BLOCK DIAGRAM (OUTPUT STEERING MODES) 5/30/2017 PIC18(L)F6xK40 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Figure 24-9. Simplified CWG Block Diagram (Output Steering Modes) Rev. 10-000211D 5/30/2017 MODE = 000: Asynchronous LSAC MODE = 001: Synchronous ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 CWG Data A 1 1 POLA OVRA 0 CWG1A 0 STRA CWG Data CWG Data Input LSBD ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 D CWG Data B Q E 1 1 POLB OVRB EN 0 CWG1B 0 STRB LSAC ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 CWG Data C Auto-shutdown source (CWGxAS1 register) S Q R 1 1 POLC OVRC 0 CWG1C 0 STRC REN LSBD SHUTDOWN = 0 ‘1’ 00 ‘0’ 01 High-Z 10 11 CWG Data D 1 POLD OVRD 0 1 0 CWG1D SHUTDOWN STRD FREEZE D Q CWG Data For example, when STRA = 0 then the corresponding pin is held at the level defined by OVRA. When STRA = 1, then the pin is driven by the modulated input signal. The POLy bits control the signal polarity only when STRy = 1. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 388 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module The CWG auto-shutdown operation also applies in Steering modes as described in Auto-Shutdown”. An auto-shutdown event will only affect pins that have STRy = 1. 24.2.4.1 Synchronous Steering Mode In Synchronous Steering mode (MODE = 001), changes to steering selection registers take effect on the next rising edge of the modulated data input (see figure below). In Synchronous Steering mode, the output will always produce a complete waveform. Important:  Only the STRx bits are synchronized; the OVRx bits are not synchronized. Figure 24-10. Example of Synchronous Steering (MODE = 001) Rev. 30-000101A 4/14/2017 CWG1 clock Input source CWG1A CWG1B 24.2.4.2 Asynchronous Steering Mode In Asynchronous mode (MODE = 000), steering takes effect at the end of the instruction cycle that writes to STRx. In Asynchronous Steering mode, the output signal may be an incomplete waveform (see figure below). This operation may be useful when the user firmware needs to immediately remove a signal from the output pin. Figure 24-11. Example of Asynchronous Steering (MODE = 000) Rev. 30-000102A 4/14/2017 CWG1 INPUT End of Instruction Cycle End of Instruction Cycle STRA CWG1A CWG1A Follows CWG1 data input 24.3 Start-up Considerations The application hardware must use the proper external pull-up and/or pull-down resistors on the CWG output pins. This is required because all I/O pins are forced to high-impedance at Reset. The polarity control bits (POLy) allow the user to choose whether the output signals are active-high or active-low. 24.4 Clock Source The clock source is used to drive the dead-band timing circuits. The CWG module allows the following clock sources to be selected: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 389 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module • • FOSC (system clock) HFINTOSC When the HFINTOSC is selected, the HFINTOSC will be kept running during Sleep. Therefore, CWG modes requiring dead band can operate in Sleep, provided that the CWG data input is also active during Sleep. The clock sources are selected using the CS bit. The system clock FOSC, is disabled in Sleep and thus dead-band control cannot be used. 24.5 Selectable Input Sources The CWG generates the output waveforms from the input sources which are selected with the ISM bits as shown below. Table 24-1. CWG Data Input Sources ISM Data Source 111 DSM_out 110 CMP2_out 101 CMP1_out 100 PWM4_out 011 PWM3_out 010 CCP2_out 001 CCP1_out 000 Pin selected by CWGxPPS 24.6 Output Control 24.6.1 CWG Outputs Each CWG output can be routed to a Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) output via the RxyPPS register. Related Links (PPS) Peripheral Pin Select Module 24.6.2 Polarity Control The polarity of each CWG output can be selected independently. When the output polarity bit is set, the corresponding output is active-high. Clearing the output polarity bit configures the corresponding output as active-low. However, polarity does not affect the override levels. Output polarity is selected with the POLy bits. Auto-shutdown and steering options are unaffected by polarity. 24.7 Dead-Band Control The dead-band control provides non-overlapping PWM signals to prevent shoot-through current in PWM switches. Dead-band operation is employed for Half-Bridge and Full-Bridge modes. The CWG contains two 6-bit dead-band counters. One is used for the rising edge of the input source control in Half-Bridge mode or for reverse dead-band Full-Bridge mode. The other is used for the falling edge of the input source control in Half-Bridge mode or for forward dead band in Full-Bridge mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 390 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Dead band is timed by counting CWG clock periods from zero up to the value in the rising or falling deadband counter registers. 24.7.1 Dead-Band Functionality in Half-Bridge mode In Half-Bridge mode, the dead-band counters dictate the delay between the falling edge of the normal output and the rising edge of the inverted output. This can be seen in Figure 24-1. 24.7.2 Dead-Band Functionality in Full-Bridge mode In Full-Bridge mode, the dead-band counters are used when undergoing a direction change. The MODE bit can be set or cleared while the CWG is running, allowing for changes from Forward to Reverse mode. The CWGxA and CWGxC signals will change immediately upon the first rising input edge following a direction change, but the modulated signals (CWGxB or CWGxD, depending on the direction of the change) will experience a delay dictated by the dead-band counters. 24.8 Rising Edge and Reverse Dead Band In Half-Bridge mode, the rising edge dead band delays the turn-on of the CWGxA output after the rising edge of the CWG data input. In Full-Bridge mode, the reverse dead-band delay is only inserted when changing directions from Forward mode to Reverse mode, and only the modulated output CWGxB is affected. The CWGxDBR register determines the duration of the dead-band interval on the rising edge of the input source signal. This duration is from 0 to 64 periods of the CWG clock. Dead band is always initiated on the edge of the input source signal. A count of zero indicates that no dead band is present. If the input source signal reverses polarity before the dead-band count is completed, then no signal will be seen on the respective output. The CWGxDBR register value is double-buffered. When EN = 0, the buffer is loaded when CWG1DBR is written. When EN = 1, then the buffer will be loaded at the rising edge following the first falling edge of the data input, after the LD bit is set. Refer to the following figure for an example. Figure 24-12. Dead-Band Operation, CWGxDBR = 0x01, CWGxDBF = 0x02 Rev. 30-000103A 4/14/2017 cwg_clock Input Source CWGxA CWGxB 24.9 Falling Edge and Forward Dead Band In Half-Bridge mode, the falling edge dead band delays the turn-on of the CWGxB output at the falling edge of the CWG data input. In Full-Bridge mode, the forward dead-band delay is only inserted when changing directions from Reverse mode to Forward mode, and only the modulated output CWGxD is affected. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 391 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module The CWGxDBF register determines the duration of the dead-band interval on the falling edge of the input source signal. This duration is from zero to 64 periods of CWG clock. Dead-band delay is always initiated on the edge of the input source signal. A count of zero indicates that no dead band is present. If the input source signal reverses polarity before the dead-band count is completed, then no signal will be seen on the respective output. The CWGxDBF register value is double-buffered. When EN = 0, the buffer is loaded when CWGxDBF is written. When EN = 1, then the buffer will be loaded at the rising edge following the first falling edge of the data input after the LD is set. Refer to the following figure for an example. Figure 24-13. Dead-Band Operation, CWGxDBR = 0x03, CWGxDBF = 0x06, Source Shorter Than Dead Band Rev. 30-000104A 4/14/2017 cwg_clock Input Source CWGxA CWGxB source shorter than dead band 24.10 Dead-Band Jitter When the rising and falling edges of the input source are asynchronous to the CWG clock, it creates jitter in the dead-band time delay. The maximum jitter is equal to one CWG clock period. Refer to the equations below for more details. Equation 24-1. Dead-Band Delay Time Calculation 1 ����� − ����_��� = • ��� < 5: 0 > ����_����� ����� − ����_��� = 1 • ��� < 5: 0 > + 1 ����_����� � ������ = ����� − ����_��� − ����� − ����_��� � ������ = 1 ����_����� ����� − ����_��� = ����� − ����_��� + � ������ Equation 24-2. Dead-Band Delay Example Calculation ��� < 5: 0 > = 0�0� = 10 ����_����� = 8 ��� � ������ = 1 = 125�� 8 ��� ����� − ����_��� = 125�� • 10 = 125�� ����� − ����_��� = 1.25�� + 0.125 �� = 1.37�� © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 392 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.11 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Notes: 10-000172C.vsd CWG SHUTDOWN BLOCK DIAGRAM 8/7/2015 PIC16(L)F1614/5/8/9 LECW Auto-Shutdown Auto-shutdown is a method to immediately override the CWG output levels with specific overrides that allow for safe shutdown of the circuit. The shutdown state can be either cleared automatically or held until cleared by software. The auto-shutdown circuit is illustrated in the following figure. Figure 24-16. CWG Shutdown Block Diagram Write ‘1’ to SHUTDOWN bit Rev. 10-000172C 8/7/2015 PPS AS0E CWGxINPPS C1OUT_sync AS4E C2OUT_sync AS5E TMR2_postscaled AS1E S Q REN TMR4_postscaled AS2E Write ‘0’ to SHUTDOWN bit TMR6_postscaled AS3E R SHUTDOWN S D FREEZE CWG_data Q CWG_shutdown CK 24.11.1 Shutdown The shutdown state can be entered by either of the following two methods: • • Software generated External Input 24.11.1.1 Software Generated Shutdown Setting the SHUTDOWN bit will force the CWG into the shutdown state. When the auto-restart is disabled, the shutdown state will persist as long as the SHUTDOWN bit is set. When auto-restart is enabled, the SHUTDOWN bit will clear automatically and resume operation on the next rising edge event. The SHUTDOWN bit indicates when a shutdown condition exists. The bit may be set or cleared in software or by hardware. 24.11.1.2 External Input Source External shutdown inputs provide the fastest way to safely suspend CWG operation in the event of a Fault condition. When any of the selected shutdown inputs goes active, the CWG outputs will immediately go to the selected override levels without software delay. The override levels are selected by the LSBD and LSAC bits. Several input sources can be selected to cause a shutdown condition. All input sources are active-low. The shutdown input sources are individually enabled by the ASyE bits as shown in the following table: Table 24-2. Shutdown Sources ASyE Source AS5E CMP2_out (low causes shutdown) AS4E CMP1_out (low causes shutdown) AS3E TMR6_postscaled (high causes shutdown) AS2E TMR4_postscaled (high causes shutdown) AS1E TMR2_postscaled (high causes shutdown) AS0E Pin selected by CWGxPPS (low causes shutdown) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 393 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Important:  Shutdown inputs are level sensitive, not edge sensitive. The shutdown state cannot be cleared, except by disabling auto-shutdown, as long as the shutdown input level persists. 24.11.1.3 Pin Override Levels The levels driven to the CWG outputs during an auto-shutdown event are controlled by the LSBD and LSAC bits. The LSBD bits control CWG1B/D output levels, while the LSAC bits control the CWG1A/C output levels. 24.11.1.4 Auto-Shutdown Interrupts When an auto-shutdown event occurs, either by software or hardware setting SHUTDOWN, the CWG1IF flag bit of the PIRx register is set. Related Links PIR7 24.11.2 Auto-Shutdown Restart After an auto-shutdown event has occurred, there are two ways to resume operation: • • Software controlled Auto-restart In either case, the shutdown source must be cleared before the restart can take place. That is, either the shutdown condition must be removed, or the corresponding ASyE bit must be cleared. 24.11.2.1 Software-Controlled Restart When the REN bit is clear (REN = 0), the CWG module must be restarted after an auto-shutdown event through software. Once all auto-shutdown sources are removed, the software must clear SHUTDOWN. Once SHUTDOWN is cleared, the CWG module will resume operation upon the first rising edge of the CWG data input. Important:  The SHUTDOWN bit cannot be cleared in software if the auto-shutdown condition is still present. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 394 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module Figure 24-17. SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONALITY, AUTO-RESTART DISABLED (REN = 0, LSAC = 01, LSBD = 01) Rev. 30-000105A 4/14/2017 REN Cleared by Software Shutdown Event Ceases CWG Input Source Shutdown Source SHUTDOWN CWG1A CWG1C Tri-State (No Pulse) CWG1B CWG1D Tri-State (No Pulse) No Shutdown Output Resumes Shutdown 24.11.2.2 Auto-Restart When the REN bit is set (REN = 1), the CWG module will restart from the shutdown state automatically. Once all auto-shutdown conditions are removed, the hardware will automatically clear SHUTDOWN. Once SHUTDOWN is cleared, the CWG module will resume operation upon the first rising edge of the CWG data input. Important:  The SHUTDOWN bit cannot be cleared in software if the auto-shutdown condition is still present. Figure 24-18. SHUTDOWN FUNCTIONALITY, AUTO-RESTART ENABLED (REN = 1, LSAC = 01, LSBD = 01) Rev. 30-000106A 4/14/2017 Shutdown Event Ceases REN auto-cleared by hardware CWG Input Source Shutdown Source SHUTDOWN CWG1A CWG1C CWG1B CWG1D Tri-State (No Pulse) Tri-State (No Pulse) No Shutdown Output Resumes Shutdown 24.12 Operation During Sleep The CWG module operates independently from the system clock and will continue to run during Sleep, provided that the clock and input sources selected remain active. The HFINTOSC remains active during Sleep when all the following conditions are met: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 395 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module • • • CWG module is enabled Input source is active HFINTOSC is selected as the clock source, regardless of the system clock source selected. In other words, if the HFINTOSC is simultaneously selected as the system clock and the CWG clock source, when the CWG is enabled and the input source is active, then the CPU will go idle during Sleep, but the HFINTOSC will remain active and the CWG will continue to operate. This will have a direct effect on the Sleep mode current. 24.13 Configuring the CWG 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Ensure that the TRIS control bits corresponding to CWG outputs are set so that all are configured as inputs, ensuring that the outputs are inactive during setup. External hardware should ensure that pin levels are held to safe levels. Clear the EN bit, if not already cleared. Configure the MODE bits to set the output operating mode. Configure the POLy bits to set the output polarities. Configure the ISM bits to select the data input source. If a steering mode is selected, configure the STRy bits to select the desired output on the CWG outputs. Configure the LSBD and LSAC bits to select the auto-shutdown output override states (this is necessary even if not using auto-shutdown because start-up will be from a shutdown state). If auto-restart is desired, set the REN bit. If auto-shutdown is desired, configure the ASyE bits to select the shutdown source. Set the desired rising and falling dead-band times with the CWGxDBR and CWGxDBF registers. Select the clock source with the CS bits. Set the EN bit to enable the module. Clear the TRIS bits that correspond to the CWG outputs to set them as outputs. If auto-restart is to be used, set the REN bit and the SHUTDOWN bit will be cleared automatically. Otherwise, clear the SHUTDOWN bit in software to start the CWG. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 396 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.14 Register Summary - CWG Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F40 CWG1CLK 7:0 0x0F41 CWG1ISM 7:0 0x0F42 CWG1DBR 7:0 0x0F43 CWG1DBF 7:0 0x0F44 CWG1CON0 7:0 0x0F45 CWG1CON1 7:0 0x0F46 CWG1AS0 7:0 0x0F47 CWG1AS1 7:0 0x0F48 CWG1STR 7:0 24.15 CS ISM[2:0] DBR[5:0] DBF[5:0] EN LD MODE[2:0] IN SHUTDOWN OVRD REN OVRC POLD LSBD[1:0] POLC POLB POLA LSAC[1:0] AS5E AS4E AS3E AS2E AS1E AS0E OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA Register Definitions: CWG Control Long bit name prefixes for the CWG peripherals are shown in the table below. Refer to the "Long Bit Names Section" for more information. Table 24-3. CWG Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix CWG1 CWG1 Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 397 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.1 CWGxCON0 Name:  Offset:  CWGxCON0 0x0F44 CWG Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 7 6 EN LD 5 4 3 2 1 0 R/W R/W/HC R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 MODE[2:0] Bit 7 – EN CWG1 Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Module is enabled Module is disabled Bit 6 – LD  CWG1 Load Buffers bit(1) Value 1 0 Description Dead-band count buffers to be loaded on CWG data rising edge, following first falling edge after this bit is set Buffers remain unchanged Bits 2:0 – MODE[2:0] CWG1 Mode bits Value 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Description Reserved Reserved CWG outputs operate in Push-Pull mode CWG outputs operate in Half-Bridge mode CWG outputs operate in Reverse Full-Bridge mode CWG outputs operate in Forward Full-Bridge mode CWG outputs operate in Synchronous Steering mode CWG outputs operate in Asynchronous Steering mode Note:  1. This bit can only be set after EN = 1; it cannot be set in the same cycle when EN is set. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 398 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.2 CWGxCON1 Name:  Offset:  CWGxCON1 0x0F45 CWG Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 3 2 1 0 IN 5 4 POLD POLC POLB POLA RO R/W R/W R/W R/W x 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – IN CWG Input Value bit (read-only) Value 1 0 Description CWG input is a logic 1 CWG input is a logic 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3 – POLy CWG Output 'y' Polarity bit Value 1 0 Description Signal output is inverted polarity Signal output is normal polarity © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 399 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.3 CWGxCLK Name:  Offset:  CWGxCLK 0x0F40 CWGx Clock Input Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CS Access R/W Reset 0 Bit 0 – CS Clock Source CWG Clock Source Selection Select bits Value 1 0 Description HFINTOSC (remains operating during Sleep) FOSC © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 400 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.4 CWGxISM Name:  Offset:  CWGxISM 0x0F41 CWGx Input Selection Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ISM[2:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Bits 2:0 – ISM[2:0] CWG Data Input Source Select bits Table 24-4. CWG Data Input Sources ISM Data Source 111 DSM_out 110 CMP2_out 101 CMP1_out 100 PWM4_out 011 PWM3_out 010 CCP2_out 001 CCP1_out 000 Pin selected by CWGxPPS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 401 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.5 CWGxSTR Name:  Offset:  CWGxSTR 0x0F48 CWG Steering Control Register (1) Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 OVRD OVRC OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 4, 5, 6, 7 – OVRy Steering Data OVR'y' bit Value x 1 0 Condition STRy = 1 Description CWGx'y' output has the CWG data input waveform with polarity control from POLy bit STRy = 0 and POLy = x CWGx'y' output is high STRy = 0 and POLy = x CWGx'y'output is low Bits 0, 1, 2, 3 – STRy  STR'y' Steering Enable bit(2) Value 1 0 Description CWGx'y' output has the CWG data input waveform with polarity control from POLy bit CWGx'y' output is assigned to value of OVRy bit Note:  1. The bits in this register apply only when MODE = '00x' (CWGxCON0, Steering modes). 2. This bit is double-buffered when MODE = '001'. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 402 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.6 CWGxAS0 Name:  Offset:  CWGxAS0 0x0F46 CWG Auto-Shutdown Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 7 6 SHUTDOWN REN 5 4 3 R/W/HS/HC R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 1 0 1 LSBD[1:0] 2 1 0 LSAC[1:0] Bit 7 – SHUTDOWN  Auto-Shutdown Event Status bit(1,2) Value 1 0 Description An auto-shutdown state is in effect No auto-shutdown event has occurred Bit 6 – REN Auto-Restart Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Auto-restart is enabled Auto-restart is disabled Bits 5:4 – LSBD[1:0] CWGxB and CWGxD Auto-Shutdown State Control bits Value 11 10 01 00 Description A logic ‘1’ is placed on CWGxB/D when an auto-shutdown event occurs. A logic ‘0’ is placed on CWGxB/D when an auto-shutdown event occurs. Pin is tri-stated on CWGxB/D when an auto-shutdown event occurs. The inactive state of the pin, including polarity, is placed on CWGxB/D after the required dead-band interval when an auto-shutdown event occurs. Bits 3:2 – LSAC[1:0] CWGxA and CWGxC Auto-Shutdown State Control bits Value 11 10 01 00 Description A logic ‘1’ is placed on CWGxA/C when an auto-shutdown event occurs. A logic ‘0’ is placed on CWGxA/C when an auto-shutdown event occurs. Pin is tri-stated on CWGxA/C when an auto-shutdown event occurs. The inactive state of the pin, including polarity, is placed on CWGxA/C after the required dead-band interval when an auto-shutdown event occurs. Note:  1. This bit may be written while EN = 0 (CWGxCON0), to place the outputs into the shutdown configuration. 2. The outputs will remain in auto-shutdown state until the next rising edge of the CWG data input after this bit is cleared. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 403 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.7 CWGxAS1 Name:  Offset:  CWGxAS1 0x0F47 CWG Auto-Shutdown Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 3 2 1 0 AS5E AS4E AS3E AS2E AS1E AS0E R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 – ASyE CWG Auto-shutdown Source ASyE Enable bit(1) Table 24-5. Shutdown Sources ASyE Source AS5E CMP2_out (low causes shutdown) AS4E CMP1_out (low causes shutdown) AS3E TMR6_postscaled (high causes shutdown) AS2E TMR4_postscaled (high causes shutdown) AS1E TMR2_postscaled (high causes shutdown) AS0E Pin selected by CWGxPPS (low causes shutdown) Value 1 0 Description Auto-shutdown for source ASyE is enabled Auto-shutdown for source ASyE is disabled Note:  This bit may be written while EN = 0 (CWGxCON0), to place the outputs into the shutdown configuration. The outputs will remain in auto-shutdown state until the next rising edge of the CWG data input after this bit is cleared. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 404 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.8 CWGxDBR Name:  Offset:  CWGxDBR 0x0F42 CWG Rising Dead-Band Count Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DBR[5:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x Bits 5:0 – DBR[5:0] CWG Rising Edge Triggered Dead-Band Count bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuu Value n 0 Description Dead band is active no less than n, and no more than n+1, CWG clock periods after the rising edge 0 CWG clock periods. Dead-band generation is bypassed © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 405 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CWG) Complementary Waveform Generator Module 24.15.9 CWGxDBF Name:  Offset:  CWGxDBF 0x0F43 CWG Falling Dead-Band Count Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DBF[5:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x Bits 5:0 – DBF[5:0] CWG Falling Edge Triggered Dead-Band Count bits Reset States: POR/BOR = xxxxxx All Other Resets = uuuuuu Value n 0 Description Dead band is active no less than n, and no more than n+1, CWG clock periods after the falling edge 0 CWG clock periods. Dead-band generation is bypassed © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 406 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25. (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module The Data Signal Modulator (DSM) is a peripheral which allows the user to mix a data stream, also known as a modulator signal, with a carrier signal to produce a modulated output. Both the carrier and the modulator signals are supplied to the DSM module either internally, from the output of a peripheral, or externally through an input pin. The modulated output signal is generated by performing a logical “AND” operation of both the carrier and modulator signals and then provided to the MDOUT pin. The carrier signal is comprised of two distinct and separate signals. A carrier high (CARH) signal and a carrier low (CARL) signal. During the time in which the modulator (MOD) signal is in a logic high state, the DSM mixes the carrier high signal with the modulator signal. When the modulator signal is in a logic low state, the DSM mixes the carrier low signal with the modulator signal. Using this method, the DSM can generate the following types of Key Modulation schemes: • • • Frequency-Shift Keying (FSK) Phase-Shift Keying (PSK) On-Off Keying (OOK) Additionally, the following features are provided within the DSM module: • • • • • Carrier Synchronization Carrier Source Polarity Select Programmable Modulator Data Modulated Output Polarity Select Peripheral Module Disable, which provides the ability to place the DSM module in the lowest power consumption mode The figure below shows a Simplified Block Diagram of the Data Signal Modulator peripheral. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 407 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module Figure 25-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Data Signal Modulator MDCHS Rev. 10-000248E 8/7/2015 Data Signal Modulator 000 See MDCARH Register CARH MDCHPOL D SYNC 111 Q 1 MDSRCS 0 0000 MDCHSYNC RxyPPS See MDSRC Register MOD PPS MDOPOL 1111 MDCLS D SYNC 000 Q 1 0 See MDCARL Register CARL MDCLSYNC MDCLPOL 111 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 408 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.1 DSM Operation The DSM module can be enabled by setting the EN bit in the MDCON0 register. Clearing the EN bit, disables the output of the module but retain the carrier and source signal selections. The module will resume operation when the EN bit is set again. The output of the DSM module can be rerouted to several pins using the RxyPPS register. When the EN bit is cleared the output pin is held low. 25.2 Modulator Signal Sources The modulator signal can be supplied from the following sources selected with the SRCS bits: Table 25-1. MDSRC Selection MUX Connections 25.3 SRCS Connection 1011-1111 Reserved 1010 MSSP1 - SDO 1001 EUSART1 TX (TX/CK output) 1000 EUSART1 RX (DT output) 0111 CMP2 OUT 0110 CMP1 OUT 0101 PWM4 OUT 0100 PWM3 OUT 0011 CCP2 OUT 0010 CCP1 OUT 0001 MDBIT 0000 Pin selected by MDSRCPPS Carrier Signal Sources The carrier high signal and carrier low signal can be supplied from the following sources. The carrier high signal is selected by configuring the CHS bits. Table 25-2. MDCARH Source Selections MDCARH CHS Connection 111 PWM4 OUT 110 PWM3 OUT 101 CCP2 OUT 100 CCP1 OUT 011 CLKREF output © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 409 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module MDCARH CHS Connection 010 HFINTOSC 001 FOSC (system clock) 000 Pin selected by MDCARHPPS The carrier low signal is selected by configuring the CLS bits. Table 25-3. MDCARL Source Selections MDCARL 25.4 CLS Connection 111 PWM4 OUT 110 PWM3 OUT 101 CCP2 OUT 100 CCP1 OUT 011 CLKREF output 010 HFINTOSC 001 FOSC (system clock) 000 Pin selected by MDCARLPPS Carrier Synchronization During the time when the DSM switches between carrier high and carrier low signal sources, the carrier data in the modulated output signal can become truncated. To prevent this, the carrier signal can be synchronized to the modulator signal. When synchronization is enabled, the carrier pulse that is being mixed at the time of the transition is allowed to transition low before the DSM switches over to the next carrier source. Synchronization is enabled separately for the carrier high and carrier low signal sources. Synchronization for the carrier high signal is enabled by setting the CHSYNC bit. Synchronization for the carrier low signal is enabled by setting the CLSYNC bit. The figures below show the timing diagrams of using various synchronization methods. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 410 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module Figure 25-2. On Off Keying (OOK) Synchronization Rev. 30-000144A 5/26/2017 carrier_low carrier_high modulator MDCHSYNC = 1 MDCLSYNC = 0 MDCHSYNC = 1 MDCLSYNC = 1 MDCHSYNC = 0 MDCLSYNC = 0 MDCHSYNC = 0 MDCLSYNC = 1 Figure 25-3. No Synchronization (MDCHSYNC = 0, MDCLSYNC = 0) Rev. 30-000145A 5/26/2017 carrier_high carrier_low modulator MDCHSYNC = 0 MDCLSYNC = 0 Active Carrier State carrier_high carrier_low carrier_high carrier_low Figure 25-4. Carrier High Synchronization (MDCHSYNC = 1, MDCLSYNC = 0) Rev. 30-000146A 5/26/2017 carrier_high carrier_low modulator MDCHSYNC = 1 MDCLSYNC = 0 Active Carrier State carrier_high © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. both carrier_low Datasheet carrier_high both carrier_low 40001843D-page 411 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module Figure 25-5. Carrier Low Synchronization (MDCHSYNC = 0, MDCLSYNC = 1) Rev. 30-000147A 5/26/2017 carrier_high carrier_low modulator MDCHSYNC = 0 MDCLSYNC = 1 Active Carrier State carrier_high carrier_low carrier_high carrier_low Figure 25-6. Full Synchronization (MDCHSYNC = 1, MDCLSYNC = 1) Rev. 30-000148A 5/26/2017 carrier_high carrier_low modulator Falling edges used to sync MDCHSYNC = 1 MDCLSYNC = 1 Active Carrier State 25.5 carrier_high carrier_low carrier_high CL Carrier Source Polarity Select The signal provided from any selected input source for the carrier high and carrier low signals can be inverted. Inverting the signal for the carrier high and low source is enabled by setting the CHPOL bit and the CLPOL bit, respectively. 25.6 Programmable Modulator Data The BIT bit can be selected as the modulation source. This gives the user the ability to provide software driven modulation. 25.7 Modulated Output Polarity The modulated output signal provided on the DSM pin can also be inverted. Inverting the modulated output signal is enabled by setting the OPOL bit. 25.8 Operation in Sleep Mode The DSM can still operate during Sleep, if the Carrier and Modulator input sources are also still operable during Sleep. Refer to “Power-Saving Operation Modes” for more details. Related Links Peripheral Operation in Power-Saving Modes © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 412 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.9 Effects of a Reset Upon any device Reset, the DSM module is disabled. The user’s firmware is responsible for initializing the module before enabling the output. All the registers are reset to their default values. 25.10 Peripheral Module Disable The DSM module can be completely disabled using the PMD module to achieve maximum power saving. When the DSMMD bit of PMDx register is set, the DSM module is completely disabled. This puts the module in it’s lowest power consumption state. When enabled again all the registers of the DSM module default to POR status. Related Links Register Definitions: Peripheral Module Disable © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 413 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.11 Register Summary - DSM Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F51 MDCON0 7:0 0x0F52 MDCON1 7:0 0x0F53 MDSRC 7:0 0x0F54 MDCARL 7:0 CLS[2:0] 0x0F55 MDCARH 7:0 CHS[2:0] 25.12 EN OUT OPOL CHPOL CHSYNC BIT CLPOL CLSYNC SRCS[3:0] Register Definitions: Modulation Control Long bit name prefixes for the Modulation Control peripherals are shown in the table below. Refer to the "Long Bit Names Section" for more information. Table 25-4. Modulation Control Long Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix MD MD Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 414 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.12.1 MDCON0 Name:  Offset:  MDCON0 0xF51 Modulation Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 5 4 EN 7 6 OUT OPOL 3 2 1 BIT 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – EN Modulator Module Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Modulator module is enabled and mixing input signals Modulator module is disabled and has no output Bit 5 – OUT Modulator Output bit Displays the current output value of the Modulator module. Bit 4 – OPOL Modulator Output Polarity Select bit Value 1 0 Description Modulator output signal is inverted; idle high output Modulator output signal is not inverted; idle low output Bit 0 – BIT Modulation Source Select Input bit Allows software to manually set modulation source input to module Note:  1. The modulated output frequency can be greater and asynchronous from the clock that updates this register bit, the bit value may not be valid for higher speed modulator or carrier signals. 2. MDBIT must be selected as the modulation source in the MDSRC register for this operation. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 415 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.12.2 MDCON1 Name:  Offset:  MDCON1 0xF52 Modulation Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 Access Reset 5 4 1 0 CHPOL CHSYNC 3 2 CLPOL CLSYNC R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 5 – CHPOL Modulator High Carrier Polarity Select bit Value 1 0 Description Selected high carrier signal is inverted Selected high carrier signal is not inverted Bit 4 – CHSYNC Modulator High Carrier Synchronization Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Modulator waits for a falling edge on the high time carrier signal before allowing a switch to the low time carrier Modulator output is not synchronized to the high time carrier signal Bit 1 – CLPOL Modulator Low Carrier Polarity Select bit Value 1 0 Description Selected low carrier signal is inverted Selected low carrier signal is not inverted Bit 0 – CLSYNC Modulator Low Carrier Synchronization Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Modulator waits for a falling edge on the low time carrier signal before allowing a switch to the high time carrier Modulator output is not synchronized to the low time carrier signal Note:  1. Narrowed carrier pulse widths or spurs may occur in the signal stream if the carrier is not synchronized. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 416 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.12.3 MDCARH Name:  Offset:  MDCARH 0xF55 Modulation High Carrier Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CHS[2:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Bits 2:0 – CHS[2:0] Modulator Carrier High Selection bits Table 25-5. MDCARH Source Selections MDCARH CHS Connection 111 PWM4 OUT 110 PWM3 OUT 101 CCP2 OUT 100 CCP1 OUT 011 CLKREF output 010 HFINTOSC 001 FOSC (system clock) 000 Pin selected by MDCARHPPS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 417 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.12.4 MDCARL Name:  Offset:  MDCARL 0xF54 Modulation Low Carrier Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CLS[2:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Bits 2:0 – CLS[2:0] Modulator Carrier Low Input Selection bits Table 25-6. MDCARL Source Selections MDCARL CLS Connection 111 PWM4 OUT 110 PWM3 OUT 101 CCP2 OUT 100 CCP1 OUT 011 CLKREF output 010 HFINTOSC 001 FOSC (system clock) 000 Pin selected by MDCARLPPS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 418 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DSM) Data Signal Modulator Module 25.12.5 MDSRC Name:  Offset:  MDSRC 0xF53 Modulation Source Control Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SRCS[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – SRCS[3:0] Modulator Source Selection bits Table 25-7. MDSRC Selection MUX Connections SRCS Connection 1011-1111 Reserved 1010 MSSP1 - SDO 1001 EUSART1 TX (TX/CK output) 1000 EUSART1 RX (DT output) 0111 CMP2 OUT 0110 CMP1 OUT 0101 PWM4 OUT 0100 PWM3 OUT 0011 CCP2 OUT 0010 CCP1 OUT 0001 MDBIT 0000 Pin selected by MDSRCPPS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 419 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26. (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module The Master Synchronous Serial Port (MSSP) module is a serial interface useful for communicating with other peripheral or microcontroller devices. These peripheral devices may be serial EEPROMs, shift registers, display drivers, A/D converters, etc. The MSSP module can operate in one of two modes: • • Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) The SPI interface supports the following modes and features: • • • • • Master mode Slave mode Clock Parity Slave Select Synchronization (Slave mode only) Daisy-chain connection of slave devices The I2C interface supports the following modes and features: • • • • • • • • • • • • • 26.1 Master mode Slave mode Byte NACKing (Slave mode) Limited multi-master support 7-bit and 10-bit addressing Start and Stop interrupts Interrupt masking Clock stretching Bus collision detection General call address matching Address masking Address Hold and Data Hold modes Selectable SDA hold times SPI Mode Overview The Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus is a synchronous serial data communication bus that operates in Full-Duplex mode. Devices communicate in a master/slave environment where the master device initiates the communication. A slave device is controlled through a Chip Select known as Slave Select. The SPI bus specifies four signal connections: • • • • Serial Clock (SCK) Serial Data Out (SDO) Serial Data In (SDI) Slave Select (SS) The following figure shows the block diagram of the MSSP module when operating in SPI mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 420 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-1. MSSP Block Diagram (SPI mode) Rev. 30-000011A 3/31/2017 Data Bus Write Read SSPxBUF Reg SSPxDATPPS SDI PPS SSPSR Reg Shift Clock bit 0 SDO PPS RxyPPS SS SS Control Enable PPS Edge Select SSPxSSPPS SSPxCLKPPS(2) SCK SSPM 4 PPS PPS TRIS bit 2 (CKP, CKE) Clock Select Edge Select RxyPPS(1) ( T2_match 2 ) Prescaler TOSC 4, 16, 64 Baud Rate Generator (SSPxADD) Note 1: Output selection for master mode 2: Input selection for slave and master mode The SPI bus operates with a single master device and one or more slave devices. When multiple slave devices are used, an independent Slave Select connection is required from the master device to each slave device. The figure below shows a typical connection between a master device and multiple slave devices. The master selects only one slave at a time. Most slave devices have tri-state outputs so their output signal appears disconnected from the bus when they are not selected. ©2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 421 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-2. SPI Master and Multiple Slave Connection Rev. 30-000012A 3/31/2017 SPI Master SCK SCK SDO SDI SDI SDO General I/O General I/O SS General I/O SCK SDI SDO SPI Slave #1 SPI Slave #2 SS SCK SDI SDO SPI Slave #3 SS 26.1.1 SPI Mode Registers The MSSP module has five registers for SPI mode operation. These are: • • • • • • MSSP STATUS register (SSPxSTAT) MSSP Control register 1 (SSPxCON1) MSSP Control register 3 (SSPxCON3) MSSP Data Buffer register (SSPxBUF) MSSP Address register (SSPxADD) MSSP Shift register (SSPSR) (Not directly accessible) SSPxCON1 and SSPxSTAT are the control and STATUS registers for SPI mode operation. The SSPxCON1 register is readable and writable. The lower six bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. One of the five SPI master modes uses the SSPxADD value to determine the Baud Rate Generator clock frequency. More information on the Baud Rate Generator is available in Baud Rate Generator. SSPSR is the shift register used for shifting data in and out. SSPxBUF provides indirect access to the SSPSR register. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written, and from which data bytes are read. In receive operations, SSPSR and SSPxBUF together create a buffered receiver. When SSPSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPSR. 26.2 SPI Mode Operation Transmissions involve two shift registers, eight bits in size, one in the master and one in the slave. With either the master or the slave device, data is always shifted out one bit at a time, with the Most Significant ©2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 422 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module bit (MSb) shifted out first. At the same time, a new Least Significant bit (LSb) is shifted into the same register. The following figure shows a typical connection between two processors configured as master and slave devices. Figure 26-3. SPI Master/Slave Connection Rev/ 30-000013A 3/31/2017 SPI Master SSPM = 00xx = 1010 SPI Slave SSPM = 010x SDO SDI Serial Input Buffer (BUF) LSb SCK General I/O Processor 1 SDO SDI Shift Register (SSPSR) MSb Serial Input Buffer (SSPxBUF) Serial Clock Shift Register (SSPSR) MSb LSb SCK Slave Select (optional) SS Processor 2 Data is shifted out of both shift registers on the programmed clock edge and latched on the opposite edge of the clock. The master device transmits information out on its SDO output pin which is connected to, and received by, the slave’s SDI input pin. The slave device transmits information out on its SDO output pin, which is connected to, and received by, the master’s SDI input pin. To begin communication, the master device first sends out the clock signal. Both the master and the slave devices should be configured for the same clock polarity. The master device starts a transmission by sending out the MSb from its shift register. The slave device reads this bit from that same line and saves it into the LSb position of its shift register. During each SPI clock cycle, a full-duplex data transmission occurs. This means that while the master device is sending out the MSb from its shift register (on its SDO pin) and the slave device is reading this bit and saving it as the LSb of its shift register, that the slave device is also sending out the MSb from its shift register (on its SDO pin) and the master device is reading this bit and saving it as the LSb of its shift register. After eight bits have been shifted out, the master and slave have exchanged register values.  If there is more data to exchange, the shift registers are loaded with new data and the process repeats itself. Whether the data is meaningful or not (dummy data), depends on the application software. This leads to three scenarios for data transmission: • • Master sends useful data and slave sends dummy data. Master sends useful data and slave sends useful data. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 423 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module • Master sends dummy data and slave sends useful data. Transmissions may involve any number of clock cycles. When there is no more data to be transmitted, the master stops sending the clock signal and it deselects the slave. Every slave device connected to the bus that has not been selected through its slave select line must disregard the clock and transmission signals and must not transmit out any data of its own. When initializing the SPI, several options need to be specified. This is done by programming the appropriate control bits (SSPxCON1 and SSPxSTAT). These control bits allow the following to be specified: • • • • • • • Master mode (SCK is the clock output) Slave mode (SCK is the clock input) Clock Polarity (Idle state of SCK) Data Input Sample Phase (middle or end of data output time) Clock Edge (output data on rising/falling edge of SCK) Clock Rate (Master mode only) Slave Select mode (Slave mode only) To enable the serial port, SSP Enable bit, SSPEN, must be set. To reset or reconfigure SPI mode, clear the SSPEN bit, re-initialize the SSPxCONx registers and then set the SSPEN bit. The SDI, SDO, SCK and SS serial port pins are selected with the PPS controls. For the pins to behave as the serial port function, some must have their data direction bits (in the TRIS register) appropriately programmed as follows: • • • • • • SDI must have corresponding TRIS bit set SDO must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared SCK (Master mode) must have corresponding TRIS bit cleared SCK (Slave mode) must have corresponding TRIS bit set The RxyPPS and SSPxCLKPPS controls must select the same pin SS must have corresponding TRIS bit set Any serial port function that is not desired may be overridden by programming the corresponding data direction (TRIS) register to the opposite value. The MSSP consists of a transmit/receive shift register (SSPSR) and a buffer register (SSPxBUF). The SSPSR shifts the data in and out of the device, MSb first. The SSPxBUF holds the data that was written to the SSPSR until the received data is ready. Once the eight bits of data have been received, that byte is moved to the SSPxBUF register. Then, the Buffer Full Detect bit, BF, and the interrupt flag bit, SSPxIF, are set. This double-buffering of the received data (SSPxBUF) allows the next byte to start reception before reading the data that was just received. Any write to the SSPxBUF register during transmission/ reception of data will be ignored and the write collision detect bit, WCOL, will be set. User software must clear the WCOL bit to allow the following write(s) to the SSPxBUF register to complete successfully. When the application software is expecting to receive valid data, the SSPxBUF should be read before the next byte of data to transfer is written to the SSPxBUF. The Buffer Full bit, BF, indicates when SSPxBUF has been loaded with the received data (transmission is complete). When the SSPxBUF is read, the BF bit is cleared. This data may be irrelevant if the SPI is only a transmitter. Generally, the MSSP interrupt is used to determine when the transmission/reception has completed. If the interrupt method is not going to be used, then software polling can be done to ensure that a write collision does not occur. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 424 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module The SSPSR is not directly readable or writable and can only be accessed by addressing the SSPxBUF register. Additionally, the SSPxSTAT register indicates the various Status conditions. 26.2.1 SPI Master Mode The master can initiate the data transfer at any time because it controls the SCK line. The master determines when the slave (Processor 2, Figure 26-3) is to broadcast data by the software protocol. In Master mode, the data is transmitted/received as soon as the SSPxBUF register is written to. If the SPI is only going to receive, the SDO output could be disabled (programmed as an input). The SSPSR register will continue to shift in the signal present on the SDI pin at the programmed clock rate. As each byte is received, it will be loaded into the SSPxBUF register as if a normal received byte (interrupts and Status bits appropriately set). The clock polarity is selected by appropriately programming the CKP bit and the CKE bit. This then, would give waveforms for SPI communication as shown in Figure 26-4, Figure 26-6, Figure 26-7 and Figure 26-8, where the MSB is transmitted first. In Master mode, the SPI clock rate (bit rate) is user programmable to be one of the following: • • • • • FOSC/4 (or TCY) FOSC/16 (or 4 * TCY) FOSC/64 (or 16 * TCY) Timer2 output/2 FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD + 1)) Figure 26-4 shows the waveforms for Master mode. When the CKE bit is set, the SDO data is valid before there is a clock edge on SCK. The change of the input sample is shown based on the state of the SMP bit. The time when the SSPxBUF is loaded with the received data is shown. Important:  In Master mode the clock signal output to the SCK pin is also the clock signal input to the peripheral. The pin selected for output with the RxyPPS register must also be selected as the peripheral input with the SSPxCLKPPS register. The pin that is selected using the SSPxCLKPPS register should also be made a digital I/O. This is done by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 425 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-4. SPI Mode Waveform (Master Mode) Rev. 30-000014A 3/13/2017 Write to SSPxBUF SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) 4 Clock Modes SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) SDO (CKE = 0) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDO (CKE = 1) bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDI (SMP = 0) bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 0) SDI (SMP = 1) bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample (SMP = 1) SSPxIF SSPSR to SSPxBUF 26.2.2 SPI Slave Mode In Slave mode, the data is transmitted and received as external clock pulses appear on SCK. When the last bit is latched, the SSPxIF interrupt flag bit is set. Before enabling the module in SPI Slave mode, the clock line must match the proper Idle state. The clock line can be observed by reading the SCK pin. The Idle state is determined by the CKP bit. While in Slave mode, the external clock is supplied by the external clock source on the SCK pin. This external clock must meet the minimum high and low times as specified in the electrical specifications. While in Sleep mode, the slave can transmit/receive data. The shift register is clocked from the SCK pin input and when a byte is received, the device will generate an interrupt. If enabled, the device will wakeup from Sleep. 26.2.3 Daisy-Chain Configuration The SPI bus can sometimes be connected in a daisy-chain configuration. The first slave output is connected to the second slave input, the second slave output is connected to the third slave input, and so on. The final slave output is connected to the master input. Each slave sends out, during a second group of clock pulses, an exact copy of what was received during the first group of clock pulses. The whole ©2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 426 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module chain acts as one large communication shift register. The daisy-chain feature only requires a single Slave Select line from the master device. The following figure shows the block diagram of a typical daisy-chain connection when operating in SPI mode. Figure 26-5. SPI Daisy-Chain Connection Rev. 30-000015A 3/31/2017 SPI Master SCK SCK SDO SDI SDI General I/O SDO SPI Slave #1 SS SCK SDI SDO SPI Slave #2 SS SCK SDI SDO SPI Slave #3 SS In a daisy-chain configuration, only the most recent byte on the bus is required by the slave. Setting the BOEN bit will enable writes to the SSPxBUF register, even if the previous byte has not been read. This allows the software to ignore data that may not apply to it. 26.2.4 Slave Select Synchronization The Slave Select can also be used to synchronize communication. The Slave Select line is held high until the master device is ready to communicate. When the Slave Select line is pulled low, the slave knows that a new transmission is starting. If the slave fails to receive the communication properly, it will be reset at the end of the transmission, when the Slave Select line returns to a high state. The slave is then ready to receive a new transmission when the Slave Select line is pulled low again. If the Slave Select line is not used, there is a risk that the slave will eventually become out of sync with the master. If the slave misses a bit, it will always be one bit off in future transmissions. Use of the Slave Select line allows the slave and master to align themselves at  the beginning of each transmission. The SS pin allows a Synchronous Slave mode. The SPI must be in Slave mode with SS pin control enabled (SSPM = 0100). When the SS pin is low, transmission and reception are enabled and the SDO pin is driven. When the SS pin goes high, the SDO pin is no longer driven, even if in the middle of a transmitted byte and becomes a floating output. External pull-up/pull-down resistors may be desirable depending on the application. Note:  1. When the SPI is in Slave mode with SS pin control enabled (SSPM = 0100), the SPI module will reset if the SS pin is set to VDD. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 427 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 2. 3. When the SPI is used in Slave mode with CKE set; the user must enable SS pin control. While operated in SPI Slave mode the SMP bit must remain clear. When the SPI module resets, the bit counter is forced to ‘0’. This can be done by either forcing the SS pin to a high level or clearing the SSPEN bit. Figure 26-6. Slave Select Synchronous Waveform Rev. 30-000016A 4/10/2017 SS SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF Shift register SSPSR and bit count are reset SSPxBUF to SSPSR SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 7 SDI bit 6 bit 0 bit 0 bit 7 bit 7 Input Sample SSPxIF Interrupt Flag SSPSR to SSPxBUF © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 428 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-7. SPI Mode Waveform (Slave Mode with CKE = 0) Rev. 30-000017A 4/3/2017 SS Optional SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 0) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 0) Write to SSPxBUF Valid SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDI bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample SSPxIF Interrupt Flag SSPSR to SSPxBUF Write Collision detection active ©2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 429 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-8. SPI Mode Waveform (Slave Mode with CKE = 1) Rev. 30-000018A 4/1/2017 SS Not Optional SCK (CKP = 0 CKE = 1) SCK (CKP = 1 CKE = 1) Write to SSPxBUF Valid SDO bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0 SDI bit 0 bit 7 Input Sample SSPxIF Interrupt Flag SSPSR to SSPxBUF Write Collision detection active 26.2.5 SPI Operation in Sleep Mode In  SPI Master mode, module clocks may be operating at a different speed than when in Full-Power mode; in the case of the Sleep mode, all clocks are halted. Special care must be taken by the user when the MSSP clock is much faster than the system clock. In Slave mode, when MSSP interrupts are enabled, after the master completes sending data, an MSSP interrupt will wake the controller from Sleep. If an exit from Sleep mode is not desired, MSSP interrupts should be disabled. In SPI Master mode, when the Sleep mode is selected, all module clocks are halted and the transmission/reception will remain in that state until the device wakes. After the device returns to Run mode, the module will resume transmitting and receiving data. In SPI Slave mode, the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register operates asynchronously to the device. This allows the device to be placed in Sleep mode and data to be shifted into the SPI Transmit/Receive Shift register. When all eight bits have been received, the MSSP interrupt flag bit will be set and if enabled, will wake the device. 26.3 I2C Mode Overview The Inter-Integrated Circuit (I2C) bus is a multi-master serial data communication bus. Devices communicate in a master/slave environment where the master devices initiate the communication. A © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 430 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module slave device is controlled through addressing. The following two diagrams show block diagrams of the I2C Master and Slave modes, respectively. Figure 26-9. MSSP Block Diagram (I2C Master mode) Rev. 30-000019A 4/3/2017 Internal data bus SSPxDATPPS(1) Read [SSPM] Write SDA SDA in SSPxBUF Baud Rate Generator (SSPxADD) Shift Clock RxyPPS(1) PPS Receive Enable (RCEN) SSPxCLKPPS(2) SCL MSb LSb Start bit, Stop bit, Acknowledge Generate (SSPxCON2) Clock Cntl SSPSR PPS Clock arbitrate/BCOL detect (Hold off clock source) PPS PPS RxyPPS(2) SCL in Bus Collision Start bit detect, Stop bit detect Write collision detect Clock arbitration State counter for end of XMIT/RCV Address Match detect Set/Reset: S, P, SSPxSTAT, WCOL, SSPOV Reset SEN, PEN (SSPxCON2) Set SSP1IF, BCL1IF Note 1: SDA pin selections must be the same for input and output 2: SCL pin selections must be the same for input and output  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 431 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-10. MSSP Block Diagram (I2C Slave mode) Rev. 30-000020A 4/3/2017 Internal Data Bus Read Write SSPxCLKPPS(2) SCL SSPxBUF Reg PPS PPS Shift Clock Clock Stretching SSPSR Reg LSb MSb RxyPPS(2) SSPxMSK Reg (1) SSPxDATPPS SDA Addr Match Match Detect PPS SSPxADD Reg PPS Start and Stop bit Detect RxyPPS(1) Set, Reset S, P bits (SSPxSTAT Reg) Note 1: SDA pin selections must be the same for input and output 2: SCL pin selections must be the same for input and output The I2C bus specifies two signal connections: • • Serial Clock (SCL) Serial Data (SDA) Both the SCL and SDA connections are bidirectional open-drain lines, each requiring pull-up resistors for the supply voltage. Pulling the line to ground is considered a logical zero and letting the line float is considered a logical one. The following diagram shows a typical connection between two processors configured as master and slave devices. Figure 26-11. I2C Master/ Slave Connection Rev. 30-000021A 4/3/2017 VDD SCL SCL VDD Master Slave SDA SDA The I2C bus can operate with one or more master devices and one or more slave devices. There are four potential modes of operation for a given device: ©2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 432 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module • • • • Master Transmit mode (master is transmitting data to a slave) Master Receive mode (master is receiving data from a slave) Slave Transmit mode (slave is transmitting data to a master) Slave Receive mode (slave is receiving data from the master) To begin communication, a master device starts out in Master Transmit mode. The master device sends out a Start bit followed by the address byte of the slave it intends to communicate with. This is followed by a single Read/Write bit, which determines whether the master intends to transmit to or receive data from the slave device. If the requested slave exists on the bus, it will respond with an Acknowledge bit, otherwise known as an ACK. The master then continues in either Transmit mode or Receive mode and the slave continues in the complement, either in Receive mode or Transmit mode, respectively. A Start bit is indicated by a high-to-low transition of the SDA line while the SCL line is held high. Address and data bytes are sent out, Most Significant bit (MSb) first. The Read/Write bit is sent out as a logical one when the master intends to read data from the slave, and is sent out as a logical zero when it intends to write data to the slave. The Acknowledge bit (ACK) is an active-low signal, which holds the SDA line low to indicate to the transmitter that the slave device has received the transmitted data and is ready to receive more. The transition of a data bit is always performed while the SCL line is held low. Transitions that occur while the SCL line is held high are used to indicate Start and Stop bits. If the master intends to write to the slave, then it repeatedly sends out a byte of data, with the slave responding after each byte with an ACK bit. In this example, the master device is in Master Transmit mode and the slave is in Slave Receive mode. If the master intends to read from the slave, then it repeatedly receives a byte of data from the slave, and responds after each byte with an ACK bit. In this example, the master device is in Master Receive mode and the slave is Slave Transmit mode. On the last byte of data communicated, the master device may end the transmission by sending a Stop bit. If the master device is in Receive mode, it sends the Stop bit in place of the last ACK bit. A Stop bit is indicated by a low-to-high transition of the SDA line while the SCL line is held high. In some cases, the master may want to maintain control of the bus and re-initiate another transmission. If so, the master device may send another Start bit in place of the Stop bit or last ACK bit when it is in receive mode. The I2C bus specifies three message protocols; • • • Single message where a master writes data to a slave. Single message where a master reads data from a slave. Combined message where a master initiates a minimum of two writes, or two reads, or a combination of writes and reads, to one or more slaves. When one device is transmitting a logical one, or letting the line float, and a second device is transmitting a logical zero, or holding the line low, the first device can detect that the line is not a logical one. This detection, when used on the SCL line, is called clock stretching. Clock stretching gives slave devices a © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 433 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module mechanism to control the flow of data. When this detection is used on the SDA line, it is called arbitration. Arbitration ensures that there is only one master device communicating at any single time. 26.3.1 Register Definitions: I2C Mode The MSSPx module has seven registers for I2C operation. These are: • • • • • • • • MSSP Status Register (SSPxSTAT) MSSP Control Register 1 (SSPxCON1) MSSP Control Register 2 (SSPxCON2) MSSP Control Register 3 (SSPxCON3) Serial Receive/Transmit Buffer Register (SSPxBUF) MSSP Address Register (SSPxADD) I2C Slave Address Mask Register (SSPxMSK) MSSP Shift Register (SSPSR) – not directly accessible SSPxCON1, SSPxCON2, SSPxCON3 and SSPxSTAT are the Control and Status registers in I2C mode operation. The SSPxCON1, SSPxCON2, and SSPxCON3 registers are readable and writable. The lower six bits of the SSPxSTAT are read-only. The upper two bits of the SSPxSTAT are read/write. SSPSR is the Shift register used for shifting data in or out. SSPxBUF is the buffer register to which data bytes are written to or read from. SSPxADD contains the slave device address when the MSSP is configured in I2C Slave mode. When the MSSP is configured in Master mode, the lower seven bits of SSPxADD act as the Baud Rate Generator reload value. SSPxMSK holds the slave address mask value when the module is configured for 7-Bit Address Masking mode. While it is a separate register, it shares the same SFR address as SSPxADD; it is only accessible when the SSPM bits are specifically set to permit access. In receive operations, SSPSR and SSPxBUF together, create a double-buffered receiver. When SSPSR receives a complete byte, it is transferred to SSPxBUF and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. During transmission, the SSPxBUF is not double-buffered. A write to SSPxBUF will write to both SSPxBUF and SSPSR. 26.4 I2C Mode Operation All MSSP I2C communication is byte oriented and shifted out MSb first. Six SFR registers and two ® interrupt flags interface the module with the PIC microcontroller and user software. Two pins, SDA and SCL, are exercised by the module to communicate with other external I2C devices. 26.4.1 Clock Stretching When a slave device has not completed processing data, it can delay the transfer of more data through the process of clock stretching. An addressed slave device may hold the SCL clock line low after receiving or sending a bit, indicating that it is not yet ready to continue. The master that is communicating with the slave will attempt to raise the SCL line in order to transfer the next bit, but will detect that the clock line has not yet been released. Because the SCL connection is open-drain, the slave has the ability to hold that line low until it is ready to continue communicating. Clock stretching allows receivers that cannot keep up with a transmitter to control the flow of incoming data. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 434 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.4.2 Arbitration Each master device must monitor the bus for Start and Stop bits. If the device detects that the bus is busy, it cannot begin a new message until the bus returns to an Idle state. However, two master devices may try to initiate a transmission on or about the same time. When this occurs, the process of arbitration begins. Each transmitter checks the level of the SDA data line and compares it to the level that it expects to find. The first transmitter to observe that the two levels do not match, loses arbitration, and must stop transmitting on the SDA line. For example, if one transmitter holds the SDA line to a logical one (lets it float) and a second transmitter holds it to a logical zero (pulls it low), the result is that the SDA line will be low. The first transmitter then observes that the level of the line is different than expected and concludes that another transmitter is communicating. The first transmitter to notice this difference is the one that loses arbitration and must stop driving the SDA line. If this transmitter is also a master device, it also must stop driving the SCL line. It then can monitor the lines for a Stop condition before trying to reissue its transmission. In the meantime, the other device that has not noticed any difference between the expected and actual levels on the SDA line continues with its original transmission. It can do so without any complications, because so far, the transmission appears exactly as expected with no other transmitter disturbing the message. Slave Transmit mode can also be arbitrated, when a master addresses multiple slaves, but this is less common. If two master devices are sending a message to two different slave devices at the address stage, the master sending the lower slave address always wins arbitration. When two master devices send messages to the same slave address, and addresses can sometimes refer to multiple slaves, the arbitration process must continue into the data stage. Arbitration usually occurs very rarely, but it is a necessary process for proper multi-master support. 26.4.3 Byte Format All communication in I2C is done in 9-bit segments. A byte is sent from a master to a slave or vice-versa, followed by an Acknowledge bit sent back. After the eighth falling edge of the SCL line, the device outputting data on the SDA changes that pin to an input and reads in an acknowledge value on the next clock pulse. The clock signal, SCL, is provided by the master. Data is valid to change while the SCL signal is low, and sampled on the rising edge of the clock. Changes on the SDA line while the SCL line is high define special conditions on the bus, explained below. 26.4.4 Definition of I2C Terminology There is language and terminology in the description of I2C communication that have definitions specific to I2C. That word usage is defined below and may be used in the rest of this document without explanation. This table was adapted from the Philips I2C specification. TERM Description Transmitter The device which shifts data out onto the bus. Receiver The device which shifts data in from the bus. Master The device that initiates a transfer, generates clock signals and terminates a transfer. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 435 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module TERM Description Slave The device addressed by the master. Multi-master A bus with more than one device that can initiate data transfers. Arbitration Procedure to ensure that only one master at a time controls the bus. Winning arbitration ensures that the message is not corrupted. Synchronization Procedure to synchronize the clocks of two or more devices on the bus. Idle No master is controlling the bus, and both SDA and SCL lines are high. Active Any time one or more master devices are controlling the bus. Addressed Slave Slave device that has received a matching address and is actively being clocked by a master. Matching Address Address byte that is clocked into a slave that matches the value stored in SSPxADD. 26.4.5 Write Request Slave receives a matching address with R/W bit clear, and is ready to clock in data. Read Request Master sends an address byte with the R/W bit set, indicating that it wishes to clock data out of the Slave. This data is the next and all following bytes until a Restart or Stop. Clock Stretching When a device on the bus hold SCL low to stall communication. Bus Collision Any time the SDA line is sampled low by the module while it is outputting and expected high state. SDA and SCL Pins Selection of any I2C mode with the SSPEN bit set, forces the SCL and SDA pins to be open-drain. These pins should be set by the user to inputs by setting the appropriate TRIS bits. Note:  1. Data is tied to output zero when an I2C mode is enabled. 2. Any device pin can be selected for SDA and SCL functions with the PPS peripheral. These functions are bidirectional. The SDA input is selected with the SSPxDATPPS registers. The SCL input is selected with the SSPxCLKPPS registers. Outputs are selected with the RxyPPS registers. It is the user’s responsibility to make the selections so that both the input and the output for each function is on the same pin. 26.4.6 SDA Hold Time The hold time of the SDA pin is selected by the SDAHT bit. Hold time is the time SDA is held valid after the falling edge of SCL. Setting the SDAHT bit selects a longer 300 ns minimum hold time and may help on buses with large capacitance. I2C Bus Terms 26.4.7 Start Condition The I2C specification defines a Start condition as a transition of SDA from a high to a low state while SCL line is high. A Start condition is always generated by the master and signifies the transition of the bus from an Idle to an Active state. Figure 26-12 shows wave forms for Start and Stop conditions. A bus collision can occur on a Start condition if the module samples the SDA line low before asserting it low. This does not conform to the I2C Specification that states no bus collision can occur on a Start. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 436 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.4.8 Stop Condition A Stop condition is a transition of the SDA line from low-to-high state while the SCL line is high. Important:  At least one SCL low time must appear before a Stop is valid, therefore, if the SDA line goes low then high again while the SCL line stays high, only the Start condition is detected. Figure 26-12. I2C Start and Stop Conditions Rev. 30-000022A 4/3/2017 SDA SCL S Start Condition 26.4.9 P Change of Change of Data Allowed Data Allowed Stop Condition Restart Condition A Restart is valid any time that a Stop would be valid. A master can issue a Restart if it wishes to hold the bus after terminating the current transfer. A Restart has the same effect on the slave that a Start would, resetting all slave logic and preparing it to clock in an address. The master may want to address the same or another slave. Figure 26-13 shows the wave form for a Restart condition. In 10-bit Addressing Slave mode a Restart is required for the master to clock data out of the addressed slave. Once a slave has been fully addressed, matching both high and low address bytes, the master can issue a Restart and the high address byte with the R/W bit set. The slave logic will then hold the clock and prepare to clock out data. After a full match with R/W clear in 10-bit mode, a prior match flag is set and maintained until a Stop condition, a high address with R/W clear, or high address match fails. Figure 26-13. I2C Restart Condition Rev. 30-000023A 4/3/2017  Sr Change of Change of Data Allowed Restart Condition Data Allowed  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 437 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.4.10 Start/Stop Condition Interrupt Masking The SCIE and PCIE bits can enable the generation of an interrupt in Slave modes that do not typically support this function. These bits will have no effect in slave modes where interrupt on Start and Stop detect are already enabled. 26.4.11 Acknowledge Sequence The ninth SCL pulse for any transferred byte in I2C is dedicated as an Acknowledge. It allows receiving devices to respond back to the transmitter by pulling the SDA line low. The transmitter must release control of the line during this time to shift in the response. The Acknowledge (ACK) is an active-low signal, pulling the SDA line low indicates to the transmitter that the device has received the transmitted data and is ready to receive more. The result of an ACK is placed in the ACKSTAT bit. Slave software, when the AHEN and DHEN bits are set, allow the user to set the ACK value sent back to the transmitter. The ACKDT bit is set/cleared to determine the response. Slave hardware will generate an ACK response if both the AHEN and DHEN bits are clear. However, tf the BF bit or the SSPOVSSPOV bit are set when a byte is received then the ACK will not be sent by the slave. When the module is addressed, after the eighth falling edge of SCL on the bus, the ACKTIM bit is set. The ACKTIM bit indicates the acknowledge time of the active bus. The ACKTIM Status bit is only active when either the AHEN bit or DHEN bit is enabled. 26.5 I2C Slave Mode Operation The MSSP Slave mode operates in one of four modes selected by the SSPM bits. The modes can be divided into 7-bit and 10-bit Addressing mode. 10-bit Addressing modes operate the same as 7-bit with some additional overhead for handling the larger addresses. Modes with Start and Stop bit interrupts operate the same as the other modes with SSPxIF additionally getting set upon detection of a Start, Restart, or Stop condition. 26.5.1 Slave Mode Addresses The SSPxADD register contains the Slave mode address. The first byte received after a Start or Restart condition is compared against the value stored in this register. If the byte matches, the value is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and an interrupt is generated. If the value does not match, the module goes idle and no indication is given to the software that anything happened. The SSPxMSK register affects the address matching process. See SSP Mask Register for more information. 26.5.1.1 I2C Slave 7-bit Addressing Mode In 7-bit Addressing mode, the LSb of the received data byte is ignored when determining if there is an address match. 26.5.1.2 I2C Slave 10-bit Addressing Mode In 10-bit Addressing mode, the first received byte is compared to the binary value of ‘1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 0’. A9 and A8 are the two MSb’s of the 10-bit address and stored in bits 2 and 1 of the SSPxADD register. After the acknowledge of the high byte the UA bit is set and SCL is held low until the user updates SSPxADD with the low address. The low address byte is clocked in and all eight bits are compared to the low address value in SSPxADD. Even if there is not an address match; SSPxIF and UA are set, and SCL © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 438 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module is held low until SSPxADD is updated to receive a high byte again. When SSPxADD is updated the UA bit is cleared. This ensures the module is ready to receive the high address byte on the next communication. A high and low address match as a write request is required at the start of all 10-bit addressing communication. A transmission can be initiated by issuing a Restart once the slave is addressed, and clocking in the high address with the R/W bit set. The slave hardware will then acknowledge the read request and prepare to clock out data. This is only valid for a slave after it has received a complete high and low address byte match. 26.5.2 Slave Reception When the R/W bit of a matching received address byte is clear, the R/W bit is cleared. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register and acknowledged. When the overflow condition exists for a received address, then not Acknowledge is given. An overflow condition is defined as either bit BF is set, or bit SSPOV is set. The BOEN bit modifies this operation. For more information see SSPxCON3. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each transferred data byte. Flag bit, SSPxIF, must be cleared by software. When the SEN bit is set, SCL will be held low (clock stretch) following each received byte. The clock must be released by setting the CKP bit, except sometimes in 10-bit mode. See 10-bit Addressing Mode for more detail. 26.5.2.1 7-bit Addressing Reception This section describes a standard sequence of events for the MSSP module configured as an I2C slave in 7-bit Addressing mode. Figure 26-14 and Figure 26-15 is used as a visual reference for this description. This is a step by step process of what typically must be done to accomplish I2C communication. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Start bit detected. S bit is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Matching address with R/W bit clear is received. The slave pulls SDA low sending an ACK to the master, and sets SSPxIF bit. Software clears the SSPxIF bit. Software reads received address from SSPxBUF clearing the BF flag. If SEN = 1; Slave software sets CKP bit to release the SCL line. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. The master clocks out a data byte. Slave drives SDA low sending an ACK to the master, and sets SSPxIF bit. Software clears SSPxIF. Software reads the received byte from SSPxBUF clearing BF. Steps 8-12 are repeated for all received bytes from the master. Master sends Stop condition, setting P bit, and the bus goes idle. 26.5.2.2 7-bit Reception with AHEN and DHEN Slave device reception with AHEN and DHEN set operate the same as without these options with extra interrupts and clock stretching added after the eighth falling edge of SCL. These additional interrupts allow the slave software to decide whether it wants to ACK the receive address or data byte, rather than the hardware. This functionality adds support for PMBus™ that was not present on previous versions of this module. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 439 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module This list describes the steps that need to be taken by slave software to use these options for I2C communication. Figure 26-16 displays a module using both address and data holding. Figure 26-17 includes the operation with the SEN bit of the SSPxCON2 register set. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. S bit is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Matching address with R/W bit clear is clocked in. SSPxIF is set and CKP cleared after the eighth falling edge of SCL. Slave clears the SSPxIF. Slave can look at the ACKTIM bit to determine if the SSPxIF was after or before the ACK. Slave reads the address value from SSPxBUF, clearing the BF flag. Slave sets ACK value clocked out to the master by setting ACKDT. Slave releases the clock by setting CKP. SSPxIF is set after an ACK, not after a NACK. If SEN = 1, the slave hardware will stretch the clock after the ACK. 10. Slave clears SSPxIF. Important:  SSPxIF is still set after the ninth falling edge of SCL even if there is no clock stretching and BF has been cleared. Only if NACK is sent to master is SSPxIF not set 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. SSPxIF set and CKP cleared after eighth falling edge of SCL for a received data byte. Slave looks at ACKTIM bit to determine the source of the interrupt. Slave reads the received data from SSPxBUF clearing BF. Steps 7-14 are the same for each received data byte. Communication is ended by either the slave sending an ACK = 1, or the master sending a Stop condition. If a Stop is sent and Interrupt on Stop Detect is disabled, the slave will only know by polling the P bit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 440 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  Datasheet SSPOV BF SSPxIF SCL SDA S 1 A7 2 A6 3 A5 4 A4 5 A3 Receiving Address 6 A2 7 A1 8 9 ACK 1 D7 2 D6 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 SSPxBUF is read Cleared by software 3 D5 Receiving Data 8 9 2 First byte of dat a is avai labl e in SSPx BUF 1 D6 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 SSPOV set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. Cleared by software 3 D5 Receiving Data From Slave to Master D0 ACK D7 Figure 26-14. I2C Slave, 7-bit Address, Reception (SEN = 0, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) 8 D0 9 P SSPxIF set on 9th falling edge of SCL ACK = 1 Bus Master sends Stop condition Rev. 30-000024A 4/10/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 441 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  Datasheet CKP SSPOV BF SSPxIF 1 SCL S A7 SDA 2 A6 3 A5 4 A4 5 A3 Receive Address 6 A2 7 A1 8 9 R/W=0 ACK SEN 2 D6 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 8 D0 CKP is written to ‘1’ in software, releasing SCL SSPxBUF is read Cleared by software Clock is held low until CKP is set to ‘1’ 1 D7 Receive Data Figure 26-15. I2C Slave, 7-bit Address, Reception (SEN = 1, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) 9 ACK SEN 3 D5 4 D4 5 D3 6 D2 7 D1 CKP is written to ‘1’ in software, releasing SCL SSPOV set because SSPxBUF is still full. ACK is not sent. Cleared by software 2 D6 First byte of dat a is avai labl e in SSPx BUF 1 D7 Receive Data 8 D0 9 ACK Rev. 30-000025A 4/3/2017 SCL is not held low because ACK= 1 SSPxIF set on 9th falling edge of SCL P Bus Master sends Stop condition PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 442 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  S Datasheet P S ACKTIM CKP ACKDT BF SSPxIF SCL SDA Receiving Address 1 3 5 6 7 8 ACK the received byte Slave software clears ACKDT to Address is read from SSBUF If AHEN = 1: SSPxIF is set 4 ACKTIM set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCL When AHEN=1: CKP is cleared by hardware and SCL is stretched 2 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Receiving Data 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 ACKTIM cleared by hardware in 9th rising edge of SCL When DHEN=1: CKP is cleared by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCL SSPxIF is set on 9th falling edge of SCL, after ACK 1 8 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Master Releases SDA to slave for ACK sequence Figure 26-16. I2C Slave, 7-bit Address, Reception (SEN = 0, AHEN = 1, DHEN = 1) Received Data 1 2 4 5 6 ACKTIM set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCL CKP set by software, SCL is released 8 Slave software sets ACKDT to not ACK 7 Cleared by software 3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Data is read from SSPxBUF 9 ACK 9 P No interrupt after not ACK from Slave ACK=1 Master sends Stop condition Rev. 30-000026A 4/3/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 443 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  Datasheet S P S ACKTIM CKP ACKDT BF SSPxIF SCL SDA R/W = 0 4 5 6 7 8 When AHEN = 1; on the 8th falling edge of SCL of an address byte, CKP is cleared Slave software clears ACKDT to ACK the received byte Received address is loaded into SSPxBUF 2 3 ACKTIM is set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCL 1 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Receiving Address 9 ACK Receive Data 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ACKTIM is cleared by hardware on 9th rising edge of SCL When DHEN = 1; on the 8th falling edge of SCL of a received data byte, CKP is cleared Received data is available on SSPxBUF Cleared by software 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Master releases SDA to slave for ACK sequence 9 ACK Figure 26-17. I2C Slave, 7-bit Address, Reception (SEN = 1, AHEN = 1, DHEN = 1) Receive Data 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 Set by software, release SCL Slave sends not ACK SSPxBUF can be read any time before next byte is loaded 2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 9 ACK CKP is not cleared if not ACK No interrupt after if not ACK from Slave P Master sends Stop condition Rev. 30-000027A 4/3/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 444 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.5.3 Slave Transmission When the R/W bit of the incoming address byte is set and an address match occurs, the R/W bit is set. The received address is loaded into the SSPxBUF register, and an ACK pulse is sent by the slave on the ninth bit. Following the ACK, slave hardware clears the CKP bit and the SCL pin is held low (see Clock Stretching for more detail). By stretching the clock, the master will be unable to assert another clock pulse until the slave is done preparing the transmit data. The transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register which also loads the SSPSR register. Then the SCL pin should be released by setting the CKP bit. The eight data bits are shifted out on the falling edge of the SCL input. This ensures that the SDA signal is valid during the SCL high time. The ACK pulse from the master-receiver is latched on the rising edge of the ninth SCL input pulse. This ACK value is copied to the ACKSTAT bit. If ACKSTAT is set (not ACK), then the data transfer is complete. In this case, when the not ACK is latched by the slave, the slave goes idle and waits for another occurrence of the Start bit. If the SDA line was low (ACK), the next transmit data must be loaded into the SSPxBUF register. Again, the SCL pin must be released by setting bit CKP. An MSSP interrupt is generated for each data transfer byte. The SSPxIF bit must be cleared by software and the SSPxSTAT register is used to determine the status of the byte. The SSPxIF bit is set on the falling edge of the ninth clock pulse. 26.5.3.1 Slave Mode Bus Collision A slave receives a Read request and begins shifting data out on the SDA line. If a bus collision is detected and the SBCDE bit is set, the BCLxIF bit of the PIRx register is set. Once a bus collision is detected, the slave goes idle and waits to be addressed again. User software can use the BCLxIF bit to handle a slave bus collision. 26.5.3.2 7-bit Transmission A master device can transmit a read request to a slave, and then clock data out of the slave. The list below outlines what software for a slave will need to do to accomplish a standard transmission. Figure 26-18 can be used as a reference to this list. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Master sends a Start condition on SDA and SCL. S bit is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Matching address with R/W bit set is received by the Slave setting SSPxIF bit. Slave hardware generates an ACK and sets SSPxIF. SSPxIF bit is cleared by user. Software reads the received address from SSPxBUF, clearing BF. R/W is set so CKP was automatically cleared after the ACK. The slave software loads the transmit data into SSPxBUF. CKP bit is set releasing SCL, allowing the master to clock the data out of the slave. SSPxIF is set after the ACK response from the master is loaded into the ACKSTAT register. SSPxIF bit is cleared. The slave software checks the ACKSTAT bit to see if the master wants to clock out more data. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 445 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Important:  1. If the master ACKs then the clock will be stretched. 2. ACKSTAT is the only bit updated on the rising edge of the 9th SCL clock instead of the falling edge. 13. Steps 9-13 are repeated for each transmitted byte. 14. If the master sends a not ACK; the clock is not held, but SSPxIF is still set. 15. The master sends a Restart condition or a Stop. 16. The slave is no longer addressed. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 446 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  S Datasheet P S D/A R/W ACKSTAT CKP BF SSPxIF SCL SDA 1 2 5 6 7 8 Indicates an address has been received R/W is copied from the matching address byte 9 R/W = 1 Automatic ACK Received address is read from SSPxBUF 4 When R/W is set SCL is always held low after 9th SCL falling edge 3 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Receiving Address Transmitting Data Automatic 2 3 4 5 Set by software Data to transmit is loaded into SSPxBUF Cleared by software 1 6 7 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK Figure 26-18. I2C Slave, 7-bit Address, Transmission (AHEN = 0) Transmitting Data 2 3 4 5 7 8 CKP is not held for not ACK 6 Masters not ACK is copied to ACKSTAT BF is automatically cleared after 8th falling edge of SCL 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 9 ACK P Master sends Stop condition Rev. 30-000028A 4/3/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 447 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.5.3.3 7-bit Transmission with Address Hold Enabled Setting the AHEN bit enables additional clock stretching and interrupt generation after the eighth falling edge of a received matching address. Once a matching address has been clocked in, CKP is cleared and the SSPxIF interrupt is set. Figure 26-19 displays a standard waveform of a 7-bit address slave transmission with AHEN enabled. 1. 2. 3. Bus starts Idle. Master sends Start condition; the S bit is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Master sends matching address with R/W bit set. After the 8th falling edge of the SCL line the CKP bit is cleared and SSPxIF interrupt is generated. 4. Slave software clears SSPxIF. 5. Slave software reads the ACKTIM, R/W and D/A bits to determine the source of the interrupt. 6. Slave reads the address value from the SSPxBUF register clearing the BF bit. 7. Slave software decides from this information if it wishes to ACK or not ACK and sets the ACKDT bit accordingly. 8. Slave sets the CKP bit releasing SCL. 9. Master clocks in the ACK value from the slave. 10. Slave hardware automatically clears the CKP bit and sets SSPxIF after the ACK if the R/W bit is set. 11. Slave software clears SSPxIF. 12. Slave loads value to transmit to the master into SSPxBUF setting the BF bit. Important:  SSPxBUF cannot be loaded until after the ACK. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Slave sets the CKP bit releasing the clock. Master clocks out the data from the slave and sends an ACK value on the ninth SCL pulse. Slave hardware copies the ACK value into the ACKSTAT bit. Steps 10-15 are repeated for each byte transmitted to the master from the slave. If the master sends a not ACK the slave releases the bus allowing the master to send a Stop and end the communication. Important:  Master must send a not ACK on the last byte to ensure that the slave releases the SCL line to receive a Stop. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 448 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  Datasheet D/A R/W ACKTIM CKP ACKSTAT ACKDT BF SSPxIF SCL SDA S 2 4 5 6 7 8 Slave clears ACKDT to ACK address ACKTIM is set on 8th falling edge of SCL 9 ACK When R/W = 1; CKP is always cleared after ACK R/W = 1 Received address is read from SSPxBUF 3 When AHEN = 1; CKP is cleared by hardware after receiving matching address. 1 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 Receiving Address 3 4 5 6 Cleared by software 2 Set by software, releases SCL Data to transmit is loaded into SSPxBUF 1 7 8 9 Automatic ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmitting Data ACKTIM is cleared on 9th rising edge of SCL Automatic Master releases SDA to slave for ACK sequence Figure 26-19. I2C Slave, 7-bit Address, Transmission (AHEN = 1) 1 3 4 5 6 7 after not ACK CKP not cleared Master’s ACK response is copied to SSPxSTAT BF is automatically cleared after 8th falling edge of SCL 2 8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmitting Data 9 ACK P Master sends Stop condition Rev. 30-00029A 4/10/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 449 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.5.4 Slave Mode 10-bit Address Reception This section describes a standard sequence of events for the MSSP module configured as an I2C slave in 10-bit Addressing mode. Figure 26-20 is used as a visual reference for this description. This is a step by step process of what must be done by slave software to accomplish I2C communication. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Bus starts Idle. Master sends Start condition; S bit is set; SSPxIF is set if interrupt on Start detect is enabled. Master sends matching high address with R/W bit clear; UA bit is set. Slave sends ACK and SSPxIF is set. Software clears the SSPxIF bit. Software reads received address from SSPxBUF clearing the BF flag. Slave loads low address into SSPxADD, releasing SCL. Master sends matching low address byte to the slave; UA bit is set. Important:  Updates to the SSPxADD register are not allowed until after the ACK sequence. 9. Slave sends ACK and SSPxIF is set. Important:  If the low address does not match, SSPxIF and UA are still set so that the slave software can set SSPxADD back to the high address. BF is not set because there is no match. CKP is unaffected. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 26.5.5 Slave clears SSPxIF. Slave reads the received matching address from SSPxBUF clearing BF. Slave loads high address into SSPxADD. Master clocks a data byte to the slave and clocks out the slaves ACK on the ninth SCL pulse; SSPxIF is set. If SEN bit is set, CKP is cleared by hardware and the clock is stretched. Slave clears SSPxIF. Slave reads the received byte from SSPxBUF clearing BF. If SEN is set the slave sets CKP to release the SCL. Steps 13-17 repeat for each received byte. Master sends Stop to end the transmission. 10-bit Addressing with Address or Data Hold Reception using 10-bit addressing with AHEN or DHEN set is the same as with 7-bit modes. The only difference is the need to update the SSPxADD register using the UA bit. All functionality, specifically when the CKP bit is cleared and SCL line is held low are the same. Figure 26-21 can be used as a reference of a slave in 10-bit addressing with AHEN set. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 450 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-22 shows a standard waveform for a slave transmitter in 10-bit Addressing mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 451 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet CKP UA BF SSPxIF SCL SDA S 1 1 2 1 5 6 7 0 A9 A8 8 Set by hardware on 9th falling edge 4 1 When UA = 1; SCL is held low 9 ACK If address matches SSPxADD it is loaded into SSPxBUF 3 1 Receive First Address Byte 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 Software updates SSPxADD and releases SCL 2 9 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK Receive Second Address Byte Receive Data 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 3 4 5 6 7 Data is read from SSPxBUF SCL is held low while CKP = 0 2 8 9 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK Receive Data Set by software, When SEN = 1; releasing SCL CKP is cleared after 9th falling edge of received byte Receive address is read from SSPxBUF Cleared by software 2 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 ACK Figure 26-20. I2C Slave, 10-bit Address, Reception (SEN = 1, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) P Master sends Stop condition Rev. 30-000030A 4/3/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 452 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  Datasheet ACKTIM CKP UA ACKDT BF SSPxIF 1 SCL S 1 SDA 2 1 5 0 6 A9 7 A8 Set by hardware on 9th falling edge 4 1 8 R/W = 0 ACKTIM is set by hardware on 8th falling edge of SCL If when AHEN = 1; on the 8th falling edge of SCL of an address byte, CKP is cleared Slave software clears ACKDT to ACK the received byte 3 1 Receive First Address Byte 9 ACK UA 2 3 A5 4 A4 6 A2 7 A1 Update to SSPxADD is not allowed until 9th falling edge of SCL SSPxBUF can be read anytime before the next received byte 5 A3 Receive Second Address Byte A6 Cleared by software 1 A7 8 A0 Figure 26-21. I2C Slave, 10-bit Address, Reception (SEN = 0, AHEN = 1, DHEN = 0) 9 ACK UA 2 D6 3 D5 4 D4 6 D2 Set CKP with software releases SCL 7 D1 Update of SSPxADD, clears UA and releases SCL 5 D3 Receive Data Cleared by software 1 D7 8 9 2 D6 D5 Received data is read from SSPxBUF 1 D0 ACK D7 Receive Data Rev. 30-000031A 4/3/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 453 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  Datasheet D/A R/W ACKSTAT CKP UA BF SSPxIF 4 5 6 7 Set by hardware 3 Indicates an address has been received UA indicates SSPxADD must be updated SSPxBUF loaded with received address 2 8 9 1 SCL S Receiving Address R/W = 0 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 ACK SDA 3 4 5 6 7 8 After SSPxADD is updated, UA is cleared and SCL is released Cleared by software 2 9 1 4 5 6 7 8 Set by hardware 2 3 R/W is copied from the matching address byte When R/W = 1; CKP is cleared on 9th falling edge of SCL High address is loaded back into SSPxADD Received address is read from SSPxBUF Sr 1 1 1 1 0 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1 A0 ACK 1 Receive First Address Byte Receiving Second Address Byte Master sends Restart event Figure 26-22. I2C Slave, 10-bit Address, Transmission (SEN = 0, AHEN = 0, DHEN = 0) 9 ACK 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Masters not ACK is copied Set by software releases SCL Data to transmit is loaded into SSPxBUF 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Transmitting Data Byte 9 P Master sends Stop condition ACK = 1 Master sends not ACK Rev. 30-000032A 4/3/2017 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 454 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.5.6 Clock Stretching Clock stretching occurs when a device on the bus holds the SCL line low, effectively pausing communication. The slave may stretch the clock to allow more time to handle data or prepare a response for the master device. A master device is not concerned with stretching as anytime it is active on the bus and not transferring data it is stretching. Any stretching done by a slave is invisible to the master software and handled by the hardware that generates SCL. The CKP bit is used to control stretching in software. Any time the CKP bit is cleared, the module will wait for the SCL line to go low and then hold it. Setting CKP will release SCL and allow more communication. 26.5.6.1 Normal Clock Stretching Following an ACK if the R/W bit is set, a read request, the slave hardware will clear CKP. This allows the slave time to update SSPxBUF with data to transfer to the master. If the SEN bit is set, the slave hardware will always stretch the clock after the ACK sequence. Once the slave is ready; CKP is set by software and communication resumes. Important:  1. The BF bit has no effect on if the clock will be stretched or not. This is different than previous versions of the module that would not stretch the clock, clear CKP, if SSPxBUF was read before the ninth falling edge of SCL. 2. Previous versions of the module did not stretch the clock for a transmission if SSPxBUF was loaded before the ninth falling edge of SCL. It is now always cleared for read requests. 26.5.6.2 10-bit Addressing Mode In 10-bit Addressing mode, when the UA bit is set, the clock is always stretched. This is the only time the SCL is stretched without CKP being cleared. SCL is released immediately after a write to SSPxADD. Important:  Previous versions of the module did not stretch the clock if the second address byte did not match. 26.5.6.3 Byte NACKing When the AHEN bit is set; CKP is cleared by hardware after the eighth falling edge of SCL for a received matching address byte. When the DHEN bit is set; CKP is cleared after the eighth falling edge of SCL for received data. Stretching after the eighth falling edge of SCL allows the slave to look at the received address or data and decide if it wants to ACK the received data. 26.5.7 Clock Synchronization and the CKP bit Any time the CKP bit is cleared, the module will wait for the SCL line to go low and then hold it. However, clearing the CKP bit will not assert the SCL output low until the SCL output is already sampled low. Therefore, the CKP bit will not assert the SCL line until an external I2C master device has already asserted the SCL line. The SCL output will remain low until the CKP bit is set and all other devices on the I2C bus have released SCL. This ensures that a write to the CKP bit will not violate the minimum high time requirement for SCL (see the following figure). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 455 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-23. Clock Synchronization Timing Rev. 30-000033A 4/3/2017 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 SDA DX ‚ – 1 DX SCL Master device asserts clock CKP Master device releases clock WR SSPxCON1 26.5.8 General Call Address Support The addressing procedure for the I2C bus is such that the first byte after the Start condition usually  determines which device will be the slave addressed by the master device. The exception is the general call address which can address all devices. When this address is used, all devices should, in theory, respond with an acknowledge. The general call address is a reserved address in the I2C protocol, defined as address 0x00. When the GCEN bit is set, the slave module will automatically ACK the reception of this address regardless of the value stored in SSPxADD. After the slave clocks in an address of all zeros with the R/W bit clear, an interrupt is generated and slave software can read SSPxBUF and respond. The following figure shows a general call reception sequence. Figure 26-24. Slave Mode General Call Address Sequence Rev. 30-000034A 4/3/2017 Address is compared to General Call Address after ACK, set interrupt R/W = 0 ACK D7 General Call Address SDA SCL S 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 Receiving Data ACK D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 SSPxIF BF (SSPxSTAT) Cleared by software SSPxBUF is read GCEN (SSPxCON2) ’1’ In 10-bit Address mode, the UA bit will not be set on the reception of the general call address. The slave will prepare to receive the second byte as data, just as it would in 7-bit mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 456 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module If the AHEN bit is set, just as with any other address reception, the slave hardware will stretch the clock after the eighth falling edge of SCL. The slave must then set its ACKEN value and release the clock with communication progressing as it would normally. 26.5.9 SSP Mask Register An SSP Mask register (SSPxMSK) is available in I2C Slave mode as a mask for the value held in the SSPSR register during an address comparison operation. A zero (‘0’) bit in the SSPxMSK register has the effect of making the corresponding bit of the received address a “don’t care”. This register is reset to all ‘1’s upon any Reset condition and, therefore, has no effect on standard SSP operation until written with a mask value. The SSP Mask register is active during: • • 26.6 7-bit Address mode: address compare of A. 10-bit Address mode: address compare of A only. The SSP mask has no effect during the reception of the first (high) byte of the address. I2C Master Mode Master mode is enabled by setting and clearing the appropriate SSPM bits and setting the SSPEN bit. In Master mode, the SDA and SCK pins must be configured as inputs. The MSSP peripheral hardware will override the output driver TRIS controls when necessary to drive the pins low. Master mode of operation is supported by interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle. In Firmware Controlled Master mode, user code conducts all I2C bus operations based on Start and Stop bit condition detection. Start and Stop condition detection is the only active circuitry in this mode. All other communication is done by the user software directly manipulating the SDA and SCL lines. The following events will cause the SSP Interrupt Flag bit, SSPxIF, to be set (SSP interrupt, if enabled): • • • • • Start condition detected Stop condition detected Data transfer byte transmitted/received Acknowledge transmitted/received Repeated Start generated Important:  1. The MSSP module, when configured in I2C Master mode, does not allow queuing of events. For instance, the user is not allowed to initiate a Start condition and immediately write the SSPxBUF register to initiate transmission before the Start condition is complete. In this case, the SSPxBUF will not be written to and the WCOL bit will be set, indicating that a write to the SSPxBUF did not occur. 2. Master mode suspends Start/Stop detection when sending the Start/Stop condition by means of the SEN/PEN control bits. The SSPxIF bit is set at the end of the Start/Stop generation when hardware clears the control bit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 457 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.6.1 I2C Master Mode Operation The master device generates all of the serial clock pulses and the Start and Stop conditions. A transfer is ended with a Stop condition or with a Repeated Start condition. Since the Repeated Start condition is also the beginning of the next serial transfer, the I2C bus will not be released. In Master Transmitter mode, serial data is output through SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. The first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the receiving device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘0’. Serial data is transmitted eight bits at a time. After each byte is transmitted, an Acknowledge bit is received. Start and Stop conditions are output to indicate the beginning and the end of a serial transfer. In Master Receive mode, the first byte transmitted contains the slave address of the transmitting device (7 bits) and the R/W bit. In this case, the R/W bit will be logic ‘1’. Thus, the first byte transmitted is a 7-bit slave address followed by a ‘1’ to indicate the receive bit. Serial data is received via SDA, while SCL outputs the serial clock. Serial data is received eight bits at a time. After each byte is received, an Acknowledge bit is transmitted. Start and Stop conditions indicate the beginning and end of transmission. A Baud Rate Generator is used to set the clock frequency output on SCL. See Baud Rate Generator for more detail. 26.6.2 Clock Arbitration Clock arbitration occurs when the master, during any receive, transmit or Repeated Start/Stop condition, releases the SCL pin (SCL allowed to float high). When the SCL pin is allowed to float high, the Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is suspended from counting until the SCL pin is actually sampled high. When the SCL pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD and begins counting. This ensures that the SCL high time will always be at least one BRG rollover count in the event that the clock is held low by an external device as shown in the following figure. Figure 26-25. Baud Rate Generator Timing with Clock Arbitration Rev. 30-000035A 4/3/2017 SDA DX ‚ – 1 DX SCL deasserted but slave holds SCL low (clock arbitration) SCL allowed to transition high SCL BRG decrements on Q2 and Q4 cycles BRG Value 03h 02h 01h 00h (hold off) 03h 02h SCL is sampled high, reload takes place and BRG starts its count BRG Reload 26.6.3 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Start, Restart, Stop, Receive or Transmit sequence is in progress, the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). Any time the WCOL bit is set it indicates that an action on SSPxBUF was attempted while the module was not idle. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 458 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Important:  Because queuing of events is not allowed, writing to the lower five bits of SSPxCON2 is disabled until the Start condition is complete. 26.6.4 I2C Master Mode Start Condition Timing To initiate a Start condition (Figure 26-26), the user sets the SEN Start Enable bit. If the SDA and SCL pins are sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD and starts its count. If SCL and SDA are both sampled high when the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SDA pin is driven low. The action of the SDA being driven low while SCL is high is the Start condition and causes the S bit to be set. Following this, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded with the contents of SSPxADD and resumes its count. When the Baud Rate Generator times out (TBRG), the SEN bit will be automatically cleared by hardware; the Baud Rate Generator is suspended, leaving the SDA line held low and the Start condition is complete. Important:  1. If at the beginning of the Start condition, the SDA and SCL pins are already sampled low, or if during the Start condition, the SCL line is sampled low before the SDA line is driven low, a bus collision occurs, the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF, is set, the Start condition is aborted and the I2C module is reset into its Idle state. 2. The Philips I2C specification states that a bus collision cannot occur on a Start. Figure 26-26. First Start Bit Timing Rev. 30-000036A 4/3/2017 Write to SEN bit occurs here Set S bit (SSPxSTAT) At completion of Start bit, hardware clears SEN bit a nd set s SSPx I F bi t SDA = 1, SCL = 1 TBRG TBRG Write to SSPxBUF occurs here SDA 1st bit 2nd bit TBRG SCL S 26.6.5 TBRG I2C Master Mode Repeated Start Condition Timing A  Repeated Start condition (Figure 26-27) occurs when the RSEN bit is programmed high and the master state machine is no longer active. When the RSEN bit is set, the SCL pin is asserted low. When the SCL pin is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and begins counting. The SDA pin is released (brought high) for one Baud Rate Generator count (TBRG). When the Baud Rate Generator times out, if SDA is sampled high, the SCL pin will be deasserted (brought high). When SCL is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and begins counting. SDA and SCL must be sampled high for one TBRG. This action is then followed by assertion of the SDA pin (SDA = 0) for one TBRG while SCL is high. SCL is asserted low. Following this, the RSEN bit will be automatically cleared and the Baud Rate Generator will not be reloaded, leaving the SDA pin held low. As soon as a Start condition is detected on © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 459 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module the SDA and SCL pins, the S bit will be set. The SSPxIF bit will not be set until the Baud Rate Generator has timed out. Important:  1. If RSEN is programmed while any other event is in progress, it will not take effect. 2. A bus collision during the Repeated Start condition occurs if: – SDA is sampled low when SCL goes from low-to-high. – SCL goes low before SDA is asserted low. This may indicate that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’. Figure 26-27. Repeated Start Condition Waveform Rev. 30-000037A 4/10/2017 S bit set by hardware Write to SSPxCON2 occurs here SDA = 1, SCL (no change) At completion of Start bit, hardware clears the RSEN bit and sets SSPxIF SDA = 1, SCL = 1 TBRG TBRG TBRG 1st bit SDA Write to SSPxBUF occurs here TBRG SCL Sr TBRG Repeated Start 26.6.6 I2C Master Mode Transmission Transmission of a data byte, a 7-bit address or the other half of a 10-bit address is accomplished by simply writing a value to the SSPxBUF register. This action will set the Buffer Full flag bit, BF, and allow the Baud Rate Generator to begin counting and start the next transmission. Each bit of address/data will be  shifted out onto the SDA pin after the falling edge of SCL is asserted. SCL is held low for one Baud Rate Generator rollover count (TBRG). Data should be valid before SCL is released high. When the SCL pin is released high, it is held that way for TBRG. The data on the SDA pin must remain stable for that duration and some hold time after the next falling edge of SCL. After the eighth bit is shifted out (the falling edge of the eighth clock), the BF flag is cleared and the master releases SDA. This allows the slave device being addressed to respond with an ACK bit during the ninth bit time if an address match occurred, or if data was received properly. The status of ACK is written into the ACKSTAT bit on the rising edge of the ninth clock. If the master receives an Acknowledge, the Acknowledge Status bit, ACKSTAT, is cleared. If not, the bit is set. After the ninth clock, the SSPxIF bit is set and the master clock (Baud Rate Generator) is suspended until the next data byte is loaded into the SSPxBUF, leaving SCL low and SDA unchanged (Figure 26-28). After the write to the SSPxBUF, each bit of the address will be shifted out on the falling edge of SCL until all seven address bits and the R/W bit are completed. On the falling edge of the eighth clock, the master will release the SDA pin, allowing the slave to respond with an Acknowledge. On the falling edge of the ninth clock, the master will sample the SDA pin to see if the address was recognized by a slave. The status of the ACK bit is loaded into the ACKSTAT Status bit of the SSPxCON2 register. Following the falling edge of the ninth clock transmission of the address, the SSPxIF is set, the BF flag is cleared and © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 460 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module the Baud Rate Generator is turned off until another write to the SSPxBUF takes place, holding SCL low and allowing SDA to float. 26.6.6.1 BF Status Flag In Transmit mode, the BF bit is set when the CPU writes to SSPxBUF and is cleared when all eight bits are shifted out. 26.6.6.2 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a transmit is already in progress (i.e., SSPSR is still shifting out a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). The WCOL bit must be cleared by software before the next transmission. 26.6.6.3 ACKSTAT Status Flag In Transmit mode, the ACKSTAT bit is cleared when the slave has sent an Acknowledge (ACK = 0) and is set when the slave does not Acknowledge (ACK = 1). A slave sends an Acknowledge when it has recognized its address (including a general call), or when the slave has properly received its data. 26.6.6.4 Typical transmit sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. The user generates a Start condition by setting the SEN bit. SSPxIF is set by hardware on completion of the Start. SSPxIF is cleared by software. The MSSP module will wait the required start time before any other operation takes place. The user loads the SSPxBUF with the slave address to transmit. Address is shifted out the SDA pin until all eight bits are transmitted. Transmission begins as soon as SSPxBUF is written to. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. The user loads the SSPxBUF with eight bits of data. Data is shifted out the SDA pin until all eight bits are transmitted. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit. Steps 8-11 are repeated for all transmitted data bytes. The user generates a Stop or Restart condition by setting the PEN or RSEN bits. Interrupt is generated once the Stop/Restart condition is complete. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 461 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-28. I2C Master Mode Waveform (Transmission, 7 or 10-bit Address) Rev. 30-000038A 4/3/2017 Write SSPxCON2 SEN = 1 Start condition begins From slave, clear ACKSTAT bit SSPxCON2 SEN = 0 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 Transmitting Data or Second Half of 10-bit Address R/W = 0 Transmit Address to Slave SDA ACKSTAT in SSPxCON2 = 1 ACK = 0 A1 ACK D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 1 SCL held low while CPU responds to SSPxIF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SSPxBUF written with 7-bit address and R/W start transmit SCL 1 S 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 9 P SSPxIF Cleared by software service routine from SSP interrupt Cleared by software Cleared by software BF (SSPxSTAT) SSPxBUF is written by software SSPxBUF written SEN After Start condition, SEN cleared by hardware PEN R/W 26.6.7 I2C Master Mode Reception Master mode reception (Figure 26-29) is enabled by programming the RCEN Receive Enable bit. Important:  The MSSP module must be in an Idle state before the RCEN bit is set or the RCEN bit will be disregarded. The Baud Rate Generator begins counting and on each rollover, the state of the SCL pin changes (highto-low/low-to-high) and data is shifted into the SSPSR. After the falling edge of the eighth clock all the following events occur: • The receive enable flag is automatically cleared • The contents of the SSPSR are loaded into the SSPxBUF • The BF flag bit is set • • • The SSPxIF flag bit is set The Baud Rate Generator is suspended from counting The SCL pin is held low The MSSP is now in Idle state awaiting the next command. When the buffer is read by the CPU, the BF flag bit is automatically cleared. The user can then send an Acknowledge bit at the end of reception by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable, ACKEN bit. 26.6.7.1 BF Status Flag In receive operation, the BF bit is set when an address or data byte is loaded into SSPxBUF from SSPSR. It is cleared when the SSPxBUF register is read. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 462 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.6.7.2 SSPOV Status Flag In receive operation, the SSPOV bit is set when eight bits are received into the SSPSR while the BF flag bit is already set from a previous reception. 26.6.7.3 WCOL Status Flag If the user writes the SSPxBUF when a receive is already in progress (i.e., SSPSR is still shifting in a data byte), the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). 26.6.7.4 Typical Receive Sequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. The user generates a Start condition by setting the SEN bit. SSPxIF is set by hardware on completion of the Start. SSPxIF is cleared by software. User writes SSPxBUF with the slave address to transmit and the R/W bit set. Address is shifted out the SDA pin until all eight bits are transmitted. Transmission begins as soon as SSPxBUF is written to. The MSSP module shifts in the ACK bit from the slave device and writes its value into the ACKSTAT bit. The MSSP module generates an interrupt at the end of the ninth clock cycle by setting the SSPxIF bit. User sets the RCEN bit and the master clocks in a byte from the slave. After the eighth falling edge of SCL, SSPxIF and BF are set. Master clears SSPxIF and reads the received byte from SSPUF which clears BF. Master sets the ACK value to be sent to slave in the ACKDT bit and initiates the ACK by setting the ACKEN bit. Master’s ACK is clocked out to the slave and SSPxIF is set. User clears SSPxIF. Steps 8-13 are repeated for each received byte from the slave. Master sends a not ACK or Stop to end communication. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 463 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc.  S Datasheet RCEN ACKEN SSPOV BF (SSPxSTAT) SDA = 0, SCL = 1 while CPU responds to SSPxIF SSPxIF SCL SDA 1 A7 2 4 5 6 Cleared by software 3 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 Transmit Address to Slave 7 8 9 ACK Receiving Data from Slave 2 3 5 6 7 8 D0 9 ACK Receiving Data from Slave 2 3 4 RCEN cleared automatically 5 6 7 Cleared by software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Data shifted in on falling edge of CLK 1 ACK from Master SDA = ACKDT = 0 Cleared in software Set SSPxIF at end of receive 9 ACK is not sent ACK RCEN cleared automatically P Rev. 30-000039A 4/3/2017 Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of Acknowledge sequence Bus master terminates transfer Set P bit (SSPxSTAT) and SSPxIF PEN bit = 1 written here SSPOV is set because SSPxBUF is still full 8 D0 RCEN cleared automatically Set ACKEN, start Acknowledge sequence SDA = ACKDT = 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Last bit is shifted into SSPSR and contents are unloaded into SSPxBUF Cleared by software Set SSPxIF interrupt at end of receive 4 Cleared by software 1 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPxCON2 (RCEN = 1) A1 R/W RCEN = 1, start next receive ACK from Master SDA = ACKDT = 0 Write to SSPxCON2 to start Acknowledge sequence SDA = ACKDT (SSPxCON2) = 0 Master configured as a receiver by programming SSPxCON2 (RCEN = 1) SEN = 0 Write to SSPxBUF occurs here, RCEN cleared ACK from Slave automatically start XMIT Write to SSPxCON2(SEN = 1), begin Start condition Figure 26-29. I2C Master Mode Waveform (Reception, 7-bit Address) PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 40001843D-page 464 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.6.8 Acknowledge Sequence Timing An Acknowledge sequence is enabled by setting the Acknowledge Sequence Enable ACKEN bit. When this bit is set, the SCL pin is pulled low and the contents of the Acknowledge data bit are presented on the SDA pin. If the user wishes to generate an Acknowledge, then the ACKDT bit should be cleared. If not, the user should set the ACKDT bit before starting an Acknowledge sequence. The Baud Rate Generator then counts for one rollover period (TBRG) and the SCL pin is deasserted (pulled high). When the SCL pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator counts for TBRG. The SCL pin is then pulled low. Following this, the ACKEN bit is automatically cleared, the Baud Rate Generator is turned off and the MSSP module then goes into Idle mode. Figure 26-30. Acknowledge Sequence Waveform Acknowledge sequence starts here, write to SSPxCON2 ACKEN = 1, ACKDT = 0 ACKEN automatically cleared TBRG TBRG SDA D0 SCL Rev. 30-000040A 4/3/2017 ACK 8 9 SSPxIF SSPxIF set at the end of receive Cleared in software Cleared in software SSPxIF set at the end of Acknowledge sequence Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. 26.6.8.1 Acknowledge Write Collision If the user writes the SSPxBUF when an Acknowledge sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). 26.6.9 Stop Condition Timing A Stop bit is asserted on the SDA pin at the end of a receive/transmit by setting the Stop Sequence Enable PEN bit. At the end of a receive/transmit, the SCL line is held low after the falling edge of the ninth clock. When the PEN bit is set, the master will assert the SDA line low. When the SDA line is sampled low, the Baud Rate Generator is reloaded and counts down to ‘0’. When the Baud Rate Generator times out, the SCL pin will be brought high and one TBRG (Baud Rate Generator rollover count) later, the SDA pin will be deasserted. When the SDA pin is sampled high while SCL is high, the PP bit is set. One TBRG later, the PEN bit is cleared and the SSPxIF bit is set.  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 465 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-31. Stop Condition in Receive or Transmit Mode SCL = 1 for TBRG, followed by SDA = 1 for TBRG after SDA sampled high. P bit (SSPxSTAT) is set. Write to SSPxCON2, set PEN PEN bit (SSPxCON2) is cleared by hardware and the SSPxIF bit is set Falling edge of 9th clock TBRG SCL SDA Rev. 30-000041A 4/3/2017 ACK P TBRG TBRG TBRG SCL brought high after TBRG SDA asserted low before rising edge of clock to setup Stop condition Note: TBRG = one Baud Rate Generator period. 26.6.9.1 Write Collision on Stop  the user writes the SSPxBUF when a Stop sequence is in progress, then the WCOL bit is set and the If contents of the buffer are unchanged (the write does not occur). 26.6.10 Sleep Operation While in Sleep mode, the I2C slave module can receive addresses or data and when an address match or complete byte transfer occurs, wake the processor from Sleep (if the MSSP interrupt is enabled). 26.6.11 Effects of a Reset A Reset disables the MSSP module and terminates the current transfer. 26.6.12 Multi-Master Mode In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of the Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. The Stop (P) and Start (S) bits are cleared from a Reset or when the MSSP module is disabled. Control of the I2C bus may be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle, with both the S and P bits clear. When the bus is busy, enabling the SSP interrupt will generate the interrupt when the Stop condition occurs. In multi-master operation, the SDA line must be monitored for arbitration to see if the signal level is the expected output level. This check is performed by hardware with the result placed in the BCLxIF bit. The states where arbitration can be lost are: • • • • • Address Transfer Data Transfer A Start Condition A Repeated Start Condition An Acknowledge Condition 26.6.13 Multi -Master Communication, Bus Collision and Bus Arbitration Multi-Master mode support is achieved by bus arbitration. When the master outputs address/data bits onto the SDA pin, arbitration takes place when the master outputs a ‘1’ on SDA, by letting SDA float high and another master asserts a ‘0’. When the SCL pin floats high, data should be stable. If the expected data on SDA is a ‘1’ and the data sampled on the SDA pin is ‘0’, then a bus collision has taken place. The master will set the Bus Collision Interrupt Flag, BCLxIF and reset the I2C port to its Idle state (Figure 26-32). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 466 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module If a transmit was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the transmission is halted, the BF flag is cleared, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and the SSPxBUF can be written to. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. If a Start, Repeated Start, Stop or Acknowledge condition was in progress when the bus collision occurred, the condition is aborted, the SDA and SCL lines are deasserted and the respective control bits in the SSPxCON2 register are cleared. When the user services the bus collision Interrupt Service Routine and if the I2C bus is free, the user can resume communication by asserting a Start condition. The master will continue to monitor the SDA and SCL pins. If a Stop condition occurs, the SSPxIF bit will be set. A write to the SSPxBUF will start the transmission of data at the first data bit, regardless of where the transmitter left off when the bus collision occurred. In Multi-Master mode, the interrupt generation on the detection of Start and Stop conditions allows the determination of when the bus is free. Control of the I2C bus can be taken when the P bit is set, or the bus is Idle and the S and P bits are cleared. Figure 26-32. Bus Collision Timing for Transmit and Acknowledge Rev. 30-000042A 4/3/2017 Data changes while SCL = 0 SDA line pulled low by another source SDA released by master Sample SDA. While SCL is high, data does not match what is driven by the master. Bus collision has occurred. SDA SCL Set bus collision interrupt (BCLxIF) BCLxIF 26.6.13.1 Bus Collision During a Start Condition During a Start condition, a bus collision occurs if:  1. 2. SDA or SCL are sampled low at the beginning of the Start condition (Figure 26-33). SCL is sampled low before SDA is asserted low (Figure 26-34). During a Start condition, both the SDA and the SCL pins are monitored. If the SDA pin is already low, or the SCL pin is already low, then all of the following occur: • • • the Start condition is aborted, the BCLxIF flag is set and the MSSP module is reset to its Idle state (Figure 26-33). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 467 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-33. Bus Collision During Start Condition (SDA Only) Rev. 30-000043A 4/3/2017 SDA goes low before the SEN bit is set. Set BCLxIF, S bit and SSPxIF set because SDA = 0, SCL = 1. SDA SCL Set SEN, enable Start condition if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 SEN cleared automatically because of bus collision. SSPx module reset into Idle state. SEN SDA sampled low before Start condition. Set BCLxIF. S bit and SSPxIF set because SDA = 0, SCL = 1. BCLxIF SSPxIF and BCLxIF are cleared by software S SSPxIF SSPxIF and BCLxIF are cleared by software The Start condition begins with the SDA and SCL pins deasserted. When the SDA pin is sampled high, the Baud Rate Generator is loaded and counts down. If the SCL pin is sampled low while SDA is high, a bus collision occurs because it is assumed that another master is attempting to drive a data ‘1’ during the Start condition. Figure 26-34. Bus Collision During Start Condition (SCL = 0)  Rev. 30-000044A 4/3/2017 SDA = 0, SCL = 1 TBRG TBRG SDA Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 SCL SCL = 0 before SDA = 0, bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF. SEN SCL = 0 before BRG time-out, bus collision occurs. Set BCLxIF. BCLxIF Interrupt cleared by software ’0’ ’0’ SSPxIF ’0’ ’0’ S © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 468 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module If the SDA pin is sampled low during this count, the BRG is reset and the SDA line is asserted early (Figure 26-35). If, however, a ‘1’ is sampled on the SDA pin, the SDA pin is asserted low at the end of the BRG count. The Baud Rate Generator is then reloaded and counts down to zero; if the SCL pin is sampled as ‘0’ during this time, a bus collision does not occur. At the end of the BRG count, the SCL pin is asserted low. Figure 26-35. BRG Reset Due to SDA Arbitration During Start Condition Rev. 30-000045A 4/10/2017 SDA = 0, SCL = 1 Set S Less than TBRG SDA Set SSPxIF TBRG SDA pulled low by other master. Reset BRG and assert SDA. SCL S SCL pulled low after BRG time out SEN BCLxIF Set SEN, enable Start sequence if SDA = 1, SCL = 1 ’0’ S SSPxIF SDA = 0, SCL = 1, set SSPxIF Interrupts cleared by software Important:  The reason that bus collision is not a factor during a Start condition is that no two bus masters can assert a Start condition at the exact same time. Therefore, one master will always assert SDA before the other. This condition does not cause a bus collision because the two masters must be allowed to arbitrate the first address following the Start condition. If the address is the same, arbitration must be allowed to continue into the data portion, Repeated Start or Stop conditions. 26.6.13.2 Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition During a Repeated Start condition, a bus collision occurs if:  1. 2. A low level is sampled on SDA when SCL goes from low level to high level (Case 1). SCL goes low before SDA is asserted low, indicating that another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’ (Case 2). When the user releases SDA and the pin is allowed to float high, the BRG is loaded with SSPxADD and counts down to zero. The SCL pin is then deasserted and when sampled high, the SDA pin is sampled. If SDA is low, a bus collision has occurred (i.e., another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘0’, Figure 26-36). If SDA is sampled high, the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. If SDA goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out, no bus collision occurs because no two masters can assert SDA at exactly the same time. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 469 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Figure 26-36. Bus Collision During a Repeated Start Condition (Case 1) Rev. 30-000046A 4/3/2017 SDA SCL Sample SDA when SCL goes high. If SDA = 0, set BCLxIF and release SDA and SCL. RSEN BCLxIF Cleared by software S ’0’ SSPxIF ’0’ If SCL goes from high-to-low before the BRG times out and SDA has not already been asserted, a bus collision occurs. In this case, another master is attempting to transmit a data ‘1’ during the Repeated Start condition, see Figure 26-37. If, at the end of the BRG time out, both SCL and SDA are still high, the SDA pin is driven low and the BRG is reloaded and begins counting. At the end of the count, regardless of the status of the SCL pin, the SCL pin is driven low and the Repeated Start condition is complete. Figure 26-37. Bus Collision During Repeated Start Condition (Case 2) Rev. 30-000047A 4/3/2017 TBRG TBRG SDA SCL BCLxIF SCL goes low before SDA, set BCLxIF. Release SDA and SCL. Interrupt cleared by software RSEN  ’0’ S SSPxIF 26.6.13.3 Bus Collision During a Stop Condition  Bus collision occurs during a Stop condition if: 1. 2. After the SDA pin has been deasserted and allowed to float high, SDA is sampled low after the BRG has timed out (Case 1). After the SCL pin is deasserted, SCL is sampled low before SDA goes high (Case 2). The Stop condition begins with SDA asserted low. When SDA is sampled low, the SCL pin is allowed to float. When the pin is sampled high (clock arbitration), the Baud Rate Generator is loaded with SSPxADD © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 470 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module and counts down to zero. After the BRG times out, SDA is sampled. If SDA is sampled low, a bus collision has occurred. This is due to another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 26-38). If the SCL pin is sampled low before SDA is allowed to float high, a bus collision occurs. This is another case of another master attempting to drive a data ‘0’ (Figure 26-39). Figure 26-38. Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 1) Rev. 30-000048A 4/3/2017 TBRG TBRG TBRG SDA SDA sampled low after TBRG, set BCLxIF SDA asserted low SCL PEN BCLxIF P ’0’ SSPxIF ’0’ Figure 26-39. Bus Collision During a Stop Condition (Case 2) Rev. 30-000049A 4/3/2017 TBRG TBRG TBRG SDA SCL goes low before SDA goes high, set BCLxIF Assert SDA SCL PEN BCLxIF 26.7 P ’0’ SSPxIF ’0’ Baud Rate Generator The MSSP module has a Baud Rate Generator available for clock generation in both I2C and SPI Master modes. The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) reload value is placed in the SSPxADD register. When a write occurs to SSPxBUF, the Baud Rate Generator will automatically begin counting down. Once the given operation is complete, the internal clock will automatically stop counting and the clock pin will remain in its last state. An internal signal “Reload” shown in Figure 26-40 triggers the value from SSPxADD to be loaded into the BRG counter. This occurs twice for each oscillation of the module clock line. The logic dictating when the reload signal is asserted depends on the mode in which the MSSP is being operated.   © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 471 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Table 26-1 illustrates clock rates based on instruction cycles and the BRG value loaded into SSPxADD. MSSP Baud Rate Generator Frequency Equation ������ = ���� 4 × ������� + 1` Figure 26-40. Baud Rate Generator Block Diagram Rev. 30-000050A 4/3/2017 SSPM SSPM Reload SCL Control SSPxADD Reload SSPCLK BRG Down Counter F OSC/2 Important:  Values of 0x00, 0x01 and 0x02 are not valid for SSPxADD when used as a Baud Rate Generator for I2C. This is an implementation limitation. Table 26-1. MSSP Clock Rate w/BRG FOSC FCY BRG Value Fclock (2 Rollovers of BRG) 32 MHz 8 MHz 13h 400 kHz 32 MHz 8 MHz 19h 308 kHz 32 MHz 8 MHz 4Fh 100 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 09h 400 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 0Ch 308 kHz 16 MHz 4 MHz 27h 100 kHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 09h 100 kHz Note:  Refer to the I/O port electrical specifications in the electrical specifications section, Internal Oscillator Parameters, to ensure the system is designed to support Iol requirements.  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 472 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.8 Register Summary: MSSP Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F92 SSP1BUF 7:0 0x0F93 SSP1ADD 7:0 0x0F94 SSP1MSK 7:0 0x0F95 SSP1STAT 7:0 SMP CKE D/A P 0x0F96 SSP1CON1 7:0 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP 0x0F97 SSP1CON2 7:0 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN 0x0F98 SSP1CON3 7:0 ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT 26.9 BUF[7:0] ADD[7:0] MSK[6:0] MSK0 S R/W UA BF PEN RSEN SEN SBCDE AHEN DHEN SSPM[3:0] Register Definitions: MSSP Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 473 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.1 SSPxSTAT Name:  Offset:  SSPxSTAT 0x0F95 MSSP Status Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SMP CKE D/A P S R/W UA BF R/W R/W RO RO RO RO RO RO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – SMP Slew Rate Control bit Value 1 0 0 1 0 Mode SPI Master SPI Master SPI Slave I2C I2C Description Input data is sampled at the end of data output time Input data is sampled at the middle of data output time Keep this bit cleared in SPI Slave mode Slew rate control is disabled for Standard Speed mode (100 kHz and 1 MHz) Slew rate control is enabled for High-Speed mode (400 kHz) Bit 6 – CKE SPI: Clock select bit(4) I2C: SMBus Select bit Value 1 0 1 0 Mode SPI SPI I2C I2C Description Transmit occurs on the transition from active to Idle clock state Transmit occurs on the transition from Idle to active clock state Enables SMBus-specific inputs Disables SMBus-specific inputs Bit 5 – D/A Data/Address bit Value x 1 0 Mode SPI or I2C Master I2C Slave I2C Slave Description Reserved Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was data Indicates that the last byte received or transmitted was address Bit 4 – P Stop bit(1) Value x 1 0 Mode SPI I2C I2C Description Reserved Stop bit was detected last Stop bit was not detected last Bit 3 – S Start bit(1) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 474 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Value x 1 0 Mode SPI I2C I2C Description Reserved Start bit was detected last Start bit was not detected last Bit 2 – R/W Read/Write Information bit(2,3) Value x 1 0 1 0 Mode SPI I2C Slave I2C Slave I2C Master I2C Master Description Reserved Read Write Transmit is in progress Transmit is not in progress Bit 1 – UA Update Address bit (10-Bit Slave mode only) Value x 1 0 Mode Description All other modes Reserved I2C 10-bit Slave Indicates that the user needs to update the address in the SSPxADD register I2C 10-bit Slave Address does not need to be updated Bit 0 – BF Buffer Full Status bit(5) Value 1 0 1 0 Mode I2C Transmit I2C Transmit SPI and I2C Receive SPI and I2C Receive Description Character written to SSPxBUF has not been sent SSPxBUF is ready for next character Received character in SSPxBUF has not been read Received character in SSPxBUF has been read Note:  1. This bit is cleared on Reset and when SSPEN is cleared. 2. In I2C Slave mode this bit holds the R/W bit information following the last address match. This bit is only valid from the address match to the next Start bit, Stop bit or not ACK bit. 3. ORing this bit with SEN, RSEN, PEN, RCEN or ACKEN will indicate if the MSSP is in Active mode. 4. Polarity of clock state is set by the CKP bit. 5. I2C receive status does not include ACK and Stop bits. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 475 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.2 SSPxCON1 Name:  Offset:  SSPxCON1 0x0F96 MSSP Control Register 1 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP 3 R/W/HS R/W/HS R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 2 1 0 R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 SSPM[3:0] Bit 7 – WCOL Write Collision Detect bit Value 1 Mode SPI 1 I2C Master transmit 1 I2C Slave transmit 0 SPI or I2C Master or Slave transmit Master or Slave receive x Description A write to the SSPxBUF register was attempted while the previous byte was still transmitting (must be cleared by software) A write to the SSPxBUF register was attempted while the I2C conditions were not valid for a transmission to be started (must be cleared by software) The SSPxBUF register is written while it is still transmitting the previous word (must be cleared in software) No collision Don't care Bit 6 – SSPOV Receive Overflow Indicator bit(1) Value 1 Mode SPI Slave 1 I2C Receive 0 SPI Slave or I2C Receive SPI Master or I2C Master transmit x Description A byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous byte. The user must read SSPxBUF, even if only transmitting data, to avoid setting overflow. (must be cleared in software) A byte is received while the SSPxBUF register is still holding the previous byte (must be cleared in software) No overflow Don't care Bit 5 – SSPEN Master Synchronous Serial Port Enable bit.(2) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 476 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Value 1 1 0 Mode Description SPI Enables the serial port. The SCKx, SDOx, SDIx, and SSx pin selections must be made with the PPS controls. Each signal must be configured with the corresponding TRIS control to the direction appropriate for the mode selected. I2C Enables the serial port. The SDAx and SCLx pin selections must be made with the PPS controls. Since both signals are bi-directional the PPS input pin and PPS output pin selections must be made that specify the same pin. Both pins must be configured as inputs with the corresponding TRIS controls. All Disables serial port and configures these pins as I/O port pins Bit 4 – CKP SCK Release Control bit Value 1 0 1 0 x Mode SPI SPI I2C Slave I2C Slave I2C Master Description Idle state for the clock is a high level Idle state for the clock is a low level Releases clock Holds clock low (clock stretch), used to ensure data setup time Unused in this mode Bits 3:0 – SSPM[3:0] Master Synchronous Serial Port Mode Select bits(4) Value 1111 1110 1101 1100 1011 1010 1001 1000 0111 0110 0101 0100 0011 0010 0001 0000 Description I2C Slave mode: 10-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled I2C Slave mode: 7-bit address with Start and Stop bit interrupts enabled Reserved - do not use Reserved - do not use I2C Firmware Controlled Master mode (slave Idle) SPI Master mode: Clock = FOSC/(4*(SSPxADD+1)). SSPxADD must be greater than 0.(3) Reserved - do not use I2C Master mode: Clock = FOSC/(4 * (SSPxADD + 1)) I2C Slave mode: 10-bit address I2C Slave mode: 7-bit address SPI Slave mode: Clock = SCKx pin. SSx pin control is disabled SPI Slave mode: Clock = SCKx pin. SSx pin control is enabled SPI Master mode: Clock = TMR2 output/2 SPI Master mode: Clock = Fosc/64 SPI Master mode: Clock = Fosc/16 SPI Master mode: Clock = Fosc/4 Note:  1. In Master mode, the overflow bit is not set since each new reception (and transmission) is initiated by writing to the SSPxBUF register. 2. When enabled, these pins must be properly configured as inputs or outputs. 3. SSPxADD = 0 is not supported. 4. Bit combinations not specifically listed here are either reserved or implemented in I2C mode only. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 477 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.3 SSPxCON2 Name:  Offset:  SSPxCON2 0x0F97 Control Register for I2C Operation Only MSSP Control Register 2 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN PEN RSEN SEN R/W R/W/HC R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – GCEN General Call Enable bit (Slave mode only) Value x 1 0 Mode Master mode Slave mode Slave mode Description Don't care General call is enabled General call is not enabled Bit 6 – ACKSTAT Acknowledge Status bit (Master Transmit mode only) Value 1 0 Description Acknowledge was not received from slave Acknowledge was received from slave Bit 5 – ACKDT Acknowledge Data bit (Master Receive mode only)(1) Value 1 0 Description Not Acknowledge Acknowledge Bit 4 – ACKEN Acknowledge Sequence Enable bit(2) Value 1 0 Description Initiates Acknowledge sequence on SDAx and SCLx pins and transmits ACKDT data bit; automatically cleared by hardware Acknowledge sequence is Idle Bit 3 – RCEN Receive Enable bit (Master Receive mode only)(2) Value 1 0 Description Enables Receive mode for I2C Receive is Idle Bit 2 – PEN Stop Condition Enable bit (Master mode only)(2) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 478 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Value 1 0 Description Initiates Stop condition on SDAx and SCLx pins; automatically cleared by hardware Stop condition is Idle Bit 1 – RSEN Repeated Start Condition Enable bit (Master mode only)(2) Value 1 0 Description Initiates Repeated Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins; automatically cleared by hardware Repeated Start condition is Idle Bit 0 – SEN Start Condition Enable bit (Master mode only)(2) Value 1 0 Description Initiates Start condition on SDAx and SCLx pins; automatically cleared by hardware Start condition is Idle Note:  1. The value that will be transmitted when the user initiates an Acknowledge sequence at the end of a receive. 2. If the I2C module is active, these bits may not be set (no spooling) and the SSPxBUF may not be written (or writes to the SSPxBUF are disabled). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 479 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.4 SSPxCON3 Name:  Offset:  SSPxCON3 0x0F98 MSSP Control Register 3 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT SBCDE AHEN DHEN R/HS/HC R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – ACKTIM Acknowledge Time Status bit Unused in Master mode. Value x 1 0 Mode SPI or I2C Master I2C Slave and AHEN = 1 or DHEN = 1 I2C Slave Description This bit is not used. 8th falling edge of SCL has occurred and the ACK/NACK state is active. ACK/NACK state is not active. Transitions low on on 9th rising edge of SCL. Bit 6 – PCIE Stop Condition Interrupt Enable bit(1) Value x 1 0 Mode SPI or SSPM = 1111 or 0111 SSPM ≠ 1111 and SSPM ≠ 0111 SSPM ≠ 1111 and SSPM ≠ 0111 Description Don't care. Enable interrupt on detection of Stop condition Stop detection interrupts are disabled Bit 5 – SCIE Start Condition Interrupt Enable bit Value x 1 0 Mode SPI or SSPM = 1111 or 0111 SSPM ≠ 1111 and SSPM ≠ 0111 SSPM ≠ 1111 and SSPM ≠ 0111 Description Don't care. Enable interrupt on detection of Start condition Start detection interrupts are disabled Bit 4 – BOEN Buffer Overwrite Enable bit(2) Value 1 0 1 Mode SPI SPI I2C 0 I2C Description SSPxBUF is updated every time a new data byte is available, ignoring the BF bit If a new byte is receive with BF set then SSPOV is set and SSPxBUF is not updated SSPxBUF is updated every time a new data byte is available, ignoring the SSPOV effect on updating the buffer SSPxBUF is only updated when SSPOV is clear Bit 3 – SDAHT SDA Hold Time Selection bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 480 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module Value x 1 0 Mode SPI I2C I2C Description Not used in SPI mode Minimum of 300ns hold time on SDA after the falling edge of SCL Minimum of 100ns hold time on SDA after the falling edge of SCL Bit 2 – SBCDE Slave Mode Bus Collision Detect Enable bit Unused in Master mode. Value x 1 0 Mode SPI or I2C Master I2C Slave I2C Slave Description Don't care Collision detection is enabled. Collision detection is not enabled Bit 1 – AHEN Address Hold Enable bit Value x 1 0 Mode Description 2 SPI or I C Master Don't care I2C Slave Address hold is enabled. As a result CKP is cleared after the 8th falling SCL edge of an address byte reception. Software must set the CKP bit to resume operation. I2C Slave Address hold is not enabled Bit 0 – DHEN Data Hold Enable bit Value x 1 0 Mode Description SPI or I2C Master Don't care I2C Slave Data hold is enabled. As a result CKP is cleared after the 8th falling SCL edge of a data byte reception. Software must set the CKP bit to resume operation. I2C Slave Data hold is not enabled Note:  1. This bit has no effect in Slave modes that Start and Stop condition detection is explicitly listed as enabled. 2. For daisy-chained SPI operation; allows the user to ignore all but the last received byte. SSPOV is still set when a new byte is received and BF = 1, but hardware continues to write the most recent byte to SSPxBUF. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 481 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.5 SSPxBUF Name:  Offset:  SSPxBUF 0x0F92 MSSP Data Buffer Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 BUF[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W x x x x x x x x Bits 7:0 – BUF[7:0] MSSP Input and Output Data Buffer bits © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 482 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.6 SSPxADD Name:  Offset:  SSPxADD 0x0F93 MSSP Baud Rate Divider and Address Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADD[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7:0 – ADD[7:0] • SPI and I2C Master: Baud rate divider • I2C Slave: Address bits Value 3 to 255 Mode SPI and I2C Master 2,4,6,8 I2C 10-bit Slave MS Address I2C 10-bit Slave LS Address I2C 7-bit Slave n 2*(1 to 127) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Description Baud rate divider. SCK/SCL pin clock period = ((n + 1) *4)/FOSC. Values less than 3 are not valid. Bits 7-3 and Bit 0 are not used and are don't care. Bits 2:1 are bits 9:8 of the 10-bit Slave Most Significant Address Bits 7:0 of 10-Bit Slave Least Significant Address Bit 0 is not used and is don't care. Bits 7:1 are the 7-bit Slave Address Datasheet 40001843D-page 483 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (MSSP) Master Synchronous Serial Port Module 26.9.7 SSPxMSK Name:  Offset:  SSPxMSK 0x0F94 MSSP Address Mask Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 MSK[6:0] Access Reset 0 MSK0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Bits 7:1 – MSK[6:0] Mask bits Value 1 0 Mode Description I2C Slave The received address bit n is compared to SSPxADD bit n to detect I2C address match I2C Slave The received address bit n is not used to detect I2C address match Bit 0 – MSK0 Mask bit for I2C 10-bit Slave mode Value 1 0 x Mode Description I2C 10-bit Slave The received address bit 0 is compared to SSPxADD bit 0 to detect I2C address match 2 I C 10-bit Slave The received address bit 0 is not used to detect I2C address match SPI or I2C 7-bit Don't care © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 484 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27. (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART) module is a serial I/O communications peripheral. It contains all the clock generators, shift registers and data buffers necessary to perform an input or output serial data transfer independent of device program execution. The EUSART, also known as a Serial Communications Interface (SCI), can be configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system or half-duplex synchronous system. Full-Duplex mode is useful for communications with peripheral systems, such as CRT terminals and personal computers. Half-Duplex Synchronous mode is intended for communications with peripheral devices, such as A/D or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs or other microcontrollers. These devices typically do not have internal clocks for baud rate generation and require the external clock signal provided by a master synchronous device. The EUSART module includes the following capabilities: • • • • • • • • • • • Full-duplex asynchronous transmit and receive Two-character input buffer One-character output buffer Programmable 8-bit or 9-bit character length Address detection in 9-bit mode Input buffer overrun error detection Received character framing error detection Half-duplex synchronous master Half-duplex synchronous slave Programmable clock polarity in synchronous modes Sleep operation The EUSART module implements the following additional features, making it ideally suited for use in Local Interconnect Network (LIN) bus systems: • • • Automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate Wake-up on Break reception 13-bit Break character transmit Block diagrams of the EUSART transmitter and receiver are shown in Figure 27-1 and Figure 27-2. The operation of the EUSART module consists of six registers: • • • • • • Transmit Status and Control (TXxSTA) Receive Status and Control (RCxSTA) Baud Rate Control (BAUDxCON) Baud Rate Value (SPxBRG) Receive Data Register (RCxREG) Transmit Data Register (TXxREG) The RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx input pins are selected with the RXxPPS and TXxPPS registers, respectively. TXx, CKx, and DTx output pins are selected with each pin’s RxyPPS register. Since the RX input is coupled with the DT output in Synchronous mode, it is the user’s responsibility to select the same pin for both of these functions when operating in Synchronous mode. The EUSART control logic will control the data direction drivers automatically. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 485 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Figure 27-1. EUSART Transmit Block Diagram Rev. 10-000 113C 2/15/201 7 Data bu s TXIE 8 Inte rrupt TXREG register SYNC CSRC TXIF 8 RxyPP S(1) TXEN CKx Pi n PPS 1 MSb LSb (8) 0 0 RXx/DTx Pin Pin Buffer and Control PPS Transmit Shift Register (TSR) CKPPS (2) TX_out Bau d Rate Gene rato r TRMT FOSC ÷n TX9 n BRG16 +1 SPB RG H SPB RG L Multiplier x4 x16 TX9D x64 SYNC 1 x 0 0 0 BRGH x 1 1 0 0 BRG16 x 1 0 1 0 0 TXx/CKx Pi n PPS 1 RxyPP S(2) SYNC CSRC Not e 1: In S ynchro nous mod e, the DT output an d RX inpu t PPS selectio ns should en able th e same pin. 2: In Master S yn chr onous mo de the TX output an d CK inpu t PPS selections shou ld e nable the sa me pin. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 486 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Figure 27-2. EUSART Receive Block Diagram Rev. 10-000 114B 2/15/201 7 CRE N OERR RXPPS (1) RSR Register MSb RXx/DTx pin Pin Buffer and Control PPS RCIDL SPE N Data Recove ry Stop (8) 7 LSb 1 0 Start SYNC CSRC PPS RX9 1 CKx Pi n 0 CKPPS (2) Bau d Rate Gene rato r FOSC ÷n FERR RX9D RCREG Register FIFO 8 BRG16 +1 SPB RG H SPB RG L Multiplier x4 x16 x64 SYNC 1 x 0 0 0 BRGH x 1 1 0 0 BRG16 x 1 0 1 0 n Data B us RCxIF RCxIE Inte rrupt Not e 1: In S ynchro nous mod e, the DT output an d RX inpu t PPS selectio ns should en able th e same pin. 2: In Master S yn chr onous mo de the TX output an d CK inpu t PPS selections shou ld e nable the sa me pin. 27.1 EUSART Asynchronous Mode The EUSART transmits and receives data using the standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. NRZ is implemented with two levels: a Voh Mark state which represents a ‘1’ data bit, and a Vol Space state which represents a ‘0’ data bit. NRZ refers to the fact that consecutively transmitted data bits of the same value stay at the output level of that bit without returning to a neutral level between each bit transmission. An NRZ transmission port idles in the Mark state. Each character transmission consists of one Start bit followed by eight or nine data bits and is always terminated by one or more Stop bits. The Start bit is always a space and the Stop bits are always marks. The most common data format is eight bits. Each transmitted bit persists for a period of 1/(Baud Rate). An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used to derive standard baud rate frequencies from the system oscillator. See Table 27-2 for examples of baud rate configurations. The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The EUSART’s transmitter and receiver are functionally independent, but share the same data format and baud rate. Parity is not supported by the hardware, but can be implemented in software and stored as the ninth data bit. 27.1.1 EUSART Asynchronous Transmitter The Figure 27-1 is a simplified representation of the transmitter. The heart of the transmitter is the serial Transmit Shift Register (TSR), which is not directly accessible by software. The TSR obtains its data from the transmit buffer, which is the TXxREG register. 27.1.1.1 Enabling the Transmitter The EUSART transmitter is enabled for asynchronous operations by configuring the following three control bits: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 487 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. • TXEN = 1 (enables the transmitter circuitry of the EUSART) • SYNC = 0 (configures the EUSART for asynchronous operation) • SPEN = 1 (enables the EUSART and automatically enables the output drivers for the RxyPPS selected as the TXx/CKx output) All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in their default state. If the TXx/CKx pin is shared with an analog peripheral, the analog I/O function must be disabled by clearing the corresponding ANSEL bit. Important:  The TXxIF Transmitter Interrupt flag is set when the TXEN enable bit is set and the TSR is idle. 27.1.1.2 Transmitting Data A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the TXxREG register. If this is the first character, or the previous character has been completely flushed from the TSR, the data in the TXxREG is immediately transferred to the TSR register. If the TSR still contains all or part of a previous character, the new character data is held in the TXxREG until the Stop bit of the previous character has been transmitted. The pending character in the TXxREG is then transferred to the TSR in one TCY immediately following the Stop bit transmission. The transmission of the Start bit, data bits and Stop bit sequence commences immediately following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the TXxREG. 27.1.1.3 Transmit Data Polarity The polarity of the transmit data can be controlled with the SCKP bit of the BAUDxCON register. The default state of this bit is ‘0’ which selects high true transmit idle and data bits. Setting the SCKP bit to ‘1’ will invert the transmit data resulting in low true idle and data bits. The SCKP bit controls transmit data polarity in Asynchronous mode only. In Synchronous mode, the SCKP bit has a different function. See the Clock Polarity section for more detail. 27.1.1.4 Transmit Interrupt Flag The TXxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register is set whenever the EUSART transmitter is enabled and no character is being held for transmission in the TXxREG. In other words, the TXxIF bit is only clear when the TSR is busy with a character and a new character has been queued for transmission in the TXxREG. The TXxIF flag bit is not cleared immediately upon writing TXxREG. TXxIF becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following the write execution. Polling TXxIF immediately following the TXxREG write will return invalid results. The TXxIF bit is read-only, it cannot be set or cleared by software. The TXxIF interrupt can be enabled by setting the TXxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIEx register. However, the TXxIF flag bit will be set whenever the TXxREG is empty, regardless of the state of TXxIE enable bit. To use interrupts when transmitting data, set the TXxIE bit only when there is more data to send. Clear the TXxIE interrupt enable bit upon writing the last character of the transmission to the TXxREG. 27.1.1.5 TSR Status The TRMT bit of the TXxSTA register indicates the status of the TSR register. This is a read-only bit. The TRMT bit is set when the TSR register is empty and is cleared when a character is transferred to the TSR register from the TXxREG. The TRMT bit remains clear until all bits have been shifted out of the TSR register. No interrupt logic is tied to this bit, so the user needs to poll this bit to determine the TSR status. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 488 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Important:  The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. 27.1.1.6 Transmitting 9-Bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character transmissions. When the TX9 bit of the TXxSTA register is set, the EUSART will shift nine bits out for each character transmitted. The TX9D bit of the TXxSTA register is the ninth, and Most Significant data bit. When transmitting 9-bit data, the TX9D data bit must be written before writing the eight Least Significant bits into the TXxREG. All nine bits of data will be transferred to the TSR shift register immediately after the TXxREG is written. A special 9-bit Address mode is available for use with multiple receivers. See the Address Detection section for more information on the Address mode. 27.1.1.7 Asynchronous Transmission Setup 1. Initialize the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)). 2. Select the transmit output pin by writing the appropriate value to the RxyPPS register. 3. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit. 4. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 control bit. A set ninth data bit will indicate that the eight Least Significant data bits are an address when the receiver is set for address detection. 5. Set SCKP bit if inverted transmit is desired. 6. Enable the transmission by setting the TXEN control bit. This will cause the TXxIF interrupt bit to be set. 7. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE interrupt enable bit of the PIEx register 8. An interrupt will occur immediately provided that the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register are also set. 9. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded into the TX9D data bit. 10. Load 8-bit data into the TXxREG register. This will start the transmission. Figure 27-3. Asynchronous Transmission Rev. 10-000 115A 2/7/201 7 Word 1 Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx pin TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg Empty Flag) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 1 1 TCY © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 489 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Figure 27-4. Asynchronous Transmission (Back-to-Back) Word 1 Rev. 10-000 116A 2/7/201 7 Word 2 Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx pin TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg Empty Flag) 27.1.2 Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Word 1 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 Word 2 1 TCY EUSART Asynchronous Receiver The Asynchronous mode is typically used in RS-232 systems. A simplified representation of the receiver is shown in the Figure 27-2. The data is received on the RXx/DTx pin and drives the data recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a high-speed shifter operating at 16 times the baud rate, whereas the serial Receive Shift Register (RSR) operates at the bit rate. When all eight or nine bits of the character have been shifted in, they are immediately transferred to a two character First-In-First-Out (FIFO) memory. The FIFO buffering allows reception of two complete characters and the start of a third character before software must start servicing the EUSART receiver. The FIFO and RSR registers are not directly accessible by software. Access to the received data is via the RCxREG register. 27.1.2.1 Enabling the Receiver The EUSART receiver is enabled for asynchronous operation by configuring the following three control bits: • CREN = 1 (enables the receiver circuitry of the EUSART) • SYNC = 0 (configures the EUSART for asynchronous operation) • SPEN = 1 (enables the EUSART) All other EUSART control bits are assumed to be in their default state. The user must set the RXxPPS register to select the RXx/DTx I/O pin and set the corresponding TRIS bit to configure the pin as an input. Important:  If the RX/DT function is on an analog pin, the corresponding ANSEL bit must be cleared for the receiver to function. 27.1.2.2 Receiving Data The receiver data recovery circuit initiates character reception on the falling edge of the first bit. The first bit, also known as the Start bit, is always a zero. The data recovery circuit counts one-half bit time to the center of the Start bit and verifies that the bit is still a zero. If it is not a zero then the data recovery circuit aborts character reception, without generating an error, and resumes looking for the falling edge of the Start bit. If the Start bit zero verification succeeds then the data recovery circuit counts a full bit time to the center of the next bit. The bit is then sampled by a majority detect circuit and the resulting ‘0’ or ‘1’ is shifted into the RSR. This repeats until all data bits have been sampled and shifted into the RSR. One final bit time is measured and the level sampled. This is the Stop bit, which is always a ‘1’. If the data © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 490 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. recovery circuit samples a ‘0’ in the Stop bit position then a framing error is set for this character, otherwise the framing error is cleared for this character. See the Receive Framing Error section for more information on framing errors. Immediately after all data bits and the Stop bit have been received, the character in the RSR is transferred to the EUSART receive FIFO and the RCxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register is set. The top character in the FIFO is transferred out of the FIFO by reading the RCxREG register. Important:  If the receive FIFO is overrun, no additional characters will be received until the overrun condition is cleared. See the Receive Overrun Error section for more information. 27.1.2.3 Receive Interrupts The RCxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register is set whenever the EUSART receiver is enabled and there is an unread character in the receive FIFO. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit is read-only, it cannot be set or cleared by software. RCxIF interrupts are enabled by setting all of the following bits: • • • RCxIE, Interrupt Enable bit of the PIEx register PEIE, Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit of the INTCON register GIE, Global Interrupt Enable bit of the INTCON register The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when there is an unread character in the FIFO, regardless of the state of interrupt enable bits. 27.1.2.4 Receive Framing Error Each character in the receive FIFO buffer has a corresponding framing error Status bit. A framing error indicates that a Stop bit was not seen at the expected time. The framing error status is accessed via the FERR bit of the RCxSTA register. The FERR bit represents the status of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. Therefore, the FERR bit must be read before reading the RCxREG. The FERR bit is read-only and only applies to the top unread character in the receive FIFO. A framing error (FERR = 1) does not preclude reception of additional characters. It is not necessary to clear the FERR bit. Reading the next character from the FIFO buffer will advance the FIFO to the next character and the next corresponding framing error. The FERR bit can be forced clear by clearing the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register which resets the EUSART. Clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register does not affect the FERR bit. A framing error by itself does not generate an interrupt. Important:  If all receive characters in the receive FIFO have framing errors, repeated reads of the RCxREG will not clear the FERR bit. 27.1.2.5 Receive Overrun Error The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An overrun error will be generated if a third character, in its entirety, is received before the FIFO is accessed. When this happens the OERR bit of the RCxSTA register is set. The characters already in the FIFO buffer can be read but no additional characters will be received until the error is cleared. The error must be cleared by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by resetting the EUSART by clearing the SPEN bit of the RCxSTA register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 491 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.1.2.6 Receiving 9-Bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When the RX9 bit of the RCxSTA register is set the EUSART will shift nine bits into the RSR for each character received. The RX9D bit of the RCxSTA register is the ninth and Most Significant data bit of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must be read before reading the eight Least Significant bits from the RCxREG. 27.1.2.7 Address Detection A special Address Detection mode is available for use when multiple receivers share the same transmission line, such as in RS-485 systems. Address detection is enabled by setting the ADDEN bit of the RCxSTA register. Address detection requires 9-bit character reception. When address detection is enabled, only characters with the ninth data bit set will be transferred to the receive FIFO buffer, thereby setting the RCxIF interrupt bit. All other characters will be ignored. Upon receiving an address character, user software determines if the address matches its own. Upon address match, user software must disable address detection by clearing the ADDEN bit before the next Stop bit occurs. When user software detects the end of the message, determined by the message protocol used, software places the receiver back into the Address Detection mode by setting the ADDEN bit. 27.1.2.8 Asynchronous Reception Setup 1. Initialize the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see the EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) section). 2. Set the RXxPPS register to select the RXx/DTx input pin. 3. Clear the ANSEL bit for the RXx pin (if applicable). 4. Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit. The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous operation. 5. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. 6. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. 7. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. 8. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a character is transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if the RCxIE interrupt enable bit was also set. 9. Read the RCxSTA register to get the error flags and, if 9-bit data reception is enabled, the ninth data bit. 10. Get the received eight Least Significant data bits from the receive buffer by reading the RCxREG register. 11. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. 27.1.2.9 9-Bit Address Detection Mode Setup This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems. To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address Detect Enable follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Initialize the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair and the BRGH and BRG16 bits to achieve the desired baud rate (see the EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) section). Set the RXxPPS register to select the RXx input pin. Clear the ANSEL bit for the RXx pin (if applicable). Enable the serial port by setting the SPEN bit. The SYNC bit must be clear for asynchronous operation. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 492 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. Enable 9-bit reception by setting the RX9 bit. Enable address detection by setting the ADDEN bit. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit. The RCxIF interrupt flag bit will be set when a character with the ninth bit set is transferred from the RSR to the receive buffer. An interrupt will be generated if the RCxIE interrupt enable bit is also set. Read the RCxSTA register to get the error flags. The ninth data bit will always be set. Get the received eight Least Significant data bits from the receive buffer by reading the RCxREG register. Software determines if this is the device’s address. If an overrun occurred, clear the OERR flag by clearing the CREN receiver enable bit. If the device has been addressed, clear the ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the receive buffer and generate interrupts. Figure 27-5. Asynchronous Reception Rev. 10-000 117A 2/8/201 7 RXx/DTx pin Start bit bit 0 Rcv Shift Reg Rcv Buffer Reg Word 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Start bit bit 0 Word 2 bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 1 RCxREG Start bit bit 0 Word 3 bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 2 RCxREG RCIDL Read RCxREG RCxIF (Interrupt flag) OERR Flag CREN (software clear) Note: This timing diagram shows three bytes appearing on the RXx input. The OERR flag is set because the RCxREG is not read before the third word is received. 27.1.3 Clock Accuracy with Asynchronous Operation The factory calibrates the internal oscillator block output (INTOSC). However, the INTOSC frequency may drift as VDD or temperature changes, and this directly affects the asynchronous baud rate. Two methods may be used to adjust the baud rate clock, but both require a reference clock source of some kind. The first (preferred) method uses the OSCTUNE register to adjust the INTOSC output. Adjusting the value in the OSCTUNE register allows for fine resolution changes to the system clock source. The other method adjusts the value in the Baud Rate Generator. This can be done automatically with the Auto-Baud Detect feature (see Auto-Baud Detect). There may not be fine enough resolution when adjusting the Baud Rate Generator to compensate for a gradual change in the peripheral clock frequency. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 493 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.2 EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG) The Baud Rate Generator (BRG) is an 8-bit or 16-bit timer that is dedicated to the support of both the asynchronous and synchronous EUSART operation. By default, the BRG operates in 8-bit mode. Setting the BRG16 bit of the BAUDxCON register selects 16-bit mode. The SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair determines the period of the free running baud rate timer. In Asynchronous mode the multiplier of the baud rate period is determined by both the BRGH bit of the TXxSTA register and the BRG16 bit of the BAUDxCON register. In Synchronous mode, the BRGH bit is ignored. Table 27-1 contains the formulas for determining the baud rate. Equation 27-1 provides a sample calculation for determining the baud rate and baud rate error. Typical baud rates and error values for various asynchronous modes have been computed and are shown in Table 27-2. It may be advantageous to use the high baud rate (BRGH = 1), or the 16-bit BRG (BRG16 = 1) to reduce the baud rate error. The 16-bit BRG mode is used to achieve slow baud rates for fast oscillator frequencies. The BRGH bit is used to achieve very high baud rates. Writing a new value to the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This ensures that the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow before outputting the new baud rate. If the system clock is changed during an active receive operation, a receive error or data loss may result. To avoid this problem, check the status of the RCIDL bit to make sure that the receive operation is idle before changing the system clock. Equation 27-1. Calculating Baud Rate Error For a device with Fosc of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, 8-bit BRG: ��������������� = Solving for SPxBRG: ������ = ������ = ���� 64 × ������ + 1 ���� −1 64 × ��������������� 16000000 −1 64 × 9600 ������ = 25.042 ≃ 25 ������������������ = 16000000 64 × 25 + 1 ������������������ = 9615 ����� = ����� = ������������������ − ��������������� ��������������� 9615 − 9600 9600 ����� = 0.16 % © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 494 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Table 27-1. Baud Rate Formulas Configuration Bits BRG/EUSART Mode Baud Rate Formula 0 8-bit/Asynchronous FOSC/[64 (n+1)] 0 1 8-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 0 16-bit/Asynchronous 0 1 1 16-bit/Asynchronous 1 0 x 8-bit/Synchronous 1 1 x 16-bit/Synchronous SYNC BRG16 BRGH 0 0 0 FOSC/[16 (n+1)] FOSC/[4 (n+1)] Note: x = Don’t care, n = value of SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair. Table 27-2. Sample Baud Rates for Asynchronous Modes SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 FOSC = 32.000 MHz FOSC = 20.000 MHz FOSC = 18.432 MHz FOSC = 11.0592 MHz BAUD RATE Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 — — — — — — — — — — — — 1200 — — — 1221 1.73 255 1200 0.00 239 1200 0.00 143 2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 129 2400 0.00 119 2400 0.00 71 9600 9615 0.16 51 9470 -1.36 32 9600 0.00 29 9600 0.00 17 10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 29 10286 -1.26 27 10165 -2.42 16 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 25 19.53k 1.73 15 19.20k 0.00 14 19.20k 0.00 8 57.6k 55.55k -3.55 3 — — — 57.60k 0.00 7 57.60k 0.00 2 115.2k — — — — — — — — — — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0 Fosc = 8.000 MHz Fosc = 4.000 MHz Fosc = 3.6864 MHz Fosc = 1.000 MHz BAUD RATE Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 — — — 300 0.16 207 300 0.00 191 300 0.16 51 1200 1202 0.16 103 1202 0.16 51 1200 0.00 47 1202 0.16 12 2400 2404 0.16 51 2404 0.16 25 2400 0.00 23 — — — 9600 9615 0.16 12 — — — 9600 0.00 5 — — — © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 495 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 10417 10417 0.00 11 10417 0.00 5 19.2k — — — — — — 57.6k — — — — — — 115.2k — — — — — — — — — — — — 19.20k 0.00 2 — — — 57.60k 0.00 0 — — — — — — — — — SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 BAUD RATE Fosc = 32.000 MHz Actual Rate Fosc = 20.000 MHz % SPBRG Error value (decimal) Actual Rate Fosc = 18.432 MHz Fosc = 11.0592 MHz % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 — — — — — — — — — — — — 1200 — — — — — — — — — — — — 2400 — — — — — — — — — — — — 9600 9615 0.16 207 9615 0.16 129 9600 0.00 119 9600 0.00 71 10417 10417 0.00 191 10417 0.00 119 10378 -0.37 110 10473 0.53 65 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 103 19.23k 0.16 64 19.20k 0.00 59 19.20k 0.00 35 57.6k 57.14k -0.79 34 56.82k -1.36 21 57.60k 0.00 19 57.60k 0.00 11 115.2k 117.64k 2.12 16 113.64k -1.36 10 115.2k 0.00 9 115.2k 0.00 5 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0 Fosc = 8.000 MHz Fosc = 4.000 MHz Fosc = 3.6864 MHz Fosc = 1.000 MHz BAUD RATE Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 — — — — — — — — — 300 0.16 207 1200 — — — 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 191 1202 0.16 51 2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 95 2404 0.16 25 9600 9615 0.16 51 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 23 — — — 10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 23 10473 0.53 21 19.2k 19231 0.16 25 19.23k 0.16 12 19.2k 0.00 11 — — — 57.6k 55556 -3.55 8 — — — 57.60k 0.00 3 — — — 115.2k — — — — 115.2k 0.00 1 — — — BAUD RATE — — 10417 0.00 5 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 Fosc = 32.000 MHz © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Fosc = 20.000 MHz Datasheet Fosc = 18.432 MHz Fosc = 11.0592 MHz 40001843D-page 496 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value (decimal) Actual Rate % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 300.0 0.00 6666 300.0 -0.01 4166 300.0 0.00 3839 300.0 0.00 2303 1200 1200 -0.02 3332 1200 -0.03 1041 1200 0.00 959 1200 0.00 575 2400 2401 -0.04 832 2399 -0.03 520 2400 0.00 479 2400 0.00 287 9600 9615 0.16 207 9615 0.16 129 9600 0.00 119 9600 0.00 71 10417 10417 0.00 191 10417 0.00 119 10378 -0.37 110 10473 0.53 65 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 103 19.23k 0.16 64 19.20k 0.00 59 19.20k 0.00 35 57.6k 57.14k -0.79 34 56.818 -1.36 21 57.60k 0.00 19 57.60k 0.00 11 115.2k 117.6k 2.12 16 113.636 -1.36 10 115.2k 0.00 9 115.2k 0.00 5 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1 Fosc = 8.000 MHz Fosc = 4.000 MHz Fosc = 3.6864 MHz Fosc = 1.000 MHz BAUD RATE Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 299.9 -0.02 1666 300.1 0.04 832 300.0 0.00 767 300.5 0.16 207 1200 1199 -0.08 416 1202 0.16 207 1200 0.00 191 1202 0.16 51 2400 2404 0.16 207 2404 0.16 103 2400 0.00 95 2404 0.16 25 9600 9615 0.16 51 9615 0.16 25 9600 0.00 23 — — — 10417 10417 0.00 47 10417 0.00 23 10473 0.53 21 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 25 19.23k 0.16 12 19.20k 0.00 11 — — — 57.6k 8 — — — 57.60k 0.00 3 — — — — — — — 115.2k 0.00 1 — — — 115.2k 55556 -3.55 — — 10417 0.00 5 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 Fosc = 32.000 MHz Fosc = 20.000 MHz Fosc = 18.432 MHz Fosc = 11.0592 MHz BAUD RATE Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 300.0 0.00 26666 300.0 0.00 16665 300.0 0.00 15359 300.0 0.00 9215 1200 1200 0.00 6666 1200 -0.01 4166 1200 0.00 3839 1200 0.00 2303 2400 2400 0.01 3332 2400 0.02 2082 2400 0.00 1919 2400 0.00 1151 9600 9604 0.04 832 9597 -0.03 520 9600 0.00 479 9600 0.00 287 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 497 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 10417 10417 0.00 767 10417 0.00 479 10425 0.08 441 10433 0.16 264 19.2k 19.18k -0.08 416 19.23k 0.16 259 19.20k 0.00 239 19.20k 0.00 143 57.6k 57.55k -0.08 138 57.47k -0.22 86 57.60k 0.00 79 57.60k 0.00 47 115.2k 115.9k 0.64 68 116.3k 0.94 42 115.2k 0.00 39 115.2k 0.00 23 SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1 Fosc = 8.000 MHz Fosc = 4.000 MHz Fosc = 3.6864 MHz Fosc = 1.000 MHz BAUD RATE Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Actual % SPBRG Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value Rate Error value (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) (decimal) 300 300.0 0.00 6666 300.0 0.01 3332 300.0 0.00 3071 300.1 0.04 832 1200 1200 -0.02 1666 1200 0.04 832 1200 0.00 767 1202 0.16 207 2400 2401 0.04 832 2398 0.08 416 2400 0.00 383 2404 0.16 103 9600 9615 0.16 207 9615 0.16 103 9600 0.00 95 9615 0.16 25 0 191 10417 0.00 95 10473 0.53 87 10417 0.00 23 19.2k 19.23k 0.16 103 19.23k 0.16 51 19.20k 0.00 47 19.23k 0.16 12 57.6k 57.14k -0.79 34 58.82k 2.12 16 57.60k 0.00 15 — — — 115.2k 117.6k 2.12 16 111.1k -3.55 8 115.2k 0.00 7 — — — 10417 10417 27.2.1 Auto-Baud Detect The EUSART module supports automatic detection and calibration of the baud rate. In the Auto-Baud Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the incoming RX signal, the RX signal is timing the BRG. The Baud Rate Generator is used to time the period of a received 55h (ASCII “U”) which is the Sync character for the LIN bus. The unique feature of this character is that it has five rising edges including the Stop bit edge. Setting the ABDEN bit of the BAUDxCON register starts the auto-baud calibration sequence. While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART state machine is held in Idle. On the first rising edge of the receive line, after the Start bit, the SPxBRG begins counting up using the BRG counter clock as shown in Figure 27-7. The fifth rising edge will occur on the RXx pin at the end of the eighth bit period. At that time, an accumulated value totaling the proper BRG period is left in the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair, the ABDEN bit is automatically cleared and the RCxIF interrupt flag is set. The value in the RCxREG needs to be read to clear the RCxIF interrupt. RCxREG content should be discarded. When calibrating for modes that do not use the SPxBRGH register the user can verify that the SPxBRGL register did not overflow by checking for 00h in the SPxBRGH register. The BRG auto-baud clock is determined by the BRG16 and BRGH bits as shown in Table 27-3. During ABD, both the SPxBRGH and SPxBRGL registers are used as a 16-bit counter, independent of the BRG16 bit setting. While calibrating the baud rate period, the SPxBRGH and SPxBRGL registers are clocked at 1/8th the BRG base clock rate. The resulting byte measurement is the average bit time when clocked at full speed. Note:  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 498 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 1. 2. 3. If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit, auto-baud detection will occur on the byte following the Break character (see Auto-Wake-up on Break). It is up to the user to determine that the incoming character baud rate is within the range of the selected BRG clock source. Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not possible. During the auto-baud process, the auto-baud counter starts counting at one. Upon completion of the auto-baud sequence, to achieve maximum accuracy, subtract 1 from the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair. Table 27-3. BRG Counter Clock Rates BRG16 BRGH BRG Base Clock BRG ABD Clock 1 1 FOSC/4 FOSC/32 1 0 FOSC/16 FOSC/128 0 1 FOSC/16 FOSC/128 0 0 FOSC/64 FOSC/512 Note:  During the ABD sequence, SPxBRGL and SPxBRGH registers are both used as a 16-bit counter, independent of the BRG16 setting. Figure 27-7. Automatic Baud Rate Calibration Rev. 10-000 120A 2/13/201 7 BRG Value XXXXh 0000h 001Ch Edge #1 RXx/DTx pin Edge #2 Edge #3 Edge #4 Edge #5 start bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 BRG Clock ABDEN Auto cleared Set by user RCxIF bit (Interrupt Flag) Read RCxREG SPxBRGH:L 27.2.2 XXXXh 001Ch Auto-Baud Overflow During the course of automatic baud detection, the ABDOVF bit of the BAUDxCON register will be set if the baud rate counter overflows before the 5th rising edge is detected on the RXx pin. The ABDOVF bit indicates that the counter has exceeded the maximum count that can fit in the 16 bits of the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair. After the ABDOVF bit has been set, the counter continues to count until the 5th rising edge is detected on the RXx pin. Upon detecting the 5th RX edge, the hardware will set the RCxIF interrupt flag and clear the ABDEN bit of the BAUDxCON register. The RCxIF flag can be subsequently cleared by reading the RCxREG register. The ABDOVF flag of the BAUDxCON register can be cleared by software directly. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 499 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. To terminate the auto-baud process before the RCxIF flag is set, clear the ABDEN bit then clear the ABDOVF bit of the BAUDxCON register. The ABDOVF bit will remain set if the ABDEN bit is not cleared first. 27.2.3 Auto-Wake-up on Break During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are suspended. Because of this, the Baud Rate Generator is inactive and a proper character reception cannot be performed. The Auto-Wake-up feature allows the controller to wake-up due to activity on the RX/DT line. This feature is available only in Asynchronous mode. The Auto-Wake-up feature is enabled by setting the WUE bit of the BAUDxCON register. Once set, the normal receive sequence on RX/DT is disabled, and the EUSART remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a wake-up event independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event consists of a high-to-low transition on the RX/DT line. (This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a wake-up signal character for the LIN protocol.) The EUSART module generates an RCxIF interrupt coincident with the wake-up event. The interrupt is generated synchronously to the Q clocks in normal CPU operating modes as shown in Figure 27-8, and asynchronously if the device is in Sleep mode as shown in Figure 27-9. The interrupt condition is cleared by reading the RCxREG register. The WUE bit is automatically cleared by the low-to-high transition on the RX line at the end of the Break. This signals to the user that the Break event is over. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle mode waiting to receive the next character. 27.2.3.1 Special Considerations Break Character To avoid character errors or character fragments during a wake-up event, the wake-up character must be all zeros. When the wake-up is enabled the function works independent of the low time on the data stream. If the WUE bit is set and a valid non-zero character is received, the low time from the Start bit to the first rising edge will be interpreted as the wake-up event. The remaining bits in the character will be received as a fragmented character and subsequent characters can result in framing or overrun errors. Therefore, the initial character in the transmission must be all ‘0’s. This must be ten or more bit times, 13bit times recommended for LIN bus, or any number of bit times for standard RS-232 devices. Oscillator Start-up Time Oscillator start-up time must be considered, especially in applications using oscillators with longer start-up intervals (i.e., LP, XT or HS/PLL mode). The Sync Break (or wake-up signal) character must be of sufficient length, and be followed by a sufficient interval, to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start and provide proper initialization of the EUSART. WUE Bit The wake-up event causes a receive interrupt by setting the RCxIF bit. The WUE bit is cleared in hardware by a rising edge on RX/DT. The interrupt condition is then cleared in software by reading the RCxREG register and discarding its contents. To ensure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process before setting the WUE bit. If a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may then be set just prior to entering the Sleep mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 500 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Figure 27-8. Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) Timing During Normal Operation Rev. 10-000 326A 2/13/201 7 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 FOSC WUE bit Bit set by user Auto cleared RXx/DTx line RCxIF Cleared due to user read of RCxREG Note 1: The EUSART remains in idle while the WUE bit is set. Figure 27-9. Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) Timings During Sleep Rev. 10-000 327A 2/13/201 7 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q2 q1 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 q1 q2 q3 q4 FOSC WUE bit Bit set by user Auto cleared RXx/DTx line RCxIF Cleared due to user read of RCxREG Sleep command executed Sleep ends Note 1: The EUSART remains in idle while the WUE bit is set. 27.2.4 Break Character Sequence The EUSART module has the capability of sending the special Break character sequences that are required by the LIN bus standard. A Break character consists of a Start bit, followed by 12 ‘0’ bits and a Stop bit. To send a Break character, set the SENDB and TXEN bits of the TXxSTA register. The Break character transmission is then initiated by a write to the TXxREG. The value of data written to TXxREG will be ignored and all ‘0’s will be transmitted. The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte following the Break character (typically, the Sync character in the LIN specification). The TRMT bit of the TXxSTA register indicates when the transmit operation is active or idle, just as it does during normal transmission. See Figure 27-10 for more detail. 27.2.4.1 Break and Sync Transmit Sequence The following sequence will start a message frame header made up of a Break, followed by an auto-baud Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus master. 1. 2. 3. Configure the EUSART for the desired mode. Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to enable the Break sequence. Load the TXxREG with a dummy character to initiate transmission (the value is ignored). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 501 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 4. 5. Write ‘55h’ to TXxREG to load the Sync character into the transmit FIFO buffer. After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is reset by hardware and the Sync character is then transmitted. When the TXxREG becomes empty, as indicated by the TXxIF, the next data byte can be written to TXxREG. 27.2.5 Receiving a Break Character The EUSART module can receive a Break character in two ways. The first method to detect a Break character uses the FERR bit of the RCxSTA register and the received data as indicated by RCxREG. The Baud Rate Generator is assumed to have been initialized to the expected baud rate. A Break character has been received when all three of the following conditions are true: • • • RCxIF bit is set FERR bit is set RCxREG = 00h The second method uses the Auto-Wake-up feature described in Auto-Wake-up on Break. By enabling this feature, the EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RX/DT, cause an RCxIF interrupt, and receive the next data byte followed by another interrupt. Note that following a Break character, the user will typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Detect feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABDEN bit of the BAUDxCON register before placing the EUSART in Sleep mode. Figure 27-10. Send Break Character Sequence Dummy Write Rev. 10-000 118A 2/13/201 7 Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx pin Start bit bit 0 27.3 bit 11 Stop bit Break TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg Empty Flag) SENDB (send break control bit) bit 1 SENDB sampled here Auto cleared EUSART Synchronous Mode Synchronous serial communications are typically used in systems with a single master and one or more slaves. The master device contains the necessary circuitry for baud rate generation and supplies the clock for all devices in the system. Slave devices can take advantage of the master clock by eliminating the internal clock generation circuitry. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 502 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. There are two signal lines in Synchronous mode: a bidirectional data line and a clock line. Slaves use the external clock supplied by the master to shift the serial data into and out of their respective receive and transmit shift registers. Since the data line is bidirectional, synchronous operation is half-duplex only. Halfduplex refers to the fact that master and slave devices can receive and transmit data but not both simultaneously. The EUSART can operate as either a master or slave device. Start and Stop bits are not used in synchronous transmissions. 27.3.1 Synchronous Master Mode The following bits are used to configure the EUSART for synchronous master operation: • SYNC = 1 (configures the EUSART for synchronous operation) • CSRC = 1 (configures the EUSART as the master) • SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (recommended setting to receive 1 byte) • CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (to receive continuously) • SPEN = 1 (enables the EUSART) Important:  Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the RCxSTA register ensures that the device is in the Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to receive. 27.3.1.1 Master Clock Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line, which is synchronous with the data. A device configured as a master transmits the clock on the TX/CK line. The TXx/CKx pin output driver is automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous transmit or receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One clock cycle is generated for each data bit. Only as many clock cycles are generated as there are data bits. 27.3.1.2 Clock Polarity A clock polarity option is provided for Microwire compatibility. Clock polarity is selected with the SCKP bit of the BAUDxCON register. Setting the SCKP bit sets the clock Idle state as high. When the SCKP bit is set, the data changes on the falling edge of each clock. Clearing the SCKP bit sets the Idle state as low. When the SCKP bit is cleared, the data changes on the rising edge of each clock. 27.3.1.3 Synchronous Master Transmission Data is transferred out of the device on the RXx/DTx pin. The RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pin output drivers are automatically enabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous master transmit operation. A transmission is initiated by writing a character to the TXxREG register. If the TSR still contains all or part of a previous character the new character data is held in the TXxREG until the last bit of the previous character has been transmitted. If this is the first character, or the previous character has been completely flushed from the TSR, the data in the TXxREG is immediately transferred to the TSR. The transmission of the character commences immediately following the transfer of the data to the TSR from the TXxREG. Each data bit changes on the leading edge of the master clock and remains valid until the subsequent leading clock edge. Note:  The TSR register is not mapped in data memory, so it is not available to the user. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 503 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.3.1.4 Synchronous Master Transmission Setup 1. Initialize the SPxBRGH, SPxBRGL register pair and the BRG16 bit to achieve the desired baud rate (see EUSART Baud Rate Generator (BRG)). 2. Select the transmit output pin by writing the appropriate values to the RxyPPS register and RXxPPS register. Both selections should enable the same pin. 3. Select the clock output pin by writing the appropriate values to the RxyPPS register and CKxPPS register. Both selections should enable the same pin. 4. Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. 5. Disable Receive mode by clearing bits SREN and CREN. 6. Enable Transmit mode by setting the TXEN bit. 7. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit. 8. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. 9. If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit should be loaded in the TX9D bit. 10. Start transmission by loading data to the TXxREG register. Figure 27-11. Synchronous Transmission Rev. 10-000 115A 2/7/201 7 Word 1 Write to TXxREG BRG Output (Shift Clock) TXx/CKx pin TXxIF bit (Transmit Buffer Reg Empty Flag) TRMT bit (Transmit Shift Reg Empty Flag) Start bit bit 0 bit 1 bit 7/8 Stop bit Word 1 1 TCY 27.3.1.5 Synchronous Master Reception Data is received at the RXx/DTx pin. The RXx/DTx pin output driver is automatically disabled when the EUSART is configured for synchronous master receive operation. In Synchronous mode, reception is enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit (SREN of the RCxSTA register) or the Continuous Receive Enable bit (CREN of the RCxSTA register). When SREN is set and CREN is clear, only as many clock cycles are generated as there are data bits in a single character. The SREN bit is automatically cleared at the completion of one character. When CREN is set, clocks are continuously generated until CREN is cleared. If CREN is cleared in the middle of a character the CK clock stops immediately and the partial character is discarded. If SREN and CREN are both set, then SREN is cleared at the completion of the first character and CREN takes precedence. To initiate reception, set either SREN or CREN. Data is sampled at the RXx/DTx pin on the trailing edge of the TX/CK clock pin and is shifted into the Receive Shift Register (RSR). When a complete character is received into the RSR, the RCxIF bit is set and the character is automatically transferred to the two character receive FIFO. The Least Significant eight bits of the top character in the receive FIFO are available in RCxREG. The RCxIF bit remains set as long as there are unread characters in the receive FIFO. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 504 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Note:  If the RX/DT function is on an analog pin, the corresponding ANSEL bit must be cleared for the receiver to function. 27.3.1.6 Receive Overrun Error The receive FIFO buffer can hold two characters. An overrun error will be generated if a third character, in its entirety, is received before RCxREG is read to access the FIFO. When this happens the OERR bit of the RCxSTA register is set. Previous data in the FIFO will not be overwritten. The two characters in the FIFO buffer can be read, however, no additional characters will be received until the error is cleared. The OERR bit can only be cleared by clearing the overrun condition. If the overrun error occurred when the SREN bit is set and CREN is clear then the error is cleared by reading RCxREG. If the overrun occurred when the CREN bit is set then the error condition is cleared by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. 27.3.1.7 Receiving 9-Bit Characters The EUSART supports 9-bit character reception. When the RX9 bit of the RCxSTA register is set the EUSART will shift nine bits into the RSR for each character received. The RX9D bit of the RCxSTA register is the ninth, and Most Significant, data bit of the top unread character in the receive FIFO. When reading 9-bit data from the receive FIFO buffer, the RX9D data bit must be read before reading the eight Least Significant bits from the RCxREG. 27.3.1.8 Synchronous Master Reception Setup 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Initialize the SPxBRGH:SPxBRGL register pair and set or clear the BRG16 bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate. Select the receive input pin by writing the appropriate values to the RxyPPS register and RXxPPS register. Both selections should enable the same pin. Select the clock output pin by writing the appropriate values to the RxyPPS register and CKxPPS register. Both selections should enable the same pin. Clear the ANSEL bit for the RXx pin (if applicable). Enable the synchronous master serial port by setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC. Ensure bits CREN and SREN are clear. If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9. Start reception by setting the SREN bit or for continuous reception, set the CREN bit. Interrupt flag bit RCxIF will be set when reception of a character is complete. An interrupt will be generated if the enable bit RCxIE was set. Read the RCxSTA register to get the ninth bit (if enabled) and determine if any error occurred during reception. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the RCxREG register. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 505 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Figure 27-12. Synchronous Reception (Master Mode, SREN) Rev. 10-000 121A 2/13/201 7 RXx/DTx pin bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 TXx/CKx pin SCKP = 0 TXx/CKx pin SCKP = 1 Write to SREN SREN bit CREN bit ‘0’ ‘0’ RCxIF (Interrupt) Read RCxREG 27.3.2 Synchronous Slave Mode The following bits are used to configure the EUSART for synchronous slave operation: • SYNC = 1 (configures the EUSART for synchronous operation.) • CSRC = 0 (configures the EUSART as a slave) • SREN = 0 (for transmit); SREN = 1 (for single byte receive) • CREN = 0 (for transmit); CREN = 1 (recommended setting for continuous receive) • SPEN = 1 (enables the EUSART) Important:  Clearing the SREN and CREN bits of the RCxSTA register ensures that the device is in the Transmit mode, otherwise the device will be configured to receive. 27.3.2.1 Slave Clock Synchronous data transfers use a separate clock line, which is synchronous with the data. A device configured as a slave receives the clock on the TX/CK line. The TXx/CKx pin output driver is automatically disabled when the device is configured for synchronous slave transmit or receive operation. Serial data bits change on the leading edge to ensure they are valid at the trailing edge of each clock. One data bit is transferred for each clock cycle. Only as many clock cycles should be received as there are data bits. Important:  If the device is configured as a slave and the TX/CK function is on an analog pin, the corresponding ANSEL bit must be cleared. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 506 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.3.2.2 EUSART Synchronous Slave Transmit The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes are identical (see Synchronous Master Transmission), except in the case of the Sleep mode. If two words are written to the TXxREG and then the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur: 1. 2. 3. The first character will immediately transfer to the TSR register and transmit. The second word will remain in the TXxREG register. The TXxIF bit will not be set. 4. After the first character has been shifted out of TSR, the TXxREG register will transfer the second character to the TSR and the TXxIF bit will now be set. If the PEIE and TXxIE bits are set, the interrupt will wake the device from Sleep and execute the next instruction. If the GIE bit is also set, the program will call the Interrupt Service Routine. 5. 27.3.2.3 Synchronous Slave Transmission Setup 1. 2. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the CSRC bit. Select the transmit output pin by writing the appropriate values to the RxyPPS register and RXxPPS register. Both selections should enable the same pin. 3. Select the clock input pin by writing the appropriate value to the CKxPPS register. 4. Clear the ANSEL bit for the CKx pin (if applicable). 5. Clear the CREN and SREN bits. 6. If interrupts are desired, set the TXxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. 7. If 9-bit transmission is desired, set the TX9 bit. 8. Enable transmission by setting the TXEN bit. 9. If 9-bit transmission is selected, insert the Most Significant bit into the TX9D bit. 10. Prepare for transmission by writing the Least Significant eight bits to the TXxREG register. The word will be transmitted in response to the Master clocks at the CKx pin. 27.3.2.4 EUSART Synchronous Slave Reception The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave modes is identical (see Synchronous Master Reception), with the following exceptions: • • • Sleep CREN bit is always set, therefore the receiver is never idle SREN bit, which is a “don’t care” in Slave mode A character may be received while in Sleep mode by setting the CREN bit prior to entering Sleep. Once the word is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the RCxREG register. If the RCxIE enable bit is set, the interrupt generated will wake the device from Sleep and execute the next instruction. If the GIE bit is also set, the program will branch to the interrupt vector. 27.3.2.5 Synchronous Slave Reception Setup: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Set the SYNC and SPEN bits and clear the CSRC bit. Select the receive input pin by writing the appropriate value to the RXxPPS register. Select the clock input pin by writing the appropriate values to the CKxPPS register. Clear the ANSEL bit for both the TXx/CKx and RXx/DTx pins (if applicable). If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 507 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 6. 7. 8. If 9-bit reception is desired, set the RX9 bit. Set the CREN bit to enable reception. The RCxIF bit will be set when reception is complete. An interrupt will be generated if the RCxIE bit was set. 9. If 9-bit mode is enabled, retrieve the Most Significant bit from the RX9D bit of the RCxSTA register. 10. Retrieve the eight Least Significant bits from the receive FIFO by reading the RCxREG register. 11. If an overrun error occurs, clear the error by either clearing the CREN bit of the RCxSTA register or by clearing the SPEN bit which resets the EUSART. 27.4 EUSART Operation During Sleep The EUSART will remain active during Sleep only in the Synchronous Slave mode. All other modes require the system clock and therefore cannot generate the necessary signals to run the Transmit or Receive Shift registers during Sleep. Synchronous Slave mode uses an externally generated clock to run the Transmit and Receive Shift registers. 27.4.1 Synchronous Receive During Sleep To receive during Sleep, all the following conditions must be met before entering Sleep mode: • • • RCxSTA and TXxSTA Control registers must be configured for Synchronous Slave Reception (see Synchronous Slave Reception Setup:). If interrupts are desired, set the RCxIE bit of the PIEx register and the GIE and PEIE bits of the INTCON register. The RCxIF interrupt flag must be cleared by reading RCxREG to unload any pending characters in the receive buffer. Upon entering Sleep mode, the device will be ready to accept data and clocks on the RXx/DTx and TXx/CKx pins, respectively. When the data word has been completely clocked in by the external device, the RCxIF interrupt flag bit of the PIRx register will be set. Thereby, waking the processor from Sleep. Upon waking from Sleep, the instruction following the SLEEP instruction will be executed. If the Global Interrupt Enable (GIE) bit of the INTCON register is also set, then the Interrupt Service Routine at address 004h will be called. 27.4.2 Synchronous Transmit During Sleep To transmit during Sleep, all the following conditions must be met before entering Sleep mode: • • • • The RCxSTA and TXxSTA Control registers must be configured for synchronous slave transmission (see Synchronous Slave Transmission Setup). The TXxIF interrupt flag must be cleared by writing the output data to the TXxREG, thereby filling the TSR and transmit buffer. Interrupt enable bits TXxIE of the PIEx register and PEIE of the INTCON register must set. If interrupts are desired, set the GIEx bit of the INTCON register. Upon entering Sleep mode, the device will be ready to accept clocks on TXx/CKx pin and transmit data on the RXx/DTx pin. When the data word in the TSR has been completely clocked out by the external device, the pending byte in the TXxREG will transfer to the TSR and the TXxIF flag will be set. Thereby, waking the processor from Sleep. At this point, the TXxREG is available to accept another character for transmission. Writing TXxREG will clear the TXxIF flag. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 508 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Upon waking from Sleep, the instruction following the SLEEP instruction will be executed. If the Global Interrupt Enable (GIE) bit is also set then the Interrupt Service Routine at address 0004h will be called. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 509 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.5 Register Summary - EUSART Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F99 RC1REG 7:0 0x0F9A TX1REG 7:0 TXREG[7:0] 7:0 SPBRGL[7:0] RCREG[7:0] 0x0F9B SP1BRG 0x0F9D RC1STA 7:0 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D 0x0F9E TX1STA 7:0 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0x0F9F BAUD1CON 7:0 ABDOVF RCIDL SCKP BRG16 WUE ABDEN 27.6 15:8 SPBRGH[7:0] Register Definitions: EUSART Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 510 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.6.1 RCxSTA Name:  Offset:  RCxSTA 0x0F9D Receive Status and Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR RX9D R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/HC R/HC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – SPEN Serial Port Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Serial port enabled Serial port disabled (held in Reset) Bit 6 – RX9 9-Bit Receive Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Selects 9-bit reception Selects 8-bit reception Bit 5 – SREN Single Receive Enable bit Controls reception. This bit is cleared by hardware when reception is complete Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC = 1 AND CSRC = 1 SYNC = 1 AND CSRC = 1 SYNC = 0 OR CSRC = 0 Description Start single receive Single receive is complete Don't care Bit 4 – CREN Continuous Receive Enable bit Value 1 0 1 0 Condition Description SYNC = 1 Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN) SYNC = 1 Disables continuous receive SYNC = 0 Enables receiver SYNC = 0 Disables receiver Bit 3 – ADDEN Address Detect Enable bit Value 1 0 X Condition Description SYNC = 0 AND RX9 = 1 The receive buffer is loaded and the interrupt occurs only when the ninth received bit is set SYNC = 0 AND RX9 = 1 All bytes are received and interrupt always occurs. Ninth bit can be used as parity bit RX9 = 0 OR SYNC = 1 Don't care Bit 2 – FERR Framing Error bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 511 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Value 1 0 Description Unread byte in RCxREG has a framing error. Unread byte in RCxREG does not have a framing error. Bit 1 – OERR Overrun Error bit Value 1 0 Description Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing either SPEN or CREN bit) No overrun error Bit 0 – RX9D Ninth bit of Received Data This can be address/data bit or a parity bit which is determined by user firmware. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 512 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.6.2 TXxSTA Name:  Offset:  TXxSTA 0x0F9E Transmit Status and Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W RO R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Bit 7 – CSRC Clock Source Select bit Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC=1 SYNC=1 SYNC=0 Description Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG) Slave mode (clock from external source) Don't care Bit 6 – TX9 9-bit Transmit Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Selects 9-bit transmission Selects 8-bit transmission Bit 5 – TXEN Transmit Enable bit Enables transmitter(1) Value 1 0 Description Transmit enabled Transmit disabled Bit 4 – SYNC EUSART Mode Select bit Value 1 0 Description Synchronous mode Asynchronous mode Bit 3 – SENDB Send Break Character bit Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC=0 SYNC=0 SYNC=1 Description Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion) Sync Break transmission disabled or completed Don't care Bit 2 – BRGH High Baud Rate Select bit Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC=0 SYNC=0 SYNC=1 Description High speed, if BRG16 = 1, baud rate is baudclk/4; else baudclk/16 Low speed Don't care © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 513 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Bit 1 – TRMT Transmit Shift Register (TSR) Status bit Value 1 0 Description TSR is empty TSR is not empty Bit 0 – TX9D Ninth bit of Transmit Data Can be address/data bit or a parity bit. Note:  1. SREN and CREN bits override TXEN in Sync mode. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 514 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.6.3 BAUDxCON Name:  Offset:  BAUDxCON 0x0F9F Baud Rate Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 4 3 1 0 ABDOVF RCIDL 5 SCKP BRG16 2 WUE ABDEN RO RO RW RW RW RW 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – ABDOVF Auto-Baud Detect Overflow bit Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC=0 SYNC=0 SYNC=1 Description Auto-baud timer overflowed Auto-baud timer did not overflow Don't care Bit 6 – RCIDL Receive Idle Flag bit Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC=0 SYNC=0 SYNC=1 Description Receiver is Idle Start bit has been received and the receiver is receiving Don't care Bit 4 – SCKP Synchronous Clock Polarity Select bit Value 1 0 1 0 Condition SYNC=0 SYNC=0 SYNC=1 SYNC=1 Description Idle state for transmit (TX) is a low level (transmit data inverted) Idle state for transmit (TX) is a high level (transmit data is non-inverted) Data is clocked on rising edge of the clock Data is clocked on falling edge of the clock Bit 3 – BRG16 16-bit Baud Rate Generator Select bit Value 1 0 Description 16-bit Baud Rate Generator is used 8-bit Baud Rate Generator is used Bit 1 – WUE Wake-up Enable bit Value 1 0 X Condition Description SYNC=0 Receiver is waiting for a falling edge. Upon falling edge no character will be received and flag RCxIF will be set. WUE will automatically clear after RCxIF is set. SYNC=0 Receiver is operating normally SYNC=1 Don't care Bit 0 – ABDEN Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 515 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. Value 1 0 X Condition SYNC=0 SYNC=0 SYNC=1 Description Auto-Baud Detect mode is enabled (clears when auto-baud is complete) Auto-Baud Detect is complete or mode is disabled Don't care © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 516 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.6.4 SPxBRG Name:  Offset:  SPxBRG 0x0F9B Baud Rate Determination Register Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 SPBRGH[7:0] Access R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SPBRGL[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 15:8 – SPBRGH[7:0] Baud Rate High Byte Register Bits 7:0 – SPBRGL[7:0] Baud Rate Low Byte Register © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 517 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.6.5 RCxREG Name:  Offset:  RCxREG 0x0F99 Receive Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RCREG[7:0] Access Reset RO RO RO RO RO RO RO RO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7:0 – RCREG[7:0] Receive data © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 518 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (EUSART) Enhanced Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver Trans.. 27.6.6 TXxREG Name:  Offset:  TXxREG 0x0F9A Transmit Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 TXREG[7:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 7:0 – TXREG[7:0] Transmit Data © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 519 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference 28. (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference The Fixed Voltage Reference, or FVR, is a stable voltage reference, independent of VDD, with the following selectable output levels: • 1.024V • 2.048V • 4.096V The output of the FVR can be configured to supply a reference voltage to the following: • • • • ADC input channel ADC positive reference Comparator input Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) The FVR can be enabled by setting the FVREN bit of the FVRCON register. Important:  Fixed Voltage Reference output cannot exceed VDD. 28.1 Independent Gain Amplifiers The output of the FVR, which is connected to the ADC, Comparators, and DAC, is routed through two independent programmable gain amplifiers. Each amplifier can be programmed for a gain of 1x, 2x or 4x, to produce the three possible voltage levels. The ADFVR bits of the FVRCON register are used to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings for the reference supplied to the ADC module. Reference the ADC chapter for additional information. The CDAFVR bits of the FVRCON register are used to enable and configure the gain amplifier settings for the reference supplied to the DAC and comparator module. Related Links (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module (CMP) Comparator Module (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module 28.2 FVR Stabilization Period When the Fixed Voltage Reference module is enabled, it requires time for the reference and amplifier circuits to stabilize. Once the circuits stabilize and are ready for use, the FVRRDY bit of the FVRCON register will be set. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 520 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Note: 10-000053C.vsd VOLTAGE REFERENCE BLOCK DIAGRAM (ADC, Comp and DAC) 12/9/2013 PIC16F1613 (LECQ) Any peripheral requiring the Fixed Reference (See Table 13-1) PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference Figure 28-1. Voltage Reference Block Diagram Rev. 10-000 053C 12/9/201 3 ADFVR CDAFVR FVREN Note 1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 1x 2x 4x FVR_buffer1 (To ADC Module) 1x 2x 4x FVR_buffer2 (To Comparators and DAC) 2 + _ FVRRDY Datasheet 40001843D-page 521 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference 28.3 Register Summary - FVR Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F31 FVRCON 7:0 28.4 FVREN FVRRDY TSEN TSRNG CDAFVR[1:0] ADFVR[1:0] Register Definitions: FVR Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 522 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference 28.4.1 FVRCON Name:  Offset:  FVRCON 0xF31 Fixed Voltage Reference Control Register Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 4 FVREN FVRRDY TSEN TSRNG 3 2 1 R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 q 0 0 0 0 0 0 CDAFVR[1:0] 0 ADFVR[1:0] Bit 7 – FVREN Fixed Voltage Reference Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Fixed Voltage Reference is enabled Fixed Voltage Reference is disabled Bit 6 – FVRRDY Fixed Voltage Reference Ready Flag bit Value 1 0 Description Fixed Voltage Reference output is ready for use Fixed Voltage Reference output is not ready or not enabled Bit 5 – TSEN Temperature Indicator Enable bit(2) Value 1 0 Description Temperature Indicator is enabled Temperature Indicator is disabled Bit 4 – TSRNG Temperature Indicator Range Selection bit(2) Value 1 0 Description VOUT = VDD - 4Vt (High Range) VOUT = VDD - 2Vt (Low Range) Bits 3:2 – CDAFVR[1:0] Comparator FVR Buffer Gain Selection bits Value 11 10 01 00 Description Comparator FVR Buffer Gain is 4x, (4.096V)(1) Comparator FVR Buffer Gain is 2x, (2.048V)(1) Comparator FVR Buffer Gain is 1x, (1.024V) Comparator FVR Buffer is off Bits 1:0 – ADFVR[1:0] ADC FVR Buffer Gain Selection bit Value 11 10 Description ADC FVR Buffer Gain is 4x, (4.096V)(1) ADC FVR Buffer Gain is 2x, (2.048V)(1) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 523 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference Value 01 00 Description ADC FVR Buffer Gain is 1x, (1.024V) ADC FVR Buffer is off Note:  1. Fixed Voltage Reference output cannot exceed VDD. 2. See Temperature Indicator Module section for additional information. Related Links Temperature Indicator Module © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 524 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Temperature Indicator Module 29. Temperature Indicator Module This family of devices is equipped with a temperature circuit designed to measure the operating temperature of the silicon die. The circuit’s range of operating temperature falls between -40°C and +85°C. The output is a voltage that is proportional to the device temperature. The output of the temperature indicator is internally connected to the device ADC. The circuit may be used as a temperature threshold detector or a more accurate temperature indicator, depending on the level of calibration performed. A one-point calibration allows the circuit to indicate a temperature closely surrounding that point. A two-point calibration allows the circuit to sense the entire range of temperature more accurately. Refer to Application Note AN1333, “Use and Calibration of the Internal Temperature Indicator” (DS00001333) for more details regarding the calibration process. 29.1 Circuit Operation Figure 29-2 shows a simplified block diagram of the temperature circuit. The proportional voltage output is achieved by measuring the forward voltage drop across multiple silicon junctions. The following equation describes the output characteristics of the temperature indicator. Equation 29-1. VOUT Ranges ���ℎ �����: ���� = ��� − 4�� ��� �����: ���� = ��� − 2�� The temperature sense circuit is integrated with the Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) module. See “Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)” chapter for more information. The circuit is enabled by setting the TSEN bit of the FVRCON register. When disabled, the circuit draws no current. The circuit operates in either high or low range. The high range, selected by setting the TSRNG bit of the FVRCON register, provides a wider output voltage. This provides more resolution over the temperature range, but may be less consistent from part to part. This range requires a higher bias voltage to operate and thus, a higher VDD is needed. The low range is selected by clearing the TSRNG bit of the FVRCON register. The low range generates a lower voltage drop and thus, a lower bias voltage is needed to operate the circuit. The low range is provided for low voltage operation. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 525 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Temperature Indicator Module Figure 29-2. Temperature Circuit Diagram Rev. 10-000069A 7/31/2013 VDD TSEN TSRNG VOUT Temp. Indicator To ADC Related Links (FVR) Fixed Voltage Reference 29.2 Minimum Operating VDD When the temperature circuit is operated in low range, the device may be operated at any operating voltage that is within specifications. When the temperature circuit is operated in high range, the device operating voltage, VDD, must be high enough to ensure that the temperature circuit is correctly biased. Table 29-1 shows the recommended minimum VDD vs. range setting. Table 29-1. Recommended VDD vs. Range 29.3 Min. VDD, TSRNG = 1 Min. VDD, TSRNG = 0 3.6V 1.8V Temperature Output The output of the circuit is measured using the internal Analog-to-Digital Converter. A channel is reserved for the temperature circuit output. Refer to “Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation (ADC2) Module” chapter for detailed information. Related Links (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 526 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Temperature Indicator Module 29.4 ADC Acquisition Time To ensure accurate temperature measurements, the user must wait at least 200 μs after the ADC input multiplexer is connected to the temperature indicator output before the conversion is performed. In addition, the user must wait 200 μs between consecutive conversions of the temperature indicator output. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 527 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module 30. (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module The Digital-to-Analog Converter supplies a variable voltage reference, ratiometric with the input source, with 32 selectable output levels. The positive input source (VSOURCE+) of the DAC can be connected to: • • • FVR Buffer External VREF+ pin VDD supply voltage The negative input source (VSOURCE-) of the DAC can be connected to: • • External VREF- pin VSS The output of the DAC (DACx_output) can be selected as a reference voltage to the following: • • • • Comparator positive input ADC input channel DACxOUT1 pin DACxOUT2 pin The Digital-to-Analog Converter (DAC) can be enabled by setting the EN bit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 528 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: Note 1: PIC18(L)F24/25K40 10-000026F.vsd 5bit_DAC Block Diagram 8/7/2015 PIC16(L)F1508/9 (LECD) The unbuffered DACx_output is provided on the DACxOUT pin(s). (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module Figure 30-1. Digital-to-Analog Converter Block Diagram Rev. 10-000026F 8/7/2015 Reserved 11 FVR Buffer 10 VREF+ VSOURCE+ 5 R 01 AVDD DACR 00 R DACPSS R 32-to-1 MUX R 32 Steps DACEN DACx_output To Peripherals R DACxOUT1(1) R DACOE1 R DACxOUT2(1) VREF- 1 AVSS DACOE2 VSOURCE- 0 DACNSS Note:  1. The unbuffered DACx_output is provided on the DACxOUT pin(s). 30.1 Output Voltage Selection The DAC has 32 voltage level ranges. The 32 levels are set with the DAC1R bits. The DAC output voltage can be determined by using the following equation. Equation 30-1. DAC Output Voltage When EN = 1: ����_������ = ���� + − ���� − � ���� 4: 0 25 + ���� − Note:  See the DAC1CON0 register for the available VSOURCE+ and VSOURCE- selections. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 529 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module 30.2 Ratiometric Output Level The DAC output value is derived using a resistor ladder with each end of the ladder tied to a positive and negative voltage reference input source. If the voltage of either input source fluctuates, a similar fluctuation will result in the DAC output value. The value of the individual resistors within the ladder can be found in the “5-Bit DAC Specifications” table from the “Electrical Specifications” chapter. Related Links 5-Bit DAC Specifications 30.3 DAC Voltage Reference Output The unbuffered DAC voltage can be output to the DACxOUTn pin(s) by setting the respective OEn bit(s). Selecting the DAC reference voltage for output on either DACxOUTn pin automatically overrides the digital output buffer, the weak pull-up and digital input threshold detector functions of that pin. Reading the DACxOUTn pin when it has been configured for DAC reference voltage output will always return a ‘0’. Important:  The unbuffered DAC output (DACxOUTn) is not intended to drive an external load. 30.4 Operation During Sleep When the device wakes up from Sleep through an interrupt or a Windowed Watchdog Timer Time-out, the contents of the DACxCON0 register are not affected. To minimize current consumption in Sleep mode, the voltage reference should be disabled. 30.5 Effects of a Reset A device Reset affects the following: • • • DACx is disabled. DACx output voltage is removed from the DACxOUTn pin(s). The DAC1R range select bits are cleared. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 530 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module 30.6 Register Summary - DAC Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F33 DAC1CON0 7:0 0x0F34 DAC1CON1 7:0 30.7 EN OE1 OE2 PSS[1:0] NSS DAC1R[4:0] Register Definitions: DAC Control Long bit name prefixes for the DAC are shown in the table below. Refer to the "Long Bit Names Section" for more information. Table 30-1.  DAC Long Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix DAC DAC Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 531 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module 30.7.1 DAC1CON0 Name:  Offset:  DAC1CON0 0xF33 DAC Control Register Bit Access Reset 5 4 EN 7 6 OE1 OE2 3 2 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 PSS[1:0] 1 0 NSS Bit 7 – EN DAC Enable bit Value 1 0 Description DAC is enabled DAC is disabled Bit 5 – OE1 DAC Voltage Output Enable bit Value 1 0 Description DAC voltage level is output on the DAC1OUT1 pin DAC voltage level is disconnected from the DAC1OUT1 pin Bit 4 – OE2 DAC Voltage Output Enable bit Value 1 0 Description DAC voltage level is output on the DAC1OUT2 pin DAC voltage level is disconnected from the DAC1OUT2 pin Bits 3:2 – PSS[1:0] DAC Positive Source Select bit Value 11 10 01 00 Description Reserved FVR buffer VREF+ AVDD Bit 0 – NSS DAC Negative Source Select bit Value 1 0 Description VREFAVSS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 532 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (DAC) 5-Bit Digital-to-Analog Converter Module 30.7.2 DAC1CON1 Name:  Offset:  DAC1CON1 0xF34 DAC Data Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DAC1R[4:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 4:0 – DAC1R[4:0] Data Input Register for DAC bits © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 533 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31. (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module The Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation (ADC2) allows conversion of an analog input signal to a 10-bit binary representation of that signal. This device uses analog inputs, which are multiplexed into a single sample and hold circuit. The output of the sample and hold is connected to the input of the converter. The converter generates a 10-bit binary result via successive approximation and stores the conversion result into the ADC result registers (ADRES). Additionally, the following features are provided within the ADC module: • • • • 8-bit Acquisition Timer Hardware Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) support: – 8-bit precharge timer – Adjustable sample and hold capacitor array – Guard ring digital output drive Automatic repeat and sequencing: – Automated double sample conversion for CVD – Two sets of result registers (Result and Previous result) – Auto-conversion trigger – Internal retrigger Computation features: – Averaging and low-pass filter functions – Reference comparison – 2-level threshold comparison – Selectable interrupts Figure 31-1 shows the block diagram of the ADC. The ADC voltage reference is software selectable to be either internally generated or externally supplied. The ADC can generate an interrupt upon completion of a conversion and upon threshold comparison. These interrupts can be used to wake-up the device from Sleep. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 534 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Filename: Title: Last Edit: First Used: 10-000034C.vsd 10-Bit ADC Block Diagram 5/10/2016 2PIC16(L)F188X5 (MFAF) (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Figure 31-1. ADC Block Diagram ADPREF VREF+ pin FVR_buffer1 11 Positive Reference Select 10 Reserved Rev. 10-000034C 5/10/2016 01 00 ADNREF VDD VREF- pin 1 0 External Channel Inputs ANa Vref- . . . ANz Vref+ ADC_clk sampled input VSS Internal Channel Inputs ADCS VSS AN0 ADC Clock Select FOSC/n Fosc Divider FRC FOSC FRC Temp Indicator DACx_output ADC CLOCK SOURCE ADC Sample Circuit FVR_buffer1 CHS ADFM set bit ADIF Write to bit GO/DONE 10 complete Q1 10-bit Result GO/DONE Q4 16 start Q2 Enable ADRESH ADRESL To Computation module Trigger Select TRIGSEL ADON . . . VSS Trigger Sources AUTO CONVERSION TRIGGER 31.1 ADC Configuration When configuring and using the ADC the following functions must be considered: • • • • • • • • Port Configuration Channel Selection ADC Voltage Reference Selection ADC Conversion Clock Source Interrupt Control Result Formatting Conversion Trigger Selection ADC Acquisition Time © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 535 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. • • • • 31.1.1 ADC Precharge Time Additional Sample and Hold Capacitor Single/Double Sample Conversion Guard Ring Outputs Port Configuration The ADC can be used to convert both analog and digital signals. When converting analog signals, the I/O pin should be configured for analog by setting the associated TRIS and ANSEL bits. Refer to the "I/O Ports" section for more information. Important:  Analog voltages on any pin that is defined as a digital input may cause the input buffer to conduct excess current. Related Links I/O Ports 31.1.2 Channel Selection The ADPCH register determines which channel is connected to the sample and hold circuit. There are several channel selections available as shown in the following selection table: Table 31-1. ADC Positive Input Channel Selections ADPCH ADC Positive Channel Input 111111 Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR)(2) 111110 DAC1 output(1) 111101 Temperature Indicator(3) 111100 AVSS (Analog Ground) 011000-111011 Reserved. No channel connected. 010111 RC7/ANC7 010110 RC6/ANC6 010101 RC5/ ANC5 010100 RC4/ ANC4 010011 RC3/ANC3 010010 RC2/ANC2 010001 RC1/ ANC1 010000 RC0/ANC0 001111 RB7/ANB7 001110 RB6/ANB6 001101 RB5/ANB5 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 536 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. ADPCH ADC Positive Channel Input 001100 RB4/ ANB4 001011 RB3/ANB3 001010 RB2/ ANB2 001001 RB1/ ANB1 001000 RB0/ANB0 000111 RA7/ANA7 000110 RA6/ANA6 000101 RA5/ANA5 000100 RA4/ ANA4 000011 RA3/ ANA3 000010 RA2/ ANA2 000001 RA1/ ANA1 000000 RA0/ANA0 When changing channels, a delay is required before starting the next conversion. Refer to Section “ADC Operation” for more information. Important:  It is recommended that when switching from an ADC channel of a higher voltage to a channel of a lower voltage, the software selects the Vss channel before switching. If the ADC does not have a dedicated Vss input channel, the Vss selection (DAC1R = b'00000') through the DAC output channel can be used. If the DAC is in use, a free input channel can be connected to Vss, and can be used in place of the DAC. 31.1.3 ADC Voltage Reference The ADPREF bits provide control of the positive voltage reference. The positive voltage reference can be: • • • • • VREF+ pin VDD FVR 1.024V FVR 2.048V FVR 4.096V The ADNREF bit provides control of the negative voltage reference. The negative voltage reference can be: • • VREF- pin VSS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 537 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.1.4 Conversion Clock The conversion clock source is software selected with the ADCS bit. When ADCS = 1 the ADC clock source is an internal fixed-frequency clock referred to as FRC. When ADCS = 0 the ADC clock frequencies are derived from FOSC. The ADCLK register selects one of 64 possible clock options from FOSC/2 to FOSC/128: • • • FOSC/2 FOSC/4 FOSC/6 • • • • FOSC/8 FOSC/10 ... FOSC/128 The time to complete one bit conversion is defined as the TAD. One full 10-bit conversion requires 11.5 TAD periods as shown in Figure 31-2. For correct conversion, the appropriate TAD specification must be met. Refer to the "ADC Timing Specifications" for more information. The "ADC Clock Period" table below gives examples of appropriate ADC clock selections. Important:  1. Except for the FRC clock source, any changes in the system clock frequency will change the ADC clock frequency, which may adversely affect the ADC result. 2. The internal control logic of the ADC runs off of the clock selected by ADCS. When the ADCS is set to ‘1’ (ADC runs on FRC), there may be unexpected delays in operation when setting ADC control bits. Table 31-2. ADC Clock Period (TAD) Vs. Device Operating Frequencies(1,4) ADC Clock Period (TAD) Device Frequency (FOSC) ADC Clock Source ADCLK 64 MHz 32 MHz 20 MHz 16 MHz 8 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz FOSC/2 000000 31.25 ns(2) 62.5 ns(2) 100 ns(2) 125 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 2.0 μs FOSC/4 000001 62.5 ns(2) 125 ns(2) 200 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 1.0 μs 4.0 μs FOSC/6 000010 125 ns(2) 187.5 ns(2) 300 ns(2) 375 ns(2) 750 ns(2) 1.5 μs 6.0 μs FOSC/8 000011 187.5 ns(2) 250 ns(2) 400 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 1.0 μs 2.0 μs 8.0 μs(3) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... FOSC/16 000100 250 ns(2) 500 ns(2) 800 ns(2) 1.0 μs 2.0 μs 4.0 μs 16.0 μs(3) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 538 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. ADC Clock Period (TAD) Device Frequency (FOSC) ADC Clock Source ADCLK 64 MHz 32 MHz 20 MHz 16 MHz FOSC/128 111111 2.0 μs 4.0 μs 6.4 μs 8.0 μs FRC ADCS=1 1.0-6.0 μs 1.0-6.0 μs 1.0-6.0 μs 1.0-6.0 μs 8 MHz 4 MHz 1 MHz 16.0 μs(3) 32.0 μs(2) 1.0-6.0 μs 128.0 μs(2) 1.0-6.0 μs 1.0-6.0 μs Note:  1. See TAD parameter in the "Electrical Specifications" section for FRC source typical TAD value. 2. These values violate the required TAD time. 3. Outside the recommended TAD time. 4. The ADC clock period (TAD) and total ADC conversion time can be minimized when the ADC clock is derived from the system clock FOSC. However, the FRC oscillator source must be used when conversions are to be performed with the device in Sleep mode. Figure 31-2. Analog-to-Digital Conversion TAD Cycles Precharge Time 1-255 TCY (TPRE) Acquisition/ Sharing Time 1-255 TCY (TACQ) Rev. 10-000035B 11/3/2016 Conversion Time (Traditional Timing of ADC Conversion) TCY TCY-TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10TAD11 b9 External and Internal External and Internal Channels are Channels share charged/discharged charge If ADPRE ≠ 0 If ADACQ ≠ 0 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 2 TCY Conversion starts Holding capacitor CHOLD is disconnected from analog input (typically 100ns) If ADPRE = 0 If ADACQ = 0 (Traditional Operation Start) Set GO bit On the following cycle: ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO bit is cleared, ADIF bit is set, Related Links Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Conversion Timing Specifications 31.1.5 Interrupts The ADC module allows for the ability to generate an interrupt upon completion of an Analog-to-Digital Conversion. The ADC Interrupt Flag is the ADIF bit in the PIRx register. The ADC Interrupt Enable is the ADIE bit in the PIEx register. The ADIF bit must be cleared in software. Important:  1. The ADIF bit is set at the completion of every conversion, regardless of whether or not the ADC interrupt is enabled. 2. The ADC operates during Sleep only when the FRC oscillator is selected. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 539 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. This interrupt can be generated while the device is operating or while in Sleep. If the device is in Sleep, the interrupt will wake-up the device. Upon waking from Sleep, the next instruction following the SLEEP instruction is always executed. If the user is attempting to wake-up from Sleep and resume in-line code execution, the ADIE bit and the PEIE bit of the INTCON register must both be set and the GIE bit of the INTCON register must be cleared. If all three of these bits are set, the execution will switch to the Interrupt Service Routine. 31.1.6 Result Formatting The 10-bit ADC conversion result can be supplied in two formats, left justified or right justified. The ADFM bit controls the output format as shown in the following figure. Figure 31-3. 10-Bit ADC Conversion Result Format Rev. 30-000116A 5/16/2017 ADRESH (ADFM = 0) ADRESL MSB LSB bit 7 bit 0 bit 7 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ 10-bit ADC Result (ADFM = 1) bit 0 MSB bit 7 LSB bit 0 Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’ 31.2 ADC Operation 31.2.1 Starting a Conversion bit 7 bit 0 10-bit ADC Result To enable the ADC module, the ADON must be set to a ‘1’. A conversion may be started by any of the following: • Software setting the ADGO bit to '1' • • An external trigger (source selected by ADACT) A continuous-mode retrigger (see section Continuous Sampling Mode) . Important:  The ADGO bit should not be set in the same instruction that turns on the ADC. Refer to ADC Conversion Procedure (Basic Mode). 31.2.2 Completion of a Conversion When any individual conversion is complete, the value already in ADRES is written into ADPREV (if ADPSIS = 0) and the new conversion results appear in ADRES. When the conversion completes, the ADC module will: • • Clear the ADGO bit (unless the ADCONT bit is set) Set the ADIF Interrupt Flag bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 540 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. • • Set the ADMATH bit Update ADACC After every conversion when ADDSEN = 0, or after every other conversion when ADDSEN = 1, the following events occur: • • ADERR is calculated ADTIF interrupt is set if ADERR calculation meets threshold comparison Important:  Filter and threshold computations occur after the conversion itself is complete. As such, interrupt handlers responding to ADIF should check ADTIF before reading filter and threshold results. 31.2.3 Terminating a Conversion If a conversion must be terminated before completion, the ADGO bit can be cleared in software. The partial conversion results will be discarded and the ADRES registers will retain the value from the previous conversion. Important:  A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. Thus, the ADC module is turned off and any pending conversion is terminated. 31.2.4 ADC Operation During Sleep The ADC module can operate during Sleep. This requires the ADC clock source to be set to the FRC option. When the FRC oscillator source is selected, the ADC waits one additional instruction before starting the conversion. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed, which can reduce system noise during the conversion. If the ADC interrupt is enabled, the device will wake-up from Sleep when the conversion completes. If the ADC interrupt is disabled, the ADC module is turned off after the conversion completes, although the ADON bit remains set. 31.2.5 External Trigger During Sleep If the external trigger is received during sleep while ADC clock source is set to the FRC, ADC module will perform the conversion and set the ADIF bit upon completion. If an external trigger is received when the ADC clock source is something other than FRC, the trigger will be recorded, but the conversion will not begin until the device exits Sleep. 31.2.6 Auto-Conversion Trigger The Auto-conversion Trigger allows periodic ADC measurements without software intervention. When a rising edge of the selected source occurs, the ADGO bit is set by hardware. The Auto-conversion Trigger source is selected with the ADACT bits. Using the Auto-conversion Trigger does not assure proper ADC timing. It is the user’s responsibility to ensure that the ADC timing requirements are met. See the following table for auto-conversion sources. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 541 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Table 31-3.  ADC Auto-Conversion Trigger Sources 31.2.7 ADACT Auto-conversioin Trigger Source 11111 Software write to ADPCH 11110 Reserved, do not use 11101 Software read of ADRESH 11100 Software read of ADERRH 10000 to 11011 Reserved, do not use 01111 Interrupt-on-change Interrupt Flag 01110 C2_out 01101 C1_out 01100 PWM4_out 01011 PWM3_out 01010 CCP2_trigger 01001 CCP1_trigger 01000 TMR6_postscaled 00111 TMR5_overflow 00110 TMR4_postscaled 00101 TMR3_overflow 00100 TMR2_postscaled 00011 TMR1_overflow 00010 TMR0_overflow 00001 Pin selected by ADACTPPS 00000 External Trigger Disabled ADC Conversion Procedure (Basic Mode) This is an example procedure for using the ADC to perform an Analog-to-Digital Conversion: 1. 2. 3. Configure Port: 1.1. Disable pin output driver (Refer to the TRISx register) 1.2. Configure pin as analog (Refer to the ANSELx register) Configure the ADC module: 2.1. Select ADC conversion clock 2.2. Configure voltage reference 2.3. Select ADC input channel (precharge+acquisition) 2.4. Turn on ADC module Configure ADC interrupt (optional): 3.1. Clear ADC interrupt flag © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 542 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 3.2. Enable ADC interrupt 3.3. Enable peripheral interrupt (PEIE bit) 3.4. Enable global interrupt (GIE bit)(1) If ADACQ = 0, software must wait the required acquisition time(2). Start conversion by setting the ADGO bit. Wait for ADC conversion to complete by one of the following: 6.1. Polling the ADGO bit 6.2. Waiting for the ADC interrupt (interrupts enabled) Read ADC Result. Clear the ADC interrupt flag (required if interrupt is enabled). Important:  1. With global interrupts disabled, the device will wake from Sleep but will not enter an Interrupt Service Routine. 2. Refer to ADC Acquisition Requirements. ADC Conversion (assembly) ; This code block configures the ADC for polling, Vdd and Vss references, ; FRC oscillator, and AN0 input. ; Conversion start & polling for completion are included. BANKSEL clrf clrf clrf clrf clrf clrf clrf clrf clrf movlw movwf BANKSEL bsf BANKSEL bsf call BANKSEL bsf btfsc goto BANKSEL movf movwf movf movwf ADCON1 ADCON1 ADCON2 ADCON3 ADREF ADPCH ADACQ ADCAP ADRPT ADACT B'10010100' ADCON0 TRISA TRISA,0 ANSEL ANSEL,0 SampleTime ADCON0 ADCON0,ADGO ADCON0,ADGO $-2 ADRESH ADRESH,W RESULTHI ADRESL,W RESULTLO ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Legacy mode, no filtering, ADRES->ADPREV no math functions Vref = Vdd & Vss select RA0/AN0 software controlled acquisition time default S&H capacitance no repeat measurements auto-conversion disabled ADC On, right-justified, FRC clock ; ; Set RA0 to input ; ; Set RA0 to analog ; Acquisiton delay ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; Start conversion Is conversion done? No, test again Read upper 2 store in GPR Read lower 8 Store in GPR bits space bits space ADC Conversion (C) /*This code block configures the ADC for polling, VDD and VSS references, ADCRC oscillator and AN0 input. Conversion start & polling for completion are included. */ void main() { © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 543 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. //System Initialize initializeSystem(); //Setup ADC ADCON0bits.FM = 1; //right justify ADCON0bits.CS = 1; //FRC Clock ADPCH = 0x00; //RA0 is Analog channel TRISAbits.TRISA0 = 1; //Set RA0 to input ANSELAbits.ANSELA0 = 1; //Set RA0 to analog ADCON0bits.ON = 1; //Turn ADC On } 31.3 while (1) { ADCON0bits.GO = 1; while (ADCON0bits.GO); resultHigh = ADRESH; resultLow = ADRESL; } //Start conversion //Wait for conversion done //Read result //Read result ADC Acquisition Requirements For the ADC to meet its specified accuracy, the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The Analog Input model is shown in ADC Acquisition Requirements. The source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time required to charge the capacitor CHOLD. The sampling switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage (VDD), refer to ADC Acquisition Requirements. The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 kΩ. As the source impedance is decreased, the acquisition time may be decreased. After the analog input channel is selected (or changed), an ADC acquisition must be completed before the conversion can be started. To calculate the minimum acquisition time, Acquisition Time Example may be used. This equation assumes that 1/2 LSb error is used (1024 steps for the ADC). The 1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the ADC to meet its specified resolution. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 544 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Acquisition Time Example Rev. 30-000117A 6/7/2017 Temperature Assumptions: = 50°C and external impedance of 10k  5.0V V DD T ACQ = Amplifier Settling Time + Hold Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient T = AMP + T C + T COFF 2 = µs T + C +   Temperature - 25°C   0.05µs/°C   The value for TC can be approximated with the following equations: 1  = V CHOLD V AP P LI ED  1 – -------------------------n+1   2 –1 ;[1] VCHOLD charged to within 1/2 lsb –TC ----------  RC V AP P LI ED  1 – e  = V CHOLD   ;[2] VCHOLD charge response to VAPPLIED – Tc ---------  1 RC  ;combining [1] and [2] V AP P LI ED  1 – e  = V A PP LIE D  1 – -------------------------n+1    2 –1 Note: Where n = number of bits of the ADC. Solving for TC: T C = – C HOLD  R IC + R SS + R S  ln(1/2047) 1 = – 0pF1  k  + 7k  + 10k   ln(0.0004885) = 1.37 µs Therefore: TA CQ 4 = 2µs + 892ns +   50°C- 25°C   0.05 µs/°C   . 62µs = Note:  1. The reference voltage (VREF) has no effect on the equation, since it cancels itself out. 2. The charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) is not discharged after each conversion. 3. The maximum recommended impedance for analog sources is 10 kΩ. This is required to meet the pin leakage specification. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 545 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Figure 31-4. Analog Input Model Rev. 30-000114A 5/16/2017 Rs VA VDD Analog Input pin VT  0.6V CPIN 5 pF VT  0.6V Sampling Switch SS Rss RIC  1k I LEAKAGE(1) CHOLD = 10 pF Ref- Legend: CHOLD 6V 5V VDD 4V = Sample/Hold Capacitance = Input Capacitance CPIN 3V 2V I LEAKAGE = Leakage current at the pin due to various junctions RIC = Interconnect Resistance R SS = Resistance of Sampling Switch SS = Sampling Switch VT RSS 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Sampling Switch (k) = Threshold Voltage Figure 31-5. ADC Transfer Function Rev. 30-000115A 5/16/2017 Full-Scale Range 3FFh 3FEh ADC Output Code 3FDh 3FCh 3FBh 03h 02h 01h 00h Analog Input Voltage 0.5 LSB REF- 31.4 Zero-Scale Transition 1.5 LSB Full-Scale Transition REF+ Capacitive Voltage Divider (CVD) Features The ADC module contains several features that allow the user to perform a relative capacitance measurement on any ADC channel using the internal ADC sample and hold capacitance as a reference. This relative capacitance measurement can be used to implement capacitive touch or proximity sensing applications. The following figure shows the basic block diagram of the CVD portion of the ADC module. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 546 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Figure 31-6. Hardware Capacitive Voltage Divider Block Diagram Rev. 10-000322B 10/4/2017 VDD VDD ADPPOL & Precharge ADPPOL & Precharge Precharge ANx ADC ADPPOL & Precharge ADPPOL & Precharge ANx Multiplexer ADCAP Additional Sample Capacitors 31.4.1 CVD Operation A CVD operation begins with the ADC’s internal sample and hold capacitor (CHOLD) being disconnected from the path which connects it to the external capacitive sensor node. While disconnected, CHOLD is precharged to VDD or VSS the sensor node is also charged to VSS or VDD respectively to the level opposite that of CHOLD. When the precharge phase is complete, the VDD/VSS bias paths for the two nodes are shut off and the paths between CHOLD and the external sensor node is re-connected, at which time the acquisition phase of the CVD operation begins. During acquisition, a capacitive voltage divider is formed between the precharged CHOLD and sensor nodes, which results in a final voltage level setting on CHOLD which is determined by the capacitances and precharge levels of the two nodes. After acquisition, the ADC converts the voltage level on CHOLD. This process is then repeated with the selected precharge levels inverted for both the CHOLD and the sensor nodes. The waveform for two CVD measurements, which is known as differential CVD measurement, is shown in the following figure. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 547 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Figure 31-7. Differential CVD Measurement Waveform Rev. 10-000335A 10/2/2017 Precharge Acquire Convert Precharge Acquire Convert External Capacitive Sensor VSS ADC Sample and Hold Capacitor Voltage VDD Second Sample First Sample Time 31.4.2 PreCharge Control The Precharge stage is an optional period of time that brings the external channel and internal sample and hold capacitor to known voltage levels. Precharge is enabled by writing a non-zero value to the ADPRE register. This stage is initiated when an ADC conversion begins, either from setting the ADGO bit, a special event trigger, or a conversion restart from the computation functionality. If the ADPRE register is cleared when an ADC conversion begins, this stage is skipped. During the precharge time, CHOLD is disconnected from the outer portion of the sample path that leads to the external capacitive sensor and is connected to either VDD or VSS, depending on the value of the ADPPOL bit. At the same time, the port pin logic of the selected analog channel is overridden to drive a digital high or low out, in order to precharge the outer portion of the ADC’s sample path, which includes the external sensor. The output polarity of this override is also determined by the ADPPOL bit such that the external sensor cap is charged opposite that of the internal CHOLD cap. The amount of time that this charging needs is controlled by the ADPRE register. Important:  The external charging overrides the TRIS setting of the respective I/O pin. If there is a device attached to this pin, Precharge should not be used. 31.4.3 Acquisition Control for CVD (ADPRE > 0) The Acquisition stage allows time for the voltage on the internal sample and hold capacitor to charge or discharge from the selected analog channel. This acquisition time is controlled by the ADACQ register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 548 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. When ADPRE = 0, acquisition starts at the beginning of conversion. When ADPRE > 0, the acquisition stage begins when precharge ends. At the start of the acquisition stage, the port pin logic of the selected analog channel is overridden to turn off the digital high/low output drivers so they do not affect the final result of the charge averaging. Also, the selected ADC channel is connected to CHOLD. This allows charge averaging to proceed between the precharged channel and the CHOLD capacitor. Important:  When ADPRE > 0 setting ADACQ to ‘0’ will set a maximum acquisition time (256 ADC clock cycles). When precharge is disabled, setting ADACQ to ‘0’ will disable hardware acquisition time control. 31.4.4 Guard Ring Outputs Figure 31-8 shows a typical guard ring circuit. CGUARD represents the capacitance of the guard ring trace placed on the PCB board. The user selects values for RA and RB that will create a voltage profile on CGUARD, which will match the selected acquisition channel. The purpose of the guard ring is to generate a signal in phase with the CVD sensing signal to minimize the effects of the parasitic capacitance on sensing electrodes. It also can be used as a mutual drive for mutual capacitive sensing. For more information about active guard and mutual drive, see Application Note AN1478, “mTouchTM Sensing Solution Acquisition Methods Capacitive Voltage Divider”. The ADC has two guard ring drive outputs, ADGRDA and ADGRDB. These outputs can be routed through PPS controls to I/O pins (see “Peripheral Pin Select (PPS) Module” for details). The polarity of these outputs are controlled by the ADGPOL and ADIPEN bits. At the start of the first precharge stage, both outputs are set to match the ADGPOL bit. Once the acquisition stage begins, ADGRDA changes polarity, while ADGRDB remains unchanged. When performing a double sample conversion, setting the ADIPEN bit causes both guard ring outputs to transition to the opposite polarity of ADGPOL at the start of the second precharge stage, and ADGRDA toggles again for the second acquisition. For more information on the timing of the guard ring output, refer to Figure 31-8 and Figure 31-9. Figure 31-8. Guard Ring Circuit Rev. 30-000120A 5/16/2017 ADGRDA RA RB CGUARD ADGRDB © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 549 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. Figure 31-9. Differential CVD with Guard Ring Output Waveform Rev. 10-000336A 10/2/2017 Precharge Acquire Convert Precharge Acquire Convert VSS Guard Ring Capacitance External Capacitive Sensor Voltage VDD Second Sample First Sample Time ADGRDA ADGRDB Figure 31-10. Hardware CVD Sequence Timing Diagram Rev. 30-000122A 5/16/2017 Precharge Time Acquisition/ Sharing Time 1-255 TINST (TPRE 1-255 TINST (TACQ) ) External and Internal External and Internal Channels share Channels are charged/discharged charge If ADPRE  0 If ADACQ 0 Conversion Time (Traditional Timing of ADC Conversion) TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 b4 b1 b0 b6 b7 b2 b8 b3 b9 b5 Conversion starts Holding capacitor CHOLD is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns) If ADPRE = 0 If ADACQ = 0 (Traditional Operation Start) Set GO/DONE bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet On the following cycle: AADRES0H:AADRES0L is loaded, ADIF bit is set, GO/DONE bit is cleared 40001843D-page 550 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.4.5 Additional Sample and Hold Capacitance Additional capacitance can be added in parallel with the internal sample and hold capacitor (CHOLD) by using the ADCAP register. This register selects a digitally programmable capacitance which is added to the ADC conversion bus, increasing the effective internal capacitance of the sample and hold capacitor in the ADC module. This is used to improve the match between internal and external capacitance for a better sensing performance. The additional capacitance does not affect analog performance of the ADC because it is not connected during conversion. See Figure 31-11. 31.5 Computation Operation The ADC module hardware is equipped with post conversion computation features. These features provide data post-processing functions that can be operated on the ADC conversion result, including digital filtering/averaging and threshold comparison functions. Figure 31-11. Computational Features Simplified Block Diagram Rev. 10-000260B 8/4/2015 ADCALC ADMD ADRES ADFILT Average/ Filter 1 0 Error Calculation ADERR Threshold Logic ADPREV ADSTPT ADUTHR ADPSIS Set Interrupt Flag ADLTHR The operation of the ADC computational features is controlled by the ADMD bits. The module can be operated in one of five modes: • Basic: This is a legacy mode. In this mode, ADC conversion occurs on single (ADDSEN = 0) or double (ADDSEN = 1) samples. ADIF is set after each conversion is complete. • Accumulate: With each trigger, the ADC conversion result is added to the accumulator and ADCNT increments. ADIF is set after each conversion. ADTIF is set according to the calculation mode. Average: With each trigger, the ADC conversion result is added to the accumulator. When the ADRPT number of samples have been accumulated, a threshold test is performed. Upon the next trigger, the accumulator is cleared. For the subsequent tests, additional ADRPT samples are required to be accumulated. Burst Average: At the trigger, the accumulator is cleared. The ADC conversion results are then collected repetitively until ADRPT samples are accumulated and finally the threshold is tested. Low-Pass Filter (LPF): With each trigger, the ADC conversion result is sent through a filter. When ADRPT samples have occurred, a threshold test is performed. Every trigger after that the ADC conversion result is sent through the filter and another threshold test is performed. • • • The five modes are summarized in the following table. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 551 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 1 2 3 Accumulate Average Burst Average Datasheet Note:  4 0 Basic Low-pass Filter ADMD Mode Unchanged ADCNT S1 + ADACC If (ADCNT=FF): or ADCNT, otherwise: (S2-S1) + ADCNT+1 ADACC Unchanged ADACC(1) Value after Cycle(2) Completion ADACLR = 1 ADACLR = 1 or ADGO set or retrigger (S2S1)+ADACCADACC/ 2ADCRS No No No Retrigger N/A N/A count ADAOV ADFLTR ADCNT If ADACC ADACC/ count threshold=true Overflow 2ADCRS If threshold=true Interrupt Value at ADTIF Interrupt If If ADACC ADACC/ count ADCNT>=ADRPT threshold=true Overflow 2ADCRS Every Sample Every Sample Threshold Test Threshold Operations No If If ADACC Filtered ADCNT>=ADRPT threshold=true Overflow Value count Each repetition: Repeat while If If ADACC ADACC/ ADRPT same as ADCNT=ADRPT threshold=true Overflow 2ADCRS Average End with ADCNT=ADRPT S1+ADACC- If (ADCNT=FF): ADACC/ ADCNT, 2ADCRS otherwise: or ADCNT+1 samples Each repetition: same as Average End with sum of all ADACLR = 1 or S1 + ADACC If (ADCNT=FF): or ADCNT, ADCNT>=ADRPT otherwise: at ADGO or (S2-S1) + ADCNT+1 retrigger ADACC ADACLR = 1 ADACLR = 1 ADACC and ADCNT Register Clear Event Table 31-4. Computation Modes PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 40001843D-page 552 2. 1. ADMD ADACC and ADCNT ADACC(1) ADCNT Value after Cycle(2) Completion Retrigger Threshold Test Threshold Operations Interrupt ADAOV ADFLTR ADCNT Value at ADTIF Interrupt S1 and S2 are abbreviations for Sample 1 and Sample 2, respectively. When ADDSEN = 0, S1 = ADRES; When ADDSEN = 1, S1 = ADPREV and S2 = ADRES. When ADDSEN = 0 then Cycle means one conversion. When ADDSEN = 1 the Cycle means two conversions. Mode Register Clear Event PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 553 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.5.1 Digital Filter/Average The digital filter/average module consists of an accumulator with data feedback options, and control logic to determine when threshold tests need to be applied. The accumulator is a 16-bit wide register which can be accessed through the ADACC registers. Upon each trigger event (the ADGO bit set or external event trigger), the ADC conversion result is added to the accumulator. If the accumulated value exceeds 2(accumulator_width)-1 = 216 = 65535, the ADAOV overflow bit is set. The number of samples to be accumulated is determined by the ADRPT (A/D Repeat Setting) register. Each time a sample is added to the accumulator, the ADCNT register is incremented. Once ADRPT samples are accumulated (ADCNT = ADRPT), an accumulator clear command can be issued by the software by setting the ADACLR bit. Setting the ADACLR bit will also clear the ADAOV (Accumulator overflow) bit, as well as the ADCNT register. The ADACLR bit is cleared by the hardware when accumulator clearing action is complete. Important:  When ADC is operating from FRC, five FRC clock cycles are required to execute the ADACC clearing operation. The ADCRS bits control the data shift on the accumulator result, which effectively divides the value in accumulator (ADACC) registers. For the Accumulate mode of the digital filter, the shift provides a simple scaling operation. For the Average/Burst Average mode, the shift bits are used to determine number of samples for averaging. For the Low-pass Filter mode, the shift is an integral part of the filter, and determines the cut-off frequency of the filter. Table 31-5 shows the -3 dB cut-off frequency in ωT (radians) and the highest signal attenuation obtained by this filter at nyquist frequency (ωT = π). Table 31-5. Low-pass Filter -3 dB Cut-off Frequency 31.5.2 ADCRS ωT (radians) @ -3 dB Frequency dB @ Fnyquist=1/(2T) 1 0.72 -9.5 2 0.284 -16.9 3 0.134 -23.5 4 0.065 -29.8 5 0.032 -36.0 6 0.016 -42.0 7 0.0078 -48.1 Basic Mode Basic mode (ADMD = 000) disables all additional computation features. In this mode, no accumulation occurs but threshold error comparison is performed. Double sampling, Continuous mode, and all CVD features are still available, but no features involving the digital filter/average features are used. 31.5.3 Accumulate Mode In Accumulate mode (ADMD = 001), after every conversion, the ADC result is added to the ADACC register. The ADACC register is right-shifted by the value of the ADCRS bits. This right-shifted value is copied in to the ADFLT register. The Formatting mode does not affect the right-justification of the ADACC © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 554 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. value. Upon each sample, ADCNT is also incremented, incrementing the number of samples accumulated. After each sample and accumulation, the ADACC value has a threshold comparison performed on it (see Threshold Comparison) and the ADTIF interrupt may trigger. 31.5.4 Average Mode In Average Mode (ADMD = 010), the ADACC registers accumulate with each ADC sample, much as in Accumulate mode, and the ADCNT register increments with each sample. The ADFLT register is also updated with the right-shifted value of the ADACC register. The value of the ADCRS bits governs the number of right shifts. However, in Average mode, the threshold comparison is performed upon ADCNT being greater than or equal to a user-defined ADRPT value. In this mode when ADRPT = 2^ADCNT, then the final accumulated value will be divided by number of samples, allowing for a threshold comparison operation on the average of all gathered samples. 31.5.5 Burst Average Mode The Burst Average mode (ADMD = 011) acts the same as the Average mode in most respects. The one way it differs is that it continuously retriggers ADC sampling until the ADCNT value is greater than or equal to ADRPT, even if Continuous Sampling mode (see Continuous Sampling Mode) is not enabled. This allows for a threshold comparison on the average of a short burst of ADC samples. 31.5.6 Low-pass Filter Mode The Low-pass Filter mode (ADMD = 100) acts similarly to the Average mode in how it handles samples (accumulates samples until ADCNT value greater than or equal to ADRPT, then triggers threshold comparison), but instead of a simple average, it performs a low-pass filter operation on all of the samples, reducing the effect of high-frequency noise on the average, then performs a threshold comparison on the results. (see Computation Operation for a more detailed description of the mathematical operation). In this mode, the ADCRS bits determine the cut-off frequency of the low-pass filter (as demonstrated by Digital Filter/Average). 31.5.7 Threshold Comparison At the end of each computation: • • • The conversion results are latched and held stable at the end-of-conversion. The error (ADERR) is calculated based on a difference calculation which is selected by the ADCALC bits. The value can be one of the following calculations (see Table 31-6 for more details): – The first derivative of single measurements – The CVD result when double-sampling is enabled – The current result vs. a setpoint – The current result vs. the filtered/average result – The first derivative of the filtered/average value – Filtered/average value vs. a setpoint The result of the calculation (ADERR) is compared to the upper and lower thresholds, ADUTH and ADLTH registers, to set the ADUTHR and ADLTHR flag bits. The threshold logic is selected by ADTMD bits. The threshold trigger option can be one of the following: – Never interrupt – Error is less than lower threshold – Error is greater than or equal to lower threshold – Error is between thresholds (inclusive) – Error is outside of thresholds © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 555 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. – – – – Error is less than or equal to upper threshold Error is greater than upper threshold Always interrupt regardless of threshold test results If the threshold condition is met, the threshold interrupt flag ADTIF is set. Note:  1. The threshold tests are signed operations. 2. If ADAOV is set, a threshold interrupt is signaled. It is good practice for threshold interrupt handlers to verify the validity of the threshold by checking ADAOV. Table 31-6. ADC Error Calculation Mode ADERR ADCALC ADDSEN = 0 SingleSample Mode ADDSEN = 1 CVD Double-Sample Mode(1) Application 111 ADFLTR ADFLTR Filtered results above or below the threshold. 110 ADRES ADRES Measurement above or below the threshold 101 ADLFTR-ADSTPT ADFLTR-ADSTPT Average/filtered value vs. setpoint 100 ADPREV-ADFLTR ADPREV-ADFLTR First derivative of filtered value(3) (negative) 011 Reserved Reserved 010 ADRES-ADFLTR (ADRES-ADPREV)ADFLTR Actual result vs. averaged/filtered value 001 ADRES-ADSTPT (ADRES-ADPREV)ADSTPT Actual result vs.setpoint 000 ADRES-ADPREV ADRES-ADPREV First derivative of single measurement(2) Reserved Actual CVD result(1,2) Note:  1. When ADDSEN=1, ADERR is computed only after every second sample. 2. When ADPSIS = 0. 3. When ADPSIS = 1. 31.5.8 Continuous Sampling Mode Setting the ADCONT bit register automatically retriggers a new conversion cycle after updating the ADACC register. That means the ADGO bit is set to generate automatic retriggering, until the device Reset occurs or the ADSOI A/D Stop-on-interrupt bit is set (correct logic). 31.5.9 Double Sample Conversion Double sampling is enabled by setting the ADDSEN bit. When this bit is set, two conversions are required before the module will calculate threshold error. Each conversion must still be triggered separately when ADCONT = 0. The first conversion will set the ADMATH bit and update ADACC, but will not calculate © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 556 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. ADERR or trigger ADTIF. When the second conversion completes, the first value is transferred to ADPREV (depending on the setting of ADPSIS) and the value of the second conversion is placed into ADRES. Only upon the completion of the second conversion is ADERR calculated and ADTIF triggered (depending on the value of ADCALC). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 557 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.6 Register Summary - ADC Control Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F56 ADACT 7:0 0x0F57 ADCLK 7:0 0x0F58 ADREF 7:0 ADACT[4:0] ADCS[5:0] ADNREF 0x0F59 ADCON1 7:0 ADPPOL 0x0F5A ADCON2 7:0 ADPSIS 0x0F5B ADCON3 7:0 0x0F5C ADACQ 7:0 0x0F5D ADCAP 7:0 0x0F5E ADPRE 7:0 0x0F5F ADPCH 7:0 0x0F60 ADCON0 7:0 0x0F61 ADPREV 0x0F63 ADRES 0x0F65 ADSTAT 7:0 0x0F66 ADRPT 7:0 0x0F67 ADCNT 7:0 ADCNT[7:0] 7:0 ADSTPTL[7:0] 15:8 ADSTPTH[7:0] 0x0F68 ADSTPT 0x0F6A ADLTH 0x0F6C ADUTH 0x0F6E ADERR 0x0F70 0x0F72 31.7 ADACC ADFLTR ADIPEN ADPREF[1:0] ADGPOL ADDSEN ADCRS[2:0] ADACLR ADMD[2:0] ADCALC[2:0] ADSOI ADTMD[2:0] ADACQ[7:0] ADCAP[4:0] ADPRE[7:0] ADPCH[5:0] ADON ADCONT ADCS 7:0 ADPREVL[7:0] 15:8 ADPREVH[7:0] 7:0 ADRESL[7:0] 15:8 ADFM ADGO ADRESH[7:0] ADAOV ADUTHR ADLTHR ADMATH ADSTAT[2:0] ADRPT[7:0] 7:0 ADLTHL[7:0] 15:8 ADLTHH[7:0] 7:0 ADUTHL[7:0] 15:8 ADUTHH[7:0] 7:0 ADERRL[7:0] 15:8 ADERRH[7:0] 7:0 ADACCL[7:0] 15:8 ADACCH[7:0] 7:0 ADFLTRL[7:0] 15:8 ADFLTRH[7:0] Register Definitions: ADC Control © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 558 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.7.1 ADCON0 Name:  Offset:  ADCON0 0xF60 ADC Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 7 6 ADON ADCONT 5 ADCS 4 3 ADFM 2 1 ADGO 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W/HC 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – ADON ADC Enable bit Value 1 0 Description ADC is enabled ADC is disabled Bit 6 – ADCONT ADC Continuous Operation Enable bit Value 1 0 Description ADGO is retriggered upon completion of each conversion trigger until ADTIF is set (if ADSOI is set) or until ADGO is cleared (regardless of the value of ADSOI) ADC is cleared upon completion of each conversion trigger Bit 4 – ADCS ADC Clock Selection bit Value 1 0 Description Clock supplied from FRC dedicated oscillator Clock supplied by Fosc, divided according to ADCLK register Bit 2 – ADFM ADC results Format/alignment Selection Value 1 0 Description ADRES and ADPREV data are right-justified ADRES and ADPREV data are left-justified, zero-filled Bit 0 – ADGO ADC Conversion Status bit Value 1 0 Description ADC conversion cycle in progress. Setting this bit starts an ADC conversion cycle. The bit is cleared by hardware as determined by the ADCONT bit ADC conversion completed/not in progress © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 559 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.7.2 ADCON1 Name:  Offset:  ADCON1 0xF59 ADC Control Register 1 Bit Access Reset 7 6 5 ADPPOL ADIPEN ADGPOL 4 3 2 1 ADDSEN 0 R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – ADPPOL Precharge Polarity bit Action During 1st Precharge Stage Value x 1 0 1 0 Condition ADPRE=0 ADPRE>0 & ADC input is I/O pin ADPRE>0 & ADC input is I/O pin ADPRE>0 & ADC input is internal ADPRE>0 & ADC input is internal Description Bit has no effect Pin shorted to AVDD Pin shorted to VSS CHOLD Shorted to AVDD CHOLD Shorted to VSS Bit 6 – ADIPEN A/D Inverted Precharge Enable bit Value x 1 0 Condition Description ADDSEN = 0 Bit has no effect ADDSEN = 1 The precharge and guard signals in the second conversion cycle are the opposite polarity of the first cycle ADDSEN = 1 Both Conversion cycles use the precharge and guards specified by ADPPOL and ADGPOL Bit 5 – ADGPOL Guard Ring Polarity Selection bit Value 1 0 Description ADC guard Ring outputs start as digital high during Precharge stage ADC guard Ring outputs start as digital low during Precharge stage Bit 0 – ADDSEN Double-Sample Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Two conversions are processed as a pair. The selected computation is performed after every second conversion. Selected computation is performed after every conversion © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 560 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.7.3 ADCON2 Name:  Offset:  ADCON2 0xF5A ADC Control Register 2 Bit 7 6 ADPSIS Access Reset 5 4 ADCRS[2:0] 3 2 ADACLR 1 0 ADMD[2:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W/HC R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit 7 – ADPSIS ADC Previous Sample Input Select bits Value 1 0 Description ADFLTR is transferred to ADPREV at start-of-conversion ADRES is transferred to ADPREV at start-of-conversion Bits 6:4 – ADCRS[2:0] ADC Accumulated Calculation Right Shift Select bits Value 0 to 7 0 to 7 x Condition Description ADMD = 'b100 Low-pass filter time constant is 2ADCRS, filter gain is 1:1 ADMD =' b011 to 'b001 The accumulated value is right-shifted by ADCRS (divided by 2ADCRS)(1,2) ADMD ='b000 to 'b001 These bits are ignored Bit 3 – ADACLR  A/D Accumulator Clear Command bit(3) Value 1 0 Description ADACC, ADAOV and ADCNT registers are cleared Clearing action is complete (or not started) Bits 2:0 – ADMD[2:0]  ADC Operating Mode Selection bits(4) Value 111-101 100 011 010 001 000 Description Reserved Low-pass Filter mode Burst Average mode Average mode Accumulate mode Basic (Legacy) mode Note:  1. To correctly calculate an average, the number of samples (set in ADRPT) must be 2ADCRS. 2. ADCRS = 'b111 is a reserved option. 3. 4. This bit is cleared by hardware when the accumulator operation is complete; depending on oscillator selections, the delay may be many instructions. See Table 31-4 for Full mode descriptions. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 561 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (ADC2) Analog-to-Digital Converter with Computation Module.. 31.7.4 ADCON3 Name:  Offset:  ADCON3 0xF5B ADC Control Register 3 Bit 7 6 5 4 ADCALC[2:0] Access Reset 3 2 ADSOI 1 0 ADTMD[2:0] R/W R/W R/W R/W/HC R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bits 6:4 – ADCALC[2:0] ADC Error Calculation Mode Select bits See Table 31-6 table for selection details. Bit 3 – ADSOI ADC Stop-on-Interrupt bit Value 1 0 x Condition Description ADCONT = 1 ADGO is cleared when the threshold conditions are met, otherwise the conversion is retriggered ADCONT = 1 ADGO is not cleared by hardware, must be cleared by software to stop retriggers ADCONT = 0 This bit is not used Bits 2:0 – ADTMD[2:0] Threshold Interrupt Mode Select bits Value 111 110 101 100 011 010 001 000 Description Interrupt regardless of threshold test results Interrupt if ADERR>ADUTH Interrupt if ADERR≤ADUTH Interrupt if ADERRADUTH Interrupt if ADERR>ADLTH and ADERR CxVN CxVP < CxVN CxVP < CxVN CxVP > CxVN Bit 4 – POL Comparator Output Polarity Select bit Value 1 0 Description Comparator output is inverted Comparator output is not inverted Bit 1 – HYS Comparator Hysteresis Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Comparator hysteresis enabled Comparator hysteresis disabled Bit 0 – SYNC Comparator Output Synchronous Mode bit Output updated on the falling edge of Timer1/3/5 clock source. Value 1 0 Description Comparator output to Timer1/3/5 and I/O pin is synchronous to changes on the timer clock source. Comparator output to Timer1/3/5 and I/O pin is asynchronous © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 590 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CMP) Comparator Module 32.15.2 CMxCON1 Name:  Offset:  CMxCON1 0xF3A,0xF36 Comparator x Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 INTP INTN R/W R/W 0 0 Bit 1 – INTP Comparator Interrupt on Positive-Going Edge Enable bit Value 1 0 Description The CxIF interrupt flag will be set upon a positive-going edge of the CxOUT bit No interrupt flag will be set on a positive-going edge of the CxOUT bit Bit 0 – INTN Comparator Interrupt on Negative-Going Edge Enable bit Value 1 0 Description The CxIF interrupt flag will be set upon a negative-going edge of the CxOUT bit No interrupt flag will be set on a negative-going edge of the CxOUT bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 591 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CMP) Comparator Module 32.15.3 CMxNCH Name:  Offset:  CMxNCH 0xF3B,0xF37 Comparator x Inverting Channel Select Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 NCH[2:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Bits 2:0 – NCH[2:0] Comparator Inverting Input Channel Select bits NCH Negative Input Sources 111 AVSS 110 FVR_Buffer2 101 CxNCH not connected 100 CxNCH not connected 011 CxIN3- 010 CxIN2- 001 CxIN1- 000 CxIN0- © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 592 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CMP) Comparator Module 32.15.4 CMxPCH Name:  Offset:  CMxPCH 0xF3C,0xF38 Comparator x Non-Inverting Channel Select Register Bit 7 PCH Positive Input Source 111 AVSS 110 FVR_Buffer2 101 DAC_Output 100 CxPCH not connected 011 CxPCH not connected 010 CxPCH not connected 001 CxIN1+ 000 CxIN0+ 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PCH[2:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 Bits 2:0 – PCH[2:0] Comparator Non-Inverting Input Channel Select bits © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 593 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (CMP) Comparator Module 32.15.5 CMOUT Name:  Offset:  CMOUT 0xF3D Comparator Output Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 Access Reset 2 1 0 MC2OUT MC1OUT RO RO 0 0 Bits 0, 1 – MCxOUT Mirror copy of CxOUT bit © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 594 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect 33. (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect The HLVD module can be configured to monitor the device voltage. This is useful in battery monitoring applications. Complete control of the HLVD module is provided through the HLVDCON0 and HLVDCON1 registers. The module’s block diagram is shown in the figure below. Figure 33-1. HLVD Module Block Diagram Rev. 10-000256A 8/7/2015 VDD 16-to-1 MUX 4 HLVDSEL HLVDEN HLVDOUT Trigger/ Interrupt Generation + HLVDRDY HLVDEN HLVDIF HLVDINTH HLVDINTL Bandgap Reference Volatge Since the HLVD can be software enabled through the HLVDEN bit, setting and clearing the enable bit does not produce a false HLVD event glitch. Each time the HLVD module is enabled, the RDY bit can be used to detect when the module is stable and ready to use. The INTH and INTL bits determine the overall operation of the module. When INTH is set, the module monitors for rises in VDD above the trip point set by the bits. When INTL is set, the module monitors for drops in VDD below the trip point set by the SEL bits. When both the INTH and INTL bits are set, any changes above or below the trip point set by the SEL bits can be monitored. The OUT bit can be read to determine if the voltage is greater than or less than the selected trip point. 33.1 Operation When the HLVD module is enabled, a comparator uses an internally generated voltage reference as the set point. The set point is compared with the trip point, where each node in the resistor divider represents a trip point voltage. The “trip point” voltage is the voltage level at which the device detects a high or lowvoltage event, depending on the configuration of the module. When the supply voltage is equal to the trip point, the voltage tapped off of the resistor array is equal to the internal reference voltage generated by the voltage reference module. The comparator then generates an interrupt signal by setting the HLVDIF bit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 595 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect The trip point voltage is software programmable to any of 16 values. The trip point is selected by programming the SEL bits. 33.2 Setup To set up the HLVD module: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the desired HLVD trip point by writing the value to the SEL bits of the HLVDCON1 register. Depending on the application to detect high-voltage peaks or low-voltage drops or both, set the INTH or INTL bit appropriately. Enable the HLVD module by setting the EN bit. Clear the HLVD interrupt flag (HLVDIF), which may have been set from a previous interrupt. If interrupts are desired, enable the HLVD interrupt by setting the HLVDIE and GIE bits. An interrupt will not be generated until the RDY bit is set. Important:  Before changing any module settings (interrupts and tripping point), first disable the module (EN = 0), make the changes and re-enable the module. This prevents the generation of false HLVD events. Related Links PIR2 PIE3 33.3 Current Consumption When the module is enabled, the HLVD comparator and voltage divider are enabled and consume static current. The total current consumption, when enabled, is specified in electrical specification Parameter D206. Depending on the application, the HLVD module does not need to operate constantly. To reduce current consumption, the module can be enabled for short periods where the voltage is checked. After such a check, the module could be disabled. Related Links Power-Down Current (IPD)(1,2) 33.4 HLVD Start-up Time If the HLVD or other circuits using the internal voltage reference are disabled to lower the device’s current consumption, the reference voltage circuit will require time to become stable before a low or high-voltage condition can be reliably detected. This start-up time, TFVRST, is an interval that is independent of device clock speed. It is specified in electrical specification. The HLVD interrupt flag is not enabled until TFVRST has expired and a stable reference voltage is reached. For this reason, brief excursions beyond the set point may not be detected during this interval (see the figures below). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 596 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect Figure 33-2. Low-Voltage Detect Operation (INTL = 1) Rev. 30-000141A 5/26/2017 CASE 1: HLVDIF may not be Set VDD VHLVD HLVDIF Enable HLVD TFVRST HLVDRDY Band Gap Reference Voltage is Stable CASE 2: HLVDIF Cleared in Software VDD VHLVD HLVDIF Enable HLVD HLVDRDY TFVRST Band Gap Reference Voltage is Stable HLVDIF Cleared in Software HLVDIF Cleared in Software, HLVDIF Remains Set since HLVD Condition still Exists © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 597 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect Figure 33-3. High-Voltage Detect Operation (INTH = 1) Rev. 30-000142A 5/26/2017 CASE 1: HLVDIF may not be Set VHLVD VDD HLVDIF Enable HLVD TIRVST HLVDRDY HLVDIF Cleared in Software Band Gap Reference Voltage is Stable CASE 2: VHLVD VDD HLVDIF Enable HLVD HLVDRDY TIRVST Band Gap Reference Voltage is Stable HLVDIF Cleared in Software HLVDIF Cleared in Software, HLVDIF Remains Set since HLVD Condition still Exists 33.5 Applications In many applications, it is desirable to detect a drop below, or rise above, a particular voltage threshold. For example, the HLVD module could be periodically enabled to detect Universal Serial Bus (USB) attach or detach. This assumes the device is powered by a lower voltage source than the USB when detached. An attach would indicate a High-Voltage Detect from, for example, 3.3V to 5V (the voltage on USB) and vice versa for a detach. This feature could save a design a few extra components and an attach signal (input pin). For general battery applications, the figure below shows a possible voltage curve. Over time, the device voltage decreases. When the device voltage reaches voltage, Va, the HLVD logic generates an interrupt at time, Ta. The interrupt could cause the execution of an Interrupt Service Routine (ISR), which would allow the application to perform “housekeeping tasks” and a controlled shutdown before the device voltage exits the valid operating range at TB. This would give the application a time window, represented by the difference between TA and TB, to safely exit. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 598 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect Figure 33-4. Typical Low-Voltage Detect Application Rev. 30-000143A 5/26/2017 Voltage VA VB Time TA TB Legend: VA = HLVD trip point VB = Minimum valid device o per at ing vol tage 33.6 Operation During Sleep When enabled, the HLVD circuitry continues to operate during Sleep. If the device voltage crosses the trip point, the HLVDIF bit will be set and the device will wake up from Sleep. Device execution will continue from the interrupt vector address if interrupts have been globally enabled. 33.7 Operation During Idle and Doze Modes In both Idle and Doze modes, the module is active and events are generated if peripheral is enabled. 33.8 Effects of a Reset A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state. This forces the HLVD module to be turned off. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 599 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect 33.9 Register Summary - HLVD Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F2F HLVDCON0 7:0 0x0F30 HLVDCON1 7:0 33.10 EN OUT RDY INTH INTL SEL[3:0] Register Definitions: HLVD Control Long bit name prefixes for the HLVD peripheral is shown in the following table. Refer to the "Long Bit Names" section for more information. Table 33-1. HLVD Long Bit Name Prefixes Peripheral Bit Name Prefix HLVD HLVD Related Links Long Bit Names © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 600 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect 33.10.1 HLVDCON0 Name:  Offset:  HLVDCON0 0xF2F High/Low-Voltage Detect Control Register 0 Bit Access Reset 5 4 1 0 EN 7 6 OUT RDY 3 2 INTH INTL R/W RO RO R/W R/W 0 x x 0 0 Bit 7 – EN High/Low-voltage Detect Power Enable bit Value 1 0 Description Enables the HLVD module Disables the HLVD module Bit 5 – OUT HLVD Comparator Output bit Value 1 0 Description Voltage ≤ selected detection limit (SEL) Voltage ≥ selected detection limit (SEL) Bit 4 – RDY Band Gap Reference Voltages Stable Status Flag bit Value 1 0 Description Indicates HLVD Module is ready and output is stable Indicates HLVD Module is not ready Bit 1 – INTH HLVD Positive going (High Voltage) Interrupt Enable Value 1 0 Description HLVDIF will be set when voltage ≥ selected detection limit (SEL) HLVDIF will not be set Bit 0 – INTL HLVD Negative going (Low Voltage) Interrupt Enable Value 1 0 Description HLVDIF will be set when voltage ≤ selected detection limit (SEL) HLVDIF will not be set © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 601 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 (HLVD) High/Low-Voltage Detect 33.10.2 HLVDCON1 Name:  Offset:  HLVDCON1 0xF30 Low-Voltage Detect Control Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SEL[3:0] Access Reset R/W R/W R/W R/W 0 0 0 0 Bits 3:0 – SEL[3:0] High/Low Voltage Detection Limit Selection bits Table 33-2. HLVD Detection Limits SEL Detection Limit 1111 Reserved 1110 4.63V 1101 4.32V 1100 4.12V 1011 3.91V 1010 3.71V 1001 3.60V 1000 3.40V 0111 3.09V 0110 2.88V 0101 2.78V 0100 2.57V 0011 2.47V 0010 2.26V 0001 2.06V 0000 1.85V Reset States: POR = 0000 BOR = uuuu © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 602 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) 34. In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) ICSP™ programming allows customers to manufacture circuit boards with unprogrammed devices. Programming can be done after the assembly process, allowing the device to be programmed with the most recent firmware or a custom firmware. Five pins are needed for ICSP™ programming: • • • • • ICSPCLK ICSPDAT MCLR/VPP VDD VSS In Program/Verify mode the program memory, User IDs and the Configuration Words are programmed through serial communications. The ICSPDAT pin is a bidirectional I/O used for transferring the serial data and the ICSPCLK pin is the clock input. For more information on ICSP™ refer to the “ Memory Programming Specification” (DS40001772). 34.1 High-Voltage Programming Entry Mode The device is placed into High-Voltage Programming Entry mode by holding the ICSPCLK and ICSPDAT pins low then raising the voltage on MCLR/VPP to VIHH. 34.2 Low-Voltage Programming Entry Mode ® The Low-Voltage Programming Entry mode allows the PIC Flash MCUs to be programmed using VDD only, without high voltage. When the LVP bit of Configuration Words is set to ‘1’, the low-voltage ICSP programming entry is enabled. To disable the Low-Voltage ICSP mode, the LVP bit must be programmed to ‘0’. Entry into the Low-Voltage Programming Entry mode requires the following steps: 1. 2. MCLR is brought to Vil. A 32-bit key sequence is presented on ICSPDAT, while clocking ICSPCLK. Once the key sequence is complete, MCLR must be held at VIL for as long as Program/Verify mode is to be maintained. If low-voltage programming is enabled (LVP = 1), the MCLR Reset function is automatically enabled and cannot be disabled. See the MCLR Section for more information. The LVP bit can only be reprogrammed to ‘0’ by using the High-Voltage Programming mode. Related Links MCLR 34.3 Common Programming Interfaces Connection to a target device is typically done through an ICSP™ header. A commonly found connector on development tools is the RJ-11 in the 6P6C (6-pin, 6-connector) configuration. See Figure 34-1. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 603 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) Figure 34-1. ICD RJ-11 Style Connector Interface VDD ICSPDAT NC 2 4 6 ICSPCLK 1 3 5 Target VPP/MCLR VSS PC Board Bottom Side Pin Description* 1 = VPP/MCLR 2 = VDD Target 3 = VSS (ground) 4 = ICSPDAT 5 = ICSPCLK 6 = No Connect Another connector often found in use with the PICkit™ programmers is a standard 6-pin header with 0.1 inch spacing. Refer to Figure 34-2. For additional interface recommendations, refer to the specific device programmer manual prior to PCB design. It is recommended that isolation devices be used to separate the programming pins from other circuitry. The type of isolation is highly dependent on the specific application and may include devices such as resistors, diodes, or even jumpers. See Figure 34-3 for more information. Figure 34-2. PICkit™ Programmer Style Connector Interface Pin 1 Indicator 1 2 3 4 5 6 Pin Description1 1 = VPP/MCLR 2 = VDD Target 3 = VSS (ground) 4 = ICSPDAT © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 604 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™) 5 = ICSPCLK 6 = No Connect Note:  1. Note:  The 6-pin header (0.100" spacing) accepts 0.025" square pins. Figure 34-3. Typical Connection for ICSP™ Programming External Programming Signals Device to be Programmed VDD VDD VDD VPP MCLR/VPP VSS VSS Data ICSPDAT Clock ICSPCLK * * * To Normal Connections * Isolation devices (as required). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 605 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary 35. Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0EA0 PPSLOCK 7:0 0x0EA1 INT0PPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA2 INT1PPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA3 INT2PPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA4 T0CKIPPS 7:0 PORT PIN[2:0] 0x0EA5 T1CKIPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EA6 T1GPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EA7 T3CKIPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EA8 T3GPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] PPSLOCKED 0x0EA9 T5CKIPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAA T5GPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAB T2INPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAC T4INPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAD T6INPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAE ADACTPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EAF CCP1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB0 CCP2PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB1 CWG1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB2 MDCARLPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB3 MDCARHPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB4 MDSRCPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB5 RX1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB6 CK1PPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB7 SSP1CLKPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB8 SSP1DATPPS 7:0 PORT[1:0] PIN[2:0] 0x0EB9 SSP1SSPPS 7:0 0x0EBA IPR0 7:0 PORT[1:0] 0x0EBB IPR1 7:0 OSCFIP CSWIP 0x0EBC IPR2 7:0 HLVDIP ZCDIP 0x0EBD IPR3 7:0 RC1IP TX1IP 0x0EBE IPR4 7:0 TMR6IP TMR5IP 0x0EBF IPR5 7:0 0x0EC0 IPR6 7:0 0x0EC1 IPR7 7:0 0x0EC2 PIE0 7:0 0x0EC3 PIE1 7:0 OSCFIE CSWIE 0x0EC4 PIE2 7:0 HLVDIE ZCDIE 0x0EC5 PIE3 7:0 RC1IE TX1IE 0x0EC6 PIE4 7:0 TMR6IE TMR5IE 0x0EC7 PIE5 7:0 0x0EC8 PIE6 7:0 0x0EC9 PIE7 7:0 0x0ECA PIR0 7:0 TMR0IP SCANIP CRCIP © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. CRCIE PIN[2:0] INT2IP TMR4IP INT1IP INT0IP ADTIP ADIP C2IP C1IP BCL1IP SSP1IP TMR3IP TMR2IP TMR1IP TMR5GIP TMR3GIP TMR1GIP CCP2IP CCP1IP NVMIP TMR0IE SCANIE IOCIP CWG1IP IOCIE INT2IE TMR4IE INT1IE INT0IE ADTIE ADIE C2IE C1IE BCL1IE SSP1IE TMR3IE TMR2IE TMR1IE TMR5GIE TMR3GIE TMR1GIE CCP2IE CCP1IE NVMIE TMR0IF CWG1IE IOCIF Datasheet INT2IF INT1IF INT0IF 40001843D-page 606 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0ECB PIR1 7:0 OSCFIF CSWIF ADTIF 0x0ECC PIR2 7:0 HLVDIF ZCDIF C2IF C1IF 0x0ECD PIR3 7:0 RC1IF TX1IF BCL1IF SSP1IF 0x0ECE PIR4 7:0 TMR6IF TMR5IF 0x0ECF PIR5 7:0 0x0ED0 PIR6 7:0 0x0ED1 PIR7 7:0 0x0ED2 WDTCON0 7:0 0x0ED3 WDTCON1 7:0 0x0ED4 WDTPS TMR4IF TMR3IF TMR2IF TMR1IF TMR5GIF TMR3GIF TMR1GIF CCP2IF SCANIF CRCIF NVMIF SEN WDTCS[2:0] WINDOW[2:0] 7:0 PSCNTL[7:0] 15:8 PSCNTH[7:0] 0x0ED6 WDTTMR 7:0 0x0ED7 CPUDOZE 7:0 WDTTMR[4:0] 0x0ED8 OSCCON1 7:0 NOSC[2:0] 0x0ED9 OSCCON2 7:0 COSC[2:0] 0x0EDA OSCCON3 7:0 CSWHOLD DOZEN CCP1IF CWG1IF WDTPS[4:0] IDLEN ADIF ROI STATE DOE SOSCPWR PSCNT[1:0] DOZE[2:0] NDIV[3:0] CDIV[3:0] ORDY NOSCR 0x0EDB OSCSTAT 7:0 EXTOR HFOR MFOR LFOR SOR ADOR 0x0EDC OSCEN 7:0 EXTOEN HFOEN MFOEN LFOEN SOSCEN ADOEN 0x0EDD OSCTUNE 7:0 0x0EDE OSCFRQ 7:0 0x0EDF VREGCON 7:0 0x0EE0 BORCON 7:0 SBOREN 0x0EE1 PMD0 7:0 SYSCMD 0x0EE2 PMD1 0x0EE3 0x0EE4 0x0EE5 PLLR HFTUN[5:0] HFFRQ[3:0] VREGPM Reserved BORRDY FVRMD HLVDMD CRCMD SCANMD NVMMD CLKRMD IOCMD 7:0 TMR6MD TMR5MD TMR4MD TMR3MD TMR2MD TMR1MD TMR0MD PMD2 7:0 DACMD ADCMD CMP2MD CMP1MD ZCDMD PMD3 7:0 PWM4MD PWM3MD CCP2MD CCP1MD PMD4 7:0 0x0EE6 PMD5 7:0 0x0EE7 RA0PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EE8 RA1PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EE9 RA2PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEA RA3PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] UART1MD MSSP1MD CWG1MD DSMMD 0x0EEB RA4PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEC RA5PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EED RA6PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEE RA7PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EEF RB0PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF0 RB1PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF1 RB2PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF2 RB3PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF3 RB4PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF4 RB5PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF5 RB6PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF6 RB7PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF7 RC0PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EF8 RC1PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 607 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0EF9 RC2PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFA RC3PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFB RC4PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFC RC5PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFD RC6PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFE RC7PPS 7:0 PPS[4:0] 0x0EFF ... Reserved 0x0F09 0x0F0A IOCAF 7:0 IOCAF7 IOCAF6 IOCAF5 IOCAF4 IOCAF3 IOCAF2 IOCAF1 IOCAF0 0x0F0B IOCAN 7:0 IOCAN7 IOCAN6 IOCAN5 IOCAN4 IOCAN3 IOCAN2 IOCAN1 IOCAN0 0x0F0C IOCAP 7:0 IOCAP7 IOCAP6 IOCAP5 IOCAP4 IOCAP3 IOCAP2 IOCAP1 IOCAP0 0x0F0D INLVLA 7:0 INLVLA7 INLVLA6 INLVLA5 INLVLA4 INLVLA3 INLVLA2 INLVLA1 INLVLA0 0x0F0E SLRCONA 7:0 SLRA7 SLRA6 SLRA5 SLRA4 SLRA3 SLRA2 SLRA1 SLRA0 0x0F0F ODCONA 7:0 ODCA7 ODCA6 ODCA5 ODCA4 ODCA3 ODCA2 ODCA1 ODCA0 0x0F10 WPUA 7:0 WPUA7 WPUA6 WPUA5 WPUA4 WPUA3 WPUA2 WPUA1 WPUA0 0x0F11 ANSELA 7:0 ANSELA7 ANSELA6 ANSELA5 ANSELA4 ANSELA3 ANSELA2 ANSELA1 ANSELA0 0x0F12 IOCBF 7:0 IOCBF7 IOCBF6 IOCBF5 IOCBF4 IOCBF3 IOCBF2 IOCBF1 IOCBF0 0x0F13 IOCBN 7:0 IOCBN7 IOCBN6 IOCBN5 IOCBN4 IOCBN3 IOCBN2 IOCBN1 IOCBN0 0x0F14 IOCBP 7:0 IOCBP7 IOCBP6 IOCBP5 IOCBP4 IOCBP3 IOCBP2 IOCBP1 IOCBP0 0x0F15 INLVLB 7:0 INLVLB7 INLVLB6 INLVLB5 INLVLB4 INLVLB3 INLVLB2 INLVLB1 INLVLB0 0x0F16 SLRCONB 7:0 SLRB7 SLRB6 SLRB5 SLRB4 SLRB3 SLRB2 SLRB1 SLRB0 0x0F17 ODCONB 7:0 ODCB7 ODCB6 ODCB5 ODCB4 ODCB3 ODCB2 ODCB1 ODCB0 0x0F18 WPUB 7:0 WPUB7 WPUB6 WPUB5 WPUB4 WPUB3 WPUB2 WPUB1 WPUB0 0x0F19 ANSELB 7:0 ANSELB7 ANSELB6 ANSELB5 ANSELB4 ANSELB3 ANSELB2 ANSELB1 ANSELB0 0x0F1A IOCCF 7:0 IOCCF7 IOCCF6 IOCCF5 IOCCF4 IOCCF3 IOCCF2 IOCCF1 IOCCF0 0x0F1B IOCCN 7:0 IOCCN7 IOCCN6 IOCCN5 IOCCN4 IOCCN3 IOCCN2 IOCCN1 IOCCN0 0x0F1C IOCCP 7:0 IOCCP7 IOCCP6 IOCCP5 IOCCP4 IOCCP3 IOCCP2 IOCCP1 IOCCP0 0x0F1D INLVLC 7:0 INLVLC7 INLVLC6 INLVLC5 INLVLC4 INLVLC3 INLVLC2 INLVLC1 INLVLC0 0x0F1E SLRCONC 7:0 SLRC7 SLRC6 SLRC5 SLRC4 SLRC3 SLRC2 SLRC1 SLRC0 0x0F1F ODCONC 7:0 ODCC7 ODCC6 ODCC5 ODCC4 ODCC3 ODCC2 ODCC1 ODCC0 0x0F20 WPUC 7:0 WPUC7 WPUC6 WPUC5 WPUC4 WPUC3 WPUC2 WPUC1 WPUC0 0x0F21 ANSELC 7:0 ANSELC7 ANSELC6 ANSELC5 ANSELC4 ANSELC3 ANSELC2 ANSELC1 ANSELC0 INTH INTL 0x0F22 ... Reserved 0x0F26 0x0F27 IOCEF 7:0 IOCEF3 0x0F28 IOCEN 7:0 IOCEN3 0x0F29 IOCEP 7:0 IOCEP3 0x0F2A INLVLE 7:0 INLVLE3 7:0 WPUE3 0x0F2B ... Reserved 0x0F2C 0x0F2D WPUE 0x0F2E Reserved 0x0F2F HLVDCON0 7:0 EN © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. OUT RDY Datasheet 40001843D-page 608 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F30 HLVDCON1 7:0 0x0F31 FVRCON 7:0 FVREN 0x0F32 ZCDCON 7:0 0x0F33 DAC1CON0 7:0 0x0F34 DAC1CON1 7:0 0x0F35 CM2CON0 7:0 HYS SYNC 0x0F36 CM2CON1 7:0 INTP INTN 0x0F37 CM2NCH 7:0 NCH[2:0] 0x0F38 CM2PCH 7:0 0x0F39 CM1CON0 7:0 HYS SYNC 0x0F3A CM1CON1 7:0 INTP INTN 0x0F3B CM1NCH 7:0 NCH[2:0] 0x0F3C CM1PCH 7:0 PCH[2:0] 0x0F3D CMOUT 7:0 0x0F3E CLKRCON 7:0 0x0F3F CLKRCLK 7:0 0x0F40 CWG1CLK 7:0 0x0F41 CWG1ISM 7:0 0x0F42 CWG1DBR 7:0 0x0F43 CWG1DBF 7:0 0x0F44 CWG1CON0 7:0 0x0F45 CWG1CON1 7:0 0x0F46 CWG1AS0 7:0 0x0F47 CWG1AS1 7:0 0x0F48 CWG1STR 7:0 0x0F49 SCANLADR SEL[3:0] FVRRDY TSEN TSRNG SEN OUT POL EN OE1 OE2 SCANHADR PSS[1:0] EN OUT PCH[2:0] EN OUT POL MC2OUT EN DC[1:0] CLK[2:0] CS ISM[2:0] DBR[5:0] DBF[5:0] EN LD SHUTDOWN REN MODE[2:0] IN OVRD OVRC POLD LSBD[1:0] AS3E AS2E AS1E AS0E OVRB OVRA STRD STRC STRB STRA SCANLADRU[5:0] 15:8 SCANHADRH[7:0] 23:16 7:0 MDCON0 7:0 0x0F52 MDCON1 7:0 SCANHADRU[5:0] SCANEN MDSRC 7:0 MDCARL 7:0 0x0F55 MDCARH 7:0 0x0F56 ADACT 7:0 0x0F57 ADCLK 7:0 0x0F58 ADREF 7:0 0x0F59 ADCON1 7:0 ADPPOL 0x0F5A ADCON2 7:0 ADPSIS ADCON3 7:0 ADACQ 7:0 0x0F5D ADCAP 7:0 BUSY INVALID OUT OPOL CHPOL CHSYNC INTM MODE[1:0] TSEL[3:0] 0x0F53 0x0F5B SCANGO EN 0x0F54 0x0F5C POLA AS4E SCANHADRL[7:0] SCANTRIG POLB AS5E 7:0 0x0F50 POLC LSAC[1:0] SCANLADRH[7:0] 0x0F51 MC1OUT DIV[2:0] 15:8 7:0 NSS POL SCANLADRL[7:0] SCANCON0 INTN DAC1R[4:0] 7:0 0x0F4F ADFVR[1:0] INTP 23:16 0x0F4C CDAFVR[1:0] BIT CLPOL CLSYNC SRCS[3:0] CLS[2:0] CHS[2:0] ADACT[4:0] ADCS[5:0] ADNREF © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. ADIPEN ADPREF[1:0] ADGPOL ADDSEN ADCRS[2:0] ADCALC[2:0] ADACLR ADMD[2:0] ADSOI ADTMD[2:0] ADACQ[7:0] ADCAP[4:0] Datasheet 40001843D-page 609 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F5E ADPRE 7:0 0x0F5F ADPCH 7:0 0x0F60 ADCON0 7:0 0x0F61 ADPREV 0x0F63 ADRES 0x0F65 ADSTAT 7:0 0x0F66 ADRPT 7:0 ADRPT[7:0] 0x0F67 ADCNT 7:0 ADCNT[7:0] 0x0F68 ADSTPT 7:0 ADSTPTL[7:0] 15:8 ADSTPTH[7:0] 7:0 ADLTHL[7:0] 0x0F6A ADLTH 0x0F6C ADUTH 0x0F6E ADERR 0x0F70 ADACC 0x0F72 ADFLTR 0x0F74 CRCDAT 0x0F76 CRCACC 0x0F78 CRCSHIFT ADPRE[7:0] ADPCH[5:0] ADON ADCONT ADCS ADFM 7:0 ADPREVL[7:0] 15:8 ADPREVH[7:0] 7:0 ADRESL[7:0] 15:8 ADRESH[7:0] ADAOV ADUTHR ADLTHR ADMATH ADSTAT[2:0] 15:8 ADLTHH[7:0] 7:0 ADUTHL[7:0] 15:8 ADUTHH[7:0] 7:0 ADERRL[7:0] 15:8 ADERRH[7:0] 7:0 ADACCL[7:0] 15:8 ADACCH[7:0] 7:0 ADFLTRL[7:0] 15:8 ADFLTRH[7:0] 7:0 CRCDATL[7:0] 15:8 CRCDATH[7:0] 7:0 CRCACCL[7:0] 15:8 CRCACCH[7:0] 7:0 CRCSHIFTL[7:0] 15:8 ADGO CRCSHIFTH[7:0] 7:0 CRCXORL[6:0] CRCXORL0 0x0F7A CRCXOR 0x0F7C CRCCON0 7:0 0x0F7D CRCCON1 7:0 0x0F7E NVMADR 0x0F80 NVMDAT 7:0 0x0F81 NVMCON1 7:0 0x0F82 NVMCON2 7:0 0x0F83 LATA 7:0 LATA7 LATA6 LATA5 LATA4 LATA3 LATA2 LATA1 LATA0 0x0F84 LATB 7:0 LATB7 LATB6 LATB5 LATB4 LATB3 LATB2 LATB1 LATB0 0x0F85 LATC 7:0 LATC7 LATC6 LATC5 LATC4 LATC3 LATC2 LATC1 LATC0 TRISA0 15:8 CRCXORH[7:0] EN GO BUSY ACCM SHIFTM DLEN[3:0] 7:0 FULL PLEN[3:0] NVMADRL[7:0] 15:8 NVMADRH[1:0] NVMDAT[7:0] NVMREG[1:0] FREE WRERR WREN WR RD NVMCON2[7:0] 0x0F86 ... Reserved 0x0F87 0x0F88 TRISA 7:0 TRISA7 TRISA6 TRISA5 TRISA4 TRISA3 TRISA2 TRISA1 0x0F89 TRISB 7:0 TRISB7 TRISB6 TRISB5 TRISB4 TRISB3 TRISB2 TRISB1 TRISB0 0x0F8A TRISC 7:0 TRISC7 TRISC6 TRISC5 TRISC4 TRISC3 TRISC2 TRISC1 TRISC0 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 610 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0F8B ... Reserved 0x0F8C 0x0F8D PORTA 7:0 RA7 RA6 RA5 RA4 RA3 RA2 RA1 0x0F8E PORTB 7:0 RB7 RB6 RB5 RB4 RB3 RB2 RB1 RB0 0x0F8F PORTC 7:0 RC7 RC6 RC5 RC4 RC3 RC2 RC1 RC0 0x0F90 Reserved 0x0F91 PORTE 7:0 0x0F92 SSP1BUF 7:0 0x0F93 SSP1ADD 7:0 0x0F94 SSP1MSK 7:0 0x0F95 SSP1STAT 7:0 SMP CKE D/A P 0x0F96 SSP1CON1 7:0 WCOL SSPOV SSPEN CKP 0x0F97 SSP1CON2 7:0 GCEN ACKSTAT ACKDT ACKEN RCEN ACKTIM PCIE SCIE BOEN SDAHT RA0 RE3 BUF[7:0] ADD[7:0] MSK[6:0] MSK0 S R/W UA BF PEN RSEN SEN SBCDE AHEN DHEN RX9D SSPM[3:0] 0x0F98 SSP1CON3 7:0 0x0F99 RC1REG 7:0 RCREG[7:0] 0x0F9A TX1REG 7:0 TXREG[7:0] 0x0F9B SP1BRG 0x0F9D RC1STA 7:0 SPEN RX9 SREN CREN ADDEN FERR OERR 0x0F9E TX1STA 7:0 CSRC TX9 TXEN SYNC SENDB BRGH TRMT TX9D 0x0F9F BAUD1CON 7:0 ABDOVF RCIDL SCKP BRG16 WUE ABDEN 0x0FA0 PWM4DC 0x0FA2 PWM4CON 0x0FA3 PWM3DC 0x0FA5 PWM3CON 7:0 SPBRGL[7:0] 15:8 SPBRGH[7:0] 7:0 DCL[1:0] 15:8 7:0 DCH[7:0] EN 7:0 OUT POL DCL[1:0] 15:8 7:0 DCH[7:0] EN OUT POL 7:0 CCPRL[7:0] 15:8 CCPRH[7:0] 0x0FA6 CCPR2 0x0FA8 CCP2CON 7:0 0x0FA9 CCP2CAP 7:0 EN OUT FMT CTS[1:0] 7:0 0x0FAA CCPR1 0x0FAC CCP1CON 7:0 0x0FAD CCP1CAP 7:0 0x0FAE Reserved 0x0FAF T6TMR 7:0 MODE[3:0] CCPRL[7:0] 15:8 CCPRH[7:0] EN OUT FMT MODE[3:0] CTS[1:0] TxTMR[7:0] 0x0FB0 T6PR 7:0 0x0FB1 T6CON 7:0 ON TxPR[7:0] 0x0FB2 T6HLT 7:0 PSYNC 0x0FB3 T6CLKCON 7:0 CS[3:0] 0x0FB4 T6RST 7:0 RSEL[3:0] 0x0FB5 T4TMR 7:0 0x0FB6 T4PR 7:0 0x0FB7 T4CON 7:0 CKPS[2:0] CPOL OUTPS[3:0] CSYNC MODE[4:0] TxTMR[7:0] TxPR[7:0] ON © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. CKPS[2:0] Datasheet OUTPS[3:0] 40001843D-page 611 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0FB8 T4HLT 7:0 0x0FB9 T4CLKCON 7:0 PSYNC CPOL CSYNC MODE[4:0] CS[3:0] 0x0FBA T4RST 7:0 RSEL[3:0] 0x0FBB T2TMR 7:0 TxTMR[7:0] 0x0FBC T2PR 7:0 TxPR[7:0] 0x0FBD T2CON 7:0 ON 0x0FBE T2HLT 7:0 PSYNC 0x0FBF T2CLKCON 7:0 0x0FC0 T2RST 7:0 0x0FC1 TMR5 CKPS[2:0] CPOL OUTPS[3:0] CSYNC MODE[4:0] CS[3:0] RSEL[3:0] 7:0 TMRxL[7:0] 15:8 TMRxH[7:0] 0x0FC3 T5CON 7:0 0x0FC4 T5GCON 7:0 0x0FC5 TMR5GATE 7:0 0x0FC6 TMR5CLK 7:0 CKPS[1:0] GE GPOL GTM SYNC GSPM TMR3 0x0FC9 T3CON 7:0 0x0FCA T3GCON 7:0 15:8 GE GPOL GTM SYNC GSPM GGO/DONE RD16 ON GVAL 7:0 GSS[3:0] TMR3CLK 7:0 CS[3:0] 0x0FCD TMR1 0x0FCF T1CON 7:0 0x0FD0 T1GCON 7:0 0x0FD1 TMR1GATE 7:0 GSS[3:0] 0x0FD2 TMR1CLK 7:0 CS[3:0] 0x0FD3 TMR0 0x0FD5 T0CON0 7:0 0x0FD6 T0CON1 7:0 0x0FD7 PCON0 7:0 0x0FD8 STATUS 7:0 7:0 TMRxL[7:0] 15:8 TMRxH[7:0] CKPS[1:0] GE GPOL GTM SYNC GSPM GGO/DONE 7:0 TMR0L[7:0] 15:8 TMR0H[7:0] T0EN T0OUT T016BIT T0CS[2:0] STKOVF 7:0 T0OUTPS[3:0] T0CKPS[3:0] STKUNF WDTWV RWDT RMCLR RI POR BOR TO PD N OV Z DC C FSRL[7:0] 15:8 FSRH[3:0] 0x0FDB PLUSW2 7:0 PLUSW[7:0] PREINC2 7:0 PREINC[7:0] 0x0FDD POSTDEC2 7:0 POSTDEC[7:0] 0x0FDE POSTINC2 7:0 POSTINC[7:0] 0x0FDF INDF2 7:0 INDF[7:0] 0x0FE0 BSR 7:0 7:0 BSR[3:0] FSRL[7:0] 15:8 FSRH[3:0] 0x0FE3 PLUSW1 7:0 PLUSW[7:0] 0x0FE4 PREINC1 7:0 PREINC[7:0] 0x0FE5 POSTDEC1 7:0 POSTDEC[7:0] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. GVAL T0ASYNC 0x0FDC FSR1 ON TMRxH[7:0] CKPS[1:0] TMR3GATE 0x0FE1 RD16 CS[3:0] 0x0FCB FSR2 ON TMRxL[7:0] 0x0FCC 0x0FD9 RD16 GVAL GSS[3:0] 7:0 0x0FC7 GGO/DONE Datasheet 40001843D-page 612 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Register Summary Offset Name Bit Pos. 0x0FE6 POSTINC1 7:0 0x0FE7 INDF1 7:0 INDF[7:0] 0x0FE8 WREG 7:0 WREG[7:0] 0x0FE9 FSR0 7:0 FSRL[7:0] POSTINC[7:0] 15:8 FSRH[3:0] 0x0FEB PLUSW0 7:0 PLUSW[7:0] 0x0FEC PREINC0 7:0 PREINC[7:0] 0x0FED POSTDEC0 7:0 POSTDEC[7:0] 0x0FEE POSTINC0 7:0 POSTINC[7:0] 0x0FEF INDF0 7:0 INDF[7:0] 0x0FF0 ... Reserved 0x0FF1 0x0FF2 INTCON 0x0FF3 PROD 0x0FF5 7:0 GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL IPEN INT2EDG 7:0 PRODL[7:0] 15:8 PRODH[7:0] TABLAT 7:0 TABLAT[7:0] 7:0 TBLPTRL[7:0] 0x0FF6 TBLPTR 15:8 TBLPTRH[7:0] 0x0FF9 PCL 0x0FFA PCLAT 0x0FFC STKPTR 23:16 0x0FFD TOS TBLPTR21 INT0EDG TBLPTRU[4:0] 7:0 PCL[7:0] 7:0 PCLATH[7:0] 15:8 PCLATU[4:0] 7:0 STKPTR[4:0] 7:0 TOSL[7:0] 15:8 TOSH[7:0] 23:16 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. INT1EDG TOSU[4:0] Datasheet 40001843D-page 613 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary 36. Instruction Set Summary PIC18(L)F24/25K40 devices incorporate the standard set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an extended set of eight new instructions, for the optimization of code that is recursive or that utilizes a software stack. The extended set is discussed later in this section. 36.1 Standard Instruction Set ® The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many enhancements to the previous PIC MCU instruction sets, ® while maintaining an easy migration from these PIC MCU instruction sets. Most instructions are a single program memory word (16 bits), but there are four instructions that require two program memory locations. Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and one or more operands, which further specify the operation of the instruction. The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped into four basic categories: • • • • Byte-oriented operations Bit-oriented operations Literal operations Control operations The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 36-2 lists byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control operations. Table 36-1 shows the opcode field descriptions. Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by ‘f’) The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’) The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The file register designator ‘f’ specifies which file register is to be used by the instruction. The destination designator ‘d’ specifies where the result of the operation is to be placed. If ‘d’ is zero, the result is placed in the WREG register. If ‘d’ is one, the result is placed in the file register specified in the instruction. All bit-oriented instructions have three operands: 1. 2. 3. The file register (specified by ‘f’) The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’) The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’) The bit field designator ‘b’ selects the number of the bit affected by the operation, while the file register designator ‘f’ represents the number of the file in which the bit is located. The literal instructions may use some of the following operands: • • • A literal value to be loaded into a file register (specified by ‘k’) The desired FSR register to load the literal value into (specified by ‘f’) No operand required (specified by ‘—’) The control instructions may use some of the following operands: • A program memory address (specified by ‘n’) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 614 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary • • • The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions (specified by ‘s’) The mode of the table read and table write instructions (specified by ‘m’) No operand required (specified by ‘—’) All instructions are a single word, except for four double-word instructions. These instructions were made double-word to contain the required information in 32 bits. In the second word, the four MSbs are ‘1’s. If this second word is executed as an instruction (by itself), it will execute as a NOP. All single-word instructions are executed in a single instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the Program Counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction cycles, with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed as a NOP. The double-word instructions execute in two instruction cycles. One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods. Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal instruction execution time is 1 μs. If a conditional test is true, or the Program Counter is changed as a result of an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 μs. Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 μs. Figure 36-1 shows the general formats that the instructions can have. All examples use the convention ‘nnh’ to represent a hexadecimal number. The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 36-2, lists the standard instructions recognized by the Microchip Assembler (MPASMTM). Standard Instruction Set provides a description of each instruction. Table 36-1. Opcode Field Descriptions Field Description RAM access bit a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored) a a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register bbb Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7). BSR Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank. C, DC, Z, OV, N ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative. Destination select bit d = 0: store result in WREG d d = 1: store result in file register f dest Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location. f 8-bit Register file address (00h to FFh) or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h). fs 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 615 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Field Description 12-bit Register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address. fd Global Interrupt Enable bit. GIE Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value). k Label name. label The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions. Only used with table read and table write instructions: mm n * No change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *+ Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) *- Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) +* Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes) The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for CALL/BRANCH and RETURN instructions. PC Program Counter. PCL Program Counter Low Byte. PCH Program Counter High Byte. PCLATH Program Counter High Byte Latch. PCLATU Program Counter Upper Byte Latch. PD Power-down bit. PRODH Product of Multiply High Byte. PRODL Product of Multiply Low Byte. s Fast Call/Return mode select bit s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode) TBLPTR 21-bit Table Pointer (points to a Program Memory location). TABLAT 8-bit Table Latch. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 616 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Field Description TO Time-out bit. TOS Top-of-Stack. Unused or unchanged. u Watchdog Timer. WDT Working register (accumulator). WREG Don’t care (‘0’ or ‘1’). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for compatibility with all Microchip software tools. x zs 7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (source). zd 7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (destination). {} Optional argument. [text] Indicates an indexed address. The contents of text. (text) [expr] → Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr. Assigned to. Register bit field. < > ∈ In the set of. italics User defined term (font is Courier). © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 617 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Figure 36-1. General Format for Instructions Byte-oriented file register operations 15 10 9 8 7 OPCODE d a Example Instruction 0 f (FILE #) ADDWF MYREG, W, B d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Byte to Byte move operations (2-word) 15 12 11 OPCODE 15 0 f (Source FILE #) 12 11 MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2 0 f (Destination FILE #) 1111 f = 12-bit file register address Bit-oriented file register operations 15 12 11 9 8 7 OPCODE b (BIT #) a 0 f (FILE #) BSF MYREG, bit, B b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f) a = 0 to force Access Bank a = 1 for BSR to select bank f = 8-bit file register address Literal operations 15 8 7 OP CODE k 0 (l iter al ) MOVLW 7Fh k = 8-bit immediate value Control operations CALL, GOTO and Branch operations 15 8 7 OPCODE 15 0 n (literal) 12 11 GOTO Label 0 n (literal) 1111 n = 20-bit immediate value 15 8 7 OPCODE 15 S 0 CALL MYFUNC n (literal) 12 11 0 n (literal) 1111 S = Fast bit 15 OPCODE n 15 OPCODE © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 11 10 0 BRA MYFUNC (l iter al ) 8 7 0 BC MYFUNC n (literal) Datasheet 40001843D-page 618 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Table 36-2. Instruction Set Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS ADDWF f, d, a Add WREG and f 1 0010 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2 ADDWFC f, d, a Add WREG and CARRY bit to f 1 0010 00da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2 ANDWF f, d, a AND WREG with f 1 0001 01da ffff ffff Z, N 1, 2 CLRF f, a Clear f 1 0110 101a ffff ffff Z 2 COMF f, d, a Complement f 1 0001 11da ffff ffff Z, N 1, 2 CPFSEQ f, a Compare f with WREG, skip = 1 (2 or 3) 0110 001a ffff ffff None 4 CPFSGT f, a Compare f with WREG, skip > 1 (2 or 3) 0110 010a ffff ffff None 4 CPFSLT f, a Compare f with WREG, skip < 1 (2 or 3) 0110 000a ffff ffff None 1, 2 DECF f, d, a Decrement f 1 0000 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2, 3, 4 f, d, Decrement f, Skip if 1 (2 or 3) a 0 0010 11da ffff ffff None 1, 2, 3, 4 DCFSNZ f, d, Decrement f, Skip if 1 (2 or 3) a Not 0 0100 11da ffff ffff None 1, 2 0010 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N 1, 2, 3, 4 DECFSZ INCF f, d, a INCFSZ f, d, a Increment f, Skip if 1 (2 or 3) 0 0011 11da ffff ffff None 4 INFSNZ f, d, a Increment f, Skip if 1 (2 or 3) Not 0 0100 11da ffff ffff None 1, 2 IORWF f, d, a Inclusive OR WREG with f 1 0001 00da ffff ffff Z, N 1, 2 MOVF f, d, a Move f 1 0101 00da ffff ffff Z, N 1 2 1100 ffff ffff ffff None MOVFF Increment f fs, fd Move fs (source) to 1st word © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 1 Datasheet 40001843D-page 619 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles fd (destination) 2nd word 16-Bit Instruction Word MSb LSb 1111 ffff ffff ffff Status Affected MOVWF f, a Move WREG to f 1 0110 111a ffff ffff None MULWF f, a Multiply WREG with f 1 0000 001a ffff ffff None NEGF f, a Negate f 1 0110 110a ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N RLCF f, d, a Rotate Left f through Carry 1 0011 01da ffff ffff C, Z, N RLNCF f, d, a Rotate Left f (No Carry) 1 0100 01da ffff ffff Z, N RRCF f, d, a Rotate Right f through Carry 1 0011 00da ffff ffff C, Z, N RRNCF f, d, a Rotate Right f (No Carry) 1 0100 00da ffff ffff Z, N SETF f, a Set f 1 0110 00da ffff ffff None Subtract f from WREG with borrow 1 0101 01da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N f, d, a Subtract WREG from f 1 0101 11da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N SUBWFB f, d, a Subtract WREG from f with borrow 1 0101 10da ffff ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N SUBFWB f, d, a SUBWF Notes 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 1, 2 SWAPF f, d, a Swap nibbles in f 1 0011 10da ffff ffff None 4 TSTFSZ f, a Test f, skip if 0 1 (2 or 3) 0110 011a ffff ffff None 1, 2 XORWF f, d, a Exclusive OR WREG with f 1 0001 10da ffff ffff Z, N BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS BCF f, b, a Bit Clear f 1 1001 bbba ffff ffff None 1, 2 BSF f, b, a Bit Set f 1 1000 bbba ffff ffff None 1, 2 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 620 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word MSb LSb Status Affected Notes BTFSC f, b, a Bit Test f, Skip if Clear 1 (2 or 3) 1011 bbba ffff ffff None 3, 4 BTFSS f, b, a Bit Test f, Skip if Set 1 (2 or 3) 1010 bbba ffff ffff None 3, 4 BTG f, b, a Bit Toggle f 1 0111 bbba ffff ffff None 1, 2 4 CONTROL OPERATIONS BC n Branch if Carry 1 (2) 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn None BN n Branch if Negative 1 (2) 1110 0110 nnnn nnnn None BNC n Branch if Not Carry 1 (2) 1110 0011 nnnn nnnn None BNN n Branch if Not Negative 1 (2) 1110 0111 nnnn nnnn None BNOV n Branch if Not Overflow 1 (2) 1110 0101 nnnn nnnn None BNZ n Branch if Not Zero 1 (2) 1110 0001 nnnn nnnn None BOV n Branch if Overflow 1 (2) 1110 0100 nnnn nnnn None BRA n Branch Unconditionally 2 1101 0nnn nnnn nnnn None BZ n Branch if Zero 1 (2) 1110 0000 nnnn nnnn None CALL k, s Call subroutine 1st word 2 1110 110s kkkk kkkk None 1111 kkkk kkkk kkkk 2nd word CLRWDT — Clear Watchdog Timer 1 0000 0000 0000 0100 TO, PD DAW — Decimal Adjust WREG 1 0000 0000 0000 0111 C GOTO k Go to address 1st word 2 1110 1111 kkkk kkkk None 1111 kkkk kkkk kkkk 2nd word © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 621 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary 16-Bit Instruction Word Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles NOP — No Operation 1 0000 0000 0000 0000 None NOP — No Operation 1 1111 xxxx xxxx xxxx None POP — Pop top of return stack (TOS) 1 0000 0000 0000 0110 None PUSH — Push top of return stack (TOS) 1 0000 0000 0000 0101 None RCALL n Relative Call 2 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn None Software device Reset 1 0000 0000 1111 1111 All Return from interrupt enable 2 0000 0000 0001 000s GIE/GIEH, RESET RETFIE s MSb LSb Status Affected Notes PEIE/GIEL RETLW k Return with literal in WREG 2 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None RETURN s Return from Subroutine 2 0000 0000 0001 001s None SLEEP — Go into Standby mode 1 0000 0000 0000 0011 TO, PD LITERAL OPERATIONS ADDLW k Add literal and WREG 1 0000 1111 kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N ANDLW k AND literal with WREG 1 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Z, N IORLW k Inclusive OR literal with WREG 1 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Z, N LFSR f, k Move literal (12-bit) 2nd word 2 1110 1110 00ff kkkk None 1111 0000 kkkk kkkk to FSR(f) 1st word MOVLB k Move literal to BSR 1 0000 0001 0000 kkkk None MOVLW k Move literal to WREG 1 0000 1110 kkkk kkkk None MULLW k Multiply literal with WREG 1 0000 1101 kkkk kkkk None © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 622 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Mnemonic, Operands Description Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word MSb LSb Status Affected RETLW k Return with literal in WREG 2 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk None SUBLW k Subtract WREG from literal 1 0000 1000 kkkk kkkk C, DC, Z, OV, N XORLW k Exclusive OR literal with WREG 1 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Z, N Notes DATA MEMORY ↔ PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS TBLRD* Table Read TBLRD*+ 2 0000 0000 0000 1000 None Table Read with post-increment 0000 0000 0000 1001 None TBLRD*- Table Read with post-decrement 0000 0000 0000 1010 None TBLRD+* Table Read with pre-increment 0000 0000 0000 1011 None TBLWT* Table Write 0000 0000 0000 1100 None TBLWT*+ Table Write with post-increment 0000 0000 0000 1101 None TBLWT*- Table Write with post-decrement 0000 0000 0000 1110 None TBLWT+* Table Write with pre-increment 0000 0000 0000 1111 None 2 Note:  1. When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as input and is driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’. 2. If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if assigned. 3. If Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The second cycle is executed as a NOP. 4. Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all program memory locations have a valid instruction. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 623 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary 36.1.1 Standard Instruction Set ADDLW ADD literal to W Syntax: ADDLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) + k → W Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1111 kkkk Description: The contents of W are added to the 8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 kkkk Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: ADDLW 15h Before Instruction W = 10h After Instruction W = 25h ADDWF ADD W to f Syntax: ADDWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) + (f) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: Description: 0010 01da ffff ffff Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 624 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary ADDWF ADD W to f If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction W = 17h REG = 0C2h After Instruction W = 0D9h REG = 0C2h Important:  All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). ADDWFC ADD W and CARRY bit to f Syntax: ADDWFC f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) + (f) + (C) → dest Status Affected: N,OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: Description: 0010 00da ffff ffff Add W, the CARRY flag and data memory location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in data memory location ‘f’. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 625 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary ADDWFC ADD W and CARRY bit to f If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh).See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ADDWFC REG, 0, 1 Before Instruction CARRY bit = 1 REG = 02h W = 4Dh After Instruction CARRY bit = 0 REG = 02h W = 50h ANDLW AND literal with W Syntax: ANDLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) .AND. k → W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1011 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are AND’ed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 626 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example: ANDLW 05Fh Before Instruction W = A3h After Instruction W = 03h ANDWF AND W with f Syntax: ANDWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) .AND. (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: Description: 0001 01da ffff ffff The contents of W are AND’ed with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: ANDWF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction W = 17h REG = C2h After Instruction W = 02h © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 627 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary REG = C2h BC Branch if Carry Syntax: BC n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘1’ (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 0010 nnnn nnnn Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal ‘n’ Example: Q3 Q4 Process Data HERE No operation BC 5 Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If CARRY = 1; PC = address (HERE + 12) If CARRY = 0; PC = address (HERE + 2) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 628 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BCF Bit Clear f Syntax: BCF f, b {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b≤7 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: 0 → f Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 1001 bbba ffff ffff Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BCF FLAG_REG, 7, 0 Before Instruction FLAG_REG = C7h After Instruction FLAG_REG = 47h BN Branch if Negative Syntax: BN n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’ (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0110 Datasheet nnnn nnnn 40001843D-page 629 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BN Branch if Negative Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘1’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read literal ‘n’ Example: Q4 Process Data HERE No operation BN Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If NEGATIVE = 1; PC = address (Jump) If NEGATIVE = 0; PC = address (HERE + 2) BNC Branch if Not Carry Syntax: BNC n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if CARRY bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0011 Datasheet nnnn nnnn 40001843D-page 630 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BNC Branch if Not Carry Description: If the CARRY bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Example: HERE Q3 Q4 Process Data No operation BNC Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If CARRY = 0; PC = address (Jump) If CARRY = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) BNN Branch if Not Negative Syntax: BNN n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0111 Datasheet nnnn nnnn 40001843D-page 631 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BNN Branch if Not Negative Description: If the NEGATIVE bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Example: HERE Q3 Q4 Process Data No operation BNN Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If NEGATIVE = 0; PC = address (Jump) If NEGATIVE = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) BNOV Branch if Not Overflow Syntax: BNOV n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0101 Datasheet nnnn nnnn 40001843D-page 632 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BNOV Branch if Not Overflow Description: If the OVERFLOW bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read literal ‘n’ Example: Q4 Process Data HERE No operation BNOV Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If OVERFLOW = 0; PC = address (Jump) If OVERFLOW = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) BNZ Branch if Not Zero Syntax: BNZ n Operands: -128 ≤ n ≤ 127 Operation: if ZERO bit is ‘0’ (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0001 Datasheet nnnn nnnn 40001843D-page 633 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BNZ Branch if Not Zero Description: If the ZERO bit is ‘0’, then the program will branch. The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is added to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Q Cycle Activity: If Jump: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation If No Jump: Q1 Q2 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Example: HERE Q3 Q4 Process Data No operation BNZ Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If ZERO = 0; PC = address (Jump) If ZERO = 1; PC = address (HERE + 2) BRA Unconditional Branch Syntax: BRA n Operands: -1024 ≤ n ≤ 1023 Operation: (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1101 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0nnn Datasheet nnnn nnnn 40001843D-page 634 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary BRA Unconditional Branch Description: Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a 2cycle instruction. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE BRA Jump Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction PC = address (Jump) BSF Bit Set f Syntax: BSF f, b {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b≤7 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: 1 → f Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 1000 bbba ffff ffff Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 635 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: BSF FLAG_REG, 7, 1 Before Instruction FLAG_REG = 0Ah After Instruction FLAG_REG = 8Ah BTFSC Bit Test File, Skip if Clear Syntax: BTFSC f, b {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b≤7 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: skip if (f) = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 1011 bbba ffff ffff If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 636 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE FALSE TRUE BTFSC : : FLAG, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) After Instruction If FLAG = 0; PC = address (TRUE) If FLAG = 1; PC = address (FALSE) BTFSS Bit Test File, Skip if Set Syntax: BTFSS f, b {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 0≤b (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 Description: 010a ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the contents of WREG, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Q2 Q3 Datasheet Q4 40001843D-page 647 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NGREATER GREATER CPFSGT REG, 0 : : Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) W=? After Instruction If REG > W; PC = Address (GREATER) If REG ≤ W; PC = Address (NGREATER) CPFSLT Compare f with W, skip if f < W Syntax: CPFSLT f {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – (), skip if (f) < (W) (unsigned comparison) Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0110 000a ffff ffff Compares the contents of data memory location ‘f’ to the contents of W by performing an unsigned subtraction. If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the contents of W, then the fetched instruction is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making this a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 648 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NLESS LESS CPFSLT REG, 1 : : Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) W=? After Instruction If REG < W; PC = Address (LESS) If REG ≥ W; PC = Address (NLESS) DAW Decimal Adjust W Register Syntax: DAW Operands: None Operation: If [W > 9] or [DC = 1] then (W) + 6 → W; else (W) → W; If [W + DC > 9] or [C = 1] then (W) + 6 + DC → W ; © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 649 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary DAW Decimal Adjust W Register else (W) + DC → W Status Affected: C Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0111 Description: DAW adjusts the 8-bit value in W, resulting from the earlier addition of two variables (each in packed BCD format) and produces a correct packed BCD result. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register W Process Data Write W Example1: DAW Before Instruction W = A5h C=0 DC = 0 After Instruction W = 05h C=1 DC = 0 Example 2: Before Instruction W = CEh C=0 DC = 0 After Instruction W = 34h C=1 DC = 0 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 650 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary DECF Decrement f Syntax: DECF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1 → dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: Description: 0000 01da ffff ffff Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: DECF CNT, 1, 0 Before Instruction CNT = 01h Z=0 After Instruction CNT = 00h Z=1 DECFSZ Decrement f, skip if 0 Syntax: DECFSZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 651 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary DECFSZ Decrement f, skip if 0 Operation: (f) – 1 → dest, skip if result = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0010 Description: 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 652 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example: HERE DECFSZ GOTO LOOP CONTINUE CNT, 1, 1 Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction CNT = CNT - 1 If CNT = 0; PC = Address (CONTINUE) If CNT ≠ 0; PC = Address (HERE + 2) DCFSNZ Decrement f, skip if not 0 Syntax: DCFSNZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – 1 → dest, skip if result ≠ 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0100 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 653 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE ZERO NZERO DCFSNZ : : TEMP, 1, 0 Before Instruction TEMP = ? After Instruction TEMP = TEMP – 1, If TEMP = 0; PC = Address (ZERO) If TEMP ≠ 0; PC = Address (NZERO) GOTO Unconditional Branch Syntax: GOTO k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 1048575 Operation: k → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (k) 2nd word(k) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 1110 1111 1111 k19kkk Datasheet k7kkk kkkk kkkk0 kkkk8 40001843D-page 654 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary GOTO Unconditional Branch Description: GOTO allows an unconditional branch anywhere within entire 2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC. GOTO is always a 2-cycle instruction. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’, No operation Read literal ‘k’, Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: GOTO THERE After Instruction PC = Address (THERE) INCF Increment f Syntax: INCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1 → dest Status Affected: C, DC, N, OV, Z Encoding: Description: 0010 10da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 655 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Read register ‘f’ Example: Q3 Q4 Process Data INCF Write to destination CNT, 1, 0 Before Instruction CNT = FFh Z=0 C=? DC = ? After Instruction CNT = 00h Z=1 C=1 DC = 1 INCFSZ Increment f, skip if 0 Syntax: INCFSZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1 → dest, skip if result = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0011 11da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 656 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary INCFSZ Increment f, skip if 0 Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NZERO ZERO INCFSZ : : CNT, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction CNT = CNT + 1 If CNT = 0; PC = Address (ZERO) If CNT ≠ 0; PC = Address (NZERO) INFSNZ Increment f, skip if not 0 Syntax: INFSNZ f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 657 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary INFSNZ Increment f, skip if not 0 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) + 1 → dest, skip if result ≠ 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0100 Description: 10da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If the result is not ‘0’, the next instruction, which is already fetched, is discarded and a NOP is executed instead, making it a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read register ‘f’ Q4 Process Data Write to destination If skip: Q1 No operation Q2 No operation Q3 No operation Q4 No operation If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 658 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example: HERE ZERO NZERO INFSNZ REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction REG = REG + 1 If REG ≠ 0; PC = Address (NZERO) If REG = 0; PC = Address (ZERO) IORLW Inclusive OR literal with W Syntax: IORLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) .OR. k → W Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1001 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are ORed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: IORLW 35h Before Instruction W = 9Ah After Instruction W = BFh IORWF Inclusive OR W with f Syntax: IORWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 659 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary IORWF Inclusive OR W with f d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) .OR. (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: Description: 0001 00da ffff ffff Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ Example: Q3 Process Data IORWF Q4 Write to destination RESULT, 0, 1 Before Instruction RESULT = 13h W = 91h After Instruction RESULT = 13h W = 93h LFSR Load FSR Syntax: LFSR f, k Operands: 0≤f≤2 0 ≤ k ≤ 4095 Operation: k → FSRf Status Affected: None © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 660 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary LFSR Load FSR Encoding: 1110 1111 1110 0000 00ff k7kkk k11kkk kkkk Description: The 12-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the File Select Register pointed to by ‘f’. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ MSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ MSB to FSRfH Decode Read literal ‘k’ LSB Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to FSRfL Example: LFSR 2, 3ABh After Instruction FSR2H = 03h FSR2L = ABh MOVF Move f Syntax: MOVF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: f → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: Description: 0101 00da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to a destination dependent upon the status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 661 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MOVF Move f Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write W Example: MOVF REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 22h W = FFh After Instruction REG = 22h W = 22h MOVFF Move f to f Syntax: MOVFF fs,fd Operands: 0 ≤ fs ≤ 4095 0 ≤ fd ≤ 4095 Operation: (fs) → fd Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 2nd word (destin.) Description: 1100 1111 ffff ffff ffff ffff ffffs ffffd The contents of source register ‘fs’ are moved to destination register ‘fd’. Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data space (000h to FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’ can also be anywhere from 000h to FFFh. Either source or destination can be W (a useful special situation). MOVFF is particularly useful for transferring a data memory location to a peripheral register (such as the transmit buffer or an I/O port). The MOVFF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 662 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MOVFF Move f to f Words: 2 Cycles: 2 (3) Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ (src) Process Data No operation Decode No operation No dummy read No operation Write register ‘f’ (dest) Example: MOVFF REG1, REG2 Before Instruction REG1 = 33h REG2 = 11h After Instruction REG1 = 33h REG2 = 33h MOVLB Move literal to low nibble in BSR Syntax: MOVLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k → BSR Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0001 kkkk kkkk Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the Bank Select Register (BSR). The value of BSR always remains ‘0’, regardless of the value of k7:k4. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read literal ‘k’ © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Q3 Q4 Process Data Write literal ‘k’ to BSR Datasheet 40001843D-page 663 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example: MOVLB 5 Before Instruction BSR Register = 02h After Instruction BSR Register = 05h MOVLW Move literal to W Syntax: MOVLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k→W Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1110 Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 kkkk kkkk Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Example: Q3 Q4 Process Data Write to W MOVLW 5Ah After Instruction W = 5Ah MOVWF Move W to f Syntax: MOVWF f {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) → f Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0110 111a ffff ffff Move data from W to register ‘f’. Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the 256-byte bank. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 664 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MOVWF Move W to f If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: MOVWF REG, 0 Before Instruction W = 4Fh REG = FFh After Instruction W = 4Fh REG = 4Fh MULLW Multiply literal with W Syntax: MULLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) x k → PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0000 1101 kkkk kkkk An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is placed in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. W is unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither overflow nor carry is possible in this operation. A zero result is possible but not detected. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 665 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MULLW Multiply literal with W Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Example: Q3 Process Data MULLW Q4 Write registers PRODH: PRODL 0C4h Before Instruction W = E2h PRODH = ? PRODL = ? After Instruction W = E2h PRODH = ADh PRODL = 08h MULWF Multiply W with f Syntax: MULWF f {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) x (f) → PRODH:PRODL Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0000 001a ffff ffff An unsigned multiplication is carried out between the contents of W and the register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL register pair. PRODH contains the high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are unchanged. None of the Status flags are affected. Note that neither overflow nor carry is possible in this operation. A zero result is possible but not detected. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 666 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MULWF Multiply W with f If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 35.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Read register ‘f’ Example: Q3 Process Data MULWF Q4 Write registers PRODH: PRODL REG, 1 Before Instruction W = C4h REG = B5h PRODH = ? PRODL = ? After Instruction W = C4h REG = B5h PRODH = 8Ah PRODL = 94h NEGF Negate f Syntax: NEGF f {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f)+1→f Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: Description: 0110 110a ffff ffff Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s complement. The result is placed in the data memory location ‘f’. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 667 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary NEGF Negate f If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write register ‘f’ Example: NEGF REG, 1 Before Instruction REG = 0011 1010 [3Ah] After Instruction REG = 1100 0110 [C6h] NOP No Operation Syntax: NOP Operands: None Operation: No operation Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1111 Description: No operation. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx 0000 xxxx Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 668 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example: None. POP Pop Top of Return Stack Syntax: POP Operands: None Operation: (TOS) → bit bucket Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0110 Description: The TOS value is pulled off the return stack and is discarded. The TOS value then becomes the previous value that was pushed onto the return stack. This instruction is provided to enable the user to properly manage the return stack to incorporate a software stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation POP TOS value No operation Example: POP GOTO NEW Before Instruction TOS = 0031A2h Stack (1 level down) = 014332h After Instruction TOS = 014332h PC = NEW PUSH Push Top of Return Stack Syntax: PUSH Operands: None Operation: (PC + 2) → TOS Status Affected: None © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 669 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary PUSH Push Top of Return Stack Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0101 Description: The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of the return stack. The previous TOS value is pushed down on the stack. This instruction allows implementing a software stack by modifying TOS and then pushing it onto the return stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode PUSH PC + 2 onto return stack No operation No operation Example: PUSH Before Instruction TOS = 345Ah PC = 0124h After Instruction PC = 0126h TOS = 0126h Stack (1 level down) = 345Ah RCALL Relative Call Syntax: RCALL n Operands: -1024 ≤ n ≤ 1023 Operation: (PC) + 2 → TOS, (PC) + 2 + 2n → PC Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 1101 1nnn nnnn nnnn Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K from the current location. First, return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the stack. Then, add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will have incremented to fetch the next instruction, the new address will be PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a 2-cycle instruction. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 670 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary RCALL Relative Call Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘n’ PUSH PC to stack Process Data Write to PC No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE Jump RCALL Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction PC = Address (Jump) TOS = Address (HERE + 2) RESET Reset Syntax: RESET Operands: None Operation: Reset all registers and flags that are affected by a MCLR Reset. Status Affected: All Encoding: 0000 0000 Description: This instruction provides a way to execute a MCLR Reset by software. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 1111 1111 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Start Reset No operation No operation Example: RESET After Instruction © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 671 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Registers = Reset Value Flags* = Reset Value RETFIE Return from Interrupt Syntax: RETFIE {s} Operands: s ∈ [0,1] Operation: (TOS) → PC, 1 → GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL, if s = 1 (WS) → W, (STATUSS) → Status, (BSRS) → BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged. Status Affected: GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL. Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 000s Description: Return from interrupt. Stack is popped and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into the PC. Interrupts are enabled by setting either the high or low priority global interrupt enable bit. If ‘s’ = 1, the contents of the shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into their corresponding registers, W, Status and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation POP PC from stack Set GIEH or GIEL No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: RETFIE 1 After Interrupt PC = TOS W = WS BSR = BSRS © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 672 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Status = STATUSS GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL = 1 RETLW Return literal to W Syntax: RETLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k → W, (TOS) → PC, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 1100 kkkk kkkk Description: W is loaded with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The Program Counter is loaded from the top of the stack (the return address). The high address latch (PCLATH) remains unchanged. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data POP PC from stack, Write to W No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: CALL TABLE ; offset value ; W now has ; table value : TABLE ADDWF PCL RETLW k0 RETLW k1 : : RETLW kn ; contains table ; W = offset ; Begin table ; ; End of table Before Instruction W = 07h After Instruction W = value of kn © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 673 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary RETURN Return from Subroutine Syntax: RETURN {s} Operands: s ∈ [0,1] Operation: (TOS) → PC, if s = 1 (WS) → W, (STATUSS) → Status, (BSRS) → BSR, PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged Status Affected: None Encoding: 0000 0000 0001 001s Description: Return from subroutine. The stack is popped and the top of the stack (TOS) is loaded into the Program Counter. If ‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow registers, WS, STATUSS and BSRS, are loaded into their corresponding registers, W, Status and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers occurs (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data POP PC from stack No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: RETURN After Instruction: PC = TOS RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry Syntax: RLCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 674 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary RLCF Rotate Left f through Carry Operation: (f) → dest, (f) → C, (C) → dest Status Affected: C, N, Z Encoding: 0011 Description: 01da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left through the CARRY flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 35.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. C Words: 1 Cycles: 1 register f Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read register ‘f’ Example: Q4 Process Data RLCF Write to destination REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1110 0110 C=0 After Instruction REG = 1110 0110 W = 1100 1100 C=1 RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) Syntax: RLNCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 675 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary RLNCF Rotate Left f (No Carry) a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) → dest, (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: Description: 0100 01da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. register f Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read register ‘f’ Example: Q4 Process Data RLNCF Write to destination REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1010 1011 After Instruction REG = 0101 0111 RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry Syntax: RRCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) → dest, (f) → C, © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 676 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary RRCF Rotate Right f through Carry (C) → dest Status Affected: C, N, Z Encoding: Description: 0011 00da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right through the CARRY flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. C Words: 1 Cycles: 1 register f Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read register ‘f’ Example: Q4 Process Data RRCF Write to destination REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1110 0110 C=0 After Instruction REG = 1110 0110 W = 0111 0011 C=0 RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) Syntax: RRNCF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) → dest, © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 677 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary RRNCF Rotate Right f (No Carry) (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: Description: 0100 00da ffff ffff The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be selected (default), overriding the BSR value. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, then the bank will be selected as per the BSR value. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. register f Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Example 1: Q3 Read register ‘f’ Q4 Process Data RRNCF REG, 1, 0 RRNCF REG, 0, 0 Write to destination Before Instruction REG = 1101 0111 After Instruction REG = 1110 1011 Example 2: Before Instruction W=? REG = 1101 0111 After Instruction W = 1110 1011 REG = 1101 0111 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 678 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary SETF Set f Syntax: SETF f {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: FFh → f Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0110 100a ffff ffff The contents of the specified register are set to FFh. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Q3 Read register ‘f’ Example: Q4 Process Data SETF Write register ‘f’ REG, 1 Before Instruction REG = 5Ah After Instruction REG = FFh SLEEP Enter Sleep mode Syntax: SLEEP Operands: None Operation: 00h → WDT, 0 → WDT postscaler, 1 → TO, 0 → PD Status Affected: TO, PD © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 679 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary SLEEP Enter Sleep mode Encoding: 0000 0000 0000 0011 Description: The Power-down Status bit (PD) is cleared. The Time-out Status bit (TO) is set. Watchdog Timer and its postscaler are cleared. The processor is put into Sleep mode with the oscillator stopped. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation Process Data Go to Sleep Example: SLEEP Before Instruction TO = ? PD = ? After Instruction TO = 1 † PD = 0 † If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared. SUBFWB Subtract f from W with borrow (Continued) Syntax: SUBFWB f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) – (f) – (C) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: Description: 0101 01da ffff ffff Subtract register ‘f’ and CARRY flag (borrow) from W (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 680 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary SUBFWB Subtract f from W with borrow (Continued) f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 35.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Read register ‘f’ Example 1: Process Data SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 SUBFWB REG, 0, 0 Q4 Write to destination Before Instruction REG = 3 W=2 C=1 After Instruction REG = FF W=2 C=0 Z=0 N = 1 ; result is negative Example 2: Before Instruction REG = 2 W=5 C=1 After Instruction REG = 2 W=3 C=1 Z=0 N = 0 ; result is positive © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 681 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example 3: SUBFWB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1 W=2 C=0 After Instruction REG = 0 W=2 C=1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N=0 SUBLW Subtract W from literal Syntax: SUBLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k – (W) → Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0000 1000 Description W is subtracted from the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 kkkk kkkk Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example 1: SUBLW 02h Before Instruction W = 01h C=? After Instruction W = 01h C = 1 ; result is positive © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 682 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Z=0 N=0 Example 2: SUBLW 02h SUBLW 02h Before Instruction W = 02h C=? After Instruction W = 00h C = 1 ; result is zero Z=1 N=0 Example 3: Before Instruction W = 03h C=? After Instruction W = FFh ; (2’s complement) C = 0 ; result is negative Z=0 N=1 SUBWF Subtract W from f Syntax: SUBWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: Description: 0101 11da ffff ffff Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 683 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary SUBWF Subtract W from f If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 35.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode” for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Q3 Read register ‘f’ Example 1: Process Data SUBWF REG, 1, 0 SUBWF REG, 0, 0 Q4 Write to destination Before Instruction REG = 3 W=2 C=? After Instruction REG = 1 W=2 C = 1 ; result is positive Z=0 N=0 Example 2: Before Instruction REG = 2 W=2 C=? After Instruction REG = 2 W=0 C = 1 ; result is zero Z=1 N=0 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 684 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example 3: SUBWF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1 W=2 C=? After Instruction REG = FFh ;(2’s complement) W=2 C = 0 ; result is negative Z=0 N=1 SUBWFB Subtract W from f with Borrow Syntax: SUBWFB f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) – (W) – (C) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: Description: 0101 10da ffff ffff Subtract W and the CARRY flag (borrow) from register ‘f’ (2’s complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read register ‘f’ © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Q3 Process Data Datasheet Q4 Write to destination 40001843D-page 685 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Example 1: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 19h (0001 1001) W = 0Dh (0000 1101) C=1 After Instruction REG = 0Ch (0000 1100) W = 0Dh (0000 1101) C=1 Z=0 N = 0 ; result is positive Example 2: SUBWFB REG, 0, 0 Before Instruction REG = 1Bh (0001 1011) W = 1Ah (0001 1010) C=0 After Instruction REG = 1Bh (0001 1011) W = 00h C=1 Z = 1 ; result is zero N=0 Example 3: SUBWFB REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 03h (0000 0011) W = 0Eh (0000 1110) C=1 After Instruction REG = F5h (1111 0101) ; [2’s comp] W = 0Eh (0000 1110) C=0 Z=0 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 686 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary N = 1 ; result is negative SWAPF Swap f Syntax: SWAPF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (f) → dest, (f) → dest Status Affected: None Encoding: Description: 0011 10da ffff ffff The upper and lower nibbles of register ‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed in register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: SWAPF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = 53h After Instruction REG = 35h TBLRD Table Read Syntax: TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*) Operands: None Operation: if TBLRD *, © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 687 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary TBLRD Table Read (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT; TBLPTR – No Change; if TBLRD *+, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT; (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLRD *-, (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT; (TBLPTR) – 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLRD +*, (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR; (Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT; Status Affected: None Encoding: 10nn nn=0 * 0000 0000 0000 =1 *+ =2 *=3 +* Description: This instruction is used to read the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the program memory, a pointer called Table Pointer (TBLPTR) is used. The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-Mbyte address range. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLRD instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • • • • Words: 1 Cycles: 2 no change post-increment post-decrement pre-increment Q Cycle Activity: Q1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Q2 Q3 Datasheet Q4 40001843D-page 688 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Decode No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation (Read Program Memory) No operation No operation (Write TABLAT) TBLRD Table Read (Continued) Example1: TBLRD *+ ; TBLRD +* ; Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h MEMORY (00A356h) = 34h After Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 00A357h Example2: Before Instruction TABLAT = AAh TBLPTR = 01A357h MEMORY (01A357h) = 12h MEMORY (01A358h) = 34h After Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01A358h TBLWT (Continued) Table Write Syntax: TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*) Operands: None Operation: if TBLWT*, (TABLAT) → Holding Register; TBLPTR – No Change; if TBLWT*+, (TABLAT) → Holding Register; (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLWT*-, © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 689 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary TBLWT (Continued) Table Write (TABLAT) → Holding Register; (TBLPTR) – 1 → TBLPTR; if TBLWT+*, (TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR; (TABLAT) → Holding Register; Status Affected: None Encoding: 11nn nn=0 * 0000 0000 =1 *+ 0000 =2 *=3 +* Description: This instruction uses the LSBs of TBLPTR to determine which of the holding registers the TABLAT is written to. The holding registers are used to program the contents of Program Memory (P.M.). (Refer to the “Program Flash Memory” section for additional details on programming Flash memory.) The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR has a 2-MByte address range. The LSb of the TBLPTR selects which byte of the program memory location to access. TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of Program Memory Word TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of Program Memory Word The TBLWT instruction can modify the value of TBLPTR as follows: • • • • Words: 1 Cycles: 2 no change post-increment post-decrement pre-increment Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation (Read TABLAT) No operation No operation (Write to Holding Register ) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 690 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary TBLWT Table Write (Continued) Example1: TBLWT *+; Before Instruction TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A356h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = FFh After Instructions (table write completion) TABLAT = 55h TBLPTR = 00A357h HOLDING REGISTER (00A356h) = 55h Example 2: TBLWT +*; Before Instruction TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Ah HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = FFh After Instruction (table write completion) TABLAT = 34h TBLPTR = 01389Bh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Ah) = FFh HOLDING REGISTER (01389Bh) = 34h TSTFSZ Test f, skip if 0 Syntax: TSTFSZ f {,a} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 a ∈ [0,1] Operation: skip if f = 0 Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 011a Datasheet ffff ffff 40001843D-page 691 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary TSTFSZ Test f, skip if 0 Description: If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched during the current instruction execution is discarded and a NOP is executed, making this a 2-cycle instruction. If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. Words: 1 Cycles: 1(2) Note: Three cycles if skip and followed by a 2-word instruction. Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data No operation If skip: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 No operation No operation No operation No operation Q3 Q4 If skip and followed by 2-word instruction: Q1 Q2 No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE NZERO ZERO TSTFSZ : : CNT, 1 Before Instruction PC = Address (HERE) After Instruction If CNT = 00h, PC = Address (ZERO) If CNT ≠ 00h, PC = Address (NZERO) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 692 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary XORLW Exclusive OR literal with W Syntax: XORLW k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: (W) .XOR. k → Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: 0000 1010 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are XORed with the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to W Example: XORLW 0AFh Before Instruction W = B5h After Instruction W = 1Ah XORWF Exclusive OR W with f Syntax: XORWF f {,d {,a}} Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 255 d ∈ [0,1] a ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) .XOR. (f) → dest Status Affected: N, Z Encoding: Description: 0001 10da ffff ffff Exclusive OR the contents of W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in the register ‘f’ (default). If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the GPR bank. If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction set is enabled, this instruction operates in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode for details. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 693 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary XORWF Exclusive OR W with f Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: XORWF REG, 1, 0 Before Instruction REG = AFh W = B5h After Instruction REG = 1Ah W = B5h 36.2 Extended Instruction Set In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18 instruction set, PIC18(L)F24/25K40 devices also provide an optional extension to the core CPU functionality. The added features include eight additional instructions that augment indirect and indexed addressing operations and the implementation of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode for many of the standard PIC18 instructions. The additional features of the extended instruction set are disabled by default. To enable them, users must set the XINST Configuration bit. The instructions in the extended set can all be classified as literal operations, which either manipulate the File Select Registers, or use them for indexed addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution. The extended instructions are specifically implemented to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in high-level languages, particularly C. Among other things, they allow users working in high-level languages to perform certain operations on data structures more efficiently. These include: • • • • dynamic allocation and deallocation of software stack space when entering and leaving subroutines function pointer invocation software Stack Pointer manipulation manipulation of variables located in a software stack A summary of the instructions in the extended instruction set is provided in Extended Instruction Syntax. Detailed descriptions are provided in Extended Instruction Set. The opcode field descriptions in Standard Instruction Set apply to both the standard and extended PIC18 instruction sets. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 694 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Important:  The instruction set extension and the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode were designed for optimizing applications written in C; the user may likely never use these instructions directly in assembler. The syntax for these commands is provided as a reference for users who may be reviewing code that has been generated by a compiler. 36.2.1 Extended Instruction Syntax Most of the extended instructions use indexed arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and some offset to specify a source or destination register. When an argument for an instruction serves as part of indexed addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets (“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used as an index or offset. MPASM™ Assembler will flag an error if it determines that an index or offset value is not bracketed. When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets are also used to indicate index arguments in byteoriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands. Important:  In the past, square brackets have been used to denote optional arguments in the PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this text and going forward, optional arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”). Table 36-3. Extensions to the PIC18 Instruction Set Mnemonic, Operands ADDFSR Cycles 16-Bit Instruction Word MSb LSb Status Affected Add literal to FSR 1 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk None Add literal to FSR2 and return 2 1110 1000 11kk kkkk None CALLW Call subroutine using WREG 2 0000 0000 0001 0100 None MOVSF zs, fd Move zs (source) to 1st word 2 1110 1011 0zzz zzzz None 1111 ffff ffff ffff 1110 1011 1zzz zzzz 1111 xxxx xzzz zzzz ADDULNK f, k Description k fd (destination) 2nd word MOVSS zs, zd Move zs (source) to 1st word 2 zd (destination) 2nd word PUSHL SUBFSR SUBULNK k f, k k None Store literal at FSR2, decrement FSR2 1 1110 1010 kkkk kkkk None Subtract literal from FSR 1 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk None Subtract literal from FSR2 and return 2 1110 1001 11kk kkkk None © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 695 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary 36.2.2 Extended Instruction Set ADDFSR Add Literal to FSR Syntax: ADDFSR f, k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 f ∈ [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR(f) + k → FSR(f) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1000 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Q3 Q4 Process Data Example: Write to FSR ADDFSR 2, 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh After Instruction FSR2 = 0422h ADDULNK Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Syntax: ADDULNK k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 Operation: FSR2 + k → FSR2, (TOS) → PC Status Affected: Encoding: Description: None 1110 1000 11kk kkkk The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. This may be thought of as a special case of the ADDFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 696 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary ADDULNK Add Literal to FSR2 and Return Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read literal ‘k’ Process Data Write to FSR No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: ADDULNK 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh PC = 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = 0422h PC = (TOS) Important:  All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction syntax then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s). CALLW Subroutine Call Using WREG Syntax: CALLW Operands: None Operation: (PC + 2) → TOS, (W) → PCL, (PCLATH) → PCH, (PCLATU) → PCU Status Affected: Encoding: Description None 0000 0000 0001 0100 First, the return address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the return stack. Next, the contents of W are written to PCL; the existing value is discarded. Then, the contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are latched into PCH and PCU, respectively. The second cycle is executed as a NOP instruction while the new next instruction is fetched. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 697 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary CALLW Subroutine Call Using WREG Unlike CALL, there is no option to update W, Status or BSR. Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read WREG PUSH PC to stack No operation No operation No operation No operation No operation Example: HERE CALLW Before Instruction PC = address (HERE) PCLATH = 10h PCLATU = 00h W = 06h After Instruction PC = 001006h TOS = address (HERE + 2) PCLATH = 10h PCLATU = 00h W = 06h MOVSF Move Indexed to f Syntax: MOVSF [zs], fd Operands: 0 ≤ zs ≤ 127 0 ≤ fd ≤ 4095 Operation: ((FSR2) + zs) → fd Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 1110 1111 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 1011 ffff Datasheet 0zzz ffff zzzzs ffffd 40001843D-page 698 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MOVSF Move Indexed to f 2nd word (destin.) Description: The contents of the source register are moved to destination register ‘fd’. The actual address of the source register is determined by adding the 7-bit literal offset ‘zs’ in the first word to the value of FSR2. The address of the destination register is specified by the 12-bit literal ‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses can be anywhere in the 4096byte data space (000h to FFFh). The MOVSF instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an indirect addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Determine source addr Determine source addr Read source reg Decode No operation No dummy read No operation Write register ‘f’ (dest) Example: MOVSF [05h], REG2 Before Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h REG2 = 11h After Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h REG2 = 33h MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed Syntax: MOVSS [zs], [zd] Operands: 0 ≤ zs ≤ 127 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 699 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary MOVSS Move Indexed to Indexed 0 ≤ zd ≤ 127 Operation: ((FSR2) + zs) → ((FSR2) + zd) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1st word (source) 1110 1111 2nd word (dest.) Description 1011 xxxx 1zzz xzzz zzzzs zzzzd The contents of the source register are moved to the destination register. The addresses of the source and destination registers are determined by adding the 7-bit literal offsets ‘zs’ or ‘zd’, respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both registers can be located anywhere in the 4096byte data memory space (000h to FFFh). The MOVSS instruction cannot use the PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the destination register. If the resultant source address points to an indirect addressing register, the value returned will be 00h. If the resultant destination address points to an indirect addressing register, the instruction will execute as a NOP. Words: 2 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Determine source addr Determine source addr Read source reg Decode Determine dest addr Determine dest addr Write to dest reg Example: MOVSS [05h], [06h] Before Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h Contents of 86h = 11h © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 700 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary After Instruction FSR2 = 80h Contents of 85h = 33h Contents of 86h = 33h PUSHL Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2 Syntax: PUSHL k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 255 Operation: k → (FSR2), FSR2 – 1 → FSR2 Status Affected: None Encoding: 1111 1010 kkkk kkkk Description: The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2 is decremented by 1 after the operation. This instruction allows users to push values onto a software stack. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read ‘k’ Process data Write to destination Example: PUSHL 08h Before Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L = 01ECh Memory (01ECh) = 00h After Instruction FSR2H:FSR2L = 01EBh Memory (01ECh) = 08h © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 701 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary SUBFSR Subtract Literal from FSR Syntax: SUBFSR f, k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 f ∈ [ 0, 1, 2 ] Operation: FSR(f) – k → FSRf Status Affected: None Encoding: 1110 1001 ffkk kkkk Description: The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination Example: SUBFSR 2, 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh After Instruction FSR2 = 03DCh SUBULNK Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return Syntax: SUBULNK k Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 63 Operation: FSR2 – k → FSR2 (TOS) → PC Status Affected: Encoding: Description: None 1110 1001 11kk kkkk The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then executed by loading the PC with the TOS. The instruction takes two cycles to execute; a NOP is performed during the second cycle. This may be thought of as a special case of the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates only on FSR2. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 702 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary SUBULNK Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return Words: 1 Cycles: 2 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Decode Read register ‘f’ Process Data Write to destination No Operation No Operation No Operation No Operation Example: SUBULNK 23h Before Instruction FSR2 = 03FFh PC = 0100h After Instruction FSR2 = 03DCh PC = (TOS) 36.2.3 Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset Mode Important:  Enabling the PIC18 instruction set extension may cause legacy applications to behave erratically or fail entirely. In addition to eight new commands in the extended set, enabling the extended instruction set also enables Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode (Section “Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). This has a significant impact on the way that many commands of the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted. When the extended set is disabled, addresses embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory locations: either as a location in the Access Bank (‘a’ = 0), or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR (‘a’ = 1). When the extended instruction set is enabled and ‘a’ = 0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or less is interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in FSR2 and not as a literal address. For practical purposes, this means that all instructions that use the Access RAM bit as an argument – that is, all byteoriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost half of the core PIC18 instructions – may behave differently when the extended instruction set is enabled. When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original values. This may be useful in creating backward compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it when moving back and forth between C and assembly routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users must also keep in mind the syntax © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 703 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary requirements of the extended instruction set (see Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands). Although the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18 programming must keep in mind that, when the extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing. Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode are provided on the following page to show how execution is affected. The operand conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all instructions of these types. Related Links Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set 36.2.3.1 Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18 Commands When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file register argument, ‘f’, in the standard byte-oriented and bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset value, ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used, it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a value greater than 5Fh within brackets, will generate an error in the MPASM assembler. If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed Literal Offset Addressing, the Access RAM argument is never specified; it will automatically be assumed to be ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard operation (extended instruction set disabled) when ‘a’ is set on the basis of the target address. Declaring the Access RAM bit in this mode will also generate an error in the MPASM assembler. The destination argument, ‘d’, functions as before. In the latest versions of the MPASM™ assembler, language support for the extended instruction set must be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the source listing. Related Links Data Memory and the Extended Instruction Set 36.2.4 Considerations when Enabling the Extended Instruction Set It is important to note that the extensions to the instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In particular, users who are not writing code that uses a software stack may not benefit from using the extensions to the instruction set. Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode may create issues with legacy applications written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2 when the instruction set extension is enabled, the application may read or write to the wrong data addresses. When porting an application to the PIC18(L)F24/25K40 it is very important to consider the type of code. A large, re-entrant application that is written in ‘C’ and would benefit from efficient compilation will do well when using the instruction set extensions. Legacy applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most likely not benefit from using the extended instruction set. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 704 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary ADDWF ADD W to Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: ADDWF [k] {,d} Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 95 d ∈ [0,1] Operation: (W) + ((FSR2) + k) → dest Status Affected: N, OV, C, DC, Z Encoding: 0010 01d0 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of W are added to the contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back in register ‘f’ (default). Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Decode Q2 Read ‘k’ Example: Q3 Q4 Process Data ADDWF Write to destination [OFST] , 0 Before Instruction W = 17h OFST = 2Ch FSR2 = 0A00h Contents of 0A2Ch = 20h After Instruction W = 37h Contents of 0A2Ch = 20h BSF Bit Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: BSF [k], b Operands: 0 ≤ f ≤ 95 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 705 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Bit Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) BSF 0≤b≤7 Operation: 1 → ((FSR2) + k) Status Affected: None Encoding: 1000 bbb0 kkkk kkkk Description: Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’, is set. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Read register ‘f’ Example: Q3 Q4 Process Data BSF Write to destination [FLAG_OFST], 7 Before Instruction FLAG_OFST = 0Ah FSR2 = 0A00h Contents of 0A0Ah = 55h After Instruction Contents of 0A0Ah = D5h SETF Set Indexed (Indexed Literal Offset mode) Syntax: SETF [k] Operands: 0 ≤ k ≤ 95 Operation: FFh → ((FSR2) + k) Status Affected: None Encoding: 0110 1000 kkkk kkkk Description: The contents of the register indicated by FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh. Words: 1 Cycles: 1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 706 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Instruction Set Summary Q Cycle Activity: Q1 Q2 Decode Example: Q3 Q4 Read ‘k’ Process Data SETF Write register [OFST] Before Instruction OFST = 2Ch FSR2 = 0A00h Contents of 0A2Ch = 00h After Instruction Contents of 0A2Ch = FFh 36.2.5 ® Special Considerations with Microchip MPLAB IDE Tools The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have been designed to fully support the extended instruction set of the PIC18(L)F24/25K40 family of devices. This includes the MPLAB C18 C compiler, MPASM assembly language and MPLAB Integrated Development Environment (IDE). When selecting a target device for software development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for the XINST Configuration bit is ‘0’, disabling the extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode. For proper execution of applications developed to take advantage of the extended instruction set, XINST must be set during programming. To develop software for the extended instruction set, the user must enable support for the instructions and the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s). Depending on the environment being used, this may be done in several ways: • • • A menu option, or dialog box within the environment, that allows the user to configure the language tool and its settings for the project A command line option A directive in the source code These options vary between different compilers, assemblers and development environments. Users are encouraged to review the documentation accompanying their development systems for the appropriate information. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 707 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Development Support 37. Development Support ® ® The PIC microcontrollers (MCU) and dsPIC digital signal controllers (DSC) are supported with a full range of software and hardware development tools: • • • • • • • • 37.1 Integrated Development Environment ® – MPLAB X IDE Software Compilers/Assemblers/Linkers – MPLAB XC Compiler – MPASMTM Assembler – MPLINKTM Object Linker/ MPLIBTM Object Librarian – MPLAB Assembler/Linker/Librarian for Various Device Families Simulators – MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator Emulators – MPLAB REAL ICE™ In-Circuit Emulator In-Circuit Debuggers/Programmers – MPLAB ICD 3 – PICkit™ 3 Device Programmers – MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer Low-Cost Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits and Starter Kits Third-party development tools MPLAB X Integrated Development Environment Software The MPLAB X IDE is a single, unified graphical user interface for Microchip and third-party software, and ® ® hardware development tool that runs on Windows , Linux and Mac OS X. Based on the NetBeans IDE, MPLAB X IDE is an entirely new IDE with a host of free software components and plug-ins for highperformance application development and debugging. Moving between tools and upgrading from software simulators to hardware debugging and programming tools is simple with the seamless user interface. With complete project management, visual call graphs, a configurable watch window and a feature-rich editor that includes code completion and context menus, MPLAB X IDE is flexible and friendly enough for new users. With the ability to support multiple tools on multiple projects with simultaneous debugging, MPLAB X IDE is also suitable for the needs of experienced users. Feature-Rich Editor: • • • • Color syntax highlighting Smart code completion makes suggestions and provides hints as you type Automatic code formatting based on user-defined rules Live parsing User-Friendly, Customizable Interface: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 708 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Development Support • • Fully customizable interface: toolbars, toolbar buttons, windows, window placement, etc. Call graph window Project-Based Workspaces: • • • • Multiple projects Multiple tools Multiple configurations Simultaneous debugging sessions File History and Bug Tracking: • • 37.2 Local file history feature Built-in support for Bugzilla issue tracker MPLAB XC Compilers The MPLAB XC Compilers are complete ANSI C compilers for all of Microchip’s 8, 16, and 32-bit MCU and DSC devices. These compilers provide powerful integration capabilities, superior code optimization and ease of use. MPLAB XC Compilers run on Windows, Linux or MAC OS X. For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide debug information that is optimized to the MPLAB X IDE. The free MPLAB XC Compiler editions support all devices and commands, with no time or memory restrictions, and offer sufficient code optimization for most applications. MPLAB XC Compilers include an assembler, linker and utilities. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. MPLAB XC Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. Notable features of the assembler include: • • • • • • 37.3 Support for the entire device instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command-line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB X IDE compatibility MPASM Assembler The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal macro assembler for PIC10/12/16/18 MCUs. ® The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel standard HEX files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines and generated machine code, and COFF files for debugging. The MPASM Assembler features include: • • Integration into MPLAB X IDE projects User-defined macros to streamline assembly code © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 709 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Development Support • • 37.4 Conditional assembly for multipurpose source files Directives that allow complete control over the assembly process MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable objects created by the MPASM Assembler. It can link relocatable objects from precompiled libraries, using directives from a linker script. The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and modification of library files of precompiled code. When a routine from a library is called from a source file, only the modules that contain that routine will be linked in with the application. This allows large libraries to be used efficiently in many different applications. The object linker/library features include: • • • 37.5 Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many smaller files Enhanced code maintainability by grouping related modules together Flexible creation of libraries with easy module listing, replacement, deletion and extraction MPLAB Assembler, Linker and Librarian for Various Device Families MPLAB Assembler produces relocatable machine code from symbolic assembly language for PIC24, PIC32 and dsPIC DSC devices. MPLAB XC Compiler uses the assembler to produce its object file. The assembler generates relocatable object files that can then be archived or linked with other relocatable object files and archives to create an executable file. Notable features of the assembler include: • • • • • • 37.6 Support for the entire device instruction set Support for fixed-point and floating-point data Command-line interface Rich directive set Flexible macro language MPLAB X IDE compatibility MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator The MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator allows code development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs on an instruction level. On any given instruction, the data areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller. Registers can be logged to files for further run-time analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display extend the power of the simulator to record and track program execution, actions on I/O, most peripherals and internal registers. The MPLAB X SIM Software Simulator fully supports symbolic debugging using the MPLAB XC Compilers, and the MPASM and MPLAB Assemblers. The software simulator offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside of the hardware laboratory environment, making it an excellent, economical software development tool. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 710 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Development Support 37.7 MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System The MPLAB REAL ICE In-Circuit Emulator System is Microchip’s next generation high-speed emulator for Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and programs all 8, 16 and 32-bit MCU, and DSC devices with the easy-to-use, powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB X IDE. The emulator is connected to the design engineer’s PC using a high-speed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with either a connector compatible with in-circuit debugger systems (RJ-11) or with the new high-speed, noise tolerant, Low-Voltage Differential Signal (LVDS) interconnection (CAT5). The emulator is field upgradable through future firmware downloads in MPLAB X IDE. MPLAB REAL ICE offers significant advantages over competitive emulators including full-speed emulation, run-time variable watches, trace analysis, complex breakpoints, logic probes, a ruggedized probe interface and long (up to three meters) interconnection cables. 37.8 MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger System is Microchip’s most cost-effective, high-speed hardware debugger/programmer for Microchip Flash DSC and MCU devices. It debugs and programs PIC Flash microcontrollers and dsPIC DSCs with the powerful, yet easy-to-use graphical user interface of the MPLAB IDE. The MPLAB ICD 3 In-Circuit Debugger probe is connected to the design engineer’s PC using a highspeed USB 2.0 interface and is connected to the target with a connector compatible with the MPLAB ICD 2 or MPLAB REAL ICE systems (RJ-11). MPLAB ICD 3 supports all MPLAB ICD 2 headers. 37.9 PICkit 3 In-Circuit Debugger/Programmer The MPLAB PICkit 3 allows debugging and programming of PIC and dsPIC Flash microcontrollers at a most affordable price point using the powerful graphical user interface of the MPLAB IDE. The MPLAB PICkit 3 is connected to the design engineer’s PC using a full-speed USB interface and can be connected to the target via a Microchip debug (RJ-11) connector (compatible with MPLAB ICD 3 and MPLAB REAL ICE). The connector uses two device I/O pins and the Reset line to implement in-circuit debugging and In-Circuit Serial Programming™ (ICSP™). 37.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal, CE compliant device programmer with programmable voltage verification at Vddmin and Vddmax for maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display (128 x 64) for menus and error messages, and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various package types. The ICSP cable assembly is included as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program PIC devices without a PC connection. It can also set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3 connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable. The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and optimized algorithms for quick programming of large memory devices, and incorporates an MMC card for file storage and data applications. 37.11 Demonstration/Development Boards, Evaluation Kits, and Starter Kits A wide variety of demonstration, development and evaluation boards for various PIC MCUs and dsPIC DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 711 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Development Support areas for adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware and source code for examination and modification. The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs, temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232 interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional EEPROM memory. The demonstration and development boards can be used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom circuits and for learning about various microcontroller applications. In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/development board series of circuits, ® Microchip has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software for analog filter design, KeeLoq ® ® security ICs, CAN, IrDA , PowerSmart battery management, SEEVAL evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate sensing, plus many more. Also available are starter kits that contain everything needed to experience the specified device. This usually includes a single application and debug capability, all on one board. Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com) for the complete list of demonstration, development and evaluation kits. 37.12 Third-Party Development Tools Microchip also offers a great collection of tools from third-party vendors. These tools are carefully selected to offer good value and unique functionality. • • • • • Device Programmers and Gang Programmers from companies, such as SoftLog and CCS Software Tools from companies, such as Gimpel and Trace Systems Protocol Analyzers from companies, such as Saleae and Total Phase ® Demonstration Boards from companies, such as MikroElektronika, Digilent and Olimex ® Embedded Ethernet Solutions from companies, such as EZ Web Lynx, WIZnet and IPLogika © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 712 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38. Electrical Specifications 38.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings(†) Parameter Ambient temperature under bias Storage temperature Voltage on pins with respect to VSS • Rating -40°C to +125°C -65°C to +150°C on VDD pin: PIC18LF24/25K40 PIC18F24/25K40 -0.3V to +4.0V -0.3V to +6.5V • on MCLR pin: -0.3V to +9.0V • on all other pins: -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V) Maximum current • on VSS pin(1) • on VDD pin for 28-pin Devices(1) • on any standard I/O pin -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C 85°C < TA ≤ +125°C -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C 85°C < TA ≤ +125°C Clamp current, IK (VPIN < 0 or VPIN > VDD) Total power dissipation(2) 350 mA 120 mA 250 mA 85 mA ±50 mA ±20 mA 800 mW Important:  1. Maximum current rating requires even load distribution across I/O pins. Maximum current rating may be limited by the device package power dissipation characterizations, see Thermal Characteristics to calculate device specifications. 2. Power dissipation is calculated as follows: PDIS = VDD x {IDD - Σ IOH} + Σ {(VDD - VOH) x IOH} + Σ (VOI x IOL) NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure above maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. 38.2 Standard Operating Conditions The standard operating conditions for any device are defined as: Operating Voltage: VDDMIN ≤ VDD ≤ VDDMAX TA_MIN ≤ TA ≤ TA_MAX Operating Temperature: © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 713 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Parameter VDD — Operating Supply Voltage(1) PIC18LF24/25K40 Ratings VDDMIN (FOSC ≤ 16 MHz) VDDMIN (FOSC ≤ 32 MHz) +1.8V +2.5V VDDMIN (FOSC ≤ 64 MHz) VDDMAX PIC18F24/25K40 VDDMIN (FOSC ≤ 16 MHz) VDDMIN (FOSC ≤ 32 MHz) VDDMIN (FOSC ≤ 64 MHz) VDDMAX TA — Operating Ambient Temperature Range Industrial Temperature TA_MIN TA_MAX Extended Temperature TA_MIN TA_MAX +3.0V +3.6V +2.3V +2.5V +3.0V +5.5V -40°C +85°C -40°C +125°C Figure 38-1. Voltage Frequency Graph, -40°C ≤ TA≤ +125°C, for PIC18F24/25K40 only Rev. 30-000069A 4/6/2017 5.5 VDD (V) 3.0 2.5 2.3 0 4 10 16 32 64 Frequency (MHz) Note:  1. The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. 2. Refer to External Clock/Oscillator Timing Requirements for each Oscillator mode’s supported frequencies. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 714 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-2. Voltage Frequency Graph, -40°C ≤ TA≤ +125°C, for PIC18LF24/25K40 Devices only Rev. 30-000070A 4/6/2017 VDD (V) 3.6 3.0 2.5 1.8 4 0 10 16 32 64 Frequency (MHz) Note:  1. The shaded region indicates the permissible combinations of voltage and frequency. 2. Refer to External Clock/Oscillator Timing Requirements for each Oscillator mode’s supported frequencies. 38.3 DC Characteristics 38.3.1 Supply Voltage Table 38-1.  PIC18LF24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions 1.8 — 3.6 V FOSC ≤ 16 MHz 2.5 — 3.6 V FOSC > 16 MHz 3.0 — 3.6 V FOSC > 32 MHz 1.5 — — V Device in SLEEP mode Supply Voltage D002 VDD RAM Data Retention(1) D003 VDR Power-on Reset Release Voltage(2) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 715 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications PIC18LF24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. D004 VPOR Characteristic Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions — 1.6 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3) — 0.8 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3) — V/ms BOR or LPBOR disabled(3) Power-on Reset Rearm Voltage(2) D005 VPORR VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal(2) D006 SVDD 0.05 — Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode without losing RAM data. 2. See the following figure, POR and POR REARM with Slow Rising VDD. 3. Please see Reset, WDT, Oscillator Start-up Timer, Power-up Timer, Brown-Out Reset and LowPower Brown-Out Reset Specifications for BOR and LPBOR trip point information. PIC18F24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions 2.3 — 5.5 V FOSC ≤ 16 MHz 2.5 — 5.5 V FOSC > 16 MHz 3.0 — 5.5 V FOSC > 32 MHz 1.7 — — V Device in SLEEP mode — 1.6 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3) Supply Voltage D002A VDD RAM Data Retention(1) D003A VDR Power-on Reset Release Voltage(2) D004A VPOR Power-on Reset Rearm Voltage(2) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 716 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications PIC18F24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. D005A VPORR Characteristic Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions — 1.5 — V BOR or LPBOR disabled(3) — V/ms BOR or LPBOR disabled(3) VDD Rise Rate to ensure internal Power-on Reset signal(2) D006A SVDD 0.05 — Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode without losing RAM data. 2. See the following figure, POR and POR REARM with Slow Rising VDD. 3. Please see Reset, WDT, Oscillator Start-up Timer, Power-up Timer, Brown-Out Reset and LowPower Brown-Out Reset Specifications for BOR and LPBOR trip point information. Figure 38-3. POR and POR Rearm with Slow Rising VDD Rev. 30-000071A 4/6/2017 VDD VPOR VPORR SVDD VSS NPOR(1) POR REARM VSS TVLOW(3) TPOR(2) Note:  1. When NPOR is low, the device is held in Reset.  2. TPOR 1 μs typical. 3. TVLOW 2.7 μs typical. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 717 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.3.2 Supply Current (IDD)(1,2,4) Table 38-2.  PIC18LF24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Device Characteristics Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions D100 IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 450 650 μA 3.0V D100A IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 310 — μA 3.0V D101 IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 1.9 2.6 mA 3.0V D101A IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 1.4 — mA 3.0V D102 IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 7.4 9.4 mA 3.0V D102A IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 5.2 — mA 3.0V D103 IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 6.9 8.9 mA 3.0V D103A IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 4.9 — mA 3.0V D104 IDDIDLE IDLE mode, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 1.05 — mA 3.0V D105 IDDDOZE(3) DOZE mode, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz, Doze Ratio = 16 — 1.1 — mA 3.0V VDD Note PMD’s all 1’s PMD’s all 1’s PMD’s all 1’s PMD’s all 1’s Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins are outputs driven low; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3. IDDDOZE = [IDDIDLE*(N-1)/N] + IDDHFO16/N where N = DOZE Ratio (see CPUDOZE register). 4. PMD bits are all in the default state, no modules are disabled. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 718 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications PIC18F24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Device Characteristics Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions D150 IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 550 750 μA 3.0V D150A IDDXT4 XT = 4 MHz — 410 — μA 3.0V D151 IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 2.0 2.7 mA 3.0V D151A IDDHFO16 HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 1.5 — mA 3.0V D152 IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 7.5 9.5 mA 3.0V D152A IDDHFOPLL HFINTOSC = 64 MHz — 5.3 — mA 3.0V D153 IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 7.0 9.0 mA 3.0V D153A IDDHSPLL64 HS+PLL = 64 MHz — 5.0 — mA 3.0V D154 IDDIDLE IDLE mode, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz — 1.15 — mA 3.0V D155 IDDDOZE(3) DOZE mode, HFINTOSC = 16 MHz, Doze Ratio = 16 — 1.2 — mA 3.0V VDD Note PMD’s all 1’s PMD’s all 1’s PMD’s all 1’s PMD’s all 1’s Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are: OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins are outputs driven low; MCLR = VDD; WDT disabled. 2. The supply current is mainly a function of the operating voltage and frequency. Other factors, such as I/O pin loading and switching rate, oscillator type, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have an impact on the current consumption. 3. IDDDOZE = [IDDIDLE*(N-1)/N] + IDDHFO16/N where N = DOZE Ratio (see CPUDOZE register). 4. PMD bits are all in the default state, no modules are disabled. Related Links CPUDOZE © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 719 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.3.3 Power-Down Current (IPD)(1,2) Table 38-3.  PIC18LF24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Device Characteristics Min. D200 IPD IPD Base — D201 IPD_WDT Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator/WDT D202 IPD_SOSC D203 Typ.† Max. +85°C Max. +125°C Units Conditions 0.05 2 9 μA 3.0V — 0.4 3 10 μA 3.0V Secondary Oscillator (SOSC) — 0.6 5 13 μA 3.0V IPD_LPBOR Low-Power Brown-out Reset (LPBOR) — 0.5 3.0 10 μA 3.0V D204 IPD_FVR FVR — 31 51 60 μA 3.0V D205 IPD_BOR Brown-out Reset (BOR) — 9 14 18 μA 3.0V D206 IPD_HLVD High/Low Voltage Detect (HLVD) — 31 — — μA 3.0V D207 IPD_ADCA ADC - Active — 250 — — μA 3.0V VDD Note FVRCON = 0x81 or 0x84 ADC is converting (4) D208 IPD_CMP Comparator — 30 45 48 μA 3.0V Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The peripheral ∆ current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPDcurrent from this limit. Max. values should be used when calculating total current consumption. 2. The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VSS. 3. All peripheral currents listed are on a per-peripheral basis if more than one instance of a peripheral is available. 4. ADC clock source is FRC. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 720 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications PIC18F24/25K40 only Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated), VREGPM = 1 Param. No. Sym. Device Characteristics Min. D250 IPD IPD Base — D250A IPD IPD Base D251 IPD_WDT D252 Typ.† Max. +85°C Max. +125°C Units Conditions 0.4 4 12 μA 3.0V — 20 — — μA 3.0V Low-Frequency Internal Oscillator/WDT — 0.6 5 13 μA 3.0V IPD_SOSC Secondary Oscillator (SOSC) — 0.8 8.5 15 μA 3.0V D253 IPD_LPBOR Low-Power Brown-out Reset (LPBOR) — 0.7 5.0 13 μA 3.0V D254 IPD_FVR FVR — 32 53 62 μA 3.0V D255 IPD_BOR Brown-out Reset (BOR) — 14 19 21 μA 3.0V D256 IPD_HLVD High/Low Voltage Detect (HLVD) — 32 — — μA 3.0V D257 IPD_ADCA ADC - Active — 280 — — μA 3.0V VDD Note VREGPM = 0 FVRCON = 0x81 or 0x84 ADC is converting (4) D258 IPD_CMP Comparator — 31 47 50 μA 3.0V Data in “Typ.” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. The peripheral current is the sum of the base IDD and the additional current consumed when this peripheral is enabled. The peripheral ∆ current can be determined by subtracting the base IDD or IPDcurrent from this limit. Max. values should be used when calculating total current consumption. 2. The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured with the part in Sleep mode with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VSS. 3. All peripheral currents listed are on a per-peripheral basis if more than one instance of a peripheral is available. 4. ADC clock source is FRC. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 721 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.3.4 I/O Ports Table 38-4.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Device Characteristics Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions — — 0.8 V 4.5V≤VDD≤5.5V — — 0.15 VDD V 1.8V≤VDD≤4.5V 2.0V≤VDD≤5.5V Input Low Voltage VIL I/O PORT: D300 • with TTL buffer D301 D302 • with Schmitt Trigger buffer — — 0.2 VDD V D303 • with I2C levels — — 0.3 VDD V D304 • with SMBus levels — — 0.8 V — — 0.2 VDD V 2.0 — — V 4.5V≤VDD≤5.5V 0.25 VDD +0.8 — — V 1.8V≤VDD≤4.5V 2.0V≤VDD≤5.5V D305 MCLR 2.7V≤VDD≤5.5V High Low Voltage VIH D320 I/O PORT: • with TTL buffer D321 D322 • with Schmitt Trigger buffer 0.8VDD — — V D323 • with I2C levels 0.7 VDD — — V D324 • with SMBus levels 2.1 — — V 0.7 VDD — — V — ±5 ±125 nA VSS≤VPIN≤VDD, Pin at highimpedance, 85°C — ±5 ±1000 nA VSS≤VPIN≤VDD, Pin at highimpedance, 125°C — ±50 ±200 nA VSS≤VPIN≤VDD, Pin at highimpedance, 85°C 25 120 200 μA VDD=3.0V, VPIN=VSS D325 MCLR Input Leakage D340 2.7V≤VDD≤5.5V Current(1) IIL I/O PORTS D341 MCLR(2) D342 Weak Pull-up Current D350 IPUR Output Low Voltage © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 722 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Device Characteristics D360 VOL Min. Typ.† Max. Units Conditions I/O PORTS — — 0.6 V IOL=10.0 mA, VDD=3.0V I/O PORTS VDD-0.7 — — V IOH=6.0 mA, VDD=3.0V — 5 50 pF Output High Voltage D370 VOH All I/O Pins D380 CIO Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin. 2. The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input voltages. 38.3.5 Memory Programming Specifications Table 38-5.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Device Characteristics Min. Typ† Max. Units Conditions 100k — — E/W -40°C≤TA≤+85°C Provided no other Year specifications are violated Data EEPROM Memory Specifications MEM20 ED DataEE Byte Endurance MEM21 TD_RET Characteristic Retention MEM22 ND_REF Total Erase/Write Cycles before Refresh MEM23 VD_RW VDD for Read or Erase/Write operation MEM24 TD_BEW Byte Erase and Write Cycle Time — 40 — 1M 10M — 500k E/W -40°C≤ TA≤+60°C -40°C≤ TA≤+85°C VDDMIN — VDDMAX V — 4.0 5.0 ms 10k — — -40°C≤Ta≤+85°C E/W (Note 1) — 40 — Provided no other Year specifications are violated Program Flash Memory Specifications MEM30 EP Flash Memory Cell Endurance MEM32 TP_RET Characteristic Retention © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 723 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. MEM33 VP_RD Device Characteristics VDD for Read operation MEM34 VP_REW VDD for Row Erase or Write operation MEM35 TP_REW Self-Timed Row Erase or Self-Timed Write Min. Typ† Max. Units VDDMIN — VDDMAX V VDDMIN — VDDMAX V — 2.0 2.5 ms Conditions Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. Flash Memory Cell Endurance for the Flash memory is defined as: One Row Erase operation and one Self-Timed Write. 38.3.6 Thermal Characteristics Table 38-6.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic TH01 Thermal Resistance Junction to Ambient θJA Typ. Units Conditions 60 °C/W 28-pin SPDIP package 80 °C/W 28-pin SOIC package 90 °C/W 28-pin SSOP package 27.5 °C/W 28-pin UQFN 4x4 mm package 27.5 °C/W 28-pin QFN 6x6mm package 47.2 °C/W 40-pin PDIP package TBD °C/W 40-pin UQFN 5x5 package 46 °C/W 44-pin TQFP package 24.4 °C/W 44-pin QFN 8x8mm package TH02 θJC Thermal Resistance Junction to Case 31.4 °C/W 28-pin SPDIP package 24 °C/W 28-pin SOIC package 24 °C/W 28-pin SSOP package 24 °C/W 28-pin UQFN 4x4mm package 24 °C/W 28-pin QFN 6x6mm package 24.7 °C/W 40-pin PDIP package TBD °C/W 40-pin UQFN 5x5 package 14.5 °C/W 44-pin TQFP package © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 724 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Typ. Units Conditions 20 °C/W 44-pin QFN 8x8mm package TH03 TJMAX Maximum Junction Temperature 150 °C TH04 PD Power Dissipation — W PD=PINTERNAL+PI/O(3) TH05 PINTERNAL Internal Power Dissipation — W PINTERNAL=IDDxVDD(1) TH06 PI/O I/O Power Dissipation — W PI/O=Σ(IOL*VOL)+Σ(IOH*(VDD-VOH)) TH07 PDER Derated Power — W PDER=PDMAX (TJ-TA)/θJA(2) Note:  1. IDD is current to run the chip alone without driving any load on the output pins. 2. TA = Ambient Temperature, TJ = Junction Temperature. Filename: 10-000133A.vsd 3. See "Absolute Maximum Ratings" for total power dissipation. Title: LOAD CONDITION Last Edit: First Used: Note: 38.4 8/1/2013 PIC16F1508/9 AC Characteristics Figure 38-4. Load Conditions Rev. 10-000133A 8/1/2013 Load Condition Pin CL VSS Legend: CL=50 pF for all pins 38.4.1 External Clock/Oscillator Timing Requirements Figure 38-5. Clock Timing Rev. 30-000072A 4/6/2017 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 CLKIN OS1 OS2 OS2 OS20 CLKOUT (CLKOUT Mode) Note:  See table below. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 725 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Table 38-7.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions ECL Oscillator OS1 FECL Clock Frequency — — 500 kHz OS2 TECL_DC Clock Duty Cycle 40 — 60 % ECM Oscillator OS3 FECM Clock Frequency — — 8 MHz OS4 TECM_DC Clock Duty Cycle 40 — 60 % ECH Oscillator OS5 FECH Clock Frequency — — 64 MHz OS6 TECH_DC Clock Duty Cycle 40 — 60 % Clock Frequency — — 100 kHz Note 4 Clock Frequency — — 4 MHz Note 4 Clock Frequency — — 20 MHz Note 4 Clock Frequency 32.4 32.768 33.1 kHz Note 4 (Note 2, Note 3) LP Oscillator OS7 FLP XT Oscillator OS8 FXT HS Oscillator OS9 FHS Secondary Oscillator OS10 FSEC System Oscillator OS20 FOSC System Clock Frequency — — 64 MHz OS21 FCY Instruction Frequency — FOSC/4 — MHz OS22 TCY Instruction Period 62.5 1/FCY — ns Note:  1. Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested to operate at “min” values with an external clock applied to OSC1 pin. When an external clock input is used, the “max” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices. 2. The system clock frequency (FOSC) is selected by the “main clock switch controls” as described in the “Power Saving Operation Modes” section. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 726 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. 3. 4. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions The system clock frequency (FOSC) must meet the voltage requirements defined in the "Standard Operating Conditions" section. LP, XT and HS oscillator modes require an appropriate crystal or resonator to be connected to the device. For clocking the device with the external square wave, one of the EC mode selections must be used. Related Links Standard Operating Conditions Power-Saving Operation Modes 38.4.2 Internal Oscillator Parameters(1) Table 38-8.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic OS50 FHFOSC Precision Calibrated HFINTOSC Frequency Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions — 4 — MHz (Note 2) 8 12 16 32 48 64 OS51 FHFOSCLP Low-Power Optimized HFINTOSC Frequency — 1 — MHz — 2 — MHz OS52 FMFOSC Internal Calibrated MFINTOSC Frequency — 500 — kHz OS53* FLFOSC Internal LFINTOSC Frequency — 31 — kHz OS54* THFOSCST HFINTOSC Wakeup from Sleep Start-up Time — 11 20 μs VREGPM=0 — 50 — μs VREGPM=1 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 727 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic OS56 TLFOSCST LFINTOSC Wakeup from Sleep Start-up Time Min. Typ. † Max. Units — 0.2 — ms Conditions   * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. To ensure these oscillator frequency tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as  0.1 μF and  0.01 μF values in parallel are recommended. close to the device as possible. 2. See the figure below. Figure 38-6. Precision Calibrated HFINTOSC Frequency Accuracy Over Device VDD and Temperature 125 ± 5% Temperature (°C) 85 ± 3% 60 ± 2% 0 ± 5% -40 1.8 2.0 2.3 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 VDD (V)  © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 728 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.4.3 PLL Specifications Table 38-9.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units PLL01 FPLLIN PLL Input Frequency Range 4 — 16 MHz PLL02 FPLLOUT PLL Output Frequency Range 16 — 64 MHz PLL03 FPLLST PLL Lock Time from Start-up — 200 — μs PLL04 FPLLJIT PLL Output Frequency Stability (Jitter) -0.25 — 0.25 % Conditions (Note 1) * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. The output frequency of the PLL must meet the FOSC requirements listed in Parameter D002. 38.4.4 I/O and CLKOUT Timing Specifications Figure 38-7. CLKOUT and I/O Timing Rev. 30-000074A 4/6/2017 Cycle Write Fetch Q1 Q4 Read Execute Q2 Q3 FOSC IO2 IO1 IO10 CLKOUT IO8 IO4 IO7 IO5 I/O pin (Input) IO3 I/O pin (Output) New Value Old Value IO7, IO8 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 729 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Table 38-10. I/O and CLKOUT Timing Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions IO1* TCLKOUTH CLKOUT rising edge delay (rising edge FOSC (Q1 cycle) to falling edge CLKOUT — — 70 ns IO2* TCLKOUTL CLKOUT falling edge delay (rising edge FOSC (Q3 cycle) to rising edge CLKOUT — — 72 ns IO3* TIO_VALID Port output valid time (rising edge FOSC (Q1 cycle) to port valid) — 50 70 ns IO4* TIO_SETUP Port input setup time (Setup time before rising edge FOSC – Q2 cycle) 20 — — ns IO5* TIO_HOLD Port input hold time (Hold time after rising edge FOSC – Q2 cycle) 50 — — ns IO6* TIOR_SLREN Port I/O rise time, slew rate enabled — 25 — ns VDD=3.0V IO7* TIOR_SLRDIS Port I/O rise time, slew rate disabled — 5 — ns VDD=3.0V IO8* TIOF_SLREN Port I/O fall time, slew rate enabled — 25 — ns VDD=3.0V IO9* TIOF_SLRDIS Port I/O fall time, slew rate disabled — 5 — ns VDD=3.0V IO10* TINT INT pin high or low time to trigger an interrupt 25 — — ns IO11* TIOC Interrupt-on-Change minimum high or low time to trigger interrupt 25 — — ns * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. 38.4.5 Reset, WDT, Oscillator Start-up Timer, Power-up Timer, Brown-Out Reset and Low-Power BrownOut Reset Specifications Table 38-11.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units RST01* TMCLR MCLR Pulse Width Low to ensure Reset 2 — — μs RST02* TIOZ I/O high-impedance from Reset detection — — 2 μs RST03 TWDT Watchdog Timer Time-out Period — 16 — ms RST04* TPWRT Power-up Timer Period — 65 — ms © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet Conditions 1:512 Prescaler 40001843D-page 730 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units RST05 TOST RST06 VBOR Oscillator Start-up Timer Period(1,2) — 1024 — TOSC Brown-out Reset Voltage 2.7 2.85 3.0 V BORV=00 2.55 2.7 2.85 V BORV=01 2.3 2.45 2.6 V BORV=10 2.3 2.45 2.6 V BORV=11(F devices only) 1.8 1.9 2.1 V BORV=11(LF Devices only) RST07 VBORHYS Brown-out Reset Hysteresis — 40 — mV RST08 TBORDC Brown-out Reset Response Time — 3 — μs RST09 VLPBOR Low-Power Brownout Reset Voltage 1.8 1.9 2.5 V Conditions * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. By design, the Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) counts the first 1024 cycles, independent of frequency. 2. To ensure these voltage tolerances, VDD and VSS must be capacitively decoupled as close to the device as possible. 0.1 μF and 0.01 μF values in parallel are recommended. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 731 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-8. Reset, Watchdog Timer, Oscillator Start-up Timer and Power-up Timer Timing Rev. 30-000075A 4/6/2017 VDD MCLR RST01 Internal POR RST04 PWRT Time-out RST05 OSC Start-up Time Internal Reset(1) Watchdog Timer Reset(1) RST03 RST02 RST02 I/O pins Note:  1. Asserted low. Figure 38-9. Brown-out Reset Timing and Characteristics Rev. 30-000076A 4/6/2017 VDD VBOR and VHYST VBOR (Device in Brown-out Reset) (Device not in Brown-out Reset) RST08 Reset RST04(1) (due to BOR) Note:  1. Only if PWRTE bit in the Configuration Word register is programmed to ‘1’; 2 ms delay if PWRTE = 0. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 732 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.4.6 High/Low-Voltage Detect Characteristics Table 38-12.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) 38.4.7 Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. Max. Units Conditions HLVD01 VDET Voltage Detect — 1.90 — V HLVDSEL=b'0000' — 2.10 — V HLVDSEL=b'0001' — 2.25 — V HLVDSEL=b'0010' — 2.50 — V HLVDSEL=b'0011' — 2.60 — V HLVDSEL=b'0100' — 2.75 — V HLVDSEL=b'0101' — 2.90 — V HLVDSEL=b'0110' — 3.15 — V HLVDSEL=b'0111' — 3.35 — V HLVDSEL=b'1000' — 3.60 — V HLVDSEL=b'1001' — 3.75 — V HLVDSEL=b'1010' — 4.00 — V HLVDSEL=b'1011' — 4.20 — V HLVDSEL=b'1100' — 4.35 — V HLVDSEL=b'1101' — 4.65 — V HLVDSEL=b'1110' Analog-To-Digital Converter (ADC) Accuracy Specifications(1,2) Table 38-13.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C, TAD = 1μs Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. AD01 NR AD02 Resolution — — 10 bit EIL Integral Error — ±0.1 ±1.0 LSb ADCREF+=3.0V, ADCREF- = 0V AD03 EDL Differential Error — ±0.1 ±1.0 LSb ADCREF+=3.0V, ADCREF- = 0V AD04 EOFF Offset Error — 0.5 ±2.0 LSb ADCREF+=3.0V, ADCREF- = 0V AD05 EGN Gain Error — ±0.2 ±1.5 LSb ADCREF+=3.0V, ADCREF- = 0V AD06 VADREF ADC Reference Voltage (ADREF+ - ADREF-) 1.8 — VDD V AD07 VAIN ADREF- — ADREF+ V Full-Scale Range © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet Units Conditions 40001843D-page 733 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C, TAD = 1μs Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. AD08 ZAIN AD09 RVREF Units Conditions Recommended Impedance of Analog Voltage Source — 10 — kΩ ADC Voltage Reference Ladder Impedance — 50 — kΩ (Note 3) * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. Total Absolute Error is the sum of the offset, gain and integral non-linearity (INL) errors. 2. The ADC conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input and has no missing codes. 3. This is the impedance seen by the VREF pads when the external reference pads are selected. 38.4.8 Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Conversion Timing Specifications Table 38-14.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic AD20 TAD ADC Clock Period AD21 Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions 1 — 9 μs Using FOSC as the ADC clock source ADOCS = 0 — 2 — μs Using FRC as the ADC clock source ADOCS = 1 Set of GO/DONE bit to Clear of GO/ DONE bit AD22 TCNV Conversion Time(1) — 11+3TCY — TAD AD23 TACQ Acquisition Time — 2 — μs AD24 THCD Sample and Hold Capacitor Disconnect Time — — — μs FOSC-based clock source FRC-based clock source * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. Does not apply for the ADCRC oscillator. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 734 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-10. ADC Conversion Timing (ADC Clock FOSC-Based) Rev. 30-000077A 4/6/2017 BSF ADCON0, GO AD133 1 TCY AD131 Q4 AD130 ADC_clk 9 ADC Data 8 7 6 3 2 1 0 NEW_DATA OLD_DATA ADRES 1 TCY ADIF GO Sample DONE Sampling Stopped AD132 Figure 38-11. ADC Conversion Timing (ADC Clock from ADCRC) Rev. 30-000078A 4/6/2017 BSF ADCON0, GO AD133 1 TCY AD131 Q4 AD130 ADC_clk 9 ADC Data 8 7 6 2 1 0 NEW_DATA OLD_DATA ADRES 3 ADIF 1 TCY GO DONE Sample AD132 Sampling Stopped Note:  1. If the ADC clock source is selected as ADCRC, a time of TCY is added before the ADC clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 735 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.4.9 Comparator Specifications Table 38-15.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions CM01 VIOFF Input Offset Voltage — — ±30 mV VICM=VDD/2 CM02 VICM Input Common Mode Range GND — VDD V CM03 CMRR Common Mode Input Rejection Ratio — 50 — dB CM04 VHYST Comparator Hysteresis 10 25 40 mV CM05 TRESP(1) Response Time, Rising Edge — 300 600 ns Response Time, Falling Edge — 220 500 ns * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. Response time measured with one comparator input at VDD/2, while the other input transitions from VSS to VDD. 38.4.10 5-Bit DAC Specifications Table 38-16.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units DSB01 VLSB Step Size — (VDACREF+VDACREF-)/32 — V DSB02 VACC Absolute Accuracy — — ±5 LSb DSB03* RUNIT Unit Resistor Value — 5000 — Ω DSB04* TST Settling Time(1) — — 10 μs Conditions * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 736 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Note:  1. Settling time measured while DACR transitions from ‘00000’ to ‘01111’. 38.4.11 Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR) Specifications Table 38-17.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions FVR01 VFVR1 1x Gain (1.024V) -4 — +4 % VDD≥2.5V, -40°C to 85°C FVR02 VFVR2 2x Gain (2.048V) -4 — +4 % VDD≥2.5V, -40°C to 85°C FVR03 VFVR4 4x Gain (4.096V) -5 — +5 % VDD≥4.75V, -40°C to 85°C FVR04 TFVRST FVR Start-up Time — 25 — μs 38.4.12 Zero Cross Detect (ZCD) Specifications Table 38-18.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) VDD = 3.0V, TA = 25°C Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units ZC01 VPINZC Voltage on Zero Cross Pin — 0.75 — V ZC02 IZCD_MAX Maximum source or sink current — — 600 μA ZC03 TRESPH Response Time, Rising Edge — 1 — μs TRESPL Response Time, Falling Edge — 1 — μs Conditions † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 737 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications 38.4.13 Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock Requirements Table 38-19.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature: -40°C≤TA≤+125°C Param No. Sym. Characteristic 40* TT0H T0CKI High Pulse Width 41* TT0L T0CKI Low Pulse Width Min. Typ. † Max. 0.5TCY +20 — — ns 10 — — ns 0.5TCY +20 — — ns 10 — — ns Greater of: 20 or (TCY +40)/N — — ns Synchronous, No Prescaler 0.5TCY +20 — — ns Synchronous, with Prescaler 15 — — ns Asynchronous 30 — — ns 0.5TCY +20 — — ns Synchronous, with Prescaler 15 — — ns Asynchronous 30 — — ns Synchronous Greater of: 30 or (TCY +40)/N — — ns Asynchronous 60 — — ns 2 TOSC — 7 TOSC — No Prescaler With Prescaler No Prescaler With Prescaler 42* TT0P T0CKI Period 45* TT1H T1CKI High Time 46* 47* 49* TT1L TT1P T1CKI Synchronous, Low Time No Prescaler T1CKI Input Period TCKEZTMR1 Delay from External Clock Edge to Timer Increment Units Conditions N = Prescale value N = Prescale value Timers in Sync mode * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 738 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-12. Timer0 and Timing1 External Clock Timings Rev. 30-000079A 4/6/2017 T0CKI 40 41 42 T1CKI 45 46 49 47 TMR0 or TMR1 38.4.14 Capture/Compare/PWM Requirements (CCP) Table 38-20.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Operating Temperature: -40°C≤TA≤+125°C Param No. Sym. Characteristic CC01* TCCL CCPx Input Low Time No Prescaler 0.5TCY+20 CCPx Input High Time No Prescaler 0.5TCY+20 CC02* CC03* TCCH TCCP CCPx Input Period With Prescaler With Prescaler Min. Typ. † Max. — — ns — — ns — — ns 20 — — ns (3TCY +40)/N — — ns 20 Units Conditions N = Prescale value * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 739 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-13. Capture/Compare/PWM Timings (CCP) Rev. 30-000080A 4/6/2017 CCPx (Capture mode) CC01 CC02 CC03 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. 38.4.15 EUSART Synchronous Transmission Requirements Table 38-21.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic US120 TCKH2DTV SYNC XMIT (Master and Slave) — 80 ns 3.0V≤VDD≤5.5V Clock high to data-out valid — 100 ns 1.8V≤VDD≤5.5V Clock out rise time and fall time — 45 ns 3.0V≤VDD≤5.5V (Master mode) — 50 ns 1.8V≤VDD≤5.5V Data-out rise time and fall time — 45 ns 3.0V≤VDD≤5.5V — 50 ns 1.8V≤VDD≤5.5V US121 TCKRF US122 TDTRF Min. Max. Units Conditions Figure 38-14. EUSART Synchronous Transmission (Master/Slave) Timing Rev. 30-000081A 4/6/2017 CK US121 US121 DT US122 US120 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. 38.4.16 EUSART Synchronous Receive Requirements Table 38-22.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Max. Units Conditions US125 TDTV2CKL SYNC RCV (Master and Slave) 10 — ns 15 — ns Data-setup before CK ↓ (DT hold time) US126 TCKL2DTL © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Data-hold after CK ↓ (DT hold time) Datasheet 40001843D-page 740 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-15. EUSART Synchronous Receive (Master/Slave) Timing Rev. 30-000082A 4/6/2017 CK US125 DT US126 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. 38.4.17 SPI Mode Requirements Table 38-23.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. SP70* TSSL2SCH, SS↓ to SCK↓ or SCK↑ input 2.25*TCY — — ns TSSL2SCL Units Conditions SP71* TSCH SCK input high time (Slave mode) TCY + 20 — — ns SP72* TSCL SCK input low time (Slave mode) TCY + 20 — — ns SP73* TDIV2SCH, Setup time of SDI data input to SCK edge 100 — — ns Hold time of SDI data input to SCK edge 100 — — ns SDO data output rise time — 10 25 ns 3.0V≤VDD≤5.5V — 25 50 ns 1.8V≤VDD≤5.5V TDIV2SCL SP74* TSCH2DIL, TSCL2DIL SP75* TDOR SP76* TDOF SDO data output fall time — 10 25 ns SP77* TSSH2DOZ SS↑ to SDO output high-impedance 10 — 50 ns SP78* TSCR SCK output rise time (Master mode) — 10 25 ns 3.0V≤VDD≤5.5V — 25 50 ns 1.8V≤VDD≤5.5V SP79* TSCF SCK output fall time (Master mode) — 10 25 ns SP80* TSCH2DOV, SDO data output valid after SCK edge — — 50 ns 3.0V≤VDD≤5.5V — — 145 ns 1.8V≤VDD≤5.5V TSCL2DOV © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 741 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. SP81* TDOV2SCH, SDO data output setup to SCK edge 1 TCY — — ns — — 50 ns 1.5 TCY + 40 — — ns TDOV2SCL SP82* TSSL2DOV SDO data output valid after SS↓ edge SP83* TSCH2SSH, SS ↑after SCK edge TSCL2SSH Units Conditions * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. † Data in “Typ” column is at 3.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance only and are not tested. Figure 38-16. SPI Master Mode Timing (CKE = 0, SMP = 0) Rev. 30-000083A 4/6/2017 SS SP81 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SP72 SP78 SP79 SP79 SP78 SCK (CKP = 1) SP80 bit 6 - - - - - -1 MSb SDO LSb SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In SP74 SP73 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 742 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-17. SPI Master Mode Timing (CKE = 1, SMP = 1) Rev. 30-000084A 4/6/2017 SS SP81 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SP72 SP79 SP73 SCK (CKP = 1) SP80 SDO MSb SP78 LSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In SP74 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. Figure 38-18. SPI Slave Mode Timing (CKE = 0) Rev. 30-000085A 4/6/2017 SS SP70 SCK (CKP = 0) SP83 SP71 SP72 SP78 SP79 SP79 SP78 SCK (CKP = 1) SP80 SDO MSb bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb SP77 SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In SP74 SP73 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 743 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Figure 38-19. SPI Slave Mode Timing (CKE = 1) Rev. 30-000086A 4/6/2017 SP82 SS SP70 SP83 SCK (CKP = 0) SP71 SP72 SCK (CKP = 1) SP80 MSb SDO bit 6 - - - - - -1 LSb SP77 SP75, SP76 SDI MSb In bit 6 - - - -1 LSb In SP74 Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. 38.4.18 I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Requirements Table 38-24.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. SP90* SP91* SP92* SP93* Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions TSU:STA Start condition 100 kHz mode Setup time 400 kHz mode 4700 — — 600 — — THD:STA Start condition 100 kHz mode Hold time 400 kHz mode 4000 — — 600 — — TSU:STO Stop condition 100 kHz mode Setup time 400 kHz mode 4700 — — 600 — — THD:STO Stop condition 100 kHz mode Hold time 4000 — — © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet ns Only relevant for Repeated Start Setup time 400 kHz mode 600 condition ns After this period, the first clock Hold time 400 kHz mode 600 — — pulse is generated ns ns 40001843D-page 744 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Typ. † Max. Units Conditions 400 kHz mode 600 — — * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. Figure 38-20. I2C Bus Start/Stop Bits Timing Rev. 30-000087A 4/6/2017 SCL SP93 SP91 SP90 SP92 SDA Stop Condition Start Condition Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. 38.4.19 I2C Bus Data Requirements Table 38-25.  Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Characteristic SP100* THIGH Clock high time SP101* TLOW Clock low time © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Min. Max. Units 100 kHz mode 4.0 — μs Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz 400 kHz mode 0.6 — μs Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz SSP module 1.5TCY — 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs Device must operate at a minimum of 1.5 MHz 400 kHz mode 1.3 — μs Device must operate at a minimum of 10 MHz Datasheet Conditions 40001843D-page 745 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. SP102* SP103* SP106* SP107* SP109* SP110* SP111 Sym. TR TF THD:DAT TSU:DAT TAA TBUF CB Characteristic Min. Max. SSP module 1.5TCY — SDA and SCL rise time 100 kHz mode — 1000 ns 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1CB 300 ns SDA and SCL fall time 100 kHz mode — 250 ns 400 kHz mode 20 + 0.1CB 250 ns Data input hold time 100 kHz mode 0 — ns 400 kHz mode 0 0.9 μs 100 kHz mode 250 — ns 400 kHz mode 100 — ns Output valid from clock 100 kHz mode — 3500 ns 400 kHz mode — — ns Bus free time 100 kHz mode 4.7 — μs 400 kHz mode 1.3 — μs — 400 pF Data input setup time Bus capacitive loading Units Conditions CB is specified to be from 10-400 pF CB is specified to be from 10-400 pF (Note 2) (Note 1) Time the bus must be free before a new transmission can start * - These parameters are characterized but not tested. Note:  1. As a transmitter, the device must provide this internal minimum delay time to bridge the undefined region (min. 300 ns) of the falling edge of SCL to avoid unintended generation of Start or Stop conditions. 2. A Fast mode (400 kHz) I2C bus device can be used in a Standard mode (100 kHz) I2C bus system, but the requirement TSU:DAT≥250 ns must then be met. This will automatically be the case © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 746 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Electrical Specifications Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated) Param. No. Sym. Characteristic Min. Max. Units Conditions if the device does not stretch the low period of the SCL signal. If such a device does stretch the low period of the SCL signal, it must output the next data bit to the SDA line TR max. + TSU:DAT = 1000 + 250 = 1250 ns (according to the Standard mode I2C bus specification), before the SCL line is released. Figure 38-21. I2C Bus Data Timing Rev. 30-000088A 4/6/2017 SP103 SCL SP100 SP90 SP102 SP101 SP106 SP107 SP91 SDA In SP92 SP110 SP109 SP109 SDA Out Note:  Refer to Figure 38-4 for load conditions. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 747 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables 39. DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables The graphs and tables provided in this section are for design guidance and are not tested. In some graphs or tables, the data presented are outside specified operating range (i.e., outside specified VDD range). This is for information only and devices are ensured to operate properly only within the specified range. Unless otherwise noted, all graphs apply to both the L and LF devices. Note:  The graphs and tables provided following this note are a statistical summary based on a limited number of samples and are provided for informational purposes only. The performance characteristics listed herein are not tested or guaranteed. In some graphs or tables, the data presented may be outside the specified operating range (e.g., outside specified power supply range) and therefore, outside the warranted range. Note:  “Typical” represents the mean of the distribution at 25°C. “Maximum”, “Max.”, “Minimum” or “Min.” represents (mean + 3σ) or (mean - 3σ) respectively, where σ is a standard deviation, over each temperature range. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 748 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Graphs Figure 39-2. ADC, DNL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 1µS, 25°C 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 DNL (LSb) INL (LSb) Figure 39-1. ADC, INL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 1µS, 25°C 0.0 0.0 -0.5 -0.5 -1.0 -1.0 0 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 0 1024 128 256 384 Figure 39-3. ADC, INL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 4µS, 25°C 640 768 896 1024 Figure 39-4. ADC, DNL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 4µS, 25°C ADC, INL, Vdd = 3.0V, TAD = 4uS, 25C 2.0 1.0 512 Output Code Output Code 1.0 1.5 0.5 0.5 DNL (LSb) DNL INL (LSb) 1.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 -0.5 -0.5 -1.0 -0.5 -1.5 -1.0 -2.0 -1.0 0 512 128 1024 256 1536 384 2048 512 2560 640 3072 768 3584 896 0 4096 1024 128 256 384 512 640 768 896 1024 Output Code Output Code Figure 39-5. ADC, Single-Ended INL, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 3.0V Figure 39-6. ADC, Single-Ended DNL, VDD = 3.0V, VREF = 3.0V 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 DNL (LSb) 0 INL (LSb) 39.1 0 -0.2 -0.2 -0.4 -0.4 -0.6 -0.6 -0.8 -1 -0.8 0.000001 0.000002 0.000004 0.000001 0.000008 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0.000002 0.000004 0.000008 TADs TADs Datasheet 40001843D-page 749 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-7. ADC, Single-Ended INL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 1µS Figure 39-8. ADC, Single-Ended DNL, VDD = 3.0V, TAD = 1µS 1.5 1.5 1 1 Max Max 0.5 DNL (LSB) INL (LSB) 0.5 0 0 -0.5 -0.5 Min Min -1 -1 -1.5 -1.5 1.8 2.3 VREF(V) 1.8 3 Figure 39-9. ADC RC Oscillator Period, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 2.3 VREF (V) 3 Figure 39-10. ADC RC Oscillator Period, PIC18F24/25K40 only 4.0 5.0 4.5 3.5 4.0 3.0 2.5 3.0 Time (us) Time (us) 3.5 2.5 2.0 2.0 1.5 1.5 1.0 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.0 0.0 1.8 2.1 2.4 Typical 25°C 2.7 Vdd (V) 3 3.3 2.3 3.6 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 Vdd (V) +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Figure 39-11. Bandgap Ready Time, PIC18LF24/25K40 +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Figure 39-12. Brown-Out Reset Voltage, Trip Point (BORV = 00) 3.05 70 3.00 +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 60 2.95 Voltage (V) 50 Time (us) 2.5 40 2.90 2.85 30 Typical 25°C 2.80 20 2.75 10 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Temperature (°C) Vdd (V) +3 Sigma © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet -3 Sigma Typical 40001843D-page 750 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-13. Brown-Out Reset Hysteresis, Low Trip Point (BORV = 00) Figure 39-14. Brown-Out Reset Voltage, Trip Point (BORV = 01) 70.0 2.90 2.85 60.0 2.80 2.75 40.0 Voltage (V) Voltage (mV) 50.0 +3 Sigma 30.0 20.0 2.70 2.65 2.60 2.55 10.0 2.50 Typical 2.45 0.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 -60 140 -40 -20 0 Temperature (°C) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 Temperature (°C) +3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical Figure 39-15. Brown-Out Reset Hysteresis, Trip Figure 39-16. Brown-Out Reset Voltage, Trip Point (BORV = 01) Point (BORV = 1x) 2.70 40.0 2.65 35.0 2.60 30.0 2.55 +3 Sigma Voltage (V) Voltage (mV) 25.0 20.0 15.0 2.50 2.45 2.40 2.35 10.0 Typical 2.30 5.0 2.25 0.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 2.20 140 -60 -40 -20 0 Temperature (°C) 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 100 120 140 Temperature (°C) +3 Sigma -3 Sigma Typical Figure 39-17. Brown-Out Reset Hysteresis, Trip Figure 39-18. LPBOR Reset Voltage, Point (BORV = 1x) PIC18LF24/25K40 only 40.0 2.60 35.0 2.50 2.40 30.0 2.30 Voltage (V) Voltage (mV) 25.0 +3 Sigma 20.0 15.0 2.20 2.10 2.00 10.0 1.90 Typical 1.80 5.0 1.70 0.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 -60 -40 -20 0 +3 Sigma © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 20 40 60 80 Temperature (°C) Temperature (°C) Datasheet Typical -3 Sigma 40001843D-page 751 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-19. LPBOR Reset Hysteresis, PIC18LF24/25K40 only Figure 39-20. Brown-Out Reset Voltage, Trip Point (BORV = 11) for PIC18LF24/25K40 only 60.0 2.10 2.05 50.0 +3 Sigma 2.00 30.0 Voltage (V) Voltage (mV) 40.0 Typical 20.0 1.95 1.90 1.85 10.0 1.80 0.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 1.75 -60 -40 -20 0 20 Temperature (°C) 40 60 80 100 120 140 Temperature (°C) +3 Sigma Typical -3 Sigma Figure 39-21. Brown-Out Reset Hysteresis, Trip Figure 39-22. BOR Response Time, Point (BORV = 11) for PIC18LF24/25K40 only PIC18LF24/25K40 only 5.0 50.0 4.5 +3 Sigma 40.0 4.0 35.0 3.5 30.0 Time (us) Voltage (mV) 45.0 25.0 Typical 20.0 +3 Sigma 125°C 3.0 2.5 Typical 25°C 2.0 1.5 15.0 10.0 1.0 5.0 0.5 0.0 0.0 -60 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Vdd (V) Temperature (°C) Typical 25°C Figure 39-23. BOR Response Time, PIC18F24/25K40 only +3 Sigma 125°C Left blank intentionally 7 6 Time (us) 5 +3 Sigma 125°C 4 3 Typical 25°C 2 1 0 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 Vdd (V) Typical 25°C © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. +3 Sigma 125°C Datasheet 40001843D-page 752 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-24. Comparator Response Time, Falling Edge, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 300 700 250 600 +3 Sigma 125°C +3 Sigma 125°C 500 Time (nS) 200 Time (nS) Figure 39-25. Comparator Response Time, Rising Edge, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 150 Typical 25°C 400 300 Typical 25°C 100 200 50 100 0 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 0 3.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 Vdd (V) Typical 25°C 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 Vdd (V) +3 Sigma 125°C Typical 25°C Figure 39-26. Comparator Response Time, Falling Edge, PIC18F24/25K40 only +3 Sigma 125°C Figure 39-27. Comparator Response Time, Rising Edge, PIC18F24/25K40 only 250 900 800 200 700 +3 Sigma 125°C +3 Sigma 125°C 150 Time (nS) Time (nS) 600 Typical 25°C 100 500 400 300 Typical 25°C 200 50 100 0 2.3 0 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 5.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Typical 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C Typical 25°C Figure 39-28. Comparator Offset, VDD = 3.0V, 25°C +3 Sigma 125°C Figure 39-29. Comparator Offset, VDD = 3.0V, from -40°C to 125°C 30 30 25 25 20 15 10 Offset Voltage (mV) Offset Voltage (mV) 20 MAX 5 0 -5 MIN 15 10 0 -5 -10 -10 -15 -15 -20 MAX 5 MIN -20 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 Common Mode Voltage (V) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.5 3 0 Datasheet 0.5 1 1.5 2 Common Mode Voltage (V) 2.5 3 40001843D-page 753 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-30. Comparator Hysteresis, VDD = 3.0V, PIC18LF24/25K40 only Figure 39-31. Comparator Hysteresis, VDD = 5.5V, PIC18F24/25K40 only 50 45 43 45 41 Hysteresis (mV) Hysteresis (mV) 39 37 35 33 31 29 40 35 30 25 27 20 25 0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 Common Mode Voltage (V) -40°C 25°C 2.5 125° 3.0 0.0 3.5 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 Common Mode Voltage (V) -40°C 85°C Figure 39-32. Comparator Offset, VDD = 5.0V, 25°C, PIC18F24/25K40 only 25°C 4.0 125° 4.5 5.0 5.5 85° Figure 39-33. Comparator Offset, VDD = 5.5V, from -40°C to 125°C, PIC18F24/25K40 only 30 40 25 30 15 Offset Voltage (mV) Offset Voltage (mV) 20 10 MAX 5 0 -5 MIN -10 20 10 MAX 0 MIN -10 -15 -20 -20 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 Common Mode Voltage (V) 3.5 4 4.5 5 0 Figure 39-34. Typical FVR Voltage Error 1x, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 Common Mode Voltage (V) 4 4.5 5 5.5 Figure 39-35. Typical FVR Voltage Error 1x, PIC18F24/25K40 only 1.1% 1.2% 1.0% 1.0% 0.9% 0.8% 0.8% Error (%) Error (%) 0.7% 0.6% 0.5% 0.6% 0.4% 0.4% 0.3% 0.2% 0.2% 0.1% 0.0% 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 Typical -40°C Typical 25°C © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 3.7 0.0% 2.4 Vdd (V) Typical 85°C Typical 125°C 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5 5.2 5.4 5.6 Vdd (V) Typical -40°C Datasheet Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C 40001843D-page 754 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-36. Typical FVR Voltage Error 2x, PIC18LF24/25K40 only Figure 39-37. Typical FVR Voltage Error 2x, PIC18F24/25K40 only 1.0% 1.0% 0.8% 0.8% 0.6% 0.4% Error (%) Error (%) 0.6% 0.2% 0.4% 0.2% 0.0% 0.0% -0.2% -0.2% -0.4% 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 2.4 3.7 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 Typical -40°C Typical 25°C 4 4.2 4.4 4.6 4.8 5 5.2 5.4 5.6 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Typical 85°C Typical -40°C Typical 125°C Figure 39-38. Typical FVR Voltage Error 4x, PIC18F24/25K40 only Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 125°C Figure 39-39. HFINTOSC Typical Frequency Error, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 3.0% 1.0% 2.0% 0.8% 1.0% 0.6% Error (%) Error (%) 0.0% 0.4% 0.2% -1.0% -2.0% -3.0% 0.0% -4.0% -0.2% -5.0% 1.6 -0.4% 4.7 4.8 4.9 5 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 5.6 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Typical -40°C Typical 25°C Typical 85°C Typical 25°C Typical 125°C Figure 39-40. HFINTOSC Typical Frequency Error, PIC18F24/25K40 only +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Figure 39-41. HFINTOSC Frequency Error, VDD = 3V 3.0% 3.0% 2.5% 2.0% 2.0% 1.5% 0.0% Error (%) Error (%) 1.0% -1.0% 1.0% 0.5% 0.0% -2.0% -0.5% -3.0% -1.0% -1.5% -4.0% 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 -2.0% -50 Vdd (V) 0 50 100 150 Temperature (°C) Typical 25°C +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical Datasheet +3 Sigma -3 Sigma 40001843D-page 755 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-42. IDD, LFINTOSC, FOSC = 31kHz, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-43. IDD Maximum, HFINTOSC, PIC18F24/25K40 only 45 8.0 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Max: 125°C + 3σ 64 MHz 7.0 40 Max. 6.0 35 Idd (mA) Idd (µA) 5.0 Typical 30 25 4.0 32 MHz 3.0 16 MHz 2.0 20 4 MHz 1.0 15 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 0.0 6.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Figure 39-44. IDD, ECM Oscillator, FOSC = 4MHz, Figure 39-45. IDD, ECH Oscillator, Typical, PIC18F24/25K40 only PIC18F24/25K40 only 1,000 900 7.0 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C 800 5.0 Max. 700 Idd (mA) Idd (µA) 64 MHz 6.0 Typical 600 4.0 32 MHz 3.0 500 2.0 400 300 1.0 200 0.0 16 MHz 8 MHz 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 Vdd (V) Figure 39-46. IDD, ECH Oscillator, Maximum, PIC18F24/25K40 only 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 5.5 6.0 Figure 39-47. IDD, HFINTOSC, Typical, PIC18F24/25K40 only 7.0 7.0 Max: 125°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 64 MHz 6.0 6.0 5.0 5.0 64 MHz 4.0 Idd (mA) Idd (mA) 4.0 Vdd (V) 32 MHz 3.0 16 MHz 4.0 3.0 32 MHz 16 MHz 2.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 8 MHz 0.0 0.0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 4 MHz 5.0 5.5 6.0 2.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.5 Datasheet 40001843D-page 756 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-48. IDD, LFINTOSC, FOSC = 31kHz, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 14 Figure 39-49. IDD, HFINTOSC, Maximum, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 10.0 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Max: 125°C + 3σ 9.0 Max. 12 8.0 64 MHz 7.0 6.0 8 Idd (mA) Idd (µA) 10 Typical 6 5.0 4.0 3.0 4 16 MHz 2.0 2 4 MHz 1.0 0 1.7 2.2 2.7 3.2 0.0 3.7 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Figure 39-50. IDD, ECM Oscillator, FOSC = 4MHz, Figure 39-51. IDD, ECH Oscillator, Typical, PIC18LF24/25K40 only PIC18LF24/25K40 only 700 6 Max: 125°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Typical: 25°C 600 64 MHz 5 500 Max. Idd (mA) Idd (µA) 4 400 300 Typical 200 3 2 100 1 4 MHz 0 1.6 2.1 2.6 Vdd (V) Typical 3.1 3.6 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 Vdd (V) Max. Figure 39-52. IDD, ECH Oscillator, Maximum, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 10 0 Figure 39-53. IDD, HFINTOSC, Typical, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 7.0 Max: 125°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 9 64 MHz 6.0 8 6 Idd (mA) Idd (mA) 64 MHz 5.0 7 5 4 3 4.0 3.0 2.0 16 MHz 2 1.0 1 4 MHz 16 MHz 0.0 0 1.6 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 1.6 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.1 2.6 3.1 3.6 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Datasheet 40001843D-page 757 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-54. Schmitt Trigger High Values Figure 39-55. Schmitt Trigger Low Values 2.5 4 3.5 2 2.5 Voltage (V) Voltage (V) 3 2 1.5 1.5 1 1 0.5 0.5 0 0 1.5 2 2.5 Typical 25°C 3 3.5 4 Vdd (V) +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 4.5 5 5.5 1.5 6 2 2.5 Typical 25°C -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Figure 39-56. Input Level TTL 3 3.5 4 Vdd (V) +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 4.5 5 5.5 6 -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Figure 39-57. I/O Rise Time, Slew Rate Control Enabled 1.8 1.6 50 1.4 45 40 35 1 Time (nS) Voltage (V) 1.2 0.8 0.6 +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 30 25 20 0.4 15 0.2 10 Typical 25°C 5 0 1.5 2 2.5 Typical 25°C 3 3.5 4 Vdd (V) +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 4.5 5 5.5 6 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C Figure 39-58. I/O Fall Time, Slew Rate Control Enabled 30 50 25 Time (nS) Time (nS) 30 5 0 0 2.5 3 Typical 25°C 3.5 4 Vdd (V) +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 4.5 5 5.5 6 Typical 25°C 1.5 +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 6 15 10 2 5.5 10 Typical 25°C 1.5 5 +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 20 +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 20 4.5 Figure 39-59. I/O Rise Time, Slew Rate Control Disabled 60 40 3.5 4 Vdd (V) 2 2.5 3 Typical 25°C Datasheet 3.5 4 Vdd (V) 4.5 5 5.5 6 +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 40001843D-page 758 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-60. I/O Fall Time, Slew Rate Control Disabled Figure 39-61. IPD, Watchdog Timer, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 20 3 18 +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 16 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 2.5 Max. 2 12 Ipd (µA) Time (nS) 14 10 8 6 1 Typical 25°C 4 1.5 Typical 2 0.5 0 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 Vdd (V) Typical 25°C 4.5 5 5.5 6 0 1.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 Vdd (V) +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) Figure 39-62. IPD, Watchdog Timer, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-63. IPD, Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR), PIC18LF24/25K40 only 2.5 60 Max. Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 50 2 Max. 40 Idd (µA) Ipd (µA) 1.5 Typical 30 1 20 Typical Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 0.5 10 0 0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 Vdd (V) 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 Figure 39-64. IPD, Fixed Voltage Reference (FVR), PIC18F24/25K40 only 1.6 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 Vdd (V) 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 Figure 39-65. IPD, Brown-out Reset, BORV = 1, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 45 20 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 18 40 Max. Max. 16 35 14 30 Typical 12 25 Idd (µA) Idd (nA) 1.8 20 Typical 10 8 15 6 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 10 4 5 2 0 0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 Vdd (V) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.9 Datasheet 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 Vdd (V) 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 40001843D-page 759 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-66. IPD, Brown-out Reset, BORV = 1, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-67. IPD, Low-power Brown-out Reset, LPBOR = 0, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 18 700 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 16 600 Max. Max. 500 12 Idd (nA) Idd (µA) 14 Typical 10 400 300 8 200 6 100 Typical 4 0 2.6 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 Vdd (V) 4.4 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 5.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2.0 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 3.0 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 Vdd (V) Figure 39-68. IPD, Low-power Brown-out Reset, Figure 39-69. IPD, Comparator, LPBOR = 0, PIC18F24/25K40 only PIC18LF24/25K40 only 12 2.5 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Max. 10 2.0 Max. 8 Idd (µA) Idd (µA) 1.5 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 6 Typical 1.0 4 0.5 Typical 2 0 0.0 2.8 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 4.0 4.2 4.4 Vdd (V) 4.6 4.8 5.0 5.2 5.4 1.6 5.6 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 Vdd (V) 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 Figure 39-70. IPD, Comparator, PIC18F24/25K40 Figure 39-71. IPD Base, Low-power Sleep Mode, only PIC18LF24/25K40 only 50 45 600 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C Max. 500 40 35 Typical 400 Idd (nA) Idd (µA) 30 25 Max. 300 20 200 15 10 100 Typical 5 0 0 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 Vdd (V) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.6 Datasheet 1.8 2.0 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 Vdd (V) 3.0 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 40001843D-page 760 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-72. IPD Base, VREGPM = 00, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-73. IPD Base, VREGPM = 01, PIC18F24/25K40 only 35 200 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 180 Max. Max. 30 160 25 140 Typical Idd (µA) Idd (µA) 120 100 80 Typical 60 20 15 10 40 5 20 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 0 0 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.7 Vdd (V) 2.1 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.7 Vdd (V) Figure 39-74. IPD Base, VREGPM = 10, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-75. IPD Base, VREGPM = 11, PIC18F24/25K40 only 14 7000 12 6000 10 5000 8 Idd (nA) Idd (µA) Max. Typical 6 4 4000 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 3000 2000 2 1000 Max: 85°C + 3σ Typical: 25°C 0 Typical 0 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 Vdd (V) 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.7 2.5 Figure 39-76. LFINTOSC Frequency, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 Vdd (V) 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.1 5.3 5.7 Figure 39-77. LFINTOSC Frequency, PIC18F24/25K40 only 36,000 36,000 35,000 35,000 34,000 34,000 33,000 33,000 Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Max. 32,000 31,000 32,000 31,000 30,000 30,000 29,000 29,000 28,000 28,000 1.8 2.1 2.4 2.7 3 3.3 3.6 2.3 2.5 2.7 Typical 25°C +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.5 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) -3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) Typical 25°C Datasheet +3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) -3 Sigma (-40°C to 125°C) 40001843D-page 761 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-78. OSCTUNE Center Frequency Figure 39-79. POR Release Voltage 4.00% 1.7 Max: Typical + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical; statistical mean @ 25°C Min: Typical - 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 3.00% 1.675 1.65 1.00% Voltage (V) Error (%) 2.00% 0.00% -1.00% 1.625 1.6 -2.00% 1.575 -3.00% -4.00% -32 -24 -16 -8 0 8 OSCTUNE Setting Max Min 16 24 1.55 32 -40 40 60 Temperature (°C) +3 Sigma 120 -3 Sigma Typical Max: Typical + 3σ Typical: 25°C Min: Typical - 3σ 1.4 1.7 1.2 1.6 1.6 1.2 1.5 1.51 1 1.4 1.3 0.6 100 POR REARM VOLTAGE, (VREGPM 1 = 1) 1.6 1.8 Typical Max: Typical + 3σ Typical: 25°C Min: Typical - 3σ 0.8 1.4 80 Figure 39-81. POR Rearm Voltage, VREGPM1 = 1, PIC18F24/25K40 only Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Voltage (V) Voltage (V) 20 Typical POR REARM VOLTAGE, (VREGPM 1 = 0) 1.4 1.7 1.2 0.4 1.3 0.8 1.2 1.1 0.6 1 0.4 0.9 1.1 0.2 1 0 -40 -40 0.8 0.2 -20 -20 0 0 20 40 60 20 Temperature 40 (°C) 60 Temperature +3 Sigma (°C) Typical 80 80 100 100 0.7 0 -40 -40 120 120 -20 -20 -3 Sigma 0 0 20 40 60 20 Temperature 40 (°C) 60 Typical Figure 39-82. POR Rearm Voltage, Normal Power Mode, PIC18LF24/25K40 only Temperature +3 Sigma (°C) 80 80 100 100 120 120 -3 Sigma Figure 39-83. Power-up Timer Period, PIC18F24/25K40 only 1.8 74.0 1.6 72.0 70.0 Time (mS) 1.4 Voltage (V) 0 Average Figure 39-80. POR Rearm Voltage, VREGPM1 = 0, PIC18F24/25K40 only 1.6 1.8 -20 1.2 68.0 66.0 1 64.0 0.8 62.0 0.6 -40 -20 0 20 Typical 40 60 Temperature (°C) +3 Sigma © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. -3 Sigma 80 100 120 60.0 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 Vdd (V) Typical 25°C Datasheet + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) - 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 40001843D-page 762 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-84. Power-up Timer Period, PIC18LF24/25K40 only Figure 39-85. Temperature Indicator, Initial Offset, High Range, Temp = 20°C, PIC18F24/25K40 only 73.0 900 71.0 800 69.0 700 600 67.0 ADC Output Codes Time (mS) 75.0 65.0 63.0 61.0 59.0 500 400 300 200 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd 100 57.0 1.6 1.8 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 0 Vdd (V) Typical 25°C 3 + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 3.5 4 - 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical Figure 39-86. Temperature Indicator, Initial Offset, Low Range, Temp = 20°C, PIC18F24/25K40 only Vdd (V) 4.5 +3 Sigma 5 5.5 -3 Sigma Figure 39-87. Temperature Indicator, Initial Offset, Low Range, Temp = 20°C, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 900 1,000 900 800 800 ADC Output Codes ADC Output Codes 700 700 600 500 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd 400 600 500 400 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd 300 300 2.3 2.7 3.1 3.5 Typical 3.9 Vdd (V) 4.3 +3 Sigma 4.7 5.1 5.5 2.3 2.6 2.9 Vdd (V) Typical -3 Sigma Figure 39-88. Temperature Indicator, Slope Normalized to 20°C,High Range, VDD = 5.5V, PIC18F24/25K40 only 3.2 Max 3.5 Min Figure 39-89. Temperature Indicator, Slope Normalized to 20°C,High Range, VDD = 3.6V 230 150 180 125 130 ADC Output Codes 100 ADC Output Codes 75 50 25 0 80 30 -20 -70 -25 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd -50 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd -120 -40 -75 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 +3 Sigma © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 Temperature (°C) Typical Temperature (°C) Typical -20 120 +3 Sigma -3 Sigma -3 Sigma Datasheet 40001843D-page 763 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-90. Temperature Indicator, Slope Normalized to 20°C,High Range, VDD = 3.0V Figure 39-91. Temperature Indicator, Slope Normalized to 20°C,Low Range, VDD = 3.6V 250 120 200 100 80 60 100 ADC Output Codes ADC Output Codes 150 50 0 -50 40 20 0 -20 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd -100 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd -40 -60 -150 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 -40 120 -20 0 20 Typical +3 Sigma 40 60 80 100 120 Temperature (°C) Temperature (°C) Typical -3 Sigma Figure 39-92. Temperature Indicator, Slope Normalized to 20°C, Low Range, VDD = 3.0V +3 Sigma -3 Sigma Figure 39-93. Temperature Indicator, Slope Normalized to 20°C, Low Range, VDD = 2.3V, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 150 200 100 50 100 ADC Output Codes ADC Output Codes 150 0 -50 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd 50 0 -50 -100 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 ADC Vref+ set to Vdd ADC Vref- set to Gnd 120 Temperature (°C) -100 -40 -20 0 20 40 60 Temperature (°C) Typical Figure 39-94. VOH vs IOH, Over Temperature, VDD = 5.0V, PIC18F24/25K40 only +3 Sigma 80 100 120 -3 Sigma Figure 39-95. VOL vs IOL, Over Temperature, VDD = 5.0V, PIC18F24/25K40 only 6 5 Graph represents 3σ Limits Graph represents 3σ Limits 5 4 -40°C 4 VOL (V) VOH (V) 3 3 25°C 2 125°C 25°C 2 -40°C 125°C 1 1 0 0 -45 -40 -35 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 IOL (mA) 70 80 90 100 110 IOH (mA) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 764 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-96. VOH vs IOH, Over Temperature, VDD = 3.0V Figure 39-97. VOL vs IOL, Over Temperature, VDD = 3.0V 3.0 3.5 Graph represents 3σ Limits Graph represents 3σ Limits 3.0 2.5 2.0 2.0 VOL (V) VOH (V) 2.5 -40°C 1.5 Typical 1.5 125°C Typical -40°C 1.0 125°C 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.0 0.0 -30 -25 -20 -15 -10 -5 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 Figure 39-98. VOH vs IOH, Over Temperature, VDD = 5.0V, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 35 40 45 50 55 60 Figure 39-99. VOL vs IOL, Over Temperature, VDD = 5.0V, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 1.8 2.0 Graph represents 3σ Limits 1.8 Graph represents 3σ Limits 1.6 1.6 1.4 1.4 1.2 -40°C Typical 125°C 1.2 125°C Vol (V) VOH (V) 30 IOL (mA) IOH (mA) 1.0 Typical 0.8 -40°C 1 0.8 0.6 0.6 0.4 0.4 0.2 0.2 0 0.0 -8 -7.5 -7 -6.5 -6 -5.5 -5 -4.5 -4 -3.5 -3 -2.5 -2 -1.5 -1 -0.5 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 IOL (mA) IOH (mA) Figure 39-100. Wake From Sleep, VREGPM = 0, Figure 39-101. Wake From Sleep, VREGPM = 1, HFINTOSC = 4MHz HFINTOSC = 4MHz 120 18 110 17 100 +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 90 Time (us) Time (us) 16 15 14 +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 80 70 60 Typical 25°C 50 Typical 25°C 40 13 30 20 12 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 1.5 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Datasheet 40001843D-page 765 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables 28 120 27 110 26 100 25 90 Time (us) Time (us) Figure 39-102. Wake From Sleep, VREGPM = 0, Figure 39-103. Wake From Sleep, VREGPM = 1, HFINTOSC = 16MHz HFINTOSC = 16MHz 24 80 23 70 22 60 21 50 40 20 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 1.5 6 2 2.5 3 Typical 25°C 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 Vdd (V) Vdd (V) Typical 25°C +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Figure 39-104. Wake From Sleep, VREGPM = 1, Figure 39-105. Wake From Sleep, LFINTOSC, LFINTOSC, PIC18F24/25K40 only PIC18LF24/25K40 only 700 700 650 650 600 600 + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 550 Time (us) Time (us) 550 500 450 500 450 400 400 Typical 25°C Typical 25°C 350 350 300 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9 3.1 3.3 3.5 3.7 3.9 4.1 4.3 4.5 4.7 4.9 5.1 5.3 300 5.5 1.7 Vdd (V) 2.7 3.2 3.7 Vdd (V) Figure 39-106. Watchdog Timer Time-out Period, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-107. Watchdog Timer Time-out Period, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 4.2 4.2 4.1 4.1 Time (mS) Time (mS) 2.2 4.0 3.9 4.0 3.9 3.8 3.8 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5 6.0 1.6 1.8 2 Vdd (V) Typical 25°C +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 Vdd (V) -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C Datasheet +3σ (-40°C to +125°C) -3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 40001843D-page 766 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables Figure 39-108. Weak Pull-up Current, PIC18F24/25K40 only Figure 39-109. Weak Pull-up Current, PIC18LF24/25K40 only 250.0 350.0 Pull-Up Current (uA) Pull-Up Current (uA) 300.0 250.0 200.0 150.0 200.0 150.0 100.0 100.0 50.0 50.0 0.0 0.0 2.1 2.4 2.7 3 3.3 3.6 3.9 4.2 4.5 4.8 5.1 5.4 5.7 1.6 1.8 Typical 25°C + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. 2 2.2 2.4 2.6 2.8 3 3.2 3.4 3.6 3.8 VDD (V) VDD (V) - 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) Typical 25°C Datasheet + 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) - 3σ (-40°C to +125°C) 40001843D-page 767 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Information 40. Packaging Information Package Marking Information Rev. 30-009000A 5/17/2017 Legend: XX...X Y YY WW NNN Pe3 * Note: Customer-specific information or Microchip part number Year code (last digit of calendar year) Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year) Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’) Alphanumeric traceability code b - free JEDEC ® designator for Matte Tin (Sn) This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 ) can be found on the outer packaging for this package. In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available characters for customer-specific information. Rev. 30-009028A 5/17/2017 28-Lead SPDIP (.300”) Example PIC18F27K40 /SP e3 1526017 Rev. 30-009028B 5/17/2017 28-Lead SOIC (7.50 mm) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Example PIC18F27K40 /SO e3 1526017 YYWWNNN © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 768 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Information Rev. 30-009028C5/17/2017 28-Lead SSOP (5.30 mm) Example PIC18F27K40 /SS e3 1526017 Rev. 30-009028D 5/17/2017 28-Lead QFN (6x6 mm) Example PIN 1 PIN 1 18F27K40 /ML e3 1526017 XXXXXXXX XXXXXXXX YYWWNNN Rev. 30-009028E 5/17/2017 28-Lead UQFN (4x4x0.5 mm) Example PIN 1 PIN 1 PIC18 F27K40 /MV e 526017 3 40.1 Package Details The following sections give the technical details of the packages. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 769 M PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information 28-Lead Skinny Plastic Dual In-Line (SP) – 300 mil Body [SPDIP] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging N NOTE 1 E1 1 2 3 D E A2 A L c b1 A1 b e eB Units Dimension Limits Number of Pins INCHES MIN N NOM MAX 28 Pitch e Top to Seating Plane A – – .200 Molded Package Thickness A2 .120 .135 .150 Base to Seating Plane A1 .015 – – Shoulder to Shoulder Width E .290 .310 .335 Molded Package Width E1 .240 .285 .295 Overall Length D 1.345 1.365 1.400 Tip to Seating Plane L .110 .130 .150 Lead Thickness c .008 .010 .015 b1 .040 .050 .070 b .014 .018 .022 eB – – Upper Lead Width Lower Lead Width Overall Row Spacing § .100 BSC .430 Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. § Significant Characteristic. 3. Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010" per side. 4. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. Microchip Technology Drawing C04-070B © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049AR-page 57 Datasheet 40001843D-page 770 M Note: PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging  2009 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049BC-page 110 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 771 M PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging  2009 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049BC-page 109 Datasheet 40001843D-page 772 M Note: PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging  2009 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049BC-page 104 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 773 M PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information 28-Lead Plastic Shrink Small Outline (SS) – 5.30 mm Body [SSOP] Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging D N E E1 1 2 NOTE 1 b e c A2 A φ A1 L L1 Units Dimension Limits Number of Pins MILLIMETERS MIN N NOM MAX 28 Pitch e Overall Height A – 0.65 BSC – 2.00 Molded Package Thickness A2 1.65 1.75 1.85 Standoff A1 0.05 – – Overall Width E 7.40 7.80 8.20 Molded Package Width E1 5.00 5.30 5.60 Overall Length D 9.90 10.20 10.50 Foot Length L 0.55 0.75 0.95 Footprint L1 1.25 REF Lead Thickness c 0.09 – Foot Angle φ 0° 4° 0.25 8° Lead Width b 0.22 – 0.38 Notes: 1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area. 2. Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed 0.20 mm per side. 3. Dimensioning and tolerancing per ASME Y14.5M. BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances. REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only. Microchip Technology Drawing C04-073B © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049AR-page 116 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 774 M PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging  2009 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049BC-page 97 Datasheet 40001843D-page 775 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Information © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 776 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Information © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 777 M PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Land Pattern (Footprint) Packaging Information 28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat, No Lead Package (ML) – 6x6 mm Body [QFN] with 0.55 mm Contact Length Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049AR-page 101 Datasheet 40001843D-page 778 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049AR-page 100 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 779 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Diagrams and Parameters Packaging Information Note: For the most current package drawings, please see the Microchip Packaging Specification located at http://www.microchip.com/packaging © 2007 Microchip Technology Inc. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. DS00049AR-page 101 Datasheet 40001843D-page 780 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Packaging Information © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 781 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Revision History 41. Revision History Revision A (6/2016): Initial Release. Revision B (9/2016): Updated Peripheral Module, Memory and Core features descriptions on cover page. Updated the PIC18(L)F2X/4XK40 Family Types Table. Updated Examples 11-1, 11-3, 11-5 and 11-6; Registers 4-2, 4-5 and 13-18; Sections 1.2, 4.4.1, 4.5, 4.5.4, 17.3, 17.5, 18.1, 18.1.1, and 18.1.1.1; Tables 4-2, 38-5 and 38-14. Revision C (4/2017): Updated Cover page. Updated Example 13-1; Figures 6-1 and 11-11; Registers 3-6, 17-2, 19-1, and 26-9; Sections 1.1.2, 4.3, 13.8, 23.5, 26.5.1, 26.10, 31.1.2, and 31.1.6; Tables 4-1, 10-5, 37-11 and 37-15. New Timer 2 chapter. Removed Section 4.4.2 and 31.2.3. Added Section 23.5.1. Revision D (11/2017): Updated Cover page. Data sheet format and content updated. Added characteristic graphs. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 782 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 The Microchip Web Site Microchip provides online support via our web site at http://www.microchip.com/. This web site is used as a means to make files and information easily available to customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet browser, the web site contains the following information: • • • Product Support – Data sheets and errata, application notes and sample programs, design resources, user’s guides and hardware support documents, latest software releases and archived software General Technical Support – Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ), technical support requests, online discussion groups, Microchip consultant program member listing Business of Microchip – Product selector and ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases, listing of seminars and events, listings of Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory representatives Customer Change Notification Service Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers will receive e-mail notification whenever there are changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a specified product family or development tool of interest. To register, access the Microchip web site at http://www.microchip.com/. Under “Support”, click on “Customer Change Notification” and follow the registration instructions. Customer Support Users of Microchip products can receive assistance through several channels: • • • • Distributor or Representative Local Sales Office Field Application Engineer (FAE) Technical Support Customers should contact their distributor, representative or Field Application Engineer (FAE) for support. Local sales offices are also available to help customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is included in the back of this document. Technical support is available through the web site at: http://www.microchip.com/support © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 783 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 Product Identification System To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office. PART NO. Device [X](1) –X /XX Tape Temperature and Reel Range Package Device: PIC18F24K40, PIC18F25K40 Tape & Reel Option: Blank = Tube T = Tape & Reel I = -40°C to +85°C (Industrial) E = -40°C to +125°C (Extended) ML = 28-lead QFN 6x6mm MV = 28-lead UQFN 4x4x0.5mm SO = 8-lead SOIC SP = 28-lead Skinny Plastic DIP SS = 28-lead SSOP Temperature Range: Package: Examples: • PIC18F24K40-E/P 301: Extended temp., PDIP package, QTP pattern #301. • PIC18F25K40-E/SO = Extended temp., SOIC package. • PIC18F24K40T-I/ML = Tape and reel, Industrial temp., QFN package. Note:  1. Tape and Reel identifier only appears in the catalog part number description. This identifier is used for ordering purposes and is not printed on the device package. Check with your Microchip Sales Office for package availability with the Tape and Reel option. 2. Small form-factor packaging options may be available. Please check http://www.microchip.com/ packaging for small-form factor package availability, or contact your local Sales Office. Microchip Devices Code Protection Feature Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices: • • • • Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet. Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the intended manner and under normal conditions. There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property. Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 784 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 • Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.” Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act. Legal Notice Information contained in this publication regarding device applications and the like is provided only for your convenience and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to ensure that your application meets with your specifications. MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE. Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and its use. Use of Microchip devices in life support and/or safety applications is entirely at the buyer’s risk, and the buyer agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless Microchip from any and all damages, claims, suits, or expenses resulting from such use. No licenses are conveyed, implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property rights unless otherwise stated. Trademarks The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, AnyRate, AVR, AVR logo, AVR Freaks, BeaconThings, BitCloud, CryptoMemory, CryptoRF, dsPIC, FlashFlex, flexPWR, Heldo, JukeBlox, KeeLoq, KeeLoq logo, Kleer, LANCheck, LINK MD, maXStylus, maXTouch, MediaLB, megaAVR, MOST, MOST logo, MPLAB, OptoLyzer, PIC, picoPower, PICSTART, PIC32 logo, Prochip Designer, QTouch, RightTouch, SAM-BA, SpyNIC, SST, SST Logo, SuperFlash, tinyAVR, UNI/O, and XMEGA are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. ClockWorks, The Embedded Control Solutions Company, EtherSynch, Hyper Speed Control, HyperLight Load, IntelliMOS, mTouch, Precision Edge, and Quiet-Wire are registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Adjacent Key Suppression, AKS, Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Any Capacitor, AnyIn, AnyOut, BodyCom, chipKIT, chipKIT logo, CodeGuard, CryptoAuthentication, CryptoCompanion, CryptoController, dsPICDEM, dsPICDEM.net, Dynamic Average Matching, DAM, ECAN, EtherGREEN, In-Circuit Serial Programming, ICSP, Inter-Chip Connectivity, JitterBlocker, KleerNet, KleerNet logo, Mindi, MiWi, motorBench, MPASM, MPF, MPLAB Certified logo, MPLIB, MPLINK, MultiTRAK, NetDetach, Omniscient Code Generation, PICDEM, PICDEM.net, PICkit, PICtail, PureSilicon, QMatrix, RightTouch logo, REAL ICE, Ripple Blocker, SAM-ICE, Serial Quad I/O, SMART-I.S., SQI, SuperSwitcher, SuperSwitcher II, Total Endurance, TSHARC, USBCheck, VariSense, ViewSpan, WiperLock, Wireless DNA, and ZENA are trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries. SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A. Silicon Storage Technology is a registered trademark of Microchip Technology Inc. in other countries. GestIC is a registered trademark of Microchip Technology Germany II GmbH & Co. KG, a subsidiary of Microchip Technology Inc., in other countries. All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their respective companies. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 785 PIC18(L)F24/25K40 © 2017, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the U.S.A., All Rights Reserved. ISBN: 978-1-5224-2372-0 Quality Management System Certified by DNV ISO/TS 16949 Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2009 certification for its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in Chandler and Tempe, Arizona; Gresham, Oregon and design centers in California ® ® and India. The Company’s quality system processes and procedures are for its PIC MCUs and dsPIC ® DSCs, KEELOQ code hopping devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified. © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 786 Worldwide Sales and Service AMERICAS ASIA/PACIFIC ASIA/PACIFIC EUROPE Corporate Office 2355 West Chandler Blvd. Chandler, AZ 85224-6199 Tel: 480-792-7200 Fax: 480-792-7277 Technical Support: http://www.microchip.com/ support Web Address: www.microchip.com Atlanta Duluth, GA Tel: 678-957-9614 Fax: 678-957-1455 Austin, TX Tel: 512-257-3370 Boston Westborough, MA Tel: 774-760-0087 Fax: 774-760-0088 Chicago Itasca, IL Tel: 630-285-0071 Fax: 630-285-0075 Dallas Addison, TX Tel: 972-818-7423 Fax: 972-818-2924 Detroit Novi, MI Tel: 248-848-4000 Houston, TX Tel: 281-894-5983 Indianapolis Noblesville, IN Tel: 317-773-8323 Fax: 317-773-5453 Tel: 317-536-2380 Los Angeles Mission Viejo, CA Tel: 949-462-9523 Fax: 949-462-9608 Tel: 951-273-7800 Raleigh, NC Tel: 919-844-7510 New York, NY Tel: 631-435-6000 San Jose, CA Tel: 408-735-9110 Tel: 408-436-4270 Canada - Toronto Tel: 905-695-1980 Fax: 905-695-2078 Australia - Sydney Tel: 61-2-9868-6733 China - Beijing Tel: 86-10-8569-7000 China - Chengdu Tel: 86-28-8665-5511 China - Chongqing Tel: 86-23-8980-9588 China - Dongguan Tel: 86-769-8702-9880 China - Guangzhou Tel: 86-20-8755-8029 China - Hangzhou Tel: 86-571-8792-8115 China - Hong Kong SAR Tel: 852-2943-5100 China - Nanjing Tel: 86-25-8473-2460 China - Qingdao Tel: 86-532-8502-7355 China - Shanghai Tel: 86-21-3326-8000 China - Shenyang Tel: 86-24-2334-2829 China - Shenzhen Tel: 86-755-8864-2200 China - Suzhou Tel: 86-186-6233-1526 China - Wuhan Tel: 86-27-5980-5300 China - Xian Tel: 86-29-8833-7252 China - Xiamen Tel: 86-592-2388138 China - Zhuhai Tel: 86-756-3210040 India - Bangalore Tel: 91-80-3090-4444 India - New Delhi Tel: 91-11-4160-8631 India - Pune Tel: 91-20-4121-0141 Japan - Osaka Tel: 81-6-6152-7160 Japan - Tokyo Tel: 81-3-6880- 3770 Korea - Daegu Tel: 82-53-744-4301 Korea - Seoul Tel: 82-2-554-7200 Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Tel: 60-3-7651-7906 Malaysia - Penang Tel: 60-4-227-8870 Philippines - Manila Tel: 63-2-634-9065 Singapore Tel: 65-6334-8870 Taiwan - Hsin Chu Tel: 886-3-577-8366 Taiwan - Kaohsiung Tel: 886-7-213-7830 Taiwan - Taipei Tel: 886-2-2508-8600 Thailand - Bangkok Tel: 66-2-694-1351 Vietnam - Ho Chi Minh Tel: 84-28-5448-2100 Austria - Wels Tel: 43-7242-2244-39 Fax: 43-7242-2244-393 Denmark - Copenhagen Tel: 45-4450-2828 Fax: 45-4485-2829 Finland - Espoo Tel: 358-9-4520-820 France - Paris Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20 Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79 Germany - Garching Tel: 49-8931-9700 Germany - Haan Tel: 49-2129-3766400 Germany - Heilbronn Tel: 49-7131-67-3636 Germany - Karlsruhe Tel: 49-721-625370 Germany - Munich Tel: 49-89-627-144-0 Fax: 49-89-627-144-44 Germany - Rosenheim Tel: 49-8031-354-560 Israel - Ra’anana Tel: 972-9-744-7705 Italy - Milan Tel: 39-0331-742611 Fax: 39-0331-466781 Italy - Padova Tel: 39-049-7625286 Netherlands - Drunen Tel: 31-416-690399 Fax: 31-416-690340 Norway - Trondheim Tel: 47-7289-7561 Poland - Warsaw Tel: 48-22-3325737 Romania - Bucharest Tel: 40-21-407-87-50 Spain - Madrid Tel: 34-91-708-08-90 Fax: 34-91-708-08-91 Sweden - Gothenberg Tel: 46-31-704-60-40 Sweden - Stockholm Tel: 46-8-5090-4654 UK - Wokingham Tel: 44-118-921-5800 Fax: 44-118-921-5820 © 2017 Microchip Technology Inc. Datasheet 40001843D-page 787